Professional Documents
Culture Documents
aC
'/ : >
""^
^tr^ mf
\
I
^o ^
r
.3 V ^ ^^ .J
\ ^
\.v.t3pf
3 3333 08lV9'iyf V
9^^ fVfq^oa
C<^ K» ^fc^^--C*',U-.|
D130548
mi YORK -''-^
:s
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2007 with funding from
IVIicrosoft Corporation
http://www.archive.org/details/boymechanicbook200chic2
THE BOY MECHANIC
BOOK 2
Printea In u. s. A.
The
Boy Mechanic
BOOK 2
HOW TO CONSTRUCT
DEVICES FOR WINTER SPORTS, MOTION-PICTURE CAMERA. INDOOR
GAMES, REED FURNITURE, ELECTRICAL NOVELTIES,
BOATS, FISHING RODS, CAMPS AND CAMP
APPLIANCES, KITES AND GLIDERS,
PUSHMOBILES, ROLLER
COASTER, FERRIS
WHEEL
AND
D i3»s-i% '
I
i$o
[In the training of a boy for a trade or profession there is none so profitable for outdoor
work as that of a surveyor. This article sets forth how to accomplish surveying and the
—
making of simple maps with the use of commonplace tools that any boy can make. Editor.]
many of the men we look up to today does not even have a tripod it is sim- ;
as successes in different lines worked ply strapped to the arm of the man
as surveyors in their younger days. who is using it.
Surveying takes one out of doors, and Plane-table maps vary greatly in
is apt to lead him into the unknown scale and the area they represent.
and unexplored byways of the earth. Landscape artists' plans may show
Though modern surveyors often use only single city lots, while some topo-
precise and expensive instruments, graphic maps cover hundreds of
creditable surveys can be made with square miles on a single sheet. For
simple and inexpensive apparatus. Of maps of a small farm, a park, or a
such apparatus, two of the simplest residence block in the city, a plane
are the plane table and the camera. table is almost ideal, since plane-table
Since one must know the principles maps are made with rather simple ap-
of plane-table surveying before he can paratus and do not require much
do camera surveying, this paper will actual measuring on the ground.
describe the plane table alone, leaving Mo.?.t.cbitct!3 .are located without ever
the camera for another chaptei'. : going ta tliem, or even sending a rod-
A plane table is simply a dravving iran to them.
I
/
Just a Few Weeks After George Washington's Sixteenth Birthday, in 1748, Lord Fairfax, Owner of a Large
Estate in Virginia, Took Him into His Employ as a Surveyor
2
Besides the plane table itself and a and west. It is then clamped so that it
sheet of paper, only a small carpenter's will not move while workingf on it.
level, a tape to measure a few dis- To begin the map, a point on the
tances with, and some spikes for table is chosen to represent the station
markers, a hard lead pencil, a ruler, on the ground over which the tab'e is
and a few needles are absolutely set. This point is marked by sticking
necessary for this sort of a map. a fine needle into the paper, vertically.
To start a plane-table map, a sta- A
small triangle should be drawn
tion must first be selected from which around the needle hole in the paper and
as many as labeled "Sta. A," so that it will
possible o f not be lost in the maze of points
Three
the objects Stations which will soon cover the sheet.
to be located ^|^,J{^'g'^,f,7
By sighting past "his needle to-
on the fin- piane Table ward
in Succession
some object
^
,.-
which is
,, ,,
i s h e d map to Locate
, ,
wanted on the map, like the cor-
can be seen. "'objects"^ ner of a house, its direction can
Ordinar i 1 y, be marked by setting another
the objects needle on the far side of the table, in
TABLE AT STA,C
one would line with the first and the given ob-
locate are corners of ject. Then, if a ruler or straight-
buildings, fence corners, edge be placed against these two
intersections of roads, needles and a fine line drawn
corners of lots, connecting them, this line
banks of streams, will show the exact direc-
possibly trees, tion of the object from
and section
and quar-
ter-section
cor n e r s in Sta. A. All the
the country. A ^' other objects
railroad, a lake, a which are
mountain, or / wanted on
anything / which the finished
forms a no / tic e a b 1 e map and can Table at sta.b
landmark in ^/ any particular locality, be seen from
ought to be on Sta. A
are located by direction in the
the map. In same way.
mapping a ter- The
first points to have their direc-
d
1 — nir
No I
4
It
-*'
——
y^ - 11!
a.
1-3"-
[^ ^
No 2 mark the place where his division end
An Alidade, Consist-
comes, calls out "stuck," and starts on
ing of Two Sights toward the object point.
and a Straightedge, Large spikes make good marking
Takes the Place of pins, especially if they have little red
the Two Needles
or white strips of cloth tied to them.
Surveyors use 11 markers. One is
stuck into the ground at the starting
point and is carried forward by the
No3
rear chainman, who also picks up the
point, about Si-o ft. from one end, is markers at each 100-ft. point as soon
marked with a lump
of solder.
little as the head chainman calls "stuck." In
A chisel dent in this solder will mark this way, the number of markers which
one end of the 100-ft. section. Then, the rear chainman has in his hand is
with a borrowed tape or a good rule, always the same as the number of
measure oft and mark every 10 ft., just hundreds of feet which the last set
as the first point was marked, until the marker is from the starting point.
entire 100 ft. have been laid ofif. The In measuring between two points,
last 10 ft. should be divided into feet. care must be taken to draw the tape
In all this measuring and marking, the out taut and straight, its two ends
wire must be stretched out taut and must be level with each other, and it
straight. The extra 21/2 ft. at each end must be exactly in line with the two
are used for making handles. By esti- points between which the measurement
mating the tenths of a foot, measure- is being made. In measuring down-
ments can be made with such a tape, hill, one end may have to be held up
or "chain," as an old-time surveyor high, and the point on the ground
might call it, just as accurately as they where the end division would come,
can be laid ofT on the map. found by dropping a stone from the
Two men are required for measur- place where it is in the air and watch-
ing, or "chaining," a head and a rear ing for the spot where the rock strikes
chainman. The rear chainman holds the ground. A surer way to do this is
the 100-ft. end of the tape on the sta- to hold a plumb-bob string on the last
tion point, while the head chainman division and carefully let the bob down
takes his end forward toward the sta- until it touches the ground. A rod
tion to which they are measuring. with a red or white flag on it ought to
When he has gone nearly the length be placed at or just beyond the point
of the tape, the rear chainman calls to which the measurement is to be
"halt." The head chainman stops and made so that the rear chainman can
easily line in the head chainman. The checked. Locating even a few points
latter, before he places his marker, by method may prevent some bad
this
looks back to the rear chainman to be blunders. The three stations ought to
told whether or not he is "on line" form as nearly as possible, an equilat-
with the object point. If he is not, and
ought to go to the rear chainman's
right to get "on," the latter holds out
his right arm and the head chainman
moves accordingly. When he reaches
the right point, the rear chainman
signals "all right" by holding out both
of his arms and then dropping them to
his side; the marker is stuck, and both
move up a hundred feet and repeat the
process.
After all the points possible have
been located from Sta. A, and the direc-
tion lines labeled lightly in pencil so
that they can be distinguished when
the board has been removed from the
station, the plane table is picked up
and carried to Sta. B. Here it is again
set up, leveled, and oriented by mak-
ing the direction of the line AB on the
paper exactly the same as that of the
SPIKE
line from Sta. Ato Sta. B on the
ground. This isdone by placing needles
A Made
at points A and Bon the table and then Rigid Tripod
of Strips for Legs,
is
turning the board until the two needles Which are Fastened
and Sta. A are in line. Sights are to a Large Top
taken on the same objects which were
"shot" at Sta. A, and to objects which
were not visible from Sta. A. The in- eral triangle; and the distances be-
tersection of the lines of sight toward tween all of them should be measured
a given object from A and from B and laid out accurately on the plane
marks the location on the paper of table.
that object. If the two ends of a There are two ways in which the
straight fence have been located in this map may be finished, inked, or traced.
way, a straight line joining the points By drawing in the "culture," that is,
will show the location of the fence on the things built by man, like the
the map. By exactly similar methods, houses, the fences, the roads, and the
every other object is located on the railroads, in black ink the topography,
;
to use its center as the correct point; and when the scale used why ft was
; ;
if not, the work must be repeated and made, if it was made for a special pur-
pose, and the direction of the north with a drawing board on top a much ;
point, ought to be on every map. The more satisfactory tripod can be built
topographic sheets pubHshed by the as shown in the accompanying draw-
United States Geological Survey are ings. Each leg is made of two strips
of wood, % by % in. and 3 ft. long.
These strips are screwed together at
their lower ends, gripping a spike be-
tween them which will prevent the legs
from slipping on the ground. The tops
of the are spread apart and
strips
screwed to the opposite ends of an oak
or maple cleat. This cleat is, in turn,
screwed to the under side of the cir-
cular tripod head.
In place of the two needles and the
ruler described for marking the line of
sight, most plane-table men use an
alidade, which is a combination of
two sights and a straightedge. very A
simple alidade may be made by mount-
ing two needles on a ruler. The
.0^ straight edge of the ruler is placed
From anOriginal Drawing of a Survey of Mount against the needle which marks the
Vernon, Made by George Washington
at the Age of 14 station at which the plane table is set
up. Then, by swinging the ruler
good samples to follow. They have around this needle until its two sight-
been published for a great many places ing needles come in with some
line
all over the country, and single copies object, the line of sight can be drawn
can be obtained by sending 10 cents to directly on the paper along the edge
the Director, United States Geological of the ruler. A surveyor in India once
Survey, Washington, D. C. made an alidade out of a piece of
Plane tables are almost as easily straightedge and two sights made of
made as they are bought. If there is no native coins hammered out by a native
old drawing board around the house, blacksmith. Two pieces of cigar box,
a new bread board from the ten-cent one with a fine vertical saw slit in
store will serve. For ordinary work, it, and the other with a vertical slot
a table which is 15 or 20 in. square will and a piece of fine wire or silk thread
do very well. The board must be stretched down the center, glued to a
mounted on a tripod so that it will be well planed, straight, flat piece of
rigid while it is being worked upon wood, make a fine alidade. A careful
and yet can be undamped and oriented. worker may be able to put his sights
A brass plate, with a hole in it and a on hinges so that they will fold down
nut soldered over the hole, screwed when not in use.
to the bottom of the board will per- More than anything else, map mak-
mit the board and tripod to be bolted ing rewards care and accuracy, and
together in good shape. Another shows up slipshod workmanship. If
method, which is not nearly as good, is the pencils are sharp, the lines fine, and
to drill a hole clear through the board, if the work is checked often, beautiful
countersink it on top for a bolt head, maps can be made with very simple ap-
and bolt the board and tripod head paratus.
directly together. With the brass plate
and nut, the camera tripod can be CWhite marks on waxed surfaces may
pressed into service if a nut of the be removed by rubbing lightly with a
proper size has been used. The camera soft rag moistened in alcohol, after
tripod is, however, apt to be wabbly which rub with raw linseed oil.
Machine for Sketching Pictures soldered to those on the strip fastened
to the board. This will make a
An ordinary drawing board, with hinged joint, as well as one that will
the attachments shown, provides an allow the upper strip to slide hori-
easy way to sketch pictures, even if zontally.
Centrally located on the upper
strip are two more strips, fastened
with screws at right angles to the
former, with a space between them of
I/O in. for the sliding center piece hold-
to the board, near one edge, which has To use the machine, set the board
on a table, or tripod, and level it up
a metal piece on each end, fastened to
the under side and bent up over the in front of the object to be drawn.
end to form an extension for the rod Look through the sight at the front of
to support the moving parts. The the board and move the pencil about
strip of wood should be 54 i"- wide to keep the knot of the thread on the
and 14 in. thick, and the sliding arm, outlines of the picture to be drawn.
holding the pencil, l/^ in. wide and Vi Contributed by \Ym. C. Coppess,
in. thick. A like strip, but much Union City, Ind.
shorter than the one fastened to the
board, is also fitted with metal pieces CA walnut filler is made of 3 lb. burnt
in an 'inverted position so the projec- Turkey umber, 1 lb. of burnt Italian
tions will be downward. A
rn-'m. rod sienna', both ground in oil, then mixed
to a paste with qt. of turpentine and
is run through holes in the metal 1
CAMERA surveying is simply plane- its place with naught but a pair of di-
viders and a few pictures to do the trick.
table surveying in which the land-
scape has been photographically picked And when the map is done, there are
up and carried indoors. It has the enor- all the data to tell just where a ten-
mous advantage that one can ol)tain a nis court can go or a walk ought to be
record of the utmost fidelity in a small built.
fraction of the time taken to do the Inmaking surveys, a plate camera
field work of even a sketchy plane- will do more accurate work than will
table survey, and that plotting can be a film camera and a fixed focus is a big
;
done in the comfort and with the con- help in plotting. In spite of the spe-
veniences of a drafting room. When cial and expensive instruments which
the hours one can work are short or the have been designed solely for survey-
periods of clear, dry weather are few ing work, a little ingenuity on the part
and far between, a camera is an ideal of the owner of most any kind of a
surveying instrument. It sees and re- camera, be it big or little, film or plate,
cords with the click of the shutter. box or folding, will do wonders to-
Surveying by camera was proposed ward producing good results.
early in the infant days of photogra- To be used for surveying, a camera
phy; but not until the eighties were
photographic surveys commenced in
earnest. With the extensive surveys @ ==-^^:Mii;. ., \.m
of the Canadian Rockies by the Cana-
dian government within the past
decade and the topographic surveys of Ko) ( CI3 )
(o) :
IS
the Alps, the camera has very recently
j( 1
indeed achieved the dignity of being
m\
known as a "sure-enough" surveying
instrument. Even today, few survey- ®
ors have ever u^ed photography for
making surveys, even though for
mountain topography or any survey
which includes a large number of dis-
tinctive, inaccessible landmarks, the
camera asks no odds of either the plane
table or the stadia transit.
A camera survey taken of the sum- A
the
T-Shaped Level with Adjusting Nuts is Located on
Camera Box, or on the Bed of the Folding Camera
mer cottage or the camping ground
will be a source of great delight while must be fitted with a spirit level and
it is being plotted up of winter even- some arrangement for cross hairs. A
ings. There is something weird in T-shaped level on the bed or the box,
watching each tent and dock slip into carefully adjusted, will show when the
plate is vertical and when the perpen- sidesand top and bottom of the open-
dicular line from the center of the plate ing immediately in front of the plate.
to the center of the lens is horizontal. But it is essential that the cross hairs
Actual cross hairs in the camera are have their intersection in a line p«:r-
not as good as four tiny points of V's,
one projecting from the middle of each
side, top, and bottom of the camera box,
just in front of the plate holder. How
the level is to be adjusted so that a
line between the upper and lower
points will be truly vertical, and one
through the die-side points truly hori-
zontal and on a le^el with the center of
the lens when the bubbles are in the
center of the spirit level, will be de-
scribed later.
Camera Preparation
level shallbe parallel with the axial cen- difference, or "error," is found between
ter line through the lens and the other the two vertical distances from the
parallel with the horizontal cross hair. cross hair to the two stake tops. Half
The first field adjustment is made in this error is corrected by raising or
the following manner. The camera is lowering one end of the level tube by
means of the threaded nuts which are
placed on it for the purpose. The
whole process is then repeated until
the vertical distances from the horizon-
tal cross hair at the center to the two
level stakes, one close to and one dis-
tant from the camera, are identical.
LEN5
The axial center line of the lens, or
the line of collimation, is then in ad-
justment with the level. All that re-
mains is to make the horizontal cross
hair parallel with the cross level.
CB05S HAIRS MABKED
I
GROUND CLASS
This is done by using one marked
r ON
stake. The camera is leveled as far as
appearance and strength, which can be point 1 ft. from one end and bore 13
dyed with almost all kinds of aniline
dyes and assumes much more brilliant
hues than ordinary colored glass, can
be made in the following manner: Pro-
cure a white paper, made of cotton or
linen rags, and put it in soak in a sat-
urated solution of camphor in alcohol.
When dry, the paper so treated can be
cut up into any forms suitable for
parts of lamp shades, etc.
Grape Arbor Built of Poles uprights should have the end notches
the same distance apart, one pole being
In building outdoor structures, such used as a gauge. All the joints and
as grape arbors, pergolas, or arches, it notches may be cut with a sharp
is not necessary to use sawed hatchet.
lumber, as they can be built In setting the arbor, the uprights
as substantial, and fre- should first be assembled complete with
quently more artis- braces and roof supports, and placed in
tic and cheap, the ground a distance apart corre-
o f poles. sponding to that of the notches on the
long poles. The uprights being set,
the long poles are placed and fastened
—
with nails.- Contributed by W. E.
Crane, Cleveland, Ohio.
Two Fine Hair Lines must be Scratched on Each Plate Before It is Used
to Plot From, or to Make 5TA.C Pictures from Which the Plotting is Done
13
14
15
that the 10 or 12 plates which a small make the prints from which the plot-
survey will comprise may not get hope- ting to be done. One of these lines
is
lessly mixed up. If the camera is should connect the points at the top
turned each time to the right, clock- and bottom of the plate, and the other,
wise, and the plates are numbered A-1, the points at the sides. The vertical
A-2, B-4:, etc., indicating by A-1, for line divides the objects which were on
example, the leftmost plate taken at the right of the center of the camera
Sta. A; by A-3, the plate just to the from those that were on the left, and
right of A-1, just as II is to the right the horizontal line connecting the
of I on the clock dial, and by B-4, the points on the sides separates the ob-
fourth to the right taken at Sta. B, jects that were above the camera
there ought to be no difficulty in from those that were below.
identifying the plates after the If the survey has been made
exact details of the ground are with a lens that does not cover
forgotten. the plate fully or that has con-
While the pictures are be- siderable uncorrected aber-
ing taken, "flags" of white ration, causing distorted
wood or with white-cloth shapes near the
streamers tied to them ^^t** edges and corners
must be stuck in the of the picture, re-
ground or held at the sults be mate-
can
other stations in or- rially improved by
der that their exact plotting from en-
location can be largements. In
readily and cer- making the en-
tainly found on largements,
the back of
In Plotting a
Camera Survey the the camera
Base Triangle is
should be
First Carefully
Laid Out on the removed
Paper to Such
a Scale That
the Map will
be of Desir*
able Size
STA. A STA.C
— CORRECT MAPtiING CONSTANT
INCORRECT MAPPING CONSTANT
the plates.A few distinctive stakes, and the light should be allowed to pass
some with one and some with two or through the plate and the lens in the
three strips of cloth tied to them, reverse order and direction of that
placed at important points on the in which it passed when the negative
ground will help immensely in the loca- was made. In this way, the errors
tion of knolls and shore lines. which were made by the lens originally
In plotting a camera survey, either will be straightened out, and the re-
the original plates, the prints, or en- sulting enlargements will be free from
largements may be used. The plates distortion. To make successful en-
are the most accurate if a corrected largements for surveying work, the
lens has been used and the enlarge-
; easel on which the bromide paper is
ments made back through the lens will tacked must be square with the cam-
be best if the images on the plates are era, and the paper itself should be flat
distorted. In any case, two fine hair and smooth. It is just as necessary to
lines must be scratched on each plate keep the easel at a constant distance
before it is used to plot from, or to from the camera during the enlarging
16
as it was to keep the same focus while of the plate A-1 on the drawing. This
the original negatives were being line is called the trace of the plate. An
made. object which appears both on plate A-1
In plotting a camera survey the base and A-2 is next picked out and its loca-
triangle is first carefully laid out on the tion on the trace of plate A-1 deter-
paper to such a scale that the map will mined by measuring the distance JN
be of a desirable size. With the apex equal to the distance on the plate from
of the triangle representing Sta. A, say, the image of the object to the center
as a center, a circle is drawn with a vertical line. A
light line, NO, joining
radius as nearly equal as possible to this last-found point with Sta. A, is
the distance between the optical center then drawn. Where this last line
of the lens and the plate when the pic- crosses the arc, at O, a tangent, OP, to
ture was taken. Ordinarily this will the arc is drawn, and the trace of the
be the focal length of the lens but if
; plate A-2 is found with the aid of the
the camera was not focused most point which appears on both plates just
sharply on an object a great distance as plate A-1 was located from the pic-
off, the radius may be greater. This ture of Sta. B. The traces of plates
radius is called the "mapping con- A-3 and A-4 are found in exactly the
stant." When an approximate distance same way as was that of A-2. If the
for the mapping constant has been de- radius of the arc has been estimated
termined by measurements on the cam- correctly, Sta. C will be found to be
era or by knowing the focal length of exactly on the point where the trace of
the lens, the circle, or rather the arc, the plate showing the station crosses
FG between the two lines to stations the line AC on the paper. If it does
B and C, is drawn. The plates taken not fall on the line AC, which is gen-
at Sta. A, and ranged around this cir- erally the case, everything must be
cle on the outside and just touching it, erased except the original triangle.
will show the landscape exactly as First, however, a radial line S'G', or
seen from A. S"G", is drawn from the location of
In the accompanying diagram show- Sta. C on the trace of the plate A-2,
ing the method of determining the 3 or 4, as the case may be, to the arc,
mapping constant and of locating the and the point of intersection of this
traces of the plates, the letters F, G, line and the arc, G' or G", is preserved.
H, J, P, R and S designate points re- If this point, G' or G", is outside the
ferring to the true mapping constant, base triangle, the next trial arc should
and the construction necessary to lo- be drawn with a larger mapping con-
cate the traces of the plates. The stant as a radius, or vice versa. If the
primed letters F', F", G', G", etc., are second mapping constant is off, find
used to show similar points where the again the point of intersection of the
trial mapping constant is either too radial line through the new location of
long or too short. The following de- Sta. C on the newly located trace of
scription refers equally to the construc- the last plate and the new arc. Join
tion necessary with true or trial-map- this point and the one found previ-
ping constants. ously, in the same manner, with a
Next, a line FH is drawn perpendic- straight line, G'G". The point G
ular to the line AB of the triangle at where this last drawn line intersects
the point F where the arc intersects it. the line AC of the base triangle, will
On this line is laid ofif, in the proper be the point through which the arc,
direction, a distance equal to the dis- with the correct mapping constant as
tance on the plate or print from Sta. B radius, ought to pass, provided the first
to the center vertical line. From this two approximations were not too far in
point is drawn a light line, HJ, toward error. This third trial ought to make
the center of the arc. Where this line the location of the traces of the plates
crosses the arc, at J, a tangent, KJM. exactly correct. If. however, the focus
is drawn, which will show the location of the camera was changed between ex-
17
posures at one station, the traces of the sight to the object. The same object
plates will not all be at an equal dis- is located from another station in the
tance from the station point, and their same way as on the plane table, the
;
Traces of
\
the Plates Vl"^
Determined
\' \'^\r' s
\
STA. A
located as with the plane table all that ; rise slowly foot by foot. If the con-
remains to be done is to take the sights tours are close together, the ground
and find the points on the paper which represented has a steep slope, and vice
show where the objects were on the versa. If, on a map, a number of points
ground. are of known elevation, it is simply a
This taking the sights is a simple question of judgment and practice to
matter. With a pair of dividers, the tellwhere contour lines go.
distance from a given object from the Before contours can be drawn the
center line of the plate is measured. elevations of a considerable number of
This distance is laid ol? on the proper points must be known. If the eleva-
side of the point marking the center tion of any one of them is known and
line of the trace of the same plate a ; the difference between that one and
radial line is drawn through the trace any other can be found, determining
at the given distance from the center- the elevation of the second point is
line point and the station at which the simply a problem in addition or sub-
given plate is taken this is one line of
; traction. If it be desired to find, for
18
Fic;.4
The Skiff Especially Constructed for Use in Sliallow Water and Marshes
is
-34"— by Duclt Hunters, but with the Addition of a Keel It Makes
a Good Craft for Almost Any Water as a Rowboat
19
wide, but 13-in. planks may be used, Double-Swing Gate with Common
the length being 13 ft. 4 in. Two stem
Hinge
pieces are constructed as shown in Fig.
1, and the plank ends are fastened to Ordinary hinges can be easily bent
them with screws. Nail a crosspiece and so placed on posts that a gate can
on the plank edges in the exact center, be swung in either direction. As
so as to space the planks 34 in. apart,
as shown in Fig. 2 then turn it over
;
Some calking may be required be- posts. The gate half of the hinge is
tween the bottom, or floor, boards, if fastened in the usual way. The post
they are not nailed tightly against one half is bent and so placed that the
another. The calking material may be hinge pin will approximately be on a
loosely woven cotton cord, which is line between the centers of the posts.
well forced into the seams. The first The gate and post should be beveled
coat of paint should be of red lead off to permit a full-open gateway.
mixed with raw linseed oil, and when Contributed by R. R. Schmitz, Birm-
dry any color may be applied for the ingham, Ala.
second coat.
While, for use in shallow water, Testing Out Induction Coils
these boats are not built with a keel,
one can be attached to prevent the While winding an induction coil, I
boat from "sliding off" in a side wind found it necessary to test the sections
or when turning around. When one for continuity. Having no galvanom-
is attached, it should be % i"- thick, eter, connected a battery and low-
I
3 in. wide, and about 8 ft. long. — Con- resistance telephone receiver in series
tributed by B. Francis Dashiell, Bal- with the section and battery. The bat-
timore, Md. tery and telephone receiver may also
be used for testing out the secondary
CAn aniline color soluble in alcohol, of an induction coil, to determine if it
by adding a little carbolic acid, will is burnt out. —
Contributed by John M.
hold fast on celluloid. Wells, Moosomin, Can.
30
into a board, % in- in thickness, just with a bevel protractor. The pointer is
deep enough to admit the compass a hand from an old alarm clock.
snugly, then a circle. A, 41/0 in. in The telescope arrangement consists
diameter, is drawn, having the same of a piece of pasteboard tubing, about
center as the compass hole, and the 114 in. in diameter, one end being cov-
disk is cut out with a compass or scroll ered with a piece of black paper with
saw. A cut in the same
ring, B, is a pinhole in the exact center, and the
manner from the same material, its other equipped with "cross hairs."
inside diameter being such that the Four small notches are cut in the lat-
ring just fits around the disk A, and ter end of the tube, exactly quartering
the outside diameter, 6% in. Another it, and two silk threads as fine as can
block, 5I/2 in- in diameter, is glued to be obtained, are stretched across in
the bottom of the small disk A. This these notches. The tube is fastened
will appear as shown at C. small A to a block of wood, 5 in. wide and 7
hole is bored in the center of the bot- in. long, with small tacks and two
tom block on the under side to re- pieces of fine copper wire. This block
ceive the threaded end of the screw is pinioned between the standards with
on a camera tripod. By careful ad- two nails. The hand is secured to the
justment the threads in the wood will nail in such a position that it will point
hold the transit firmly. plumb bob A straight down when the tube is level.
must be attached exactly in the cen- The instrument is adjusted in the
ter of the tripod head. This can be following manner: It is set up where
easily done if the head is wood, but in a lone tree can be seen, about one mile
case the top is of metal, the line can distant, and the center of the cross
21
hairs is carefully set on the tree. Then sit was used to lay out a map of a
a very fine wire is stretched across the ranch will now be given. The start
compass, as shown at F, and while was made on an east and west fence.
keeping it directly over the center of The instrument was set 5 ft. from the
the compass it is also placed on a di- fence at one point, and at the other
rect line pointing to the tree. Very end of the fence the stick was set at a
small brass nails, driven in at G and point 5 ft. from the fence. When the
H, serve to fasten it in the position stick was sighted, the wire cut the E
thus found. When this adjustment and W on the compass, thus showing
has been made the telescope can be that the fence was set on a line, due
turned to sight any object, after first east and west. The distance was
placing the instrument so that the measured from the fence to the house,
needle points to the N on the dial, and which was Vi mile, and this was noted
a glance at the wire will show the exact in a book. This operation was re-
direction in which the object is located. peated on the rear, and the distance
The instrument is then taken to a found to be 780 ft. while the compass
level stretch of road and set up, and a showed the direction to be 4 deg.
stick is placed on end and marked at west of south. The next line ran 427
the height of the telescope. The stick ft. and 1 deg. east of south. This
is taken along the road about 200 yd., was kept up all the way around. After
the telescope sighted on it, and the these notes had been obtained, it was
hand set. This makes the instrument an easy matter to take a piece of plain
level enough for all practical purposes. paper and strike a line representing
The plumb bob is then dropped, a dis- north and south and lay off the direc-
tance of 20 ft. measured from it on the tions. A bevel protractor was used to
road, and a mark made. The tele- find the degrees. The transit was set
scope is sighted on this mark, and a on the posts of the corrals and this
mark is made on the standard at the saved the measuring out from the in-
point of the arc, to which the hand closure. The creek was surveyed in
points. Another 20 ft. is measured, or the same manner. So many feet south-
40 ft. from the bob, and another mark west, so many feet west, so many feet
made. The telescope is sighted on 5 deg. south of west, and so on, until
it, and the location of the hand again its length was run.
marked. This works well up to about The transit can also be used for find-
300 ft., then the marks begin to come ing distances without measuring. A
very close together. This method is line from A to B is sighted, and F
used for laying out town sites. The represents a point 14 mile distant, the
instrument is set up directly over a line from F to G being 100 ft. A line
stake from which to work, and the is now sighted from A, through G to C.
telescope turned down until the 20-
is A person standing at D is directed to
A Lathe Bench
While working at a bench, or foot-
power lathe, it is quite convenient to
have some sort of a seat to sit on while
at work, or between operations. In
making such a seat, I used a board, 27
in. long and 13 in. wide, for the top,
and two boards, 19 in. long and 12 in.
wide, for the supports. These boards
were '% in. thick. The supports were
squared at the ends and securely fas-
tened to the top with nails, their posi-
tions being 3 in. in from the ends of
the top board. These were well
Enlarging and Reducing Plots by Radial Lines from braced, as shown, and a cross board
a Common Point Located Properly
covering was made to fit in each of the means of molding strips. The sliding
openings in the top board and hinged support for the cabinet consists of a
to the outer edge of the box. The 2-in. square piece secured to the bot-
boxes made a convenient place for the
tools used in the turning work. Con- —
tributed by Harold R. Harvey, Buhl,
Idaho.
By R. H. ALLEN
cide. When the notches are cut, fit in The supporting crosspiece on the
the pieces snugly, and fasten them with front sled is fastened on top of the
long, sHm wood screws. Small metal runners, at a place where its center
Showing the
Details
Method of Rear-
BRACE- Sled Oscillation,
the Bracing, and
the Steering Wheel
braces are then fastened to the runners will be 11 in. from the front end of the
and crosspiece on the inside, to stiiTen runners.
the joint. The top board is prepared by making
As the rear sled must oscillate some, both ends rounding and planing the
means must be provided for this tilt- surfaces smooth. On the under side,
ing motion while at the same time pre- the two crosspieces are placed, which
venting sidewise turning. The con- should have two Vo-in. holes bored
struction used for this purpose is a through the width of each, near the
hinged joint. The heavy 2 by 5-in. ends, to receive the eyebolts. They are
crosspiece is cut sloping on the width placed, one with its center 12 in. from
so that it remains 2 in. thick at one the end to be used for the rear, and the
edge and tapers down to a feather edge other with its center 8 in. from the
at the opposite side. This makes a front end, and securely fastened with
wedge-shaped piece, to which surface screws. The shore is placed in the
the three large hinges are attached. center of the board, and wires are run
The piece is then solidly fastened to over it connecting the eyebolts. The
the upper edges of the runners that eyebolts are then drawn up tightly to
are to be used for the rear sled, and so make the wire taut over the shore.
located that the center of the piece will This will prevent the long board from
be 8 in. from the front end of the sagging.
runners. On the upper side of the board and
LIST OF MATERIALS
1 top. 6V^ ft. wide, and 1% in
Ions. 16 In. thick. 4 seat backs. 12 in. lontr. 16 in. wide, and 1 in. thick.
4 runners. 22 in. loot:. 4 in. wide, and I in. thick. 1 dowel. 3 ft. loni,'. and 1 in. in diameter.
4 crosspieces. 16 in. lon^'. Sin. wide, and 1 in. thick. 4 rods, % in. in diameter, and 30 in, lone.
3 pieces. 16 in. long. 5 in. wide, and 2 in.
1 piece. 16 in. lont,'. .S in. wide, and 1 in,
thick. 4 eyebolts. ^ in, by 6 io, long,
thick. 3 hinces, 5-in. strap,
1 shore, 16 in. lorn,'. 3 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. 8 hintres, 3 in. strap.
26
beginning at the rear end, the backs keg hoop. A piece of wood is fas-
are fastened at intervals of 18 in. They tened across its diameter, and the hoop
are first prepared by rounding the cor- is covered with a piece of garden hose
The Top Board is Well Braced on the Under Side and Fitted with Four Backs on Top to Make It a
Luxurious Riding Sled, and the Runners are Provided with Metal Shoes for Speed
ners on the ends used for the tops, and and wrapped with twine. In the center
the opposite ends are cut sHghtly on of the crosspiece, a hole is bored to
an angle to give the back a slant. snugly fit on the broom handle, which
They are then fastened with the small is then fastened with screws.
hinges to the top board. On the edges The rear sled is fastened to the top
of the top board, 1-in. holes are bored board with screws through the extend-
about 1 in. deep, and pins driven for ing wings of the hinges and into the
foot rests. These are located 18 in. crosspiece. Holes are bored in the
apart, beginning about 5 in. from the front ends of all runners, and a chain
front end. The dowel is used for the or rope is attached in them, the loop
pins, which are made 4 in. long. end of the rear one being attached to
The steering device consists of a the under side of the top board, and the
broom handle, cut to 18 in. in length, one in the front used for drawing the
with one end fastened in a hole bored sled.
centrally in the 5-in. crosspiece of the
front sled. A hole is bored in the top To Prevent Drill from Catching As It
board through the center of the cross-
Passes through Metal
piece fastened to the under side for
the steering post. The broomstick is The regular slope of a drill will
run through this hole after first plac- cause the cutting edge to catch as it
ing two metal washers on it. After breaks through the metal on the op-
running the stick through, a hardwood posite side of the piece being drilled.
collar is fastened to it just above the Rut if a twist drill is ground more flat
top board, so that the top cannot be like a flat drill, it"grab" into
will not
raised away from the sled. At the the metal as it passes through. Con- —
upper end of the broomstick a steering tributed by James H. Beebee, Roch-
wheel is attached, made from a nail- ester, N. Y.
An Ice Boat and Catamaran
By ROBERT K. PATTERSON
* 'HIS combination is produced by 18 in. long, 6 in. wide, and 2 thick,
-Iusing the regular type of ice boat allowing the ground edge to project
and substituting boats for the runners, about 1 inch.
to make the catamaran. When the ice-boat frame is made of
In constructing the ice boat, use two poles, the runners are attached to a
poles, or timbers, one 16 ft. and the piece of wood, 13 long, shaped as
other lOi/o ft. long, crossed at a point shown and fastened at right angles
21/2 ft. from with bolts
one end of the running
longer timber. throughthe
The crossed shouldered
pieces are part diagonal-
firmly braced ly. This makes
with wires, as a surface on
shown. which the
The mast, pole end rests
which should and where it
be about 12 ft. issecurely
long, is set fastened with
into a mortise bolts. If
cut in the long squared t i m-
timber, 15 in. bers are used,
from the front the runners
end, and is can be f a s-
further stabil- tened directly
ized by wires, to them. The
as shown. A rear, or guid-
jib boom, ing, runner is
about 6 ft. fastened b e-
long, as well t w ee n two
as a main pieces of
boom, which wood, so that
is 111/2 ft. i t s edge. pro-
long, are hung jects ; then it
on the mast is clamped in
in the usual a bicycle fork,
manner. which should
The front The Ice Boat Provides an Ideal Outing in Winter Where There
Is a Body of Water Large Enough for Sailing
be cut down
runners c o n- so that about
sist of band-iron strips, 18 in. long, 3 3 in. of the forks remain. A hole is bored
in. wide, and Vt; in. thick, with one edge through the rear end of the long pole to
ground like the edge of a skate, and receive the fork head, the upper end of
the ends rounding, which are fastened which is supplied with a lever. The
with bolts to the sides of wood pieces, lever is attached to the fork head by
27
28
=P5pT -
j kl
16-
H
-1
.?il_d.J>-
V. V "l
29
boring a hole through the lever end at An Air Pencil to Make Embossed
a slight angle to fit the head, allowing Letters
sufficient end to be slotted, whereupon
a hole is bored through the width of the The device illustrated is for making
handle, and a bolt inserted, to act as a embossed letters on show cards, signs,
clamp. post cards, etc. A small bulb, such as
A board is fastened on two cross-
jiieces mortised in the upper part of
the pole, for a place to sit on when
driving the boat. The sail can be con-
structed of any good material to the
dimensions given.
To rig up the ice boat for use as a
catamaran, place a pole across the
stern, the length of the pole being
equal to the one used on the front part
of the ice boat. Two water-tight boats
are constructed, l(i ft. long, 13 in. wide,
and 10 in. deep at the center. To make
these two boats procure six boards, 16
ft. long, 10 in. wide, and 1 in. thick.
An unusual though simple tie rack thus avoiding the tedious threading
can be made by supporting the tie bar througli, required on the ordinary rack
in the center. By this arrangement the sui)])orted at each end. Collars may be
ties can be placed on it from either end, hung on a peg placed above the tie bar.
piece is 30 in. long and about 8 in under side. The block is strapped to
wide. In the cen- one shoe, a s
ter of this piece shown.
an ujjright is con- The glider is
structed, 36 in. used in the same
high. The edges manner as a push-
of the front cross- mobile.
piece are cut on a The pusher can
slant so that a be made in an-
piece nailed to its other way by us-
front and back ing sole leather
edge will stand instead of the
sloping toward Detail of the Parts
for the Construction
block. Small slots
the rear. A han- of the Ice Glider, are cut in the sides
or Pushmobile
dle,31 in. long, is for the straps.
fastened between Nails are driven
31
32
through the leather so that the points in turn supported on two upright
is
project. Either kind of pusher is pieces, as shown. A light rope is put
under the pulley, and the ends are
looped over the platforms of the bal-
ance so that it does not interfere with
the operation of the balance. The ends
of the rope should be vertical and par-
allel. The piece upon which the balance
rests is raised by inserting wedges,
thus increasing the tension in the rope.
33,000X12
In this equation, L is the distance in
inches from the center of the pulley to
the center of the rope. Two ordinary
spring balances may be substituted for
the beam balance and the difference in
their readings taken for the value W.
For best results, the tension in the
slack end of the rope should be as
small as possible, and it may be neces-
sary to wrap the rope one or more
times completely around the pulley.
BULB
The Rocking of the Table is Caused by the Pressure of Air in the Bulb under the Foot,
the Movement Causing the Pendulum to Swing and Strike the Glass
each end is placed under a rug, one force the edges out of the liquid, I
bulb being located under one table leg found the plan here illustrated a suc-
and the other near the chair of the per- cess. I procured a piece of wood, the
former set at some distance from the size of a postcard, and stuck four
table where it can be pressed with the glass push pins into one surface, one
foot. Some one selects a pendulum at each corner, and fastened a handle
the performer gazes intently at it, and to the center of the upper side. The
presses the bulb under his foot lightly papers are first placed in the bath, then
at first then, by watching the sway-
;
By 3fillman Taylor
', JC*
Stays being again wound with finer Style B may be considered the or-
strands. dinary eastern model, and a common
To prevent slipping and to secure a style best adapted for all-around use.
good foothold while walking, the man- It is a neat and gracefully designed
ner of attaching the foot to the shoe is frame, about 12 in. wide and 42 in.
of importance, and this is done by long, and is usually made with a
making use of a toe strap, which will slightly upcurving toe, about 2 in. turn
alldw the toe to push down through at the toe being correct. When made
the toe opening as the heel of the foot l)y the Indians of Maine, this model is
is lifted in the act of walking. sec- A fashioned with a rather heavy heel,
ond strap, or thong, leading from the which is an advantage for fast walk-
top around the foot, above the curve of ing, while it increases the difficulty in
the heel, is needed to lend additional quick turning.
support in lifting the snowshoe, to ef- Style C is a favorite model among
fect the easy shambling stride char- the hunters and woodsmen of New
acteristic of the snowshoer. England. This is a splendid style for
There are, of course, a great number general purposes in this section of the
of models or styles, some one style country, since the full, round toe keeps
being popular in one locality, while an the toe up near the surface, and lets
altogether different style is preferred the heel cut down more than the nar-
in another part of the country. The row-toe models. Style C is an easy
most ^epresentati^•e types are well shoe to wear, and while not so fast as
shown in the illustrations, and a brief the long, narrow frame, its full shape
description will point out their prac- is more convenient for use in the
tical advantages, because each model woods. It is usually made with about
possesses certain merits one model — 1 to IVi;-!"- turn at the toe.
being designed for fast traveling in Style D is the familiar "bear's
the open, another better adapted for jiaw," a model originating with the
brush travel, while others are more northeastern trapper. This model is
convenient for use in a hilly country well adapted for short tramps in the
where much climbing is done, and so brush, and having a flat toe, is likewise
on. a good shoe for mountain climbing.
Style A
is regarded by snowshoe ex- For tramping about in thick brush, a
perts as an extreme style, for it is long short, full shoe enables one to take a
and narrow. It is designed for fast shorter stride and turn more quickly,
traveling over smooth and level coun- but it is a slow shoe for straight-ahead
try, and over loose, powdery snow. traveling.
This style is much used by the Cree When purchasing a pair of snow-
Indians, and is usually made 13 in. shoes, some few important considera-
wide by liO in. long, with a deeply up- tions should be kept in mind, and the
curved toe. It is a good shoe for size and model will depend upon the
cross-country work, but is somewhat man to some extent, since a large,
difficult to manage on broken trails, heavy man will require a larger snow-
when the snow is packed, and also af- shoe than would suffice for a person of
fords rather slippery footing when lighter weight. Height also enters
crossing ice. Owing
to the stout con- into the choice, and while a small per-
struction of the frame and reinforce- son can travel faster and with less
ment needed to retain the high, curved fatigue when equipped with a propor-
toe, style A
is more difficult to manage tionately small shoe, a tall man will
than the more conservative models, naturally pick out a larger-sized snow-
and its stiffness of frame makes it shoe for his use. For a country where
more fatiguing to wear, while its use deep snows prevail, larger sizes are
is a decidedhandicap in mountainous best, but in localities where the snow
districts, because a curved toe always packs solidly and there is considerable
makes hill climbing more difficult. ice, and in mountainous districts.
37
dered with the flat toe. or a turn not tightly woven, and the heel is properly
greater than 1 in. The frame may be fastened by lacing with a rawhide
38
it is good idea to
a
good
select a filling of
* r Sir r > ->
above the heel of the foot, and the taken ofT and put on again by pushing
ends passed under the toe cord, just the heel strap down, when the foot may
outside of the toe-cord stays on each be slipped out of the toe stirrup.
side. The thong is then brought up The use of heavy leather shoes is of
and across the toes, one end passing course undesirable, and the only cor-
over and the other under the toe rect footwear for snowshoeing is a pair
strap. Each end of the thong is now of high-cut moccasins, cut roomy
looped around the crossed thong, on enough to allow one or more pairs of
either side, and then carried back over heavy woolen stockings to be worn.
the back of the heel and knotted with The heavy and long German socks, ex-
a common square or reef knot. Calf- tending halfway to the knee, drawn
skin makes a good flexible foot bind- on over the trouser legs, are by far the
ing, or a suitable strip of folded cloth most comfortable for cold-weather
or canvas may be used. wear. The feet, thus shod, will not
The regulation snowshoe harness, only be warm in the coldest weather,
consisting of a leather stirrup for the but the free use of the toes is not in-
toe and an instep and heel strap, will terfered with. Leather shoes are cold
be found more comfortable than the and stifif, and the heavy soles and
thong, and when once adjusted snugly heels, chafing against the snowshoes,
to the foot, the shoes may be quickly will soon ruin the filling.
There are two simple processes that tubing should be procured, or, prefer-
every experimenter should master: ably, one of those capped brass cylin-
soldering and riveting. The large sold- ders for holding pencil leads, the but-
ering copper will find only a very re- ton of which should be sawn ofif and
the cap used to keep the alcohol from
evaporating. A good, sound cork is
next in order, and in cutting the central
A Small Torch Made of a Penholder is Handy to hole, use the brass tube, which should
Use in Soldering Electrical Apparatus
be sharpened around the lower end.
stricted use with the amateur on ac- Proceed with a rotary motion, and a
count not only of its clumsiness, but of clean core will be removed. If an or-
the fact that it requires a fire, which dinary lamp wick is not at hand, soft
is often impracticable to obtain. The cotron string
experimenter should therefore con- may be bundled
struct a small alcohol lamp, which, up as a substi-
after a little experience, will reveal the tute. Such a
following advantages: It may be lamp is safe,
brought into instant use at any place odorless and will
it will make a more perfect connection not blacken the
with a small blowpipe places may be work in the least
reached that are entirely inaccessible as in the case of
to the large iron several small pieces
; kerosene or gas-
may be set in position and soldered oline.
without disturbing them, which is There are many good soldering
quite impossible with the large iron. fluxeson the market, but that obtained
To make such a lamp, procure a by dissolving as much scrap of zinc
small wide-mouthed bottle so that very as possible in muriatic acid will solder
little alcohol will be necessary and the practically everything that may be
lamp may be tipped at any desired necessary, provided, of course, the sur-
angle. A short piece of seamless brass faces are filed or scraped bright. Wire
41
solder is usually the most convenient, rivet and must be filed flat on the top
as small pieces can be readily cut off before riveting. In case of pins, it will
and placed directly on the work where be found easier to cut them off to the
required. A small blowpipe is often
a valuable adjunct, as it makes possi-
ble a long, narrow flame that may be
directed in almost any direction.
Where numerous small connections
are to be made, as is often the case with A Few Joints Where Rivets are Used to Hold the
electrical apparatus, the small torch Parts Solidly Together
illustrated will be found very conven-
proper length after they are inserted.
ient. It is simply an old penholder
Use the smallest hammer available,
with the wood portion shortened
somewhat and
striking many light blows rather than
a few heavy ones.
iB metal
the end
filed off square
and cleaned out. A Whistle
This is then
filled with wicking, and it is only neces- Cut a circular piece of tin any con-
sary to dip it in alcohol in order to venient size, preferably 3 in. in diam-
soak up enough to solder an ordinary eter, and bend it across the diameter so
connection. that it will be
The second simple process, of which in a narrow U-
many fail to appreciate the usefulness shape. Then drill
in experimental work, is that of rivet- or punch a hole
—
ing particularly when done on a small
scale. Very often the material in hand
through both
parts as shown.
is tempered steel and cannot, therefore, Place it in the mouth with the open
be soldered to advantage, or it may be edges out, being sure to press the lips
a case where subsequent heating makes on the metal tightly on both upper and
a heat-proof connection imperative. lower pieces outside of the holes and
Then, again, the joint may require the to rest the tongue against the edge
combined strength of both solder and of the tin, even with the holes, and
rivet. blow.
When properly set, the strength of The result of the first attempt may
the ordinary brass pin, when used as not be a sound, but with a little prac-
a rivet, is quite great. Should the tice any familiar tune may be whistled.
work require a particular!)' soft rivet, —Contributed by Chas. C. Bradley,
Toledo, O.
W
it is only necessary to hold the pin for
[NOWSHOE mak-
ing is an art, and
while few, if any,
white men can equal
the Indian in weaving the intricate pat-
terns which they prefer to employ for fill-
ing the frames, it is not very difficult to
fashion a good solid frame and then fill it
by making use of a simple and open system
of meshing. For the frames, white ash is
much the best wood, but hickory and white
birch are dependable substitutes, if the
former cannot be obtained. Birch is per-
haps the best wood to use when the sports-
man wishes to cut and split up his own
wood, but as suitable material for the
frames may be readily purchased for a
small sum, probably the majority of the
readers will elect to buy the material. Any
lumber dealer will be able to supply white
ash, and it is a simple matter to saw out
the frames from the board. The savved-out
frame is inferior to the hand-split bow, but
if good, selected material can be obtained,
there will be little, if any, difference for
ordinary use.
When dry and well-seasoned lumber is
used, the frame may be made to the
proper dimensions, but when green
wood is selected, the frame must be
made somewhat heavier, to allow for
the usual shrinkage in seasoning. For
a stout snowshoe frame, the width
should be about 1^^ in. thickness at
;
toe, fjr in., and thickness at heel, /^ in. The Design of the Snowshoe is Traced on a Board,
and Blocks are Used to Shape the
The frame should be cut 2 in. longer Frame or Bow
43
44
than the finished length desired, and and pliable.. After 10 or 1') minutes of
in working the wood, remember that the hot-walcr treatment, wrap the stick
the toe of the finished frame will be the with cloth and bend it back and forth
center of the to renderit more and more pliable, then
and, placing this pattern on a board, the wood has become thoroughly dry
carefully trace the design on the and has taken a permanent set, the
wooden form. A
number of cleats, or frame will not retain its shape. The
blocks, of wood will now be needed : same bending form may be used for
the inside blocks being nailed in posi- both frames, but if one is in a hurry
tion, but the outside stay blocks being to finish the shoes, two forms should be
simply provided with nails in the holes, made, and considerable pains must be
so they may be quickly fastened in taken to make them exactly alike in
position when the steamed frame is every way.
ready for the form. When the frames are dry, secure the
To make the frame soft for bending tail end of the frame by boring three
to shape, steaming must be resorted to, holes about 4 in. from the end, and
and perhaps the easiest way of doing fasten with rawhide. The work of fit-
this is to provide boiling water in a ting the two cross bars may now be
undertaken, and the balance of 'the
snowshoe depends upon fitting these
bars in their proper places. Before
cutting the mortise, spring the two
bars in the frame about 15 in. apart, and
balance the shoe in the center by hold-
ing it in the hands. When the frame
exactly balances, move the bars suffi-
ciently to make the heel about 3 oz.
heavier than the toe, and mark the
place where the mortises are to be cut.
The cross bars and mortise must be a
good tight fit, and a small, sharp chisel
Begin Weaving the Toe Filling at the Corner of will enable the builder to make a neat
Cross Bar and Frame, Carrying It Around
in a Triangle until Complete job. It is not necessary to cut the
top, and soak well by mopping with aiTord a firmand snug mortised joint.
the boiling water, shifting the stick The lanyard to which the filling is
about until the fibers have become soft woven is next put in, by boring pairs
45
of small holes in the toe and heel sec- strong, carry the strand across the
tions, and lacing a narrow rawhide frame or six times, finishing with
five
thong through the obliquely drilled a half-hitch knot, as shown, then carry
holes. Three holes are then bored in
—
the cross bar one on each side about
iy2 i'l- from the frame, and the third
in the center of the bar the lanyard
;
An
how the trick is done, and indeed it is
Endless Thong is Made with Eyes Cut in the
Ends of the Leather, and Each Part is Run really a very simple matter, being one
through the Eye of the Other of those things which are easier to do
To simplify matters, the heel may be than it is to tell how to do them. The
filled in the same manner as the toe. method of filling has been purposely
For the center, which must be woven made simple, but the majority of shoes
strong and tight, a heavier strand of are filled in practically the same man-
hide must be used. Begin with the ner, which answers quite as well as the
toe cord first, and to make this amply more intricate Indian design.
46
The knack of using the snowshoe is place them close to a hot fire, or the
quickly mastered, j)roviding the shoes hide filling will be injured. Jumping
are properly attached, to allow the toe puts severe strain on the frame of the
shoe, and while damage may not occur
when so used in deep, soft snow, it is
well to avoid the possibility of break-
age. Accidents will now and then
happen, to be sure, and as a thong may
snap at some unexpected moment, keep
a strand or two of rawhide on hand,
to meet this emergency.
ing the other when it is lifted in the act seat, as shown in the illustration. To
of walking. At first the novice may be keep the frame in position while serv-
inclined to think snowshoes a bit cum- ing as a cradle front, or when turned
bersome and unwieldy, and doubt his down for regular use, screw hooks are
ability to penetrate the brush. How- placed at each end, so that, in the for-
ever, as the snowshoer becomes accus- mer case, the frame, when swung up,
tomed to their use, he will experience can be secured in place by attaching
little if any difficulty in traveling where the hooks to screw eyes fastened under
he wills. When making a trail in a the arm supports while, for regular
;
more or less open country, it is a good use, the frame is secured in its swung-
plan to blaze it thoroughly, thus en-
abling one to return over the same
trail, in case a fall of snow should occur
in the meantime, or drifting snow fill
up and obliterate the trail first made.
When the trail is first broken by travel-
ing over it once by snowshoe, the snow
is packed well and forms a solid foun-
dation, and even should a heavy fall
of snow cover it, the blaze marks on
tree and bush will point out the trail,
which will afford faster and easier
traveling than breaking a new trail
each time one journeys in the same
direction.
A well-made pair of snowshoes will A Settee Rocker with a Front Attachment to
It into a Cradle When Desired
Make
stand a couple of seasons' hard use, or
last for a year or two longer for gen- down position by fastening the hooks
eral wear. To keep them in good into screw eyes properly placed in the
shape, they should be dried out after front legs. —
Contributed by Maurice
use, although it is never advisable to Baudier, New Orleans, La.
A Snowball Thrower
By ALBERT BATES, Jr.
The snow fort with its infantry is which all the working parts are
not complete without the artillery. A mounted. The upper end of the arm
set of mortars, or cannon, placed in the C has a piece, K, to which is attached a
fort to hurl snowballs at the entrenched
enemy makes the battle more real. A
device to substitute the cannon or a
mortar can be easily constructed by
any boy, and a few of them set in a
snow fort will add greatly to the
interest of the conflict.
The substitute, which is called a
snowball thrower, consists of a base,
A, with a standard, B, which stops the
arm C, controlled by the bar D, when
the trigger E is released. The tripping
of the trigger is accomplished by the
sloping end of D on the slanting end
of the upright F. Sides, G, are fast- Cannonading a Snow Fort with the Use of a
Snowball Thrower
ened on tlie piece F, with their upper
ends extending above the bar D, to tin can, L, for holding the snowball to
be thrown. A set of door springs, M,
•lljl- i'ih
furnishes the force to throw the snow-
V H2h
fj ^1 I
ball.
All the parts are given dimensions,
and if cut properly, they will fit to-
A Snowball Maker
Snowball making is slow when car-
ried on by hand, and where a thrower
is employed in a snow fort it becomes
necessary to have a number of assist-
ants in making the snowballs. The
time of making these balls can be
greatly reduced by the use of the snow-
ball maker shown in the illustration.
The base consists of a board. 24 in.
long, 61/2 in. wide, and 1 in. thick. A
block of wood. A, is hollowed out in
the center to make a depression in the
shape of a hemisphere, 2i/^ in. in diame-
ter and 11/4 in. deep. This block is
Fic,3 nailed to the base about 1 in. from one
When a Bucket is Filled to the Proper Amount end. To make the dimensions come
It is Turned Out by the Weight
out right, fasten a block, B, 6 in. high,
as an expensive one, and can be made made of one or more pieces, at the
cheaply. The vessel, or bucket, for other end of the base with its back
measuring the water is made diamond- edge 141/^ in. from the center of th'fe
shaped, as shown in Fig. 1, with a hemispherical depression. On top of
partition in the center to make two this block a lever, C, 30 in. long is
Two
uprights, E, are fastened to the Motor Made of Candles
back side of the block as guides for A
the lever C. A
piece is fastened across A tube of tin, or cardboard, having
their tops, and a spring is attached be- an inside diameter to receive a candle
tween it and the lever. curtain-roll-A snugly, is hung on an axle in the center
er spring will be suitable.
In making the balls a bunch of snow
Tallow Dripping from the
is thrown into the lower depression Ends Alternately
and the lever brought down with con- Lessens the Weight of the
siderable force. —
Contributed by Ab- Arms and Causes
the Tube to Tip
bott W. France, Chester, Pa.
An Inexpensive Bobsled
Any boy who can drive a nail and
bore a hole can have a bobsled on short
notice. The materials necessary are ^:^
four good, solid barrel staves four ;
12 in. long, 2 in. wide, and 1% in. that turns in bearings made of wood.
The construction of the bearings is sim-
ple, and they can be made from three
pieces of wood as shown. The tube
should be well balanced. Pieces of can-
dle are then inserted in the ends, also
well balanced. If one is heavier than
the other, light it and allow the tallow
to run off until it rises; then light the
other end. The alternate dripping from
the candles will cause the tube to tip
back and forth like a walking beam.
It will keep going automatically until
A Bobsled of Simple Construction Using Ordinary the candles are entirely consumed.
Barrel Staves for the Runners
Contributed by Geo. Jaques, Chicago.
thick; and a good board, 4 ft. long, 12
in. wide, and 1 in. thick.
Kettle-Handle Support
The crosspieces and knees are made
with the blocks and the 1-in. pieces, The handle of a kettle lying on the
12 in. long, as shown to which the
; kettle rim will become so hot that it
staves are nailed for runners. One cannot be held
of these pieces with the runners is fas- inthe bare hand.
tened to one end of the board, the To keep the
other is attached with a bolt in the handle fairly
center. The 1%
by 2-in. piece, 12 in. cool it must be
long, is fastened across the top of the supported in an
board at the front end. rope fas- A upright position.
tened to the knees of the front runners To do this, form
provides a means of steering the sled. a piece of spring
The sled can be quickly made, and it wire in the shape
will serve the purpose well when an shown, and slip it over the kettle rim.
expensive one cannot be had. — Con- The .shape of the extending end will
tributed by H. J. Blacklidge, San hold the handle upright and away from
Rafael, Cal. the heat.
50
one pair of blocks are used at the cen- through them. Use small washers on
ter and a thin piece of wood fastened both ends of the nails under the head
to their tops to serve as the fifth wheel. and at the point, which is cut off and
The hole for the steering post should riveted over. This makes a good, serv-
iceable binding for rough use. Con- —
tributed by Carl W. Lindgreen, Los
Angeles, Cal.
A Shellac Cement
The Construction is Much More Simple Than
Making a Double-Runner Bobsled
As shellac is the basis of almost ail
be from the front end and a little
6 in. cements, a good cement can l)e made
larger in diameter than the steering by thickening shellac varnish with dry
post. The latter should be rounded white lead. The two may be worked
where it passes through the hole, but together on a piece of glass with a
square on the upper end to receive the putty knife.
51
A Game Played on the Ice ers may divide into two parties, play-
ing one against the other, etc. An um-
A novel and interesting winter game
pire will be needed to see that fair
for young and old, described as a
play is maintained and settle any dis-
novelty by a Swedish paper, is played
putes that may arise.
as follows
Two poles of convenient height are
erected on the ice if skating
; on a An Electric Display for a Show
Window
A novel window
display that is very
attractive, yet simple in construction
and operation, can be made in the fol-
lowing manner: First, make a small
watertight chamber. A, as long as the
focal length of the lens to be used, and
having a glass window, B, at one end,
and a small round opening, C. at the
other. In this opening is placed a cork
through which a glass tube about 2 in.
long inserted.
is The tube makes a
A Player in Action Ready to Spear a Ring that smooth passage for the stream of water
Hangs on the Line between the Poles
flowing out of the box. Water from
shallow pond they may be driven any source of supply enters the
through the ice and into the ground, chamber through the tube D, which
but if the water is deep, holes must be may be a pipe or hose, whichever is
bored through the ice and the poles most convenient. The interior is
will soon freeze solidly in them. A painted a dull black.
rope is stretched between the poles at A convenient and compact light is
such a height as is suited to the size placed at the window end of the box.
of the players, or as agreed on to make A very good light can be made by plac-
the game more or less difficult, and on ing an electric light with a reflector in
this are strung a number of pieces of a closed box and fastening a biconvex
board, A, each having a ring of spring lens, F, in the side facing the window
steel, B, attached to its lower end. The of the water box. When the electric
purpose of the game is to run at good light and the water are turned on, the
speed between the poles and catch a light is focused at the point where the
ring on a spear, each player being en- water is issuing from the box, and fol-
titled to make a certain number of lows the course of the stream of water,
runs, and the winner being the one illuminating it in a pleasing manner.
who can catch the most rings.
The spears may be made of broom
handles tapered toward one end, and
with a shield made of tin and attached
at a suitable distance from the thicker
end (Pattern C). The line is fastened
at the top of one pole and run through
a pulley, D, at the top of the other,
thence to a weight or line fastener.
Each player should start from the same The Arrangement of the BoxesShowing the Path
of the Light Rays through the >A/ater
base line and pass between the poles at
such a speed that he will glide at least A Still Ijetter effect can be obtained
100 ft. on the other side of the poles by passing colored plates between the
without pushing himself forward by lens F and the window B. A glass
the aid of the skates. Twenty runs are disk with sectors of different colors
usually allowed each player, or 10 play- may be revolved by any source of
53
Even though a milker may be care- and then bend pieces of brass to the
ful, small particles of dirt, hairs, etc.,
correct shape and solder them in place,
will fall into the whereupon they may be smoothed up
milk pail. It is with a file or scraper. A cam of this
true that the sort on a drum is shown in the sketch
^ milk is strained at A, and on a faceplate, at B. The
afterward, but a method is not quite as accurate as mill-
large percentage ing, but answers the purpose in most
of the dirt dis- cases. —
Contributed by Chas. Hatten-
solves and passes berger, Buiifalo, N. Y.
through the
strainer along Display Holder for Coins
with the milk.
The best plan to prevent this dirt from If the luster of coins fresh from the
falling into the milk is to put a piece mint is to be preserved, they must be
of cheesecloth over the pail opening, immediately placed so as to be pro-
securing it there by slipping an open tected against contact with the hands.
wire ring. A, over the rim. The milk A good holder that will display both
will readily pass through the cloth sides of a coin can be made of two
—
without spattering. Contributed by pieces of glass, BE, between which is
W. A. Jaquythe, Richmond, Cal. placed a cardboard cut as shown at A.
The cardboard should be about the
same thickness as the coins. The
Baking Bread in Hot Sand
glass may be framed by using strips
A
driving crew on the river wanted
to move camp, but the cook objected
as he had started to bake. One of the
party suggested using a modified form
of the method of baking in vogue more
than a century ago, which was to place
the dough in the hot earth where a
fire had been burning. So, to help
the cook out, a barrel was sawed in
half and the bread, after being properly
protected, was placed in each half bar- Two Pieces of Glass Inclosing betw/een Them Coins
of the Same Size and Thickness
rel and covered with hot sand. Two of
the men carried the half barrels on of wood rabbeted to receive the edges
their backs. When the new camp was of both pieces or their edges may be
;
reached the bread was done. Contrib-— bound with passe-partout tape. Even
uted by F. B. Ripley, Eau Claire, Wis. when a frame is used, it is best to bind
54
the edges as this will prevent tarnish glass —being, in fact, a miniature
from the air. Old negative glass is camera obscura. The later and gen-
suitable for making the holder. Con- — erally more approved style of finder
tributed by R. B. Cole, New Haven, has a small concave lens conveniently
Conn. set on the outer edge of the camera.
When this direct-vision type of finder
Holder for Skates while Sharpening is used, the camera is held so that the
finder is at the height of the eye,
The base of the holder is cut from a condition that is particularly de-
a board and should be about 3 in.
Two clamps sirable. When in a crowd, of course,
longer than the skate.
the professional and many amateurs
are familiar with the method of hold-
ing the camera inverted over the head
and looking up into the finder to deter-
mine the range of the field. Even
this method is inconvenient, often im-
practical.
The up-to-date newspaper photog-
rapher insists on having his camera
equipped with direct finders, as it
saves him much trouble and many fail-
ures. Anyone with a little ingenuity
The Holder Provides a 'Way to Grind a Slight Curve can change one of the old-type finders
in the Edge of a Skate Blade
into a combination device, either di-
are cut as shown at A, from metal of rect or indirect. The sketches are self-
sufficient thickness to hold the skate explanatory, but it may be said that
firmly, then bent to shape and attached Fig. 1 represents a box camera with
to the baseboard with bolts having a regulation finder set in one corner of
wing nuts, as shown at B and C. the box. To make it a direct finder, a
One edge of the board is provided small brass hinge is used. Cut ofif part
with two pins, D
and E, solidly fas- of one wing, leaving a stub just long
tened, which are of sufficient height
to bring the center of the blade on a
level with the grinder axle. An adjust-
ing screw, F, is provided for the
grinder base to adjust the skate blade
accurately. The support G is for use
on baseboards where skates with strap
heels, H, are to be sharpened. The
shape of the clamp for this support is
shown at J.
Two Types of Ordinary View Finders and Methods
When the skate is securely clamped of Converting Them into Direct-View Finders
to the base the blade can be easily
"hollow ground" or given a slight enough to be attached to the front of
—
curve on the edge. Contributed by C. the camera directly above the lens of
G. Smith, Brooklyn, N. Y. the finder and so as not to interfere
with it, and high enough to permit the
other wing to be turned down on the
A Homemade Direct-View Finder
ground glass, with space allowed for
for Cameras the thin glass mirror A, that is to be
Every hand camera and most of the glued to the under side of the long
tripod cameras are equipped with find- wing. The joint of the hinge should
ers of one type or another, and usually work quite stiffly in order to keep it
one in which the image of the field is from jarring out of any position in
reflected upward on a small ground which it may be set.
55
If the wing is turned upward at an from the first loop form another by
angle of 45 deg., the finder can be used cutting two more slits and passing the
as a direct-vision instrument when held leather through them as described, and
at the height of the eyes. The image
reflected from the small mirror is in-
verted, but this is no disadvantage to
the photographer. The small pocket Two Pieces of Leather of Different 'Widths Forming
mirror given out for advertising pur- a Belt for Holding Cartridges
poses serves very well for making the so on, until the belt has loops along its
reflecting mirror.
whole length.
The finder shown in Fig. 2 is another The end of the narrow leather can
very common kind, and one that is be riveted to the belt or used in the
readily converted into the direct type
buckle as desired, the latter way pro-
by inserting a close-fitting mirror, B, viding an adjustment for cartridges of
on the inside of the shield to be used different sizes. —
Contributed by Rob-
as a reflector of the finder image. If
ert Pound, Lavina, Mont.
the mirror is too thick, it may inter-
fere with the closing of the shield,
Removing Iodine Stains
though in many is not es-
cases this
sential, but should be necessary
if it A
good way to chemically remove
to close down the shield in order to iodine stains from the hands or linen is
fold the camera, it can usually be read- to wash the stains in a strong solution
iusted to accommodate the mirror. of hyposulphite of sodium, known as
"hypo," which is procurable at any
photographic-supply dealer's or drug
A Non-Rolling Spool
store.
Bend a piece of wire in the shape There is no danger of using too
shown in the illustration and attach it strong a solution, but the best results
to a spool of thread. The ends of the are obtained with a mixture of 1 oz.
wire should of hypo to 2 oz. of water.
clamp the spool
slightly and the
Bed-Cover Fasteners
loop in the wire
will keep it from The arrangement shown in the
Place
rolling. sketch is easily made and will keep the
the end of the thread through the loop bed covers in place. The covers are
in the wire and it will not become
provided with eyelets, either sewed, A,
tangled. —
Contributed by J. V. Loef- or brass eyelets, B, 6 or 8 in. apart
along the edge. A wood strip, C, 3
fler. Evansville, Ind.
by li/o in., is cut as long as the width
of the bed and fastened to the frame
How to Make a Cartridge Belt with wire, bolts, or wedges. Screw-
Procure a leather belt, about 2% hooks, about 114 in. long, are turned
in. wide and long enough to reach into the strip so that they will match
about the waist, also a piece of leather, with the eyelets placed in the covers.
1 in. wide and twice as long as the Thus the covers will be kept in place
belt. Attach a buckle to one end of
the belt and rivet one end of the nar-
row piece to the belt near the buckle.
Cut two slits in the belt, a distance
apart equal to the diameter of the car- The Hooks Prevent the Covers from Slipping Off the
Sleeper and Keep Them Straight on the Bed
tridge. Pass the narrow leather piece
through one slit and back through the when the bed is occupied, and the bed
other, thus forming a loop on the belt is also easily made up. — Contributed
to receive a cartridge. About 1^4 in. by Warren E. Crane, Cleveland, O.
56
soft collars can be assembled from swinging the door farther only stretch-
an ordinary es the rubber. This is an advantage,
paper fastener however, because the lamp is sure to
and two shoe light regardless of the swing of the
buttons of the door. If no rubber were used, the door
desired color. would have to open just a certain dis-
This device tance each time.
keeps the soft If the cord is connected to the hook
collar in good with a loop or a ring, it may be easily
shape at the disconnected during the day when not
front,and serves needed. A light coil spring may be
the purpose just used in place of the rubbers. Contrib- —
as well as a more uted by C. M. Rogers, Ann Arbor,
expensive collar Michigan.
fastener. The il-
lustration shows
how it is used.
A Finger-Ring Trick
Contributed by A
coin soldered to some inexpensive
B. E. Ahlport, Oakland, Cal. ring, or a piece of brass cut from tub-
ing, will make an interesting surprise
coin for friends.
Operating a Bathroom Light The ring when
Automatically placed on the
middle finger
A device for automatically turning
with the coin in
an electric light on and off when enter-
the palm makes
ing and leaving the room is illustrated
in the sketch. A
pull-chain lamp the trick com-
socket is placed upon the wall or ceil- plete. Ask some one if he has ever
ing, and is connected to a screw hook seen such a coin, or say it is a very
door by a cord and several rub- old one, as the date is almost worn
in the
ber bands, as shown.
away. He will try to pick it up, but
When the door is opened, the lamp is will find it fast to the finger. — Con-
lit, and when leaving the room the tributed by Wm. Jenkins, New York
City.
opening of the door again turns it out.
The hook should be placed quite close
to the edge of the door, to reduce the Preventing Marks from Basting
w
necessary to press portions of them
before removing the basting threads.
Sometimes the marks of the basting
threads show after the pressing. This
can be avoided by using silk thread for
basting instead of the usual cotton
thread. The silk thread will not leave
Operating the Electric
Opening
Lamp
of the
Switch or Key by the
Door —
any marks. Contributed by L. Alberta
Norrell, Gainesville, Ga.
length of the movement, and even then
it is too much for the length of the pull
required to operate the switch, hence C Cranberries will keep fresh for weeks
placed in water in a cool place.
the need of the rubber bands. if
57
Skating Merry-Go-Round
By henry BURICH
After once making and using the 6-in. material, at least 18 ft. long. A
icemerry-go-round as illustrated, no hole is bored in the center to receive
pond will be complete unless it has one the pin in the pole end.
or more of these devices.
To construct an amuse-
ment de\'ice of this kind,
select a good pole that will
reach to the bottom of the
pond. The measurement
can be obtained by cutting
a hole in the ice at the de-
sired place and dropping
in a line weighted on one
end. A sufficient length of
the pole should be driven
into the bottom of the
pond to make it solid and
allow the upper end to pro-
ject above the surface of
the ice at least 4 feet.
Aturning crosspiece for Skaters Holding the Rope Ends are Drawn Around in a Circle
the upper end of the pole Rapidly by the Revolving Crosspiece, Turned near the
Center by Other Skaters
is made as follows First :
prepare the end of the pole by sawing The crosspiece is easily pushed
it off level, then cutting off the bark around the pole and the faster it goes
and making it round for a metal ring the closer to the center the pushers
which should be driven on tightly. A
can travel. Ropes can be tied to the
pin, about ")4 in- in diameter, is then ends of the crosspiece for the skaters
driven into a hole bored in the end of to hold on to as they are propelled
the pole. The crosspiece is made of 2 by around in a circle.
Relieving Air Pressure When Closing front end of the sled top. A
runner
with a crosspiece on top is pivoted to
Record Boxes
the extending wood piece, which
The ordinary pasteboard boxes for should be of a length to make the po-
holding phonograph records are very sition comfortable when the coaster,
hard to close, due to the air pressure sitting on the sled top, has his feet on
on the inside. I overcome this diffi- the ends of the crosspiece. Careful
culty by making three small holes in
the cover with a pin. Contributed by —
Robert Bandul, New Orleans, La.
A Steering Sled
An ordinary hand sled can be easily The Extra Runnerin Front is Pivoted, and When
Turned, Guides the Sled
converted into a sled that can be
guided like a bobsled by the addition measurements should be made to have
of one extra runner. To attach this the lower edge of the runner on a level
runner, a piece of wood is fastened to with or a little lower than the sled run-
the under side and in the center at the ners.
58
The Designs are Worked into the Unfinished Surface of Boards with Sandpaper, Sharp Chisels and a Plane,
and Then Colored with Dyes to Produce the Desired Effect
Fishing-Rod Making and Angling
By STILLMAN TAYLOR
'
I
' HE pleasures of outdoor life are isfied with the results in making a
-• most keenly enjoyed by those good solid-wood rod. Of course,
sportsmen who are familiar with all the glued-up split-bamboo butts, joints,
little tricks —
the "ins and outs" of the — and tip stock may be purchased, and
open. the active participation in
It is if the angler is determined to have only
any chosen sport which makes the bamboo, it is advisable to purchase
sport well worth while, for the enjoy- these built-up sections rather than to
ment gleaned from little journeys to risk certain failure by attempting to
forest and stream largely rests with glue the cane. However, there are sev-
the outer's own knowledge of his sport. eral good woods particularly well
Not all of the fun of fishing lies in the adapted for rod making, and while
catching of the fish, since the satisfac- slightly inferior to the finest bamboo
tion which comes through handling a in elasticity and spring, the carefully
well-balanced rod and tackle must be made solid-wood rod is good enough
reckoned the chief contributor to the for any angler and
will probably suit
outing. In other words, the pleasures the average fisherman as well as any
of fishing do not depend so much upon rod that can be purchased.
the number of fish caught, as the man- Bethabara, or washaba, a native
ner in which the person fishes for them. wood of British Guinea, makes a fine
The rod is naturally the first and im- rod, but it is a heavy wood, very hard,
portant consideration in the angler's and for this reason is perhaps less de-
kit, and it is the purpose of these ar- sirable than all other woods. With the
ticles to set forth, at first, a few hints single exception of snakewood it is the
which my own long experience leads heaviest wood for rod making and is
me to think may be of some assistance only used for short bait-casting rods.
to those anglers who enjoy making and Possessing considerable strength Beth-
repairing their own rods and tackle, abara can be worked quite slender, and
to be followed, later, by some sugges- a 5-ft. casting tip can be safely made
tions on the art of angling generally. of 5 oz. weight.
The hints given are merely my own Greenheart, a South American wood,
methods, and while they may not be is popular alike with manufacturers
the best way of accomplishing the de- and amateur rod makers, and 90 per
sired end, a good fishing rod may be cent of the better class of solid-wood
constructed. Like the majority of ama- rods are made of this material. It re-
teurs, I have achieved the desired re- sembles Bethabara in color, but is
sults with a few common tools, namely, lighter in weight, although it appar-
a saw, plane, jackknife, file, and sand- ently possesses about the same
paper. These simple tools are really strength and elasticity. In point of
all that is needed to turn out a sen-ice- fact, there is little, if any, choice be-
able and well-finished rod of excellent tween these woods, and providing
action. sound and well-selected wood is used,
Kind of Material the merits of a rod made of Bethabara
The
great elasticity and durability or greenheart are more likely to be due
of the split-cane or split-bamboo rod to the careful workmanship of the
cannot be easily disputed. The hand- maker than to the variety of the wood
made split bamboo is unquestionably used.
the best rod for every kind of fishing, Dagame, or dagama, a native of the
but it is also the most expensive and forests of Cuba, is in many respects the
the most difficult material for the ama- ideal material for rod making, as it
teur to work. In making the first rod has strength and elasticity. This
or two, the beginner will be better sat- wood is straight-grained and free from
59
60
60"
BUTT
il"
Diagram or Layout for a One-Piece Bait-Casting Rod. Showing Calipered Dimensions for Each Six Inches
of Length. A Paper Pattern of Any Rod may be Drawn Up, Providing the Amateur Rod Maker
Has a Rod to Use for a Pattern, or Possesses the Exact Diameter of the Rod at
Intervals of Six Inches along Its Length
dagame, %
in. square, run the plane paper—the unprinted back of a strip
along each side and from both ends. of wall paper
is just the thing on the—
This will determine the direction in bench and drawing two lines from the
which the grain runs. Drill two holes diameter of the butt to that of the tip.
at the end decided upon for the butt, While the caliber of casting rods dif-
spacing them about i/4 in. from the fers somewhat, the dimensions given
end, as shown
in Fig, -i. Drive a stout will suit the average angler, and I
brad corner of the bench top
in the would advise the beginner to make
and hook the butt end over the nail. the rod to these measurements. For
By rigging the stick up in this manner the butt, draw a line, exactly 1/2 in-
it will be securely held, and planing long, across the paper and from the
may be done with the grain with center of this line run a straight pencil
greater ease and accuracy than when mark at right angles to the tip end, or
the end of the stick is butted up against 60 in, distant, at which point another
a cleat nailed to the bench top. crossline is drawn, exactly i/g in, long,
The wood should be planed straight to represent the diameter. Connect
and true from end to end and calipered the ends of these two crosslines to
until it is ^o in. square. It may ap- make a long tapering form. Divide
pear crooked, but this need not trouble this pattern into eight equal parts, be-
one at this stage of the work, since it ginning at 13 in. from the butt end,
may be made perfectly straight later marking a crossline at every 6 in.
on. Overlook any kinks, and do not This layout is shown exaggerated in
attempt to straighten the stick by Fig. 5, If it is desired to copy a cer-
planing more from one side than the tain rod, find the diameter at the sev-
other. The chief thing to be done is eral 6-in, stations with the caliper and
to fashion a square stick, and when the write them down at the corresponding
caliper shows the approximate diame- sections of the paper diagram. How-
ter, draw crosslines at the ends to find ever, if a splendid all-around casting
the center.
The length of the hand grasp should
be marked out. If a double grasp is
JUITUTJUi^^J^
wanted, allow 13 in. from the butt end.
Fio.6
This will afford an 11-in. hand grasp
Gauge Made of Sheet Brass Having Slots Corre-
after sawing off the end in which the sponding in Length and Width with the
Caliper-Layout Measurements
holes were drilled. For a single hand
grasp make an allowance of 11 in. rod is desired, it is .perfectly safe to
However, the douljle grasp—^with cork follow the dimensions given in Fig. 5,
above and below the reel seat is pre- — which show the manner of dividing
ferred by most anglers because it af- the paper pattern into the equal parts
fords a better grip for the hand when and the final diameter of the rod at
reeling in the line, Mark the hand- each 6-in, station, or line.
62
Procure a small strip of thin brass, the square stick into one of octagon
or zinc, and file nine slots on one edge form. This part of the work should
to correspond in diameter with the be carefully done, and the stick fre-
width of the horizontal lines which in- quently calipered at each 6-in. mark,
dicate the diameter of the rod on the to obtain the proper taper. It is im-
pattern. This piece is shown in Fig. portant to make each of the eight
6. By making use of the pattern and sides as nearly uniform as the caliper
the brass gauge, the rod may be given and eye can do it. Set the cutter of
the desired taper and the work will the small plane very fine, lay the strip
proceed more quickly than if the cali- in the groove and plane ofif the corner
per is alone relied upon to repeatedly the full length of the stick, then turn
check up the work. another corner uppermost and plane
When a good layout of the work is it ofif, and so on, until the stick is al-
thus made, the next step is to carefully most round and tapering gradually
plane the stick so that it will be evenly from the mark of the hand grasp to
tapered in the square. Plane with the the tip.
grain and from the butt toward the To make the rod perfectly round,
tip end, and make frequent tests with use the steel scraper in which the
caliper and gauge, noting the diameter grooves were filed and scrape the whole
every 6 in. Mark all the thick spots rod to remove any flat or uneven spots,
with a pencil, and plane lightly to re- and finish up by sandpapering it down
duce the wood to the proper diameter. smooth.
Reduce the stick in this manner until The action of the rod difl:'ers with
all sides have an even taper from the the material used, and in trying out
butt to the tip. The stick should now the action, it is well to tie on the tip
be perfectly square with a nice, even and guides and affix the reel by a string
taper. Test it by resting the tip end in order to try a few casts. If the
on the floor and bending it from the action seems about right, give the rod
butt end. Note the arch it takes and a final smoothing down with No.
see ifit resumes its original shape sandpaper.
when the pressure is released. If it For the hand grasp nothing is so
does, the elasticity of the material is good as solid cork, and while hand
as it should be, but if it remains bent grasps may be purchased assembled,
or takes "set," the wood is very likely it is a simple matter to make them. In
to be imperfectly seasoned and the rod Fig. 7 are shown four kinds of han-
should be hung up in a warm closet, or dles, namely, a wood sleeve, or core,
near the kitchen stove, for a few weeks, A, bored to fit the butt of the rod and
to season. shaped for winding the fishing cord
To facilitate the work of planing a built-up cork grasp, B, made by ce-
the stick to shape, a length of pine menting cork washers over a wood
board with a groove in one edge will sleeve, or directly to the butt of the
be found handy. A 5-ft. length of the rod a cane-wound grip, C, mostly
;
ering the other end with several thick- and force the sleeve tightly in place.
nesses of cloth. Turn this tube around A day or two should be allowed for
in the cork like a wad cutter. If the the glue to set and thoroughly dry, be-
cutter is sharp, a nice clean cut will fore giving the hand grasp the final
result, but the opposite will likely oc- touches.
MiMi!V,!iffl jiii''7iliilliT'''iiniif
F.G.7
'^
WSSM
The Four Different Types of Hand Grasps Are a Wood Sleeve Bored to Fit the Butt of the Rod;
the Built-Up Cork over a Wood Sleeve; a Cane-Wound Grasp, and the Double Cord- Wound
Grasps with a Reel Seat between Them
The regulation metal reel seat is mented on, to make a neat finish be-
about long, and in fitting it to
41/1 in. tween the upper grip and the rod.
the old type of bait rod, the covered Before affixing the guides, go over
hood is affixed to the upper end of the the rod with fine sandpaper, then wet
reel seat. This arrangement is satisfac- the wood to raise the grain, and repeat
tory enough for the !J-ft. bait rod, but it this oi)eration, using old sandpaper. If
is rather awkward in fitting it to the an extra-fine polish is wanted, rub it
short bait-casting rod, as with the hood down with powdered pvmiice and oil,
at the upper end the reel is pushed so or rottenstone and oil, and finish ofif
far forward that it leaves 1 in. or more with an oiled rag.
of the reel seat exposed, and the hand To fit the agate tip, file down the end
must grip this smooth metal instead of the rod with a fine-cut file until it
of the cork. To avoid this, it is best is a good fit in the metal tube. Melt
to cut the reel seat down to 3% in. a little of the ferrule cement and smear
and affix the reel seat to the rod with a little on the tip of the rod, then push
the hood at the lower end near the the agate down in place.
hand. For a single hand grasp, a ta- Spar varnish is often used to protect
pered winding check will be needed to the rod, but extra-light coach varnish
make a neat finish and this should be gives a better gloss, and it is as dura-
ordered of the correct diameter to fit ble and waterproof as any varnish. It
the reel seat at the lower end and the is only necessary to purchase a quarter
diameter of the rod at the other. In pint of the varnish, as a very small
the double hand grasp the winding quantity is used. The final varnishing
check is used to finish ofi: the upper is, done after the rod has
of course,
end of the cork, which is tapering to been wound and the guides are perma-
fit the rod at this point. nently whipped in position. However,
In assembling the reel seat, push it is an excellent idea to fill the pores
it with the hooded end well down and of the wood by rubbing it over with a
work it into the cork to make a tight cloth saturated in the varnish before
waterproof joint. Push the reel seat the silk whippings are put on. Merely
up the rod, coat the sleeve with cement fill the cells of the wood and wipe off
and push the reel seat home. Drive all surplus, leaving the rod clean and
a small pin through the hooded end and smooth.
reel seat to make the whole rigid. This The guides may now be fastened in
pin should not be driven through the place, and for the 5-ft. rod, but two of
rod or it will weaken it at this point. them are necessa^3^ The first guide
Just let it enter the wood a short dis- should be placed 19% in- from the
tance to prevent the reel seat from metal taper which finishes ofif the up-
turning. per hand grasp, and the second guide
The upper or double grasp is fash- spaced 151/' Jn. from the first. By spac-
ioned after the reel seat is in position, ing the guides in this manner, the line
and the corks are cemented on and will run through them with the least
pushed tightly together in the same possible friction.
manner as used in forming the lower Winding, or Whipping, the Rod
grasp. The first cork should be pressed
tightly against the upper end of the Before whipping on the guides, take
reel seat and turned about so that the a fine file and round off the sharp edges
metal may enter the cork and form a of the base to prevent the possibility
tight joint. As many corks as are re- of the silk being cut. Measure off the
quired to form a grip of proper length required distances at which the guides
are in turn cemented to each other and are to be affixed, and fasten them in
the rod. After the glue has become position by winding with a few turns
dry, the cork may be worked down and of common thread. Ordinary silk of
tapered to make a smooth, swelled No. A size may be used, but No. 00 is
gxasp. The winding check is now ce- the best for small rods. Most angflers
65
agree that the size of the silk to use from the spool and tuck the end under
for the whippings should be in propor- the whipping by pulling on the ends
tion to the size of the rod heavy silk — of the waxed loop, as shown at G.
The Mountings Used on a Bait-Casting Rod Consist of a Reel Seat, Butt Cap, Taper Sleeve, Narrow
Agate Guide, Agate Offset Top, One Ring Guide, and a Welted, Shouldered Ferrule
for the heavy rod, and fine silk for the Cut off the ends neatly with a sharp
small rod. Size A
the finest silk
is knife.
commonly stocked in the stores, but For and a medium
colors, bright red
one or more spools of No. 00 and No. shade of apple green are the best,
may be ordered from any large dealer since these colors keep their original
in fishing tackle. As a rule, size tint after varnishing, and are less likely
gives a more workmanlike finish to the to fade than the more delicate shades.
butt and joints of fly and bait rods, Red finished off with a narrow circle
while No. 00 is about right to use for of green always looks well, and red
winding the tips. In fact, all rods with yellow is likewise a good combina-
weighing up to 6 oz. may be whipped tion. Narrow windings look much bet-
with No. 00 size. ter than wide whippings, and a dozen
In whipping the rod, the so-called turns make about as wide a winding
invisible knot is used. Begin the whip- as the angler desires. For edgings,
ping, as shown at E, Fig. 10, by tuck- three or four turns of silk are about
ing the end under the first coil and
holding it with the left thumb. The
r
spool of silk is held in the right hand
and the rod is turned to the left, suf-
ficient tension being kept on the silk so
that it can be evenly coiled with each
guides, begin the whipping at the base Both Ends of the Silk Thread are Placed under the
Winding to Form an Invisible Knot
and work over the pointed end of the
flange, winding on sufficient silk to ex- right, and these should be put on after
tend about %
in. beyond the pointed the wider windings have been whipped
flange of the guide base. When the on and in the same manner, although it
last coil is made, cut off the thread is best to tuck the ends of the edging
66
beneath the wider winding when pull- A temperature of about 75 deg. is best
ing the end through to make the invisi- for this work, as the varnish will not
ble knot. spread if cold or in a cold place. The
varnish should be evenly brushed on,
Varnishing the Rod
and care taken that no spots are left
After winding the rod, see that all untouched. Hang up by the tip to dry
fuzzy ends are neatly clipped off, then in a room free from dust. While the
go over the silk windings with a coat varnish will set in four or five hours,
of shellac. The shellac can be made it is a good plan to allow three days
by dissolving a little white shellac in for drying between coats. Two coats
grain alcohol. Warm the shellac and will suffice to protect the rod, but as
apply it with a small camel's-hair coach varnish, properly applied, is
brush, giving the silk only two light rather thin in body, three coats will
coats. Allow the rod to stand a couple give complete protection to the wood.
of days for the shellac to become thor- The materials required for this rod
oughly dry. are, 1 dagame or greenheart stick, 5 ft.
A small camel's-hair brush will be long and %in. square 1 reel seat with
;
—
required for the varnishing one about straight hood, %in. 1 butt cap, 1 in.
;
% in. wide will do. If the varnishing 1 taper, small end gf in. 1 offset, or
;
is to be done out of doors, a clear and angle, agate top, g\ in., and 2 narrow
warm day should be selected, and the agate guides, 1/2 hi., all in German sil-
can of coach varnish should be placed ver; 8 doz. corks, II4 by IVs in., and
in a pot of hot water for five minutes, two 50-yd. spools of silk, red and green,
so that the varnish will spread evenly. 00 size.
Simple Arrangement of a Flush Tank in Connection with a System of Pipes to Supply One or More
Pans of Water for the Poultry Yard
67
is screwed into a tee in tlie lo-in- main paste, and the flap B is folded over
line which connects with the storage them. The envelope is then ready for
tank. the inclosure. The flap C is pasted and
In using the system, sufficient water
C
is run into the tank to fill the pans / \
about three-quarters full. The float \ ^A
may then be adjusted to a shut-off posi- A
tion for the inlet valve. All pans are
automatically kept at one level, even X- X
though several may be used consider-
ably more than others. When the B
general water level has dropped suffi-
ciently, the float, dropping with it, will
open the stop valve, and cause the Fio.l
Trimming Photographs
In trimming small photograph prints
I experienced some difficulty in getting
WHILE
rod
the action the one-piece
undeniably better than
is
of are added. The material list is as fol-
lows, the attachments being made of
when the rod is made in two or three german silver Dagame or greenheart
:
pieces, it is less compact to carry. To butt, % in. by 3 ft. long; two tips in. %
make a two-piece bait-casting rod,
5-ft. by 3 ft. long; one %-in. reel seat with
the same dimensions as given for the straight hood one 1-in. butt cap one
; ;
one-piece rod will make a very fine taper, i%o in. at the small end two ;
fishing tool. It is well to make two %2-in. offset agate tops two i/^-in. nar-
;
tips in view of a possible breakage. row agate guides; two No. 1 size one-
The rod may consist
of two pieces of equal
length, but a rod of
better action is secured
by making the butt
section somewhat
shorter with a relative-
ly longer tip. By mak-
ing the butt
section about
23 in. long, ex-
clusive of fer-
rule and butt
cap, and
ring casting
guides one i%4-
;
fications for making a three-piece bait- YiQ in. to -%4 in. at 1 ft. from the butt
casting rod, together with a material end; 11/2 ft, "/32 in. 2 ft., si/g^ in.; 21/2 ;
list, is as follows: A
rod, about oV-i ft. ft., %6 in., and 3 ft., ^%4 in. The first
long with a single or double hand grasp 6 in. of the middle joint is calipered to
made of cork, will weigh about 7 oz. %2 in.; 1 ft., i'/ti4 in.; U/o ft.,
i%4 in.;
Caliper the butt so that it will taper 2 ft, Ysa in.; 21/0 ft., 13/64 in., and 3 ft.,
from i%2 in- to i^o ii. at the cap of the %6 in. The first 6 in. of the tips are
ferrule, making it 21i/^ in. long. The calipered to i%4 in.; 1 ft., %2 in.; 1%
middle joint is tapered from ^Ym in. to ft., i/s in. 2 ; ft., %4 in. ; 21/0 ft., %2 in.,
^%4 in., and is 21% in. long. The tips and 3 ft., All joints are made
%4 in.
are 21 in. long and are tapered from 36i/> in. long. The material used is
i%4 in. to %4 in. Dagame or green- dagame, or greenheart, the butt being
heart is used for the butt, joint, and % in. by 4 ft., the joint in. by 4 ft., %
tips, and german silver for the fittings. and the tips in. by 4 ft. %
The attach-
All pieces are 2 ft. long, the butt is % ments, of german silver, are One %- :
reel seat with straight hood one 1-in. ; one taper, 3%4 in. at the small end one ;
guides ; two dozen cork washers, and two No. 7 agate angle fly tops, the kind
winding silk, size 00 or 0. to wind on one dozen cork washers,;
and mounting the rod, is the same as in., and 3 ft., i%4 in. The first 6 in. of
has been described in detail before. the middle joint is i%4 in. 1 ft., %o in. ;
For fly fishing for trout, accuracy and 11/2 ft., I'/si in.; 2 ft.,
i%4 in.; 2i/o ft.,
delicacy are of more importance than %2 in., and 3 ft., i%4 in. The first 6 in.
length of cast, and the rod best suited of the tips, i%4 in. ; 1 ft., %2 in. ;
li/o ft.,
to this phase of angling differs greatly %4 in. ; 2 ft., i/s in. ; 21/0 ft., Vei in., and
from that used in bait casting. stiff, A 3 ft., %4 in. The
joints are 36i/o in.
heavy rod is entirely unsuited for fly long. The mountings are the same as
casting, and while it is, of course, pos- for the trout fly rod. Dagame, or green-
sible to make a rod too willowy for the heart, wood is used, the butt being %
sport, the amateur, working by rule of in. by 4 ft., the joint in. by 4 ft. and %
thumb, is more likely to err on the the tips %
in. by 4 feet.
other side and make the fly rods of too The two-piece salt-water rod with
stout a caliber. The idea is simply to an double cork hand grasp, the
18-in.
help the amateur over the hard part whole being Ci/j ft. long, is made to
by giving a list of dimensions of a rep- weigh about 13 oz., with the following
resentative trout and a bass fly rod. caliperings A uniform taper of ^Yei
:
To make a l)-ft. trout fly rod, with a in. to -%i in., from the cork grasp to
71
the ferrule, is given to the butt. The eted in place, and a soft-pine sleeve
first 6 in. of the tips is i%o in. ; 1 ft., ^%4 is fitted over the wood core and the
in.; 1% ft., 11/32 in.; 2 ft., ^Ye^ in.; 21/2 ferrule. The forward end of the sleeve
ft., %2 in., and to tip, i%4 in. The is, of course, tapered to fit the taper
The Mountings for a Fly Rod Consist of a Reel Seat with a Straight Hood, a Taper, Snake Guide,
Agate Angle Top, and Serrated Ferrule. The Toothed Ends are Wound
with Silk to Afford Additional Strength
joints are made 36% in. long. Dagame, of the seat, and when properly
reel
or greenheart, is used with german-sil- fitted, itslower end will project about
ver mountings. Both pieces of wood 14 in. beyond the pine sleeve. Glue
are 4 ft. long, the butt being of %-in. the sleeve on this wood core, cement
and the tip of i/li-in. material. One %- the reel seat to the sleeve, and rivet the
in. reel seat with straight hood, one 1- reel seat in place.
in. butt cap, one '^o-in. ferrule, one The cork washers are glued in posi-
taper with small end ^%4 in, one i%o- ; tion, working the firstone into the
in. stirrup-tube agate top two No. 3 ; metal edge of the reel seat, to make a
bell guides two dozen cork washers,
; nice, tight
joint at this point. The
and two spools, size A, winding silk. other corks are then glued in place
until the hand grasp is of the desired
The Independent-Butt Rod
length. The projecting end of the
The independent-butt rod, in which wood core is then cut of? flush with
the hand grasp contains the ferrule and the last cork, and the rod is mounted
the tip is made in one piece, is a favor- in the usual manner.
ite type with many of the best fisher- In making a double hand grasp, the
men. This mode of construction may forward grasp may be
fitted over the
be used with all classes of rods, the woodcore in the fashion already de-
light fly and bait-casting rods, and the scribed in making the hand grasp for
heavier caliber rods used in salt-water the one-piece bait-casting rod, or the
angling. In rods of this type, it is only forward grasp may be fitted to the tip,
necessary to use the same size ferrule just above the ferrule, as preferred.
to make as many tips as desired to fit Both methods are commonly used, the
the one butt. Tips of several calibers only dift'erence being in the manner of
and weights may thus be fashioned to finishing up the forward grasp. If the
fit the one butt, and if the single-piece forward grip is affixed to the ferruled
tip is too long for some special use, one end of the tip, two tapered thimbles
tip may be made a jointed one for ease will be required to make a nice finish.
in carrying. The heavy-surf, or tarpon, rod is
The independent butt, or hand grasp, made up of an independent, detachable
is made by fitting the ferrule directly butt, 20 in. long, having a solid-cork or
on a length of dagame, or greenheart, cord-wound hand grasp, and a one-
which has been rounded so that the piece tip, 51/2 ft. long, altogether weigh-
seated ferrule will not touch the wood. ing 231/; oz. It is uniformly calipered
The ferrule is then cemented and riv- to taper from ^%2 in. to %e in. One
73
piece of dagame, or greenheart, 1 in. cord the butt. The guides are whipped
by 61/2 ft., will be required. One 1-in. on double, the first set spaced 10 in.
reel seat for detachable butt, including from the top, and the second, 26 in.
one %-in. male ferrule one IVs-in. butt
; from the reel. The core of the inde-
cap; two No. 11 wide, raised agate pendent, or detachable, butt is con-
guides two No. 1 trumpet guides one
; ;
structed of the same material as the
%-in. agate stirrup top two spools of
; rod, which makes the hand grasp some-
winding silk, A-size, and two dozen what elastic and very much superior
cork washers, or sufficient iishline to to a stiff and rigid butt.
'^%j^
fishing. If the angler has made his uses a 5-oz. rod for pretty heavy fish-
own rod, as suggested in former chap- ing. To be on the safe side, the novice
ters, he will have a good dependable will make no mistake in choosing a
fly rod, but the large majority of an- rod of fair length and conservative
glers who are about to purchase their weight.
first fishing kit should carefully con- When selecting a rod in the tacklfc
sider the selection of the rod. At the shop, do not rest content with a mere
outset it must be understood that good examination of the appearance, but
tackle is simply a matter of price, the have the dealer affix a reel of the
finest rods and reels are necessarily weight and size intended to be used
high in price, and the same thing may with it. By reeling on a short length
be said of lines and flies. Providing of line and reeving it through the
the angler has no objection to paying guides and then fastening the end to a
$15, or more, for a rod, the choice will weight lying upon the floor, a very
naturally fall upon the handmade split good idea of the rod's behavior may be
bamboo. For this amount of money a gained, since by reeling in the line and
fair quality fly rod may be purchased, putting tension on the rod its elasticity
the finer split bamboos costing any- and curve may be seen and felt as well
where up to $50, but under $15 it is as in actual fishing. To give the ut-
very doubtful whether the angler can most satisfaction, the rod should fit its
procure a built-up rod that is in every owner, and several rods should be
way satisfactory. The question may tried until one is found that most fully
arise. Is a split-bamboo rod necessary? meets the angler's idea of what a rod
The writer's own long experience says should be. If one happens to have a
that it not, and that a finely made
is good fly reel, by all means take it
solid-wood rod, of greenheart or da- along and attach to the rod while
it
game, is quite as satisfactory in the making the tests. It is practically im-
hands of the average angler as the possible to gauge the balance of a rod
most expensive split bamboo. A good without affixing the reel, and many a
rod of this sort may be had for $10, finely balanced tool will appear badly
and with reasonable care ought to last balanced until the proper-weight reel
a lifetime. is affixed to it.
The points to look for in a fly rod,
The Proper Kind of Reel
whether the material is split bamboo
or solid wood, is an even taper from the For fishing nothing is so good as
fly
butt to the tip that is, the rod should
; the English style of click reel, which
register a uniform curve, or arc, the is made with a one-piece revolving
entire length. For general fly casting side plate and with the handle affixed
9 ft. is a handy length, and a rod of directly to it. Any kind of a balanced-
61/2 oz. weight will prove more durable handle reel is an out-and-out nuisance
than a lighter tool. A good elastic on the fly rod, because it has no advan-
rod is wanted for fly casting, but a too tage in quickly recovering the line, and
willowy or whippy action had best be the projecting handle is forever catch-
avoided. However, for small-brook ing the line while casting. In fly cast-
fishing, where the overgrown banks ing, the length of cast is regulated by
prohibit long casts, a somewhat tlie amount of line taken from the reel
shorter and stifi^er rod will be more before the cast is made, and it is while
useful. For casting in large northern "pumping" this slack line through the
streams, where the current is swift guides, in making the actual cast, that
and the trout run to a larger size, a the balanced or projecting handle is
9I/2 or 10-ft. rod of 8 oz. weight is often very apt to foul the line. good reel A
preferred. Of course, the veteran an- that is smooth-running like a watch
gler can safely use a much lighter rod will cost about $10, but a very good
than the beginner, and one occasion- one may be had for $5, and cheaper
ally meets a man on the stream that ones, while not so durable, may be
75
used with fair satisfaction. The heavier rods, a rather light-weight instrument
multiplying reels, so essential for bait is needed to balance the rod. Of the
casting from a free reel, are altogether two extremes, it is better to err on the
unsuited for the fly rod, being too side of lightness, because a heavy reel
heavy when placed below the hand, makes a butt-heavy rod and, throwing
which is the only proper position for extra weight on the wrist and arm,
the reel when fly casting. The single- makes casting increasingly difficult
action click reel, having a compara- after an hour's fishing. An old hand
tively large diameter, but being quite at the game will appreciate this point
narrow between the plates, is the one better than the novice.
to use, and hard rubber, or vulcanite,
The Kind of Line to Use
is a good material for the side plates,
while the trimmings may be of ger- The fly-casting 1-ine used by a vet-
man silver or aluminum. The all- eran generally of silk, enameled and
is
metal reel is of about equal merit, but having a double taper that is, the line
;
whatever the material, the most use- is thickest in the center and gradually
ful size is one holding about 40 yd. of tapers to a smaller diameter at each
No. E size waterproof line. A
reel of end. Single-tapered lines are likewise
this capacity will measure about 3 in. extensively used, and while they cost
in diameter and have a width of about less, they are tapered at one end only
% in. between plates. A narrow- and cannot be reversed to equalize the
spooled reel of this type enables the wear caused by casting. The level
fisherman to reel in the line plenty fast line, which has the same diameter
enough. Owing to the fact that the throughout its entire length, is the
reel is placed below the grip on fly line most generally used, but the cast
76
cannot be so delicately made with it. well rounded chosen, the lengths which
For the beginner, however, the level show flat and rough spots being dis-
line in size No. E is a good choice. For carded. Dry gut that is very brittle
small-brook fishing, No. F is plenty should be handled very little, and pre-
large enough. In choosing the size of \'ious to a day's fishing the leaders
line, there is a common-sense rule must be soaked in water over night to
among fly casters to select a line pro- make them pliable, then coiled in be-
portioned to the weight of the rod. tween felt pads of the leader box to
For a light rod a light line is the rule, keep them in fishing shape. After use,
and for the heavier rod a stouter line put the frayed leaders aside and dry
is the logical choice. If the rod is of a them out between the flannel leaves of
too stiff action, use a comparatively the fly book.
heavy line, and it will limber up con- Gut is the product of the silkworm,
siderably ; if the rod is extremely and the best quality is imported from
"whippy," use the lightest line that can Spain. It comes in bundles, or hanks,
be purchased, and used with safety. of 1,000 strands, 10 to 20 in. long and
in diiterent thicknesses, or strengths.
A Fine Leader Marks the Expert Caster
The heaviest are known as "Royal"
The leader for trout is preferably of and "Imperial," for salmon "Marana,"
;
single gut, and as fine as the angler's for e.xtra-heavy bass; "Padron," for
skill will allow. The fly caster's rule bass ; "Regular," for heavy trout
is to use a leader whose breaking strain "Fina," for light trout, and "Refina,"
is less than the line, then, when the for extra-light trout. The grades
tackle parts, it is simply a question of "Fina" and "Refina" are well suited
putting on a new leader and the more for all average fly fishing, while the
expensive line is saved. Ready-made heavier sizes are useful for heavy large
leaders may be purchased, or the an- fishing.
gler can tie them up as desired. For To make the leaders, soak the
length, a 3 or Si/^-ft. leader is about strands of gut in warm water over
right for average fishing. Longer night until they are soft and pliable.
leaders are used, and while they some- Select the strands for each leader of
times are of advantage, the 3-ft. length the desired thickness and length so
is more useful. A longer leader is awk- that the finished leader will have a
ward to handle because the loop is apt slight taper to one end only. By using
to catch in the top of the rod when the "Fina" gut for the upper length
reeling in tlie line to bring the fish close and tying in two lengths of "Refina"
to the landing net. Leaders may be gut, a nicely tapered leader of light
had with a loop at each end, or with weight is obtained. Begin the leader
loops tied in, for using a cast of two by uniting the strands together to
or three flies. For all average casting, make it the correct length, three 12-in.
the two-fly cast is the best, but the strands being about right for average
expert angler uses the single-P.y very casting. The "single water knot" is
often. For lake fishing, the single large the strongest and neatest to use.
fly is generally preferred. For using Make it by taking the thick end of the
two flies, the leader is provided with strand and doubling it back enough
three loops, one at the top, another at to tie in a common knot just large
the bottom, and an extra loop tied in enough for the line to pass through
about 15 in. from the lower loop. In and drawing it up tightly. Tie a single
fly casting, the first, or upper, fly is loose knot in the other end of the
known as the "dropper," and the lower strand, about % in. in diameter and
one as the "tail" fly. For the single- close to the end take the next thick-
;
fly cast but two loops are required. est strand of gut, thread the thicker
Gut used for leaders should be care- end through the loose knot and tie a
fully selected, and only those lengths second square knot around the strand,
which are of uniform diameter and as shown at A. By pulling on the two
77
long ends the loops can be drawn up well-known "angler's knot" is mostly
tightly, and the two knots will slide used. This knot is shown at C. The
together and make a neat and very snelled fly is attached by passing the
strong knot. Repeat this operation loop over the loop of the leader and
The Single Water Knot Used in Tying Leaders: a Good Knot for Makingthe Loop at the End of the Leaders;
an Angler's Knot Used for Attaching the Line to the Leader, and a Jam Knot for Attaching
Eyed Flies, or Hooks, to the Leader or Snell
until as many strands of gut are knot- inserting the fly through the leader
ted together as required to make the loop. When eyed flies are used they
leader of the desired length. For mak- are often attached direct to the leader,
ing the loop at the ends, a double- or a looped snell may be used as in the
bighted knot, tied as shown at B, is ordinary American-tied fly. To attach
used. If a dropper fly is desired, do the eyed fly direct to the leader, the
not pull the water knot tightly, but common "jam knot," shown at D, is
first insert a short length of gut with a mostly used, and when the slipknot is
common knot at the end and a loop in drawn up tightly and the extra end cut
the other, then draw the water knot ofl: it makes a small, neat knot, not
up tightly, and a short snell will be apt to slip.
made for attaching the fly as usually.
Flies for Trout Fishing Catch to Hold Two Joining Doors
The Standard selection of artificial Open
flies numbers about 60, but the aver- Where two open doors meet, a catch
age fisherman will find about 24 se- to keep them
lected patterns to answer every need. open can be
For making up the most "killing" flies made of a piece
for the trout season, the following can of wire, shaped
be recommended Use red ibis, stone
:
as shown. The
fly, cinnamon, red spinner, and parch- hooks at the
menee belle, for April turkey brown,
; ends of the wire
yellow dun, iron blue, spinner, mont- are slipped over
real and red fox, for May spider, the shanks of
black gnat, silver doctor, gray drake,
;
the knobs. —
orange dun, and green drake, for June Contributed by
July dun, grizzly king, pale evening W. A. Saul, Lex-
dun, red ant, and brown palmer, for ington, Mass.
July; Seth green, coachman, shad,
governor, August dun, and royal CStrips cut from
coachman, for August, and black wood dishes used
palmer, willow, whirling dun, queen of by grocers for
the water, and blue bottle, for Septem- butter, thoroughly soaked in warm
ber. water, will make excellent repair pieces
To attach a line to the leader the for market baskets.
78
Bicycle Oil Lamp Changed to Electric tween socket and push button, ends
Light being left protruding for connection to
the battery. A
small flash-light bat-
The desire for an electric light for tery was fastened to the lamp bracket.
my bicycle caused me to change a fine A small rubber washer was placed be-
oil lamp, too good to be thrown away, tween the head of the push button on
the switch and the cap, so that in
screwing the cap up, a permanent con-
nection was made. The lamp can be
>-ri used as a lantern when removed from
the bicycle. —
Contributed by Lee
Baker, Chicago.
LJf
Lifter for Removing Eggs from Hot
Water
An impro\ement over the customary
way of removing eggs from hot water
A Push Button with Socket and Miniature Globe
with a tablespoon, is to use an old-fash-
Used in an Oil Lamp for Electric Light
ioned cofifee strainer. This brings up
so that an electric globe could be used the eggs without carrying hot water
in it. The oil cup of the lamp was re- —
with them. Contributed by L. E.
moved, and a wood push button fas- Turner, New York, N. Y.
tened in its place with three screws.
Before fastening the push .button, a CGenuine oxalic acid may be used for
porcelain socket was attached to its removing stains from all woods except
bottom, and connections were made be- mahogany.
Double Top for a Table used, and an extra, plain top fitted to
it and hinged to the wall.
The need of two tables in a kitchen When it was desired to wash dishes
where there was space for only one. on the zinc top, the table was pulled
out without disturbing the articles on
the hinged top. After drying the
dishes, they are removed from the
zinc top to the hinged part, and the
a cheap rod and save a good outfit, the horizontal, as shown in Fig. 3, and
and if the angler learns how to make with a quick snap of the wrist, avoid-
a fairly long and accurate cast with a ing shoulder or body movement, throw
common rod, he may feel assured that the tip upward, checking it sharply as
79
80
soon as the tip is carried over the shoul- eye cannot aid the hand. The novice
der about 25° beyond the vertical plane will soon acquire the knack of casting,
as in Fig. 3. This snappy upstroke of however, if he will remember to keep
the rod makes the "back cast," by pro- the elbow close to the side, and to
jecting the line high in the air, and keep the line well up in the air when
carries it well behind the angler. Be- making the back cast, and to begin the
fore the line has fully straightened out forward movement before the line has
behind, and before it has an oppor- fully straightened out behind him.
tunity to fall much below the caster's After a little practice, the hand will
shoulders, the rod is snapped forward feel the slight tension communicated
with a quick wrist-and-forearm move- to the rod as the line begins to
ment, which throws the line forward in straighten out, and this should be
front of the fisherman and in the direc- taken advantage of to correctly time
tion he is facing, which finishes the the forward movement. Counting
cast with the rod "one" for the up-
in the po s i t i o n stroke, "two and"
shown in Fig. 4. for the interval re-
Long and accu- quired for the line
rate fly casting is to straighten out
much more a mat- in the rear, and
ter of than
skill "three" for the
muscle, and while forward move-
some fly fishermen ment, is also a
cast directly from good way to time
the shoulder and the cast.
upper arm, and At the begin-
thus use a consid- ning the caster
erable amount of should make no
muscular force in attempt to secure
making the cast, distance. A c c u-
this cannot be re- racy and delicacy
garded as the best in placing the fly
method of casting. on the water is of
The great elastic- much more im-
ity of the fly rod portance than
ought to be taken length of cast in
full advantage of trout fishing, and
by the caster, and to attain this end,
if this is done, it is a good plan
Fig. 2— Begin the Cast with the Rod in a Position
casting will be Just above the Horizontal Plane to place a news-
naturally accom- paper about 23 ft.
plished by the wrist and forearm. To distant and try to drop the end of the
make strenuous efforts to hurl the fly line on this mark. When the caster
through the air, using an arm or body can drop the line on the target lightly
movement, is extremely tiring after an and with reasonable accuracy, he may
hour or so of fishing, while if the cast feel justified in lengthening his cast.
is made from the wrist, aided by the Other casts than the overhead cast just
forearm, the snap of the rod may be described are occasionally used, as the
depended upon to project the fly to Spey, switch, wind, and flip casts, but
greater length of line and allow it to the overhead cast is mostly used, al-
fall close to the desired spot, lightly though it is much more difficult to
and without splashing. master.
Timing the back cast is the most To make the Spey cast, the angler
difficult detail of fly casting, because requires a rapid stream which will
the line is behind the angler and the carry the line downstream until it is
81
Straight and taut, the tip of the rod in a long loop against the wind. The
being held as long as possible to ac- underhand and the flip casts are so
complish this end. The rod is then simple that it seems almost unnec-
raised high in the air with a quick essary to describe them. Both are
wrist movement, which lifts the line short casts and are only used when the
from the water to the extreme end, angler is fishing in an overgrown
then without pausing the rod is car- stream. The underhand cast is really
ried upstream with just sufficient force a side cast, inasmuch as the short line
to let the fly fall just above the angler. is lifted from the water in a loop and
The line is now on the reverse, or up- propelled in the desired direction by a
per, side of the fisherman, when with side sweep of the rod. The flip cast
a sweep of the rod is made by hold-
the line is pro- ing the fly be-
jected over the tween the thumb
water's surface and finger and
not along the sur- with a few coils
face —
in the man- of line in the right
ner used in mak- hand. Bend the
ing the overhead rod like a bow, re-
cast. lease the fly sud-
The switch cast denly, and the
is sometimes use- snap of the rod
ful when trees or will project it in
rocks are immedi- the desired direc-
ately back of the tion and allow it
fisherman, thus to drop lightly
preventing the like a fly.
line from extend-
Handling the Flies in
ing far enough
the Water
backward to
make the over- As a general
head cast. In mak- thing the veteran
ing this cast the fly fisherman pre-
line is not lifted fers to wade with
from the water, the current and
but merely to the fishes the water in
surface by raising front of him by
the tip of the rod. making diagonal
The line is casts across the
dragged through stream. good A
the water by car- fisherman will
rying the tip in Fig.3— The Rod is Quickly Cliecked When It is
system atically
the direction one Carried over the Shoulder About 25 Degrees cover every inch
is standing until good water and
of
it is as far in the rear as the obstruc- little will be left to chance. The novice
tions will permit. By a quick down- is inclined to fish his flies in a con-
ward sweep of the rod the line is pro- trary manner, he casts more or less at
jected with sufficient force to roll it random, and is as likely to splash the
forward in a large coil or loop, much flies recklessly about in the most im-
as a wheel rolls on a track. possible places as he is to drop them
The wind cast is a modification of in a favorable rififfe or pool. To be able
the switch cast, but easier to make. to pick out fishable water, the angler
The caster brings his line almost to should know something about the
his feet, and with a quick downward habits of the trout, their characteristics
motion of the rod the line is thrown at the several seasons of the fishing
year, and their habits, which differ water as possible before making a sec-
greatly in different streams. A
fish- ond cast. Owing to the fact that trout
ing knowledge of the stream to be liewith their noses pointing upstream
visited is of much value, but if the awaiting their food carried down by
angler knows how to make a fair cast the current, the caster will naturally
and possesses average skill in handling take pains to float his flies down-
flies on water, there should be no ques- stream with the leader fairly taut. To
tion but that he will creel a fair num- neglect this detail and allow the leader
ber of trout even though he casts in to float in a wide loop near or before
strange waters. the flies is slovenly fishing, and few
To imitate the action of the natural trout will strike a fly presented in this
insect is the most successful manner of amateurish fashion.
fishing the flies, and as the natural fly Early in the fishing season, and when
will struggle more or less when borne the stream is flooded and discolored
down with the after a heavy rain,
current, the fisher- it is a good plan to
man endeavors to fish the flies be-
duplicate this low the surface.
movement by Fishing in this
making his arti- manner makes it
ficial fly wriggle more difficult to
about. This mo- tell when to strike
tion must not be a fish, and some
overdone, for if little practice is
the flies are needed to deter-
tw i t c h e d and mine the oppor-
skipped about, or tune moment by
pulled against the feeling the slight
current, the wary tension on the
trout will refuse to line. Many fish
fall for any such will be pricked to
obvious deceit. A be sure, but some
gentle motion of trout will be
the wrist will creeled, and fish-
cause the fly to ing with the sub-
move somewhat merged fly is
as the natural in- sometimes the
sect will struggle. only way trout
In making the can be taken.
Fig. 4 — The Cast is Finished by Throwing the Line
cast do not cast Forward with a Quick Wrist-and-Forearm Movement On fair days
directly down or and in smooth
upstream, but across the current at an water, better luck may be expected
angle. Let the flies fall upon the when the fly is kept upon the surface,
water as lightly as possible, so that the and this is easily managed by keep-
water will carry them downstream ing the tip of the rod well in the air.
over the likely places where the trout often the fisherman can take advan-
are hiding. Keep the line as taut as tage of a bit of floating foam, and if
possible by drawing the slack in with the fly is cast upon it and allowed to
the left hand. The flies should not float with it downstream, the ruse will
be allowed to soak in the water, often prove effective.
neither should they be retrieved in The trout is a hard striker and it is
haste. The experienced fly caster will not unusual to have a trout rush ahead
invariably fish with a wet line, that is of the fly in his attempt to mouth it.
to say, with a slightly submerged fly, In rapid water the savage rush of the
and will let the flies drag over as much fish is sufficient to hook it securely,
S3
but when casting in quiet pools, the the common angle or earthworm. The
hook is imbedded by a snap of the minnow is beyond a doubt the most
wrist. At what exact moment to enticing morsel that can be offered to a
strike, as well as the amount of force hungry trout, and a minnow may be
to use, depends upon circumstances. reckoned to secure a rise when other
When fishing instreams and
small baits fail. The inconvenience of trans-
brooks where the run small,
trout porting this bait is a great drawback,
much less force is necessary to hook and as minnows are delicate fish, a
the fish, but in quiet water and in minnow bucket is necessary for their
larger streams where 2 or 3-lb. trout preservation. This means a lot of
are not uncommon, the fish may be trouble, as the water must be fre-
struck with a smart upward jerk of the quently changed or aerated, and this
forearm and wrist. So far as my ex- labor, together with the difficulty of
perience goes, the matter of striking carrying a bulky pail through the
is governed by the temperament as brush, makes this desirable bait almost
well as the judgment of the angler. impossible for stream and brook fish-
The deliberate thinking man is likely ing. The salt-water minnow, known
to strike too late, while the nervous as a "shiner" or "mummychug," is a
individual, striking too early, is apt to topnotch trout bait, and being much
prick the trout and roll him over. tougher than the fresh-water minnow,
The best time to fish for trout is makes a bait often used by anglers re-
when they are feeding on the surface siding near the seacoast.
and in the early days of spring, when The white grub, or larvae of the so-
there are few flies about, the warmer called May beetle, is a good bait avail-
part of the day, say, from 10 in the able for early-season fishing, and may
morning to 5 in the afternoon, will be obtained in the early spring months
prove to be the most successful time. by spading up grass land. The grub
Later on, when flies are numerous, is about 1 in. long, and of a creamy
good luck may be expected at an early yellow color with a darker head. It
hour in the morning, and in the hot may be kept a month, or more, by put-
summer months the cooler hours of ting it in a box with a number of
the day may be chosen. Of course, pieces of fresh turf.
there are many exceptions, since there Crickets, grasshoppers, and many
are many cool days in summer, as well other insects, make good baits, while
as exceptionally warm days in spring, the earthworm is a good all-around
and these changes of weather should bait for trout. A supply dug some
be considered. However, extremes are days before and kept by packing in
not likely to make good fishing, and fresh moss and slightly moistening
the trout will not rise as freely on cold, with milk and water will prove more
windy days, nor will they fight as attractive in appearance and the worms
gamely. On hot days, too, not so will be tougher and cleaner to handle
much luck can be expected during the than when carried in earth.
hours of the greatest heat 13 to 4 — Other good baits include the fin of
but a good basket of trout may be a trout, and if this is used in combi-
creeled early in the morning or late nation with the eye of the same fish,
in the afternoon of summer. bright,A it forms an attractive lure. In using
clear day is usually the best for fly this bait, do not puncture the eyeball,
fishing, because the sun brings out but hook through the thin flexible skin
more flies, but a warm rain, or even a surrounding the eye. A fat piece of
fog, is also considered good fishing salt pork, cut into pieces 1 in. long
weather. and 1/4 in. wide, makes a fairly good
Among the live baits available for bait. Spoons and other spinning baits
trout fishing are the minnow, white are presumably attractive, but few
grub, cricket, grasshopper, and other sportsmen use them when angling for
insects, and last, but by no means least. so fine a fish as trout.
84
B^^ ioi^>v A P M C flOl^^^s^
. (
[In this article descriptions are given of several shelters suitable for a resort, but the reader
may select any one of them that answers his needs and build a camp house, or fit up a more
substantial one to —
make living quarters for the whole year. Editor.]
"DEING forced to take the open-air built having three rooms. The location
-'-'treatment to regain health, a per- was in a grove of young timbers, most
son adopted the plan of building a pole of it being straight, and 13 trees were
house in the woods, and the scheme was easily found that would make posts 13
so successful that it was decided to ft. long, required for the sides, and two
make a resort grounds, to attract poles IG ft. long, for the center of the
crowds during holidays, by which an ends, so that they would reach to the
income could be realized for living ex- ridge. The plot was laid out rectangu-
penses. All the pavilions, stands, fur- lar and marked for the poles, which
niture, and amusement devices were were set in the ground for a depth of 4
constructed of straight poles cut from ft., at distances of 6 ft. apart. This
young growth of timber with the bark made the house 8 ft. high at the eaves
remaining on them. Outside of boards with a square pitch roof that is, the
;
for flooring and roofing material, the ridge was 3 ft. high in the center from
entire construction of the buildings and the plate surfaces for this width of a
fences consisted of poles. house. The rule for finding this height
A level spot was selected and a house is to take one-quarter of the width of
The Frame Construction of the House Made Entirely of Rough Poles, the Verticals being Set in the
Ground, Plumbed, and Sighted to Make a Perfect Rectangle of the Desired Proportions
85
86
the house for the height in the center and used both as support for the lower
from the plate. ends of the siding and to nail the ends
The corner poles were carefull)- lo- of the flooring boards to, which were
fastened in the center to poles laid on
stones, or, better still, placed on top of
short blocks. 5 ft. long, set in the
ground. These poles for the floor
should be placed not over 2 ft. apart
to make the flooring solid.
A lean-to was built by setting three
poles at a distance of 8 ft. from one
side, beginning at the center and ex-
tending to the end of the main building.
These poles were about 6 ft. long above
the ground. The rafter poles for this
part were about Oy^ ft. long, notched
at both ends for the plates, the ends of
the house rafters being sawed off even
with the outside of the plate along this
edge. The rafter poles for the house
were 10 in all, 8 ft. long, and were laid
off and cut to fit a ridge made of a
board. These poles were notched
about 15 in. from their lower ends to
fit over the rounding edge of the plate
optional with the builder, as other roof- railing.It is very easy to make orna-
ing material can be used. In this mental parts, such as shown, on the
instance metal roofing was used, and eave of the porch, by splitting sticks
%r^'
^^iiw' .I'll
attached to stakes at the ends. A pair so that the things kept for sale could
of stakes were used at each end of a be protected in case of a shower.
step, and these were fastened to a slant- A peanut stand was also built with-
ing piece at the top, their lower ends out a floor, and to make it with nine
being set into the ground. The manner sides, nine poles were set in the ground
of bracing and crossing with horizon- to form a perfect nonagon and joined
tals makes a rigid form of construction, at their tops with latticed horizontals.
and if choice poles are selected for the Then a rafter was run from the top of
step pieces, they will be comparatively each post to the center, and boards were
level and of sufficient strength to hold fitted on each pair of rafters over the
up all the load put on them. The roof V-shaped openings.The boards were
of this building was made for a sun then covered with prepared roofing.
A railing was formed of horizontals
set in notches, cut in the posts, and then
ornamented in the same manner as for
TOP OF POST the other buildings.
Fences were constructed about the
grounds, made of pole posts with hori-
zontals on top, hewn down and fitted
as the plates for the house and the
;
Among the best and most enjoyed izontals with long bolts, or rods, run-
amusement devices on the grounds ning through both, the bottom being
were the swings. Several of these were attached in the same manner. Poles
built, with and without tables. Four are nailed across the platform horizon-
poles, about 20 ft. long, were set in the tals at the bottom for a floor, and a
ground at an angle, and each pair of table with seats at the ends is formed
side poles was joined with two horizon- of poles. The construction is obvious.
tals, about 13 ft. long, spreaders being A
short space between two trees can
fastened between the two horizontals be made into a seat by fastening two
to keep the tops of the poles evenly horizontals, one on each tree, with the
spaced. The distance apart of the poles ends supported by braces. Poles are
will depend on the size of the swing nailed on the upper surface for a seat.
and the number of persons to be seated. Other furniture for the house and
Each pair of side poles are further grounds was made of poles in the man-
strengthened with crossed poles, as ner illustrated. Tables were built for
shown. If no table is to be used in picnickers by setting four or six poles
the swing, the poles may be set closer in the ground and making a top of poles
together, so that the top horizontals or boards. Horizontals were placed
will be about 8 ft. long. The platform across the legs with extending ends, on
for the swinging part consists of two which seats were made for the tables.
poles, 12 ft. long, which are swung on Chairs and settees were built in the
six vertical poles, about 14 ft. long. same manner, poles being used for the
These poles are attached to the top hor- entire construction.
Procure some resistance wire of the barrel, also cut a mica sheet to make a
proper length and size to heat quickly. covering tube over the coil on the plas-
The wire can be tested out by coiling it ter core and insert the whole into the
on some nonconducting material, such barrel. The two terminals are con-
as an earthen jug or glazed tile, and nected to the ends of a flexible cord
connecting one end to the current wdiich has a plug attached to the oppo-
supply and running the other wire of site end. Be sure to insulate the ends
the supply over the coil until it heats of the wire where they connect to the
properly. Cut the resistance at this flexible cord inside of the pump barrel
point and temporarily coil it to fit into under the cap. In winding the resist-
the bottom of the pump barrel, allowing
one end to extend up through the space
in the center with sufficient length to
make a connection to supply wires. An Electric Heating Coil Made 'of Resistance Wire
Mix some dental plaster to the con- Placed in a Bicycle-Pump Barrel
for Boiling Water
sistency of thick cream and, while keep-
ing the wire in the center of the pump ance wire on the core, be sure that one
barrel, pour in the mixture until it is turn does not touch the other. The
filled to within ly^ i"- of the top. Al- heater when connected to a current
low the plaster to set for about a day, supply and placed in 1 qt. of water will
then remove it from the barrel and take —
bring it to a boil quickly. Contributed
off the paper roll. The coil of wire at by A. H. Waychoff, Lyons, Colo.
90
By F. S. CHARLES
A good site, pure water in abun- If the camping party consists of more
dance, and a convenient fuel supply, than two persons, each one should do
are the features of a temporary camp the part allotted to him, and the work
that should be given first considera- will be speedily accomplished. Re-
tion when starting out to enjoy a va- member that discipline brings effi-
cation in the woods. The site should ciency, and do not be slack about a
be high and dry, level enough for the camp just because it is pleasure. One
tent and camp hre, and with surround- of the party should attend to the camp
ing ground sloping enough to insure fire and prepare the meals while an-
proper drainage. A sufficient fuel other secures the fuel and water. The
supply is an important factor, and a tent can be unpacked and the ground
spot should be chosen where great ef- cleared by the other members of the
fort is not required to collect it and party, and when ready, all should as-
get it into proper shape for the fire. sist in raising the tent, especially if it
not be overflowed
by a sudden rise
of the stream. Do
Lean To of Boughs
not select the site
of an old camp, as the surroundings
are usually stripped of all fuel, and
the grounds are unclean.
Division of Work
Clear the selected spot and lay out
the lines for the tent, camp fire, etc. Log Cabin
91
tween two trees or saplings, and, after at the bottom. This second tent
tying the rope to the trees, it can be should be made without any opening
tightened with a long forked stick, whatever. The occupant must crawl
placed under one end of the rope. If under the edge to enter. The cheese-
two trees are not conveniently located, cloth tent is used inside of the ordi-
then two poles crossed and tied to- nary tent, and when not in use it is
gether will make supports for one or pushed aside.
both ends, the ridge line running over Two camps are illustrated showing
them and staked to the ground. the construction of a lean-to for a tem-
On a chilly night, the A tent is quite porary one-season camp, and a log
advantageous. The stakes can be cabin which makes a permanent place
pulled on one side and the cloth from year to year. (A more elaborate
doubled to make a lean-to, open on the and more expensive camp was de-
side away from the wind. A fire can scribed in the May issue of this maga-
be built in front and the deflected heat zine.) The construction of these
on the sleeper will keep him comfort- camps are very simple. The first is
able and warm. made of poles cut in the woods. A
For larger parties, the wall tent with ridge pole is placed between two trees
a fly is recommended. These tents can or held in place with poles of sufficient
be purchased in various sizes. The fly
is an e.xtra covering stretched over the
top to make an open air space between
the two roofs. It keeps the interior of
the tent delightfully cool in hot sum-
mer weather and provides a better pro-
tection from rain. The fly can be made
extra long, to extend over the end of
the tent, making a shady retreat which
can be used for lounging or a dining
place.
Protection from Insects
Where mosquitoes and other insects
are numerous, it well to make a
is
second tent of cheesecloth with bind-
ing tape along the top to tie it to the Forked Sticks Supporting Cooking Utensils
ridge pole of the regular tent. The
sides should be made somewhat longer length, set in the ground. Poles are
than the regular tent so that there will placed on this at an angle of about 4-5
be plenty of cloth to weight it down deg., forming a lean-to that will be en-
92
tirely open in front when finished. The rangements. Two forked sticks, one
poles are
covered, beginning- at the at each end of the logs, may be set
bottom, with pine boughs, laid in lay- in the ground and a pole placed in the
ers so as to make a roof that will shed forks lengthwise of the fire. This
water. A large fire, built a short dis- makes a convenient place for hanging
tance from the open front will make a the cooking utensils with bent wires.
warm place to sleep, the heat being re- Food Supplies
flected down the same as described for
the A tent. The conditions in various localities
make a difference in the camper's ap-
A Permanent Camp petite and in consequence no special
A good permanent camp is a log list of food can be recommended, but
cabin. This can be constructed of ma- the amount needed by the average
terials found in the woods. Trees may person in a vacation camp for two
be felled, cut to length, and notched to weeks, is about as follows:
join the ends together at each corner
Bacon 151b. Baking Powder % lb.
so as to leave little or no space be- Ham 5 Sugar 5
"
•
tween the logs. The roof is con- Flour 20
"
Beans 4
'*
•
structed of long clapboards, split from Corn Meal 5 Salt 2
• "
Rice 5 Lard 3
blocks of wood. The builder can fin- Coftee 31b.
ish such a camp as elaborately as he
chooses, and for this reason the site A number of small things must be
should be selected with great care. added to list, such as pepper, olive
this
oil, sage, nutmeg and vinegar. If the
Camp Fires weight is not to be considered, canned
There no better way to make a
is goods, preserves, jam and marmalade,
camp fire than to have a large log or also vegetables and dried fruits may
two against which to start a fire with be added. Do not forget soap and
small boughs. Larger sticks can be matches.
placed over the logs in such a way as Food can be kept cool in a box or
to hold a pot of water or to set a fry- a box-like arrangement made of
ing pan. Forked sticks can be laid on straight sticks over which burlap is
the log and weighted on the lower end hung and kept wet. This is accom-
with a stone, using the upper end to plished by setting a pan on top of the
hang a cooking vessel over the flames. box and fixing wicks of cloth over the
Two logs placed parallel, with space edges. The wicks will siphon the
enough between for the smaller sticks, water out evenly and keep the burlap
make one of the best camp cooking ar- wet.
When on a walking tour through the The usual way of washing photo-
woods or country, it might be well to graphic prints is to place them in a
provide a way to procure water for shallow tray in which they will be-
drinking purposes. Take with you come stuck together in bunches, if
several feet of small rubber tubing and they are not often separated. A
a few inches of hollow cane of the size French magazine suggests that a deep
to fit the tube. tank be used instead, and that each
one end insert the cane for a
In print be attached to a cork by means
mouthpiece, and allow the other end of a pin stuck through one corner, the
to reach into the water. Exhaust the cork thus becoming a float which keeps
air from the tube and the water will the print suspended vertically, and at
—
rush up to your lips. ^Contributed by the same time prevents contact with
L. Alberta iSTorrell, Augusta, Ga. its nearest neighbor.
93
Camp Furnishings
By CHELSEA CURTIS FRASER
When on a camping trip nothing the boughs lie on the line C and their
should be carried but the necessities, stems on the line D. This process is
and the furnishings should be made up continued until the crosspiece springs
from materials found in the woods. A are entirely covered, and then another
good spring bed can be made up in the layer is laid in the same manner on top
following manner Cut two stringers
:
pole can be made as shown in Fig. 5. a i^jj-iu- hole in the center of the wood
The hang-er consists of a piece, 7 in. plug and fit another plug into this hole
long, cut from a 2-in. sapling, nails be- with sufficient end projecting to be
shaped for the length of the steel pen
to be used. The shank of the pen and
the plug must enter the hole together.
One side of the projecting end of the
plug should be shaped to fit the inside
surface of the pen and then cut off at
a point a little farther out than the eye
in the pen. On the surface that is to
lie against the pen a groove is cut in
the plug extending from near the point
to the back end where it is to enter
the hole in the first plug. The under
side of the plug is shaped about as
Fg4 """iS shown.
A Trunk of a Tree, and a Clothes
Seat Against the
Hanger for the Tent Ridge Pole The other cartridge is cut off at such
a point that it will fit on the tapering
ing driven into its sides for hooks. The end of the first one, and is used for a
upper end is fitted with a rope which is
cap. The cartridge being filled with
tied over the ridge pole of the tent. ink and the plug inserted, the ink will
flow down the small groove in the
A Fruit Stemmer feeder plug and supply the pen with
In the berry season the stemmer ink. Care'must be taken that the sur-
sketch is a very handy face of the smaller plug fits the pen
shown in the
article for the snugly and that the groove is not cut
kitchen. It is through to the point end. This will
made of spring keep the ink from flooding, and only
and tem- that which is used for writing will be
steel
pered, the length able to get through or leak out. Con- —
^^. being about 2% tributed by Edwin N. Harnish, Ceylon,
in. The end Canada.
used for removing the stem is ground
from the outside edge after tempering.
Destroying Caterpillars on
A ring large enough to admit the sec- Grapevines
ond finger is soldered at a convenient
distance from the end on one leg. The grapes in my back yard were
Contributed by H. F. Reams, Nashville, being destroyed by caterpillars which
Tennessee. could be found under all the large
leaves. The vine was almost dead when
A Homemade Fountain Pen I began to cut off all the large leaves
and "those eaten by the caterpillars,
A very serviceable fountain pen can which allowed the sun's rays to reach
be made from two 38-72 rifle cartridges This destroyed all the
the grapes.
and a steel pen. Clean out the cart-
caterpillars and the light and heat
ridges, fit a hardwood plug tightly in —
ripened the grapes. Contributed by
Wm. Singer, Rahway, N. J.
One Cartridge Shell Makes the Fountain Part of the mixed calcimine to cover 370 sq. ft. of
Pen, and the Other the Cap plastered surface, 180 sq. ft. of brick-
the end of one shell, and cut it off work and 225 sq. ft. of average wood-
smooth with the end of the metal. Drill work.
95
\ B a \
1 i
SIDE
The Brackets for the Cover as "Well as Each of the Four Legs Fold Against the Sides of the Box in Such a Manner
as to be Out of the Way, Making the Box Easy to Carry and Store Away in a Small Space
used on a canoe trip of several hundred over, which is much more pleasant
miles; and from experience I know it than squatting before a camp fire get-
to be of a suitable size for canoeists, ting the eyes full of smoke. The legs
If the camper is going to have a fixed are hinged to the box in such a man-
camp and have his luggage hauled, a ner that all of the weight of the box
96
rests on the legs rather than on the make the brackets 10 by 13 in. Con-
hinges, and are kept from spreading structing the brackets so that their
apart by wire turnbuckles. These, be- combined length is 4 in. shorter than
ing just bolts and wire, may be tucked the total length of the box, facilitates
inside the box when on the move. The their folding against the back of the box
when not in use. This point is clearly
shown in the drawing. Our brackets
were made of V^-in. oak, li/> in. wide,
and the joints halved together. They
BUTTON TO are hinged to the back of the bo.x as
HOLD BRACKCTS
shown and when folded are held in
;
Detail of the Turnbuckle, Button to Hold the Brackets, place by a simple catch. The weight
and the Spring Clip for Holding the Legs on the of the lid is sufficient to hold the brack-
Side of the Box
ets in place when open, but to make
top is fitted with unexposed hinges and sure they will not creep when in use in-
with a lock to make it a safe place for sert a i/4-iu. dowel in the end of each so
storing valuables. that it protrudes ^4 in. Drill two holes
In constructing the cover it is well in the top to the depth of ^4 in., so that
to make it so that it covers the joints when the top rests on the brackets,
of the sides, thus making the box these holes engage with the dowels.
waterproof from the top, if rain should In hinging the brackets to the back see
fall on it. A partition can be made in that they are high enough to support
one end to hold odds and ends. A tray the lid at right angles to the box.
could be installed, like the tray in a The box here shown is made of %
trunk, to hold knives, forks, spoons, in. white pine throughout. The legs
etc., while the perishable supplies are are Yg by 2yo by 18 in. They are fast-
kept und'erneath the tray. Give the ened to the box with ordinary strap
box two coats of lead paint, and shellac hinges. When folded up against the
the inside. box they do not come quite to the top
The wire braces for the legs are so that the box should be at least 19
made as follows. Procure four ma- in. high for 18-in. legs. About 2 in.
chine bolts, about 1/4 in. in diameter and from the bottom of the legs drive in a
2 in. long —any thread will do with — brad so it protrudes Vs in. as shown.
wing nuts and washers to fit. Saw or This brad engages in a hole in the
file off the heads and drill a small hole spring-brass clip when folded up as
in one end of each bolt, large enough shown in the illustration.
to receive a No. 16 galvanized iron If in a fixed camp, it is a good idea
wire. Two inches from the bottom of to stand the legs in tomato cans partly
each leg drill a hole to take the bolt full of water. This prevents ants from
loosely. Determine the exact distance crawling up the legs into the box, but
between the outside edges of the legs it necessitates placing the wire braces
Camp Stoves
A Wind Vane
A novelty in wind vanes is shown will rise on and the height
its shaft,
in the accompanying sketch. The reached by thus serve to in-
it will
vane can be made of sheet metal (p
—
^ dicate in a relative manner only
or carved from light wood. The ^"°"
'
. —
the velocity of the wind, but it
wings are so set on the body as to is also possible to arrange the
cause the dragon to rise when the weights at such distances apart that
wind strikes them. The dragon is C the dragon will rise to A in a SO-mile
pivoted on a shaft running through wind, to B in a 30-mile wind, to C
its center of gravity, so it will read- in a 40-mile gale, and so on, with
ily turn with the wind. The tail B as many weights as desired. This
part may also be made to revolve can be done with the aid of an
as the propeller of an aeroplane. anemometer, if one can be borrowed
The length and size of the shaft for some time, or the device may
will depend on the dimen- be taken to the
sions of the dragon, and nearest weather
similarly, the location of bureau to be
the weights on the chains set. Contrib- —
will be determined by its size and uted by H. J. Ilolden, Ontario, Cal.
weight. Upon these circumstances
'and the varying velocities of the wind
will depend how high the dragon
CNever rock
filing work.
a file —push it straight on
100
A Furniture Polish J (D
A good pastelike furniture polish,
A
which is very cheap and keeps indefi- "1 ^
nitely,can be made as follows: Mix
3 oz. of white wax, 2 oz. of pearlash, The Screw is Permanently Locked with a Small Nail
Driven into the Slot Prepared for It
commonly known as potassium car-
bonate, and 6 oz. of water. Heat the very successful way to lock the screws.
mixture until it becomes dissolved, The hole in the hinge for the screw is
then add 4 oz. of boiled linseed oil and filed to produce a notch, as shown at
5 oz. of turpentine. Stir well and pour A, deep enough to receive a small wire
into cans to cool. Apply with a cloth nail or brad, which is driven through
and rub to a polish. The paste is non- the slot in the screw head at one side,
poisonous. as shown at B.
A Hanging Vase
To Remove Grease from Clothing
A very neat and attractive hanging
Equal parts of ether, ammonia and
corner vase can be made
alcohol make a solution that will
of a colored bottle. The
readily remove grease from clothing.
bottom is broken out or
cut ofi as desired and a
The solution must be kept away from
fire, and should be contained
in corked
wire hanger attached as
bottles evaporates quickly, but
as it
shown. The opening in
can be used without danger. It re-
the neck of the bottle is
well corked. Rectangu- moves grease spots from the finest
fabrics and is harmless to the texture.
lar shaped bottles fitted
with hangers can be
—
used on walls. Contrib- CJeweler's rouge rubbed well into
uted by A. D. Tanaka, chamois skin is handy to polish gold
Jujiya, Kioto, Japan. and silver articles with.
103
Stove Made of an Old Oilcan with Extending Sides and Weighted with Sand
for Use on a Fishing Boat Hold^ the Cooking Vessel Safely in a Sea
A Canoe Stove
By F. V. WILLIAMS
Limited space and the rocking mo- The main reason
tion of salmon-fishing boats in a heavy for making the
sea on the Pacific coast brought about stove in this manner is to hold the
the construction of the canoe stove cooking vessel within the sides extend-
shown in the illustration. It is made ing above the rods. No amount of
of a discarded kerosene can whose form rocking can cause the vessel to slide
is square. A
draft hole is cut in one from the stove top, and as the stove is
side of the can, 4 or 5 in. from the bot- weighted with the sand, it cannot be
tom, and a layer of sand placed easily moved from the place where it
on the bottom. Two holes are is set in the canoe.
punched through opposite sides, par- The use of such a stove in a canoe
allel with the draft hole and about has the advantage that the stove can
3 in. from the top edge. Rods are be cleaned quickly, as the ashes and
run through these holes to provide a fire can be dumped into the water and
support for the cooking utensil. The the stove used for a storage box. The
smoke from the fire passes out at the whole thing may be tossed overboard
corners around the vessel. and a new one made for another trip.
slightly pressed together so that they plates of agate; sometimes the pendu-
will spring and grip the pages. Con- — lum rod is simply attached to a very
tributed by W. A. Saul, E. Lexington, slender and flexible spring without any
Massachusetts. bearings. But the minimum of friction
is obtained by means of magnetic sus-
pension, as the following experiment
Slide-Opening Cover for a Plate
will prove.
Holder If the rod of a pendulum about IS in.
The length of time required for the long, beating half seconds, is sharpened
slide of a plate holder to be removed to a needle point and suspended from
one of the poles of a magnet, it will be
found that, if set into motion, it will
continue to swing 15 times as long as
the ordinary knife-edge suspended
pendulum, and it will not stop until
after about 16 hours, while one work-
ing on agate plates will stop in from
50 to 60 minutes. Similarly a top, pro-
vided with a fine-pointed axis of iron,
will spin much longer when suspended
from a magnet.
Magnetic suspension is used in preci-
sioninstruments for example, the
;
would enter the unprotected slot when In mechanical drawings cast iron is
the camera was in certain positions. indicated by a series of straight lines
To protect this slot so that the slide across the parts made of this material.
could be left out indefinitely, I made These lines can
a cover of a piece of sheet metal hav- be quickly
ing three slots, to admit screws turned made with the
into the camera. A knob was attached usually dis-
at the center. The illustration shows carded pencil
the application of this cover. In Fig. stubs, if these
1 the plate holder is shown slipped in are saved and
with the cover back, and Fig. 2 shows sharpened i n
the slide drawn and the cover over the the following
slot opening. —
Contributed by B. J. manner: The point is filed flat, as
Weeber, New York City. shown at A then a slot is filed in the
;
THE paddle-wheel
was
herewith,
boat, illustrated
built in the spare
groove boards for the bottom, but plain
boards can be used, although it is then
time I had on rainy afternoons and difficult to make the joint water-tight.
Saturdays, and the enjoyment I de- When tongue-and-groove boards
the
rived from it at my summer camp more are used a piece of string, well soaked
than repaid me for the time spent in in white lead or paint and placed in the
the building. The materials used in groove of each board, will be sufficient
its construction were to make atight joint.
2 side boards. 14 long. 10 in. wide and % in.
ft. Having finished the sides and bot-
thick.
2 side boards, 14 ft. long. 5 in. wide and Vi in. tom, the next step will be to fasten on
thick.
1 outside keel board. 14 ft. long. 8 wide and the bottom keel. Adjust the board to
Vi in. thick. its position and nail it in the center
1 inside keel board. 14 ft. long. 10 in. wide and
Yi in. thick part where it lies flat on the bottom
120 sq. ft. tongue-and-groove boards,
of % in. thick.
boards, then work toward the ends,
for bottom and wheel boxes.
1 piece. 2 in. square and 18 in. long.
4 washers.
gradually drawing it down over the
2 iron cranks. turn and nailing it down. If the keel
10 screweyes.
30 ft. of rope. board cannot be bent easily, it is best
Nails.
to soak it in hot water where the bend
The dimensions given in the drawing takes place and the wood can then be
willbe found satisfactory, but these nailed down without the fibers break-
may be altered to suit the conditions. ing. The inside keel is put on in the
The first step will be to cut and make same manner, but reversed.
the Nail
sides.
the two pieces
forming each side
together and then
cut the end boards
and nail them to
the sides. Lay
this framework,
bottom side up,
on a level surface
and proceed t o
nail on the bot-
tom boards across
the sides. The
ends of these
boards are sawed
off flush with the
outside surface of
the sides after they are nailed in place. The next procedure is to make the
The material list calls for tongue-and- paddle wheels. The hub for each
106
Detail Drawing of the Boat and One of the Paddle Wheels. All the Material Required for the Construction
is Such That can be Cut and Shaped with Ordinary Tools Found in the Home
Workshop
corners to make 8 sides to the piece, ers,having a hole slightly larger than
then bore a %-in. hole through its the diameter of the shaft, and drill
center. The 8 blades of each wheel, holes in their rims so that they can
16 in all, are 17 in. long, 6 in. wide and be screwed to the wheel-box upright
% in. thick. One end of each blade is as shown. The bearings thus made are
nailed to one side of the hub, then it lubricated with a little lard or grease.
is braced as shown to strengthen the The paddle-wheel boxes are built
wheel. over the wheels with the dimensions
The cranks are made of round iron, given in the drawing, to prevent the
% in. in diameter, and they are keyed splashing of water on the occupants
to the wheels with large nails in the of the boat.
manner shown. I had a blacksmith The trimmings for the boat consist
of three seats, a running board and a
springboard. The drawings show the
location of the seats. The springboard
is built up of 4 boards, %
in. thick, as
shown, only nailing them together at
the back end. This construction al-
lows the boards to slide over each
other when a person's weight is on
the outer end. The action of the
boards is the same as of a spring on
RUDDER CONTROL a vehicle.
FASTENING
PADDLE. WHEEL KEY
It is necessary to have a good brace
Detail of Paddle -Wheel Fastening, the Springboard
Construction and the Fastening for the across the boat for the back end of
Rudder Control
the springboard to catch on a 2 by —
shape the cranks for me, but if one 4-in. timber being none too large. At
has a forge, the work can be done at the point where the springboard rests
home without that expense. The bear- on the front seat there should be
ings for the crankshafts consist of another good-sized crosspiece. The
107
board can be held in place by a cleat bed or mattress to be made, and a cross
and a few short pieces of rope, the stick is attached to their tops. Several
cleat being placed across the board stakes are set parallel with the cross
back of the brace. A little diving plat-
form is attached on the outer end of
the springboard and a strip of old
carpet or gunny sack placed on it to
prevent slivers from running into the
flesh. In making the spring and run-
ning board, it is advisable to make
them removable so that the boat can
be used for other purposes.
The boat is steered with a foot-oper-
ated lever, the construction of which
is clearly shown. For the tiller-rope
guides, large screweyes are used and
also for the rudder hinges, the pin of Loom Constructed of Sticks for Weaving Grass
or Moss into a Camp Mattress
the hinge being a large nail. The hull
can be further strengthened by putting stick and at a distance to make the
a few angle-iron braces either on the length of the mattress. The warp is
in or outside. tied between the tops of the stakes and
To make the boat water-tight will the cross stick. An equal number of
require calking by filling the cracks cords are then attached to the cross
with twine and white lead or thick stick and to another loose cross stick
paint. The necessary tools are a broad, which is used to move the cords up and
dull chisel and a mallet. A couple of down while the grass or moss is placed
coats of good paint, well brushed into in for the woof. The ends of the warp
the cracks, will help to make it water- are then tied to hold it together. When
tight as well as shipshape. The boat breaking up camp the cords can be re-
may leak a little when it is first put moved and carried to the next camp.
into the water, but after a few hours Contributed by W. P. Shaw, Bloor
of soaking, the boards will swell and West, Can.
close the openings.
This boat was used for carrying A Milk-Bottle Carrier
trunks, firewood, rocks, sand, and for
Carrying a milk bottle by the rim is
fishing, and last, but not least, for
tiresome work for the fingers, so I con-
swimming. The boat is capable of structed a handle, as shown in the
carrying a load of three-quarters of a
sketch, from a piece of wire. The car-
ton. It draws very little water, there-
rier can be easily placed in the pocket.
by allowing its use in shallow water. The part fitting under the rim of
It has the further advantage that the
the bottle neck is bent to form two
operator faces in the direction the boat
semicircles, one hooking permanently
is going, furnishing the power with his
at A, while the other is hooked at B
hands and steering with his feet.
A Camp Loom
The camper who desires to "rough
it" as much as possible and to carry
only the necessities will find it quite a
comfort to construct the bedding from A Carrier Made of Wire to Quickly Attach on a
Milk -Bottle Neck
grass or moss by weaving it in the
manner of making a rag carpet, using after it is sprung around the neck of
heavy twine or small rope as the warp. the bottle. —
Contributed by Lawrence
Two stakes are set the width of the B. Robbins, Harwich, Mass.
108
sewed together, then a piece cut out to / is desired to fly the kite
the shape of the string, allowing 1 in. to directly overhead, attach
project all around for a lap. The cam- the line above the regular
bric is sewn fast to the string with the point and for low flying make
linen thread. Fasten the cloth to the the connection below this point.
frame part with the tacks, spacing The regular point is found by trial
them 1 in. apart. The space in the flights with the line fastened tem-
center, between the sticks, is cut porarily to the bridle, after which the
out. Make two pieces of the re- fastening is made permanent.
\ i|' 1
\ 1
\ I
\ 1
\ 1 FIG 2
\ 1
\ !
i
FIG 1
3'
FIG 3 FIG 4
109
A Water Filter
bridle string should be tied so that the air currents properly. The center
it will about center under the cross- of gravity will not be the same in the
Stick B for the best results, but a construction of each kite and the string
slight change from this location may can be located only by trial, after
be necessary to make the kite ride which it is permanently fastened.
the shorter lengths running horizon- brads. The ribs are so bent that the
tally and the longer upright, so that highest part will be 5 or 6 in. above
each upright piece extends 1 ft. above the horizontal. The bending must be
114
uniform and is done when fastening The two vertical rectangular spaces
them in place. in the main frame, just under the rear
The material used to cover the wings wings, are covered with cloth to act as
and rudders is strong muslin. The a rudder. The upper and lower brac-
cloth is first tacked to the front wing ing wires for the wings are attached
^ 18'
ELEVATION
MAIN FRAME
bar, then to the ribs, and sewed to a with snaps and rings so that the glider
wire which is fastened between the can be easily taken apart.
ends of the ribs. Large brass-head It is best not to use the glider in a
tacks should be used through a strip wind greater than 30 miles an hour.
of tape to fasten the cloth to the ribs. It is started from the top of a hill in
The rear wings are constructed in a the usual manner. Glides can be made
similar manner. After the cloth is in running from GO to several hundred
place it is coated with starch or varnish. feet.
Light in a Keyhole
Remove the lock and cut the mortise
deep enough to admit a 3-volt battery
lamp with a suitable socket attached.
The lamp is then connected to wires
which are concealed and run to a bat-
tery of three dry cells in the basement
or other convenient place. A small
push button is attached in the line and
The Small Truck will Greatly Assist the Carrying
of a Heavily Loaded Suitcase placed near the knob on the door. A
the folding plan, similar to a go-cart, small recess must be cut in the mortise
and can be carried on the side of the so that the light from the lamp will
case. The wheels are those used on a shine directly on the inside of the plate
go-cart, with rubber tires and about 6 —
over the keyhole. Contributed by
in. in diameter. These are fitted to Armand F. Lamarre, St. Renii, Can.
115
quire skilled workmen. Select the ma- 2 pieces, H by 154 in. by 5 ft.
4 pieces, ?i by 1 by 28 in.
terial with care and see that the wood
In addition to the lists given, four
is straight-grained and free from knots.
pieces of bamboo, 16 ft. long, tapering
The following list of spruce pieces is
from 1 or ly^ in. at the large end to
required
4 main wint' spars, K hy V4 in. by 17 ft.
% in. at the small end, are used for the
2 rudder spars, % by
in, by 81 ft. main frame.
5 wins crosspieces, % by ?4 m. by 4 ft.
4 rudder crosspieces. H by h in. by 2 ft, Construction
1 piece for main-frame crosspieces, /^ by 1 in. by 12 ft.
2 arm pieces. VA by 2 in, by 3M ft. The first part to make is the main
The following list of poplar pieces is frame A which is constructed of the
required in making the supports for four bamboo
poles. They are made
the cloth covering on the wings and into a rectangular frame with cross-
rudders. bars marked B cut to the right length
34 main-wing ribs. 5i by ^ by 64 in. from the 12-ft. piece of spruce, Y^ in.
8 rudder ribs. K by '4 by 36 in.
5 rudder nbs, >i by % by 48 in. by 1 in. The bars C and D are of oak
tor designed for laboratories where solid material is put in to last for some
gases are needed in large quantities time in order not to disturb the fas-
tenings.
^\'hen all is ready, the pump is used
gently to start the acid over the siphon
and into the generator from below.
The gas generated by the action of the
acid on the solid soon fills the bottle.
The screw clamp on the exit tube is
loosened and the gas passes into the
bottle of water and charges it, in the
case when sulphureted hydrogen is re-
quired. In the other cases, when suffi-
cient gas has been generated, the
screw clamp is tightened, and the gas
soon attains considerable pressure
which forces the acid back out of the
generator and into the acid bottle
above. The whole apparatus now
comes to an equilibrium, and the gas
in the generator is ready for another
use.— Contributed by W. M. Mills,
Bakersfield, Cal.
the siphon.
The large bottle used as a generator
may be either a 3 or 5-gal. size, and
after it is placed in the position shown,
a sufficient amount of the solid reagent
needed in gas generating is placed in Armature Cores are Easily Revolved to Fill the Core
Openings with Insulated Wire
the mouth before the exit tube, leading
away below, is fixed in position. If or polishing head. Core segments can
sulphureted hydrogen is required, fer- be quickly wound with this device.
rous sulphide is used; if hydrogen is Contributed by Geo. B. Schulz, Austin,
required, zinc is placed within and to ;
Illinois.
Footstool for Cement Floors Laboratory Force Filter
Beginner's Helper for Roller Skating Each end of the vessel is provided with
an opening, A, adapted to receive and
One of the most amusing as well as hold in place plaster-of-paris cups, B.
useful devices for a beginner on roller
The The part extending into the tank is pro-
skates is shown in the sketch.
vided with a wick, C, which reaches to
the bottom of the vessel. A glass tube,
D, is provided with a bulb on each end
and partly filled with alcohol, the re-
maining space being exhausted of air.
The glass tube is secured to a hanger
which is pivoted to the bottom of the
vessel.
After a quantity of water has been
poured into the vessel and the device
allowed to stand undisturbed for a few
minutes, the tube will begin to move
with an oscillating motion. Some of
the water in the vessel has been con-
ducted by means of the wicks C to the
bent plaster cups, from the surface of
which it evaporates, thus absorbing la-
tent heat and producing a lower tem-
perature in the cups than that of the
surrounding atmosphere. The bulb
in contact with the cup thus acquires
a lower temperature than the one at
the end D, which will result in conden-
Beginner Cannot Fall
sation of the alcohol vapor within the
former. The pressure of the vapor in
the lower bulb will then force the alco-
device made of %-in. pipe and pipe
is
hol up the inclined tube into the higher
tittings,with a strip of sheet metal 1
bulb, the evaporation in the lower
in. wide fastened about half way down
bulb maintaining the pressure 'herein.
on the legs. On the bottom of each
leg is fastened an ordinary furniture
When a sufficient quantity of alco-
Atmospheric Thermo-Engine
The device illustrated has for its ob-
ject the production of power in small
quantities with little attention and no
expense. All that is needed to produce Details of the Engine
continue until the water in the vessel the ends of the tank as shown in the
has been absorbed and evaporated. second sketch.
Contributed by E. W. Davis, Chicago. The support, as shown in the last
sketch, is made by screwing together
SO that both outside pedals can be for this work and few residences are
reached easily and 3011 will have no constructed to furnish this kind of
trouble with your feet. This robe, light.
with the use of overshoes, will insure I find a very good way to get a light
—
comfort in driving a car. Contributed
by Earl R. Hastings, Corinth, Vt.
Removing Varnish
A
good and easy way to remove
varnish from old furniture is to wash
the surface thoroughly with 9.1-per-
cent alcohol. This dissolves the var-
nish and the wood can then be cleaned
with a strong solution of soap, or weak
lye. If lye is used, it should be washed
Flatirons in the Box
off quickly and the wood dried with
at the hinged end and should be sand- flannel cloth. When the wood is
papered where it is grasped by the thoroughly dry it will take a fine finish.
hands. A half-strap hinge is prefer- — Contributed by Loren Ward, Des
able, with the strap part fastened to Moines, Iowa.
the handle. The bottom of the polisher
is covered with a piece of Brussels
Curling-Iron Heater
carpet.
In use, it is well to set the polisher The curling-iron holder shown in the
tightly over the neck of the bottle. for a gas will clean dirt
stove. It
No matter how dark it may be or from nickel parts as well as from the
how much of a hurry a person may burner, grates, ovens and sheet-metal
be in, one cannot fail to note the char- bottoms.
127
One of the most distressing sides of a cloth in a thin layer. When thor-
botanical study is the short life of the oughly dry, it should be placed in a
colors in flowers. Those who have heavy earthenware vessel and further
found the usual method of preserving dried in a hot oven. Allow it to re-
placing the Flowers on the Steel Pins and Pouring the Dry Sand around Them
plants by pressure between paper un- main oven for some time until
in the
satisfactory will be interested to learn it iscompletely warmed through so
of a treatment whereby many kinds of that one can scarcely hold the bare
flowers maj' be dried so that they retain hands in it.
a great deal of their natural form and Obtain a piece of heavy cardboard
color. and cut it to fit easily in the bottom
The flowers should be gathered as of the box. Through the bottom of
soon as the blossoms have fully the cardboard insert a number of steel
opened. It is important that they pins, one for each of the flowers to be
should be quite dry, and in order to preserved. Take the dry blossoms and
free them of drops of rain or dew, they press the stalk of each on a steel pin
may be suspended with heads down- so that it is held in an upright position.
ward for a few hours in a warm place. When the cardboard is thus filled,
It is well to begin with some simple place it in the box.
form of flower. The warm sand is put in a bag or
A large, strongly made wooden box some other receptacle from which it
—one of tin is better —
will be neces- can be easily poured. Pour the sand
sary, together with a sufficient amount into the box gently, allowing it to
of sand to fill it. If possible, the sand trickle slowly in so that it spreads
should be of the kind known as "silver
sand," which is very fine. The best
that can be procured will be found far
from clean, and it must, therefore, be
thoroughly washed. The sand should
be poured into a bowl of clean water.
Much of the dirt will float on the sur-
face. This is skimmed off and thrown
away, and clean water added. The
sand should be washed in this manner
at least a dozen times, or until nothing
remains but pure white grains of sand.
The clean sand is spread out to dry on The Dried Flowers
128
evenly. Keep on pouring sand until sand has been emptied, the cardboard
the heads of the flowers are reached, should be removed from the box and
taking care that all of them stand in a each blossom taken from its pin. In
vertical position. The utmost care the case of succulent specimens, the
must be taken, when the heads are stems v^'ill have shrunk considerably,
reached, to see that all the petals are in but the thinner petals will be in an al-
their right order. Remember that any most natural condition. The colors
crumpled flowers will be pressed into will be bright and attractive. Some
any position they may assume by the tints will have kept better than others,
weight of the sand. When the box is but most of the results will be surpris-
filled it should be covered and set ingly good. Whatever state the flow-
aside in a dry place. ers are in when they are taken from
The box should be allowed to stand the box, if the drying process has been
at least 48 hours. After the first day, thorough, they will keep almost indefi-
if only a small amount of sand has nitely.
been used, the material may have Flowers preserved in this manner
cooled of? to some extent, and the box are admirable for the decoration of
must be set in a moderately heated homes. If they are exposed to light,
oven for a short time, but no great care should be taken to see that the di-
amount of warmth is advisable. Af- rect sunshine does not strike them, as
ter 48 hours the box may be uncovered it will fade the colors. Sprigs with
and the sand carefully poured off. As leaves attached may be dried in this
the flowers are now in a very brittle way, but it has been found that much
condition, any rough handling will of the intensity of the green is lost in
cause serious damage. When all the the process.
Reading Pulse Beats with the Sun's part way down and cover the rest of
Rays the window with a heavy cardboard.
Cut a small hole in the cardboard to
The pulse beats may be counted by admit a beam of light. Set a bowl of
thisunusual method. On a clear day, water on a table in the path of the
when the sun is shining brightly. beam so as to deflect it to the ceiling
darken a room and select one window as shown by the dotted lines in the
sketch.
It is now a simple matter to show
the pulse beats. Place the wrist
against the edge of the bowl as shown,
and the beam of light directed to the
ceiling will record every beat of the
pulse by short, abrupt movements.
Stock are especially attractive, parts of shape shown at A, the first one from
the various light and dark woods ap- the joint of the knife switch being
pearing here and there in all manner of the longest and each succeeding one
odd shapes and proportions. If the shorter. The handle was taken from
stock is placed ofif center in the lathe, a single-pole switch. The case was
a still greater variety of effects will
be produced.
The application of a potassium-bi-
chromate solution to the finished work
turns each piece a different color. This
solution can be made in any depth of
color by varying the amounts of potas-
sium salt and water. Alaple or birch
treated with this solution are colored
to a rich Osage orange which cannot
be surpassed in beauty. Mahogany is
turned a deep reddish brown, and wal-
nut is darkened a great deal. The so-
CONDtNSER
lution is applied as evenly as possible
Lever and Clips
with a camel's-hair brush while the
wood is turning in the lathe. The grain made of oak and varnished and the
of the wood is somewhat roughened condenser was made of tinfoil and thin
sheets of mica, 2 by 3 in. in size. After
n MAPLE OR
BIRCH placing the condenser in the case, hot
H MAHOGANY paraffin was poured around it.
^ WALNUT
Adjustable Baking-Pan Shoes
Vase Made of Different Woods At times bread, meat, or other food,
can be dressed placed in ordinary baking pans in the
by this process, but it
A Variable Condenser
A simple variable condenser for re-
Shoe and How It is Attached to the Pan
ceiving in wireless, which will give
good results, was made by a corre- V-shaped metal strips and in two parts,
spondent of Modern Electrics as fol- as shown, with the edges of one part
lows: Each clip on the switch was lapped over so that the other strip will
made of ribbon brass or copper in the slide in it.
130
Cars Lined Up Ready for the Start and the Course Patrolled by the Boy Scouts, All Traffic being Halted
{or the Race and the Roadway Made Clear for the Entire Half Mile of Track
A Pushmobile Race
Pending the time set for a 500-mile Scouts patrolled the route, while the
international automobile race that was city policemen cleared the streets, and
scheduled to take place several weeks during the race all traffic was halted.
later, a number of boys in the sixth and Two of the requirements for enter-
seventh grades of a public school were ing the race were that the car had to be
enthusiastic over the idea of building made in the school shops and that it
must have a certain kind of a wheel,
which in this case was one condemned
by a local factory, thus making the
wheels and wheel base of all cars alike.
Two boys to a car constituted a rac-
ing team, and during the race they
could exchange positions at their pleas-
ure. The necessity of "nursing" their
cars down the steep grades and around
difficult corners developed into an im-
portant factor. All cars were
named and numbered.
for themselves, in was
The car that finished first
the school shops, disqualified for the
pushmobiles and reason that it took
having a race on a fresh pusher
meet similar to along the course.
the large one ad-
vertised.
The pushmobiles were made and the
race run as an opening feature of a
field meet held in the city. The course
was about a half mile long, and was
chosen to give the contestants plenty
of curves, a part of the run being over
brick streets and the final quarter on
the regular track where the field meet
was held.
Interest was added to the event by The Cars Winning the First. Second and Third Prizes
petitioning the mayor of the city for Respectively, the "Hoosier" being Penalized
10 Yards at the Starting Tape for Having
a permit to run the race, and the Boy Larger and Better-Grade Wheels
131
The cars were constructed under the Two pieces of ^/{j-in. soft-steel rod
supervision of the regular shop in- were used for the axles, a hole being
structor, and a drawing was furnished drilled near each end for a cotter, to
each boy making a car. The design of hold the wheels in place, and also holes
the hood and the arrangement of the through the diameter between the
seat and steering gear was left for each wheels, for iV^-in. screws to fasten the
boy to settle as he desired. The matter axles to the bolsters.
of expense was watched closely by The steering wheel is constructed of
each one. Most of the hoods and a broom handle with a small wheel
seats were constructed of empty dry- fastened to its upper end, and the lower
goods boxes. end supported by a crossbar,
With the aid of the sket F. and the back end of the
can make a car as stron hootl. Before fastening
"Peugeot" that won th the crossbar F
The side rails of the m in place, adjust
frame were made of cy- the steering
press, 58 in. long
and 2
square.
The Entire Chassis was
to the
eight for
n it is
fastened with nails dri\en
through the sides of the hood.
The construction of the steering
the Hoods
and Seats device is very simple. The crossarm
Being the Only
Parts Optional
G is a piece of timber, 7 in. long, 2 in.
in Size and Shape wide and 1 in. thick, rounded on the
for the Builder
ends and provided with a large screw
The location of the crossbars A and B eye near each end on the under side to
isvery important, as they give rigidity which are fastened the ends of two
to the frame and reinforce the two small-linked chains. The chains are
bolsters C and D. The size of the then crossed and fastened to the bot-
hood and the location of the seat de- tom bolster in front and as near the
termine where they should be set into wheels as practical. The connection is
the rail, after which they are fastened made with a screw eye similar to the
with large wood screws. The three one used in the crossarm. Another
bolsters C, D, and E are cut from reg- type of steering device may be made
ular 2 by 4-in. stock. Be careful to by building on the rod a 5-in. drum
get a uniform distance between the which takes the place of the steering
rails when they are framed together. arm. It is a more positive appliance,
If desired, the dimensions can be in- but is somewhat harder to make and
creased, but do not reduce them, as adjust.
this will narrow the tread too much. The making of the hood and the seat
The bolt connecting the bolsters C and completes the car. Decide upon the
E is a common carriage bolt, 5 in. long shape and size of the hood, but, in any
and 1/2 in- in diameter. A
washer is case and irrespective of the size, it will
placed between the pieces C and E, to require a front and back end. These
make the turning easy. are made first and then secured at the
iS'2
proper distance apart with two side and crosspiece, first placing a piece of
rails. These two ends are nailed on the the proper thickness under the front
ends of the connecting rails. It is then edge, to give it the desired slant back-
well to fasten the hood skeleton to the ward. The back curved part can be
car frame and cover it after the steer- formed of a piece of sheet metal and
ing device is in place. lined on the inside with wood pieces,
The seat bottom is cut the shape or with cloth or leather, padded to re-
desired, and fastened to the rear bolster semble the regular cushion.
I
1 1 i
A Catapult
The catapult shown in the sketch
isone I constructed some time ago and
found to be amusing and very inex-
pensive. The catapult consists of a
small piece of dowel or pine, whittled
into the shape of a handle, a screw-
eye, an elastic band and an arrow. It
is surprising how a well-balanced ar-
row will fly into the sky until lost to
sight when propelled through the eye
A Strip of Sheet Metal Cut and Clips Formed of the screw with a medium-strong
to Make a Pencil Rack
elastic. A number of forms of this
brass of about No. 15 gauge. Mark off
a number of rectangles corresponding
to the number of pencil holders
desired. With a sharp chisel, cut
through the metal on three sides of
each rectangle, leaving one of the
short sides untouched. The loose laps
can then be bent to a shape suited to
hold a pencil. The rack can be
fastened in place with nails or screws
through holes pierced at each end.
— Contributed by Mark Gluckman, The Eye of the Screw Serves as a Guide
the Arrow
for
Jersey City, N. J.
simple gun were made, but the one
CIndistinct but not entirely worn-off shown is the simplest and most ef-
dates on coins may be read by heating fective. —
Contributed by C. A. Need-
slightly. ham, New York, N. Y.
133
Growing Clean Strawberries both the front and back of the card,
being sure to keep the center part flat
A very good method of growing in- against one end or the other, then
dividual strawberry plants that will pass the hand over the card, and in
produce large clean berries is to pro-
vide a covering constructed from a A Card Having
board 10 in. square with a 3-in. hole Two Faces, Either
of Which can be
bored in the center. This covering Shown to the
is placed over the plant, as shown in Audience Instantly
the sketch, to keep down weeds, retain
moisture, and to make a base for the
ripening berries. A shower cannot
spatter dirt and sand on the growing
fruit. The rays of the sun beating
on the surface of the board will aid in doing so catch the center part and
the ripening. turn it over. The card can be changed
If a log can be obtained, the boards back again in the same manner. Con- —
can be made better and more quickly. tributed by R. Bennett, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Disks about 1 in. thick are sawed from
the log and holes in their centers either
cut with a chisel or bored, as desired. Cleaning Pearl Articles
A good way to clean pearl articles or
ornaments is to moisten them with
alcohol and then dry in magnesia pow-
der or French chalk. These last two
articles may be purchased at any drug
store and the process of cleaning is
absolutely harmless. It also polishes
the pearl and will not bleach delicate
colors.
them. If desired, the canvas can be this case the following method is very
stitched along the inside of the poles. efficient and expedient.
— Contributed by Thomas Simpson, Drill a small hole in the screw as
Pawtucket, R. I. near the center as possible. Roughen
the edges on the tang of a file with a
cold chisel, and drive the tang into the
Sail for a Boy's Wagon hole with a mallet. The roughened
Every boy. who loves a boat and has edges of the tang exert enough friction
only a wagon, can make a combination on the metal to remove the screw by
affair in which he can sail even though turning the file in the proper direction.
A screw will often break off in a usual manner the small notch is set
piece ofwork in such a manner that it under the head of the nail which is then
is quite impossible to remo\'e it by pulled out straight. —
Contributed by J.
using a pair of pliers or a wrench. In V. Loefifer, Evansville, Ind.
13o
A Cyclemobile
By FRANK PFEFFERLE
The cyclemobile is of the three- in. thick, 4 in. wide, and 22 in. long,
wheeled type and can be easily con- are fastened with nails to the rear ends
structed in the home workshop with of the sides, as shown. The rear wheel
ordinary tools. The main frame is
built up of two sidepieces, AA, Fig.
1, each 2 in. thick, 4 in. wide, and 7
ft. long, joined together at the front
end with a crosspiece, B. of the same
material. 17 in. long. The sides are
placed slightly tapering so that the
rear ends are 1] in. apart at the point
where they are joined together with
the blocks and rear-wheel attachments.
A crosspiece, C, 13 in. long, is fastened Three-Wheeled Cyclemobile Propelled Like a Bicycle
and Steered as an Automobile
in the center of the frame.
The place for the seat is cut out of is a bicycle wheel, which can be taken
each sidepiece, as shown by the from an old bicycle, or a wheel may
notches at D, which are 2 ft. from the be purchased cheaply at a bicycle store.
rear ends. Two strips of wood, E, ^o It is held in place with two pieces of
strap iron, F, shaped similar to the
rear forks on a bicycle, and each piece
is bolted to a block of wood 3 in. thick,
4 in. wide, and 6 in. long, which is
fastened to the sidepiece with the same
bolts that hold the strap iron in ])lace.
The blocks are located 20 in. from the
rear ends of the sidepieces.
The pedal arrangement. Fig. 3, con-
sists of an ordinary bicycle hanger,
with cranks and sprocket wheel set
into the end of a piece of wood, 3 in.
thick, 4 in. wide and 33 in. long, at
a point 4 in. from one end. The pieces
GG are nailed on across the frame at
ihe front end of the car, to hold the
hanger piece in the center between the
sidepieces, as shown in Fig. 1. A
small pulley, H, is made to run loosely
on a shaft fastened between the side-
pieces. This is used as an idler to keep
the upper part of the chain below the
Detail of the Parts for Constructing an Automobile-
Type Foot-Power Car seat.
136
The front axle is 30 in. long, pivoted steering wheel, N, is attached to the
as shown at J, Fig. 3, 6 in. from the upper end of the broom handle. The
front end of the main frame. Two center part of a rope, O, is given a
small brass plates, KK, are fastened few turns around the broom handle,
with screws on the under edge of each and the ends are passed through the
sidepiece, as shown, to provide a bear- openings in screweyes, PP, turned in-
ing for the axle. The front wheels are to the inner surfaces of the sidepieces
taken from a discarded baby carriage AA, and tied to the front axle.
and are about 21 in. in diameter. The seat is constructed of i/2-in. lum-
A good imitation radiator can be ber and is built in the notches cut in
made by cutting a board to the dimen- the main frame shown at D, Fig. 1.
sions given in Fig. 4. A large-mesh The body frame is made of lath, or
screen is fastened to the rear side to other thin strips of wood, that can be
imitate the water cells. bent in the shape of the radiator and
The steering gear L, Fig. 5, is made nailed to the sidepieces, as shown in
of a broom handle, one end of which Fig. G. These are braced at the top
passes through the support M
and fits with a longitudinal strip. The frame
into a hole bored into the lower part is then covered with canvas and
of the imitation radiator board. A painted as desired.
photographed and then set the camera. and central roof of the structure. If
One of the glasses is placed directly wood used for the rod, it should
is
in line with and in front of the camera be about 1 in. in diameter and of hard
lens, as shown in the sketch. If the
camera is of the focusing type, it is
focused in the ordinary manner. Box
and other cameras are set as usual.
The glasses should be well supported
in front of the camera lens, as any
slight move will be quite perceptible
on the ground glass. As the light rays
are largely reduced in passing through
the field glass and camera lens, it is
necessary to give a much longer ex-
posure. This can only be determined
by trying it out, as lenses have ditTer-
ent speeds. —
Contributed by Charles
Leonard, St. John, Can.
Time Indicator for Medicine Bottles clothes basket, can be made and
fastened on the back of the stand, con-
The time to give a patient the next nected with two hinges and supported
dose of medicine can be set on the in-
the sketch, and
by a leg hinged to the bracket, the
dicator, as shown in
lower end of the leg resting on the
retained without
floor back of the stand.
fear of its being
changed until Asmall drawer may also be pro-
vided in the front, in which to put
the dose is again
given. The in- away the soap and brushes, and the
dicator consists
wash boiler can be set underneath.
of a strip of
When one is through washing, the
bracket at the back is let down, the
paper which will
washstand set up against the wall out
reach around the
of the way, and everything is then in
bottle neck and
its place, ready for the next wash day.
divided into 24
is
equal parts rep-
— Contributed by Chas. Homewood,
Waterloo, la.
resenting hours
and half hours. The paper is then
pasted to the bottle neck. An ordi- Pipe Used as a Leather Punch
nary pin is then pushed into the cork as The sketch shows how a very cheap
shown. After a dose of medicine is and serviceable leather punch can be
given to the patient the cork is re- made of an old pipe nip-
placed so that the head of the pin will ple. Pieces of pipe of al-
indicate the time for the ne.xt dose. most any size can be
By this method, an accidental shifting found around a shop,
of the indicator is almost impossible. and it is. therefore, usu-
ally possible to quickly
A Washtub Stand make a punch of the re-
quired size. The cutter
Usually two old chairs or an old box
end can be ground very
makes the stand for the washtub, and
thin to prevent an over-
these are not always the right height.
cut, while a small slot
A stand, like that shown in the illus-
cut a little above it will
tration and having the proper height
allow the removal of the
for the one who does the washing, can
leather slugs. For its
be easily made of 2 by 4-in. material
purpose, this homemade tool is all that
and a few boards. As it is shown, the
can be desired in cheapness and utility.
stand Provides a Place
for the Washing Utensils
and Always the
It
Proper Height
is
To Prevent Oilcloth from Cracking
A good method to prevent oilcloth
from cracking, when it is used on shop
tables or counters, is to first cut a pa-
per cover for the table on which to
place the oilcloth and prepare it as fol-
lows: The paper should be well oiled
with common machine oil and placed
smoothly on the table to be covered.
The oilcloth is then smoothed out on
wringer is fastened on top of the back top of the paper and stretched tightly.
and may remain there all the time, it The oiled paper tends to keep the un-
being out of the way, always in its der side of the cloth moist, which pre-
proper place, and held very firmly. vents cracking. The cloth wears much
A light bracket, on which to set the longer because the paper acts as a pad
139
ings, cranks and pedals, can be pro- The arrangement of the coaster-
cured from a discarded bicycle and fas- brake hub produces the same efl^ect as
tened to the piece C the barrel holding
; a coaster brake on a bicycle. The one
the bearings being snugly fitted into a propelling the flymobile may stop the
hole bored in the piece with an expan- foot-power work without interfering
sive bit. The location will depend on with the travel of the machine, and, be-
the builder and should l)e marked as sides, a little back pressure on the ped-
follows Place the hanger on top of the
: als will apply the brake in the same
piece C, then put a box or board on manner.
the frame where the seat is to be and The flywheel K should be about 18
set the hanger where it will be in a in. in diameter with a 2-in. rim, or face.
comfortable position for pedaling. Such a wheel can be purchased cheaply
Mark this location and bore the hole. from any junk dealer. The flywheel is
The transmission H
consists of a set on a shaft, turning between the
140
pieces C and D
and back of the coast- fastening them to the pieces P and Q,
er-brake wheel H. Two pulleys, L, as shown. These pieces are hinged
about 3 in. in diameter, are fastened to with strap iron, R, at one end, the other
turn with the flywheel on the shaft and end of the piece P being fastened to
are fitted with flanges to separate the the crosspiece F, Fig. 1, of the main
belts. The ends of the shaft should frame. The lower piece Qis worked
run in good bearings, well oiled. by the lever S and side bars, T. A
Another pulley, M, 6 in. in diameter, small spring, U, keeps the ends of the
is made of wood and fastened to the pieces apart and allows the free turn-
rear axle. An idler wheel, shown in ing of the axle until the brake lever is
Fig. 3, is constructed of a small pulley, drawn. The lever S is connected by a
or a large spool, attached to an L- long bar to the hand lever V.
shaped piece of metal, which in turn The steering apparatus W, Figs. 1
is fastened on the end of a shaft con- and 4, is constructed of a piece of gas
trolled by the lever N. The function pipe, 3 ft. 4 in. long, with a wheel at
of this idler is to tighten up the belt or one end and a cord, X, at the other.
release it, thus changing the speed in The center part of the cord is woimd
the same manner as on a motorcycle. several times around the pipe and the
The elevation of the flymobile is giv- ends are passed through screweyes in
en in Fig. 4, which shows the arrange- the main frame pieces A and attached
ment of the belting. The size of the to the front axle, which is pivoted in
pulleys on the flywheel shaft causes it the center under the block Y. The
to turn rapidly, and, for this reason, the lower end of the pipe turns in a hole
weight of the wheel will rvni the car a bored slanting in the block. A
turn of
considerable distance when the coaster the steering wheel causes one end of
hub is released. the cord to wind and the other to un-
The rear axle revolves in bearings, wind, which turns the axle on the cen-
half of which is recessed in the under ter pivot.
edges of the pieces A
while the other The wheels are bicycle wheels, and
half is fastened to a block, screwed on the ends of the front axle are turned to
V-& p?=
f ,x
II
N*
1
m
tj
1;
L^ [f
"^ire
-^^^
"i
rH ~
i
r--1^'
1
-^#i
^nr- — J
Fio.l
' — B
'«<
Fjg.5
Plan and Elevation of the Flymobile, Showing the Location of the Working Parts, to Which, 'ith
a Few Changes, a Motorcycle Engine can be Attached to Make It a Cyclecar; Also
Details of the Brakes, Belt Tightener and Coaster-Brake Hub
over the axle. A simple brake is made receive the cones and nuts, instead of
as shown in Fig. 5. Two metal pieces, using the regular hub axles. The ends
O, preferably brass, are shaped to fit of the rear axle are turned to closely fit
over the shaft with extending ends for the hubs after the ball cups have been
141
removed. A large washer and nut Procure a hat from some one in the
clamp each wheel to the axle so that audience and place in it the die with
it will turn with it. the tin false die covering three sides
The body can be made up as desired, of the block, at the same time telling
from sheet metal, wood, or cloth the audience that the block will be
stretched over ribs of wood, and caused to pass from the hat into the
painted in the manner of an automo-
bile. A tank and tires can be placed on
the back to add to the appearance.
Fenders and a running board can be
attached to the main frame.
With the addition of some cross-
pieces in the main frame at the front
and a motorcycle engine fastened to
them so that the driving sprocket will
be in line with the sprocket on the
With the False Die in Place It Appears
coaster hub, the builder will have a real as If the Box Were Empty
cyclecar.
box, the latter being placed some dis-
tance away. Inform the audience that
The Die-and-Box Trick it would be more difficult for the die
to pass from the box into the hat. Re-
The die-and-box trick, so often per-
move the tin piece from the hat and
formed on the a very
stage,
is
leave the die, holding the surfaces of
interesting and mystifying one. The
the false die toward the audience.
apparatus, however, is simple, consist-
This will give the impression that the
ing of a box, die, a piece of tin in the
die has been removed. Set the hat on
form of three adjacent sides of the the table above the level of the eyes
die, and a hat. The die and box are of the audience. With the back of the
constructed entirely of wood, Ys in.
box toward the audience, open one
thick, and the piece of tin can be cut
top door and insert the tin piece in
from any large coffee can. The box the right-hand compartment so that
is closed by four doors, as shown in
one side touches the back, another the
Fig. 1, two of which are 234 in-
square, and the others, 3Vs in. by SVi
in. The first two are the front doors
and are preferably hinged with cloth
to the two uprights A
and B. Small
pieces of tin are fastened on the doors
at C and D, to provide a means to
open them. The other doors are
placed on top and are hinged to the
back, as shown.
The die is 3 in. square on all sides,
and is constructed of two pieces, 3 in.
The Box with
square ; two pieces, 3% in. by 3 in., Doors on One
and two pieces, 2% in. square. These Side and the Top, and
are fastened together with y2-'m. the False-Die Pattern
the one just opened, which, of course, longer pieces make right angles with
will be empty. This should be done a line drawn tangent to their ends.
several times until some one asks that One end of one short piece is placed
all doors be opened at the same time. flush with the lower ends of the two
After a few more reversals and open- long pieces, and one end of the other
ings as given, open all doors and show short piece flush with the upper ends,
it empty, then take the die from the as shown. They should be clamped
hat. —Contributed by Harold L. Groes- down solidly to keep them from mov-
beck, Salt Lake City, Utah. ing while laying off the divisions.
Light lines are drawn across their
Homemade Pantograph faces as designated by the dimensions.
On these lines and exactly in the
The pantograph consists of four center of the pieces make small marks
pieces of wood, the dimensions de- with a pencil point. Through the
pending somewhat on the size of the pieces A
and B holes are drilled to
work to be drawn. A
convenient size snugly receive the body of a small
for ordinary drawing and enlarging is screweye. The other two pieces are
drilled with a smaller drill so that the
threads of the screweye will take hold
in the wood.
The end C of the piece A has a
metal stand made of brass as shown at
D. This is fastened to the end of the
wood with a small bolt. The hole
should be a snug fit over the body of
the bolt. The lower ends of the brass
are drilled to admit thumb tacks for
holding it to the drawing board.
The joint at E is made of a suitable
binding post that can be procured at
an electrical shop, the shank below
the two joined pieces to be the same
length as the height of the metal stand
D. The end should be filed round and
polished so that it will slip over the
board or paper easily.
The stylus or tracing point F is
X
made of another binding post, in the
1
fit same manner, but instead of a round-
ing end a slightly blunt, pointed end
is filed on it. The end of the piece G
is strengthened by gluing a small block
not numbered in the sketch the num- Substitute for a Broken Bench-
bers run in the opposite direction. Vise Nut
The end C is fastened to the left
side of the drawing board, the picture frequently the case that the nut
It is
to be enlarged is placed under the on bench-vise screw breaks from be-
a
stylus or tracer point, and the paper ing subjected to a too violent strain. If
under the pencil point G. Move the
tracing point over the general outline
of the picture without making any line
before starting, so as to make sure that
the paper and picture are located right.
It is then only necessary to take hold
of the pencil and move it over the
paper while watching the tracer point
to keep it following the lines of the ©
picture. To make a reduced picture,
the original is placed under G, the 1 wo Pieces of Strap Iron Shaped to Fit the Square
tracer point changed to G and the 1 hread Make a uood Substitute Nut
A piece of wire, about 1 ft. long, is rod. Do this three or four times and a
bent into the shape shown and slipped good cutting edge will be obtained.
over the neck of the ink bottle. The Contributed by \\'m. J. Tolson, Lyons,
ends forming the Iowa.
loop around the
neck should fit CAn imitation-gold color may be made
tightly. Theup- with flake white, ground in varnish
per part of the and tinted with a touch of vermilion.
wire is shaped to When striping or lettering is done
—
hold the penholder. Contributed by with this, it will have the appearance
\V. A. Saul, E. Lexington, Mass. of real gilding work.
144
will form a
U-s h a p e d
piece as
Fig Fig. 2
I
shown in the
Brace Made at Leather
sketch'and push the hanging portion
and saves time in adjusting. When in Fill the can up to the
the can.
complete and on the wrist, it will ap- opening with water, close the cover
pear as in Fig. 2.— Contributed by J. —
and set it in the coop. Contributed
H. Harris, Berkeley, Cal. by L. Alberta Norrell, Augusta, Ga.
145
— -ig.-j^
and square or triangle. When it is the small brass tube will fit it very
necessary to make a rough drawing tightly. Take an ordinary hacksaw
and no instruments are at hand, com- and cut a slot in the side of the large
mon and easily obtainable things can piece, as shown at A. This slot is
be used as substitutes. sawed diagonally across the tube and
A sheet of heavy paper folded as extends from one side to the center.
Obtain a piece of sheet brass that will
fit into this slot tightly, and then
solder it and the small tube into the
large tube. The slot and hole for the
small tube should be so located with
respect to each other that the small
tube will empty into the largej one
directly against the piece of sheet
brass soldered in the slot.
The upper end of the large tube
A Compass. Ruler and Square Made of Ordinary should be threaded inside to fit over
Things at Hand
the threads on the faucet, or an attach-
shown at A will serve as a ruler, and ment soldered to it similar to those on
the same sheet given another fold will the end of an ordinary garden hose.
make the square B. If given another A rubber hose should be attached to
fold diagonally, a 45-deg. triangle is the small tube and connected, as
147
A Hand Hoe
A hand hoe, especially adapted for
weeding or cultivating small truck,
particularly onions, can be made of a
piece of hard wood, Ys by 1% in. by 4
The Blade is Flexible so It can Readily Shape Itself
ft. long, and a piece of old bucksaw to the Curves of a Kettle
blade. Ablade, 18 in. long and 2 in.
in scraping pans, kettles, etc., that this
most disagreeable part of the kitchen
work is quickly and easily accom-
plished.
Theflexible blade is attached to the
tin handles with small rivets. The
Bucksawr Blade Attached blade should be thin and narrow
to a Hardwood Handle enough to allow it to bend. When the
handles are pressed together, the blade
wide, bent into a loop is attached with curves to the shape of the utensil's sur-
bolts to the handle. —
Contributed by face. —
Contributed by Mrs. Delia
Ceo. H. Miller, Iowa City, Iowa. Schempp, Brodhead, Wis.
148
Anchor Posts for a Lawn Swing as a shelf for the receiving bottle.
In operation, the solution runs from
A very substantial and convenient
the upper bottle into the funnel, hold-
base for a lawn swing can be made by
ing the filter paper, but it cannot fill
using four anchor posts of cement, as
the funnel completely, because the end
of the glass tube is lower than the
edge of the funnel, and as soon as the
liquid in the funnel covers the end of
the tube, all inflow of air into the
upper bottle is stopped, and, thereby,
further flow of the solution into the
MOULD
BOX funnel prevented, until enough has fil-
Fib. I
tered through to uncover the end of
An Anchor Post of Cement and a Mold Box for Shaping the tube and thus permit air to again
Four Posts at a Time
enter the upper bottle. —
Contributed
shown in Fig. 1. are made
The posts by G. Simons, Chicago.
with a recess, A, to receive the legs of
the swing, and of any suitable size.
They may be placed with the upper Grinding Scissors
face on a level with the lawn, or higher
a pair of scissors be ground
Whether
if desired.
or the marks or scratches left
filed,
A rough mold box, Fig. 2, lined with from the contact with the abrasive
paper, will do for making the posts. should all extend across the bevel in
The box does not require any top or
bottom it is simply placed on a board
;
This funnel-tilling lil- the direction of the line ED, Fig. 1, and
automatically pre-
ter never in the direction of the line GF.
vents the solution from If the cutting edge be examined under
dispatch, when scissors are sharpened rectangular piece of wood and is fas-
in manner. The same principle
this tened with a tenon in a mortise cut in
holds good for metal snips. the vise jaw B. The clamping ar-
The angle HIJ, Fig. 3, varies accord-
ing to the material to be cut, and the
type of shear. A greater angle is re-
quired on metal shears than on shears
for domestic uses. —
Contributed by A.
Clifton, Chicago.
To use the demagnetizer, connect it and will tend to destroy any perma-
to a 110-volt alternating-current circuit nent magnetism that may be possessed
with a rheostat in circuit of such a by an object placed inside of it. The
form that the current will not exceed full current of three amperes should be
three amperes and that it may be re- allowed to pass through the winding
duced to practically zero in value by for a few minutes after the object to
increasing the resistance of the rheo- be demagnetized is inserted, and then
stat. The magnetic field inside the gradually reduced, and the object re-
coil is rapidly changing in direction moved.
The Horn or Sounding Box is Constructed in the Au xiliary Base and the Part for Connecting the Sounding
Tube to the Box Consists of Ordinary G.as Pipe Fastened with a Clip at the Back
on the barrel to the proper adjustment. cut the can and bend the side down as
This simple arrangement will relieve a shown and punch holes to recei\e the
great deal of the eye strain and will upper ends of the wires. Make the
holes so that the wires will be about
5/16 in. apart.
A Glue-Spreader Holder
The spreader that is supplied with
bottles of liquid glue should not be
placed on any surface, as it will soon
stick to it. A
holder that will
Shield to Cover the Eye That is Not Used 'When keep the spread-
Looking into a Microscope er in a safe place
can be made of a
be of assistance to the most experi- piece of wire
enced users of microscopes. Contrib-— which' twisted
is
uted by G. B. Fenton, Charleston, W. about the neck
Virginia. of the bottle, as
shown in the V_
sketch, and the
Transferring Magazine Pictures
ends bent up to receive the spreader.
Select pictures from newly printed
papers and magazines. Rub wax from
Stop on a Chair Rocker for a Baby
a paraffin candle over a sheet of clean
white paper, covering a space as large For
a baby, too small to rock with-
as the picture to be copied. Place out tipping the chair over, a small
the paper, waxed side down, on rhe willow or other suitable rocking chair
picture and while holding it firmly
with the fingers of one hand, rub the
back thoroughly with some hard sub-
stance until all parts of the picture
have been gone over. Remove the The Strip on the Rocker Prevents the Child Tipping
the Chair Too Far Either 'Way
paper and a perfect copy of the picture
will he found upon the waxed side. may be made safe in the following
Contributed by Kenneth G. Merlin, manner:
Brooklyn, N. Y. A strip, A, is fastened on the out-
154
side of the rocker with small screws so fective constant-level device. The
that it may be removed without in- outer end of the inverted U-tube is
juring the chair. A
rubber-covered curved upward so that it never empties.
tack driven in on the under side at each If desired, the upward curve may be
end of the strip modifies the shock and omitted and the straight end immersed
the baby can rock to its heart's con- in a small vessel of water. All that
tent without danger of turning over. is necessary now for the successful
Contributed by Mrs. G. W. Coplin, working of the device is that the inner
Bay City, Mich. or tank end. A, of the tube be lower
—
than the outer end in other words, be-
Homemade Countersink for Wood —
low the level of the end B and the in-
ner end below the level of the fluid.
A
round or flat-head bolt can be Of course, the U-tube must be first
made into a good rosebit or reamer for filled with liquid and will then act as
countersinking holes for screw heads. an intermittent, never-breaking siphon.
Should the tank fill above the end B,
the siphon drains the fluid down to
that level and no lower, even if the in-
ner leg of the tube reach the bottom.
To maintain this level against loss by
evaporation some slight inflow is nec-
essary.
It will be noted that if the inner
end of the siphon were above the outer
end, the siphon would break as soon
as the liquid in the tank fell to the
Round and Square Heads of Bolts Shaped and Notched
to Make Countersinks —
inner mouth. Contributed by Harry
N. Holmes, Richmond, Ind.
In the illustration, Fig. 1 shows a
reamer made of a round-head bolt, and
Fig. 2, one made of a square-head bolt.
The round-head makes the best reamer Homemade Electric Bed Warmer
as more cutters can be tiled in the sur- Theheat developed by a carbon-fil-
face and less work is required to file ament lamp is sufficiently high to allow
it into shape. its use as a heating element of, for in-
stance, a bed warmer. There are a
To Maintain a Constant Level of
number of other small heaters which
can be easily made and for which
Liquids in Vessels lamps form very suitable heating ele-
It is frequently desirable in labora- ments, but the bed warmer is probably
tory experiments, and in practica-l work the best example. All that is required
as well, to main- is a tin covering which can be made of
tam a constant an old can about 3I/2 in. in diameter.
level in a tank The top is cut out and the edge filed
without allowing smooth. The lamp-socket end of the
^- it to become flexible cord is inserted in the can and
In many
full. the shade holder gripped over the
cases an outlet opening. A small lamp of about five
pipe at a certain candlepower will do the heating.
height in the A flannel bag, large enough to slip
side of the tank over the tin can and provided with a
is not desirable, and in laboratory ex- neck that can be drawn together by
periments with beakers or crocks is, of means of a cord, gives the heater a
course, impossible. more finished appearance, as well as
The diagram shows a simple but ef- making it more pleasant to the touch.
155
another, large enough to receive the dius desired, and the protractor is read
projection from a pull socket, about 2 where the elastic band crosses its scale.
in. from the other end, or the end to A light band should be used, and
be used as the bottom of the block.
A clamp made of spring brass, as
shown, was screwed securely to the
board, to clamp the socket firmly. A
wire was passed through the small
hole and stretched across the room
from the door at a height to bring the
light about G ft. from the floor. Then
the socket was clamped to the strip
with the chain passed through the hole
cut for it. The cord attached to the The Extension Marks can
chain was run to the door casing, be Easily Read on the
Protractor under the
passed through a screweye and Elastic Band
weighted with a nut or some light ob-
ject, to keep it taut. To light the looped as shown in Fig. In this
3.
lamp or put it out only a pull on the way a circle of any size may be quickly
string was necessary. divided, if a pencil mark is made each
Thelight can be slid along on the
time the band comes over the proper
wire from one end of the room to the
figure. —
Contributed by Thos. L. Par-
a_
LiZi ker, Wibau.x. Mont.
On
Light
or Off
A good and cheaply applied method is
from a
Distance o to rub the painted surface with a paste
of ordinary whiting. This is allowed
to dry and when it is rubbed off with
a cloth the dirt and grease is taken
away with it. The whiting is cheap
and can be purchased at any drug
store.
other, or can be detached from the
strip when desired by unhooking the
cord from the chain and taking the A Door Stop
socket from the clamp. If more de- A
very good door stop can be easily
sirable, the block can be fastened made of a piece of metal as shown in
permanently to some object instead of the sketch. The
—
being on the wire. Contributed by metal is bent and
L. M. Eifel, Chicago. fastened with
screws to the
wall against •0
Projecting Protractor Readings
which the door .fft
A simple and efficient means of swings. The ex-
projecting protractor readings to a tending end fits
larger size is shown in Fig. 1. One under the door
point of the compass is placed at the knob and pre-
center of the protractor and an elastic vents from striking the wall. Con-
it —
band is looped between the points. tributed by C. R. Poole, Los Angeles,
Then the points are spread to the ra- California.
158
Welding Small Resistance-Wire Bench, or Table, with a Seat on Each Side That
Connections can be Folded for Carrying Purposes
THE popular
nishes untold
roller coaster that fur-
amusement for the
all the materials for building this roller
coaster did not exceed $10.
multitudes that patronize amusement
parks during the summer can be easily
duplicated in a smaller way on a vacant
lot or back yard for the children of
the home or the boys of a neighbor-
;
out pushing it. The car can be carried are properly adjusted, and securely
back starting by adults, but for
for fastened between washers with a nut
children a small rope can be used over on the end of the axle. Guide wheels,
the platform to draw it back on the B, are placed on the sides in the man-
^^
i|liii""||ii'
""
„^||Mllillllllll|llll'>^
I
HjJ II I. Tlgjn
Detail of the Car, ^Vheels and the Trestle, Which is Attached to a Tie
track, or a small windlass may be ar- ner shown. These wheels are ordinary
ranged for the purpose. truck casters, not the revolving kind,
The main frame of the car is 3 ft. 2 in. in diameter.
long and about 13 in. wide, firmly fas- About Vj-in. clearance should be
tened at the corners. The axles for provided l^etween the guide wheels B
the wheels are machine steel, 19 in. and the guard rail C, on the track.
long, turned up on the ends and When the car is made in this manner
threaded in the manner of a bicycle itruns close to the track and there is
axle to fit parts of bicycle hubs, at- no place where a child can get a foot
tached to the main frame as shown at or hand injured under or at the sides
A. The wheels are solid, 4 in. in diam- of the car. The one described has been
eter and 1 in. thick, and are set on the used by all the children, large and
bicycle cone of the ball cup, after they small, for a year without accident.
Detail of the Uprights, Axle and Spokes, and the End and Side Elevatione of the Completed Wheel,
Showing Braces and Cars Attached
shaft in place. These can be made of sugar barrels cut in half. The hoops
.blocks of wood with a semicircle cut are then securely nailed, both inside
out, the blocks being nailed over the and outside; a block of wood, E, se-
shaft, while it is in place, the nails curely attached to the half barrel on
entering the ends of the uprights. the outside, and another block on the
The main shaft C is made of a 2V2-in. inside opposite the outside block.
square piece of good material, 4 ft. Holes are bored 2i^ ft. from the ends
long. The ends are made round to of the spokes and a bolt run through
serve as bearings, and the square part them and through the blocks on the
is fitted with the spokes or car car- edges of the half barrels. The extend-
riers. These consist of 4 pieces, each ing ends of the spokes are used to pro-
1 in. thick, 4 in. wide and 13 ft. long. pel the wheel. Four children can ride
In the center of each piece cut a notch in the wheel at one time.— Contributed
one-half the thickness so that when by Maurice Baudier, New Orleans, La.
I<i2
The Ropes being Tied to the Wheel Rim will Easily Hulling Walnuts
Turn around the Pole
Procure a barrel that is water-tight
space for the turning of the ropes. The and mount it on a shaft so that it runs
pole may be of gas pipe or wood, long- between standards like a barrel churn.
enough to extend about 12 ft. above Fill the barrel about half full of wal-
the ground. An iron wheel is attached nuts, cover them with water and throw
on the upper end so that it will revolve in a small quantity of gravel as grind-
easily on an axle, which may be an iron ing material. Close the opening tightly
pin driven into the post. A few iron and turn the barrel for about 20 min-
washers placed on the pin under the utes. The walnuts will come out clean
wheel will reduce the friction. and smooth as glass. Contributed by —
Ropes of varying lengths are tied to Arthur Seufert, The Dalles, Oregon.
the rim of the wheel. The rider takes
hold of a rope and runs around the
Stick for Lowering Top Sash of a
pole to start the wheel in motion, then
he swings clear of the ground. Stream- Window
ers of different colors and flowers for To make it easy to raise and lower
special occasions may be attached to the upper sash of a bathroom window
make a pretty display.— Contriliuted which is behind the bathtub I devised
by J. Bert Mitchell, Wichita, Kans.
one was screwed into the top rail of on the choice of the maker, and if the
the sash and the other into the end of bed is brass, the wood can be finished
a light stick a little longer than the
length of upper sash.
The device is left on the window
permanently and affords a ready means
of handling the sash without stepping
into the bathtub, which would other-
—
wise be necessary. Contributed by W.
E. Morey, Chicago.
Procure a discarded umbrella and its stead. The wire is bent so the ends
remove the cloth, leaving only the steel
may in holes in the window
be inserted
frame. Join the ends of the ribs by
casing. As
the shade is drawn out, it
is extended outward by the wire in the
position of an awning. —
Contributed
by Arthur Kesl, Chicago, HI,
Vaulting-Pole Attachments
Some means must be provided on
vaulting-pole standards to allow for
the free release of the pole should the
vaulter strike it in going over. One of
the simplest of the many devices that
can be used for this purpose is shown
in Fig. 1. It is made
of heavy wire,
bent and slipped over the standard as
Frame Supporting a Vine
shown in Fig. 2. The projection on
the inside of the link is used similar to
running a fine wire through the tip of the tongue of a buckle in adjusting the
each rib and giving it one turn around height of the pole on the standards.
to hold them at equal distances apart. Each standard has a series of holes
The handle is then inserted in the on its front side. These holes may be
ground and some climbing vine planted numbered for convenience. The pole
beneath it. The plant will climb all
over the steel frame and make a very
attractive lawn piece. —
Contributed by
John F. Campbell, X. Somerville,
Massachusetts.
Fco 2
Shade Attachments
CBronze striping, when thoroughly
A narrow slit on the under side of the dry, should be covered with a thin
box permits the shade to be drawn out. coat of white shellac 'to keep it from
The stick at the end is removed and a tarnishing.
165
An Edger, Similar to a Garden Plow, for Quickly Trimming the Sod around a Flower Bed
166
and its shaft is removed and replaced circleon a l~s-in. radius. Start at the
with one measuring- 10 length. To in. in edge on this arc and lay ofif eight
the end of the shaft is soldered a piece chords of equal lengths, and bore V^-
of wire, bent as shown in the sketch. in. holes on the marks.
A bolt is attached to the center of the The posts are turned up, as shown
motor base, so that its threaded end by the detail, Fig. 3. This will require
will pass through the slot in the up- seven posts and two half posts. The
right, where it is held with a wing half posts are secured to the base with
nut. The battery cells may be placed small brads. The round part at the end
on the back of the upright and a small is turned slightly tajiering, so as to
switch mounted at the top and in front. make a tight fit in the hole of the shelf.
— Contributed bv Rav F. Yates, Niag- After stringing the posts on a piece of
ara Falls, N. Y.' brass wire, %; in. in diameter, and bend-
ing it in the proper shape, the posts
are glued in the holes.
A Clothes Rack
A T-shaped slot with a long top and
The rack is constructed of hard wood a short leg is cut out with a scroll saw
throughout, and as each piece is made, in one end of each arm. Make sure
it should be sandpapered and varnished to have each slot exactly Yo in. from
the upper side of each arm. All edges
should be well rounded to prevent tear-
ing of the clothes.
ff Make a semicircular platform for
fli Tie ^ _. the arms to bear upon when extended.
1^ This may be either half of a turned disk
or built up in the three segments, each
fastened with screws to the base. If
the brass wire is exactly 1 in. from the
-1 r: shelf and the thickness of the wood be-
tween the T-slot and the upper edge of
the arm i/o in., the thickness of the
f platform should be slightly under Vo
ttzll in. to make the arms rest horizontally
when they are extended.
The shelf is fastened to the base
Any Number of Arms Up to Its Limit may be Used with three or four 2-in. screws, and the
at a Time
ends of the brass wire are run through
or otherwise hnished. The plan view holes in the base and clinched on the
is shown in P'ig. 1 the construction of
;
back side. The rack may be fastened
an arm, in Fig. 3 and the pin, in;
in place on the kitchen wall with two
Fig. 3. large wood screws, or, if the wall is
The base is %
in- thick and of the Itrick, with expansion bolts. The fas-
dimensions shown in Fig 4. The pro- tening in either case must be secure to
jection on each side, measuring GVo in. hold the heavy weight of wet clothes.
long and 1 in. wide, is made separately Contributed by D. A. Price, Wilming-
and glued to the main part after dress- ton, Del.
ing and lieveling the edges.
The shelf consists of material 2 in.
thick and made in a semicircular form
How to Make a Pair of Foot Boats
on a radius of S-^ in. On this arc, lay On ponds or small lakes not deep
off chords, as shown in Fig. 1 the first ; enough for a boat one can use the foot
ones on each side being one-half the boats, as illustrated, for walking on the
length of the others. Carefully square water. The boats are made of white
up the edges for appearance. To lay wood, known as basswood, as this
oft' the post holes, scribe an arc of a wood is easily bent when steamed, and
16:
the curved part should be shaped ear of corn served. The square bolt
neatly. end will hold the ear securelv while the
Two sides are cut out, as shown, and
the boards are nailed or, better still,
screwed to them. Each straight part
may consist of one piece, in which
case there will be no joints to make
waterproof, but if boards of sufficient
size cannot be had, pieces can be used.
In this instance the edges should be
planed smooth, so that a good joint
may be had, which can be made water-
tight with white lead.
It is best to make the bottom of one
piece if possible, at least for the length
of the curve. The wood is thoroughly The Glass Knobs Make a Clean
and Sanitary Holder for
steamed, then fastened in place on the the Ear of Corn
curved part.
A strap of suitable length is fastened
kernels are eaten from the cob. Con- —
tributed by Victor Labadie, Dallas,
on the top for the toe, so that the boats
Texas.
can be controlled with the feet.
To propel the boats along easily, a
web or wing should be attached to the Inflating Toy Balloons
under side, so that it will catch the The inflation of rubber Ijalloons may
be accomplished with manufactured
gas by using the simple pipe arrange-
ment shown in the sketch. The con-
nection A is for the gas hose, which is
similar to those used for a table lamp.
The gas bag B is a football or punch-
ing bag connected to the pipe as
shown. This receives the gas as it is
let in by the valve A. The toy balloon
Foot Boats for Walking on Shallow Water Where C is connected to the pipe in the same
a Boat cannot be Used
manner and the valve D used to regu-
water on the back thrust while it will late the flow of gas. The gas is easily
fold up when the boat is slid forward. ])ressed out of the ball into the balloon.
Contributed by Waldo Saul, Lexing-
ton, Mass.
A Green-Corn Holder
Neat and attractive green-corn hold-
ers for table use can be made of small-
sized glass drawer knobs, having a bolt
1 in. in length. The bolt head is cut
off with a hacksaw, and its body is
filed to make four sides running to a
taper, leaving enough threads to secure Pipe Arrangement, Punching Bag and Valves to
Admit Gas to a Toy Rubber Balloon
it in the knob. The threads are smeared
with white lead, then it is screwed into As hydrogen gas is much better than
the knob and sufficient time allowed for the manufactured gas, it is best to use
the lead to set before using it. and can be put in the balloon in the
A pair of knobs are required for each same manner.
168
An Oar Holder
Persons rowing boats, particularly A Medicine Dropper on a Faucet Produces a ^Vhirl-
ing Motion of the \Vater in the Bowl
beginners, find that the oars will slip
out of the oarlocks, turn or fall into priced wash box, by cutting of¥ the
upper end of the rubber nipple on a
bent glass medicine dropper and plac-
ing it on the faucet as shown in the
illustration. This arrangement causes
The Screweye in Positionon the Oar and over One the water to whirl around in the bowl,
Prong of the Oarlock
which keeps the prints in constant
the water. This may be avoided by motion, thus insuring a thorough
turning a screweye of sufficient size to —
washing. Contributed by L. O. D.
prevent binding on the lock into the Sturgess, Arlington, Oregon.
169
to the end of the rod N, which is Vi in- heel of the latch. The number beneath
in diameter. The outer end of this the pointer is noted then the next
;
rod is fitted vvith a handle or turning turned up in a like manner, all being
head as desired. That shown at is O done while the drawer is open and the
made of two pieces of wood screwed disks in plain sight. The combination
together, with a pointer, P, placed be- can be changed only by changing the
tween them. A washer, R, is placed location of the pins in the disks. Con- —
between the drawer end and the handle tributed by C. B. Hanson, Fitchburg,
to take up any looseness and to allow Massachusetts.
the free turning of the rod.
A dial, S, is made of paper and the How to Start Small Machine Screws
division marks and numbers placed Small machine screws are sometimes
upon it. The latch T is fitted in a U- very difficult to start, especially when
shaped piece of metal, U, which is fas- used parts of a
in
tened to the inside of the drawer end machine that cannot
where its heel will rest on the edges of be easily reached
the disks. When the right combination with the fingers. A
is made by turning the handle first one good way to start
way and then the other, the latcli will them is by means of
drop into the notches of the disks as a piece of fine wire
they will be all in one place. wound snugly
When the drawer is to be locked, around the screw un-
turn the handle back from the last der its head. They
turn made for the combination and the can be placed and started by means of
latch will be driven upward into its the wire and when the first threads
keeper and the notches scattered so have caught the screw it can be held
that the latch will not drop until the by the screwdriver while the wire is
combination is again set. —
withdrawn. Contributed by F. W.
The numbers for the combination Bently, Huron, S. D.
170
upper end being drawn through the placed the wheel A. The steel
on
loop at the top and cut off, and the ball Eput on the thin cover of the
is
lower end then pulled out and a knot box, and the magnet causes it to roll
tied in it close to the windings of the around as the wheel turns. The box
yarn.
tween the rollers they are brought to- How to Make a Radium Photograph
gether by a pressure of* the foot on the The radium rays, like the X-rays, af-
—
crosspiece F. Contributed by J. Den-
fect the photographic plate, as is well
nis McKennon, New Britain, Conn. known, but it would naturally be sup-
posed that the enormous cost of radium
A Vise Used as a Caliper Gauge
would prevent the making of such a
photograph by the amateur.
Not infrequently it is desired to It is a fact, however, that a radium
know the distance from one side to photograph can be made at home at
another of some part that cannot be practically no cost at all, provided the
amateur has patience enough to gather
the necessary material, which is noth-
ing else but broken incandescent gas
mantles. These (especially Welsbach
mantles) contain a salt of the rare
metal thorium, which is slightly radio-
active. The thing to do, then, is to
collect a sufficient quantity of broken
mantles to cover the bottom of a small
The Jaws of a Vise, If They Are
True. Will Make a Caliper Gauge —
cardboard box a dryplate box, for in-
o Giving a Perfect Measurement
—
stance with a layer of powdered
mantle substance. Upon this layer
directly measured
with a rule, and and pressed tightly against it is placed
when no calipers are at hand. But a piece of cardboard then some metal
;
A Shot That will Pass through the Fixture Arm will Uses Bamboo
for a Pole
Carry a Cord for Pulling in the Wires
Select a good bamboo
pole, about
B, in the same manner as a fishline is
18 ft. long, and cut
into three lengths
it
weighted. The shot will roll through as follows A
piece from the top, 3I/2
:
frames, put a dusting cloth into the making it black. After this is dry,
claws and slide the ring into place, as the leather can be polished in the
shown in Fig. 2. usual way.
The longer and larger end of the
pole used as a clothesline pole. One
is To Prevent Corks Sticking in
end of this pole is fitted with a yoke Bottle Necks
made of No. 6 gauge galvanized wire,
as shown in Fig. 3. The wire for the Corks will always adhere to the
yoke is 10 in. long, and after bending necks of bottles containing glue or
it in shape, the two upper ends should other sticky liquids, with the result
be 2 in. wide at the top and 2 in. deep. that it becomes neces-
Insert the straight end of the wire into sary to cut or dig the
the smaller end of the pole and set it cork into small pieces in
in firmly with plaster of Paris. The order to remove the con-
end of the pole should be securely tents from the bottle.
wound with wire to keep the bamboo A
simple and effective
—
from splitting. C(intributed by Ger- way to prevent a cork
trude M. Bender, Utica, N. Y. from sticking is to place
a small piece of waxed
paper on the bottle opening so that
Making Common Lock Less Pickable
when the cork is pressed in, the paper
The ordinary lock can be readily will be between the cork and glass, as
changed so that it will be quite im- shown.
possible to pick it with a common key.
Attaching a Vise Jaw to a Bench The sulphur burns slowly so that the
Procure a toothed metal rail or articles will not beharmed.
rack, A, such as is used for small lad- After the sulphur has burned away,
der tracks, and mount it on the lower the jar should be kept closed for a few
minutes and when the articles are
remo^'ed, the stains will be gone. This
is harmless to try, and the cloth will
not be injured if it is in a dry condi-
tion. The articles should be washed
and dried as soon as they are taken
out of the jar.
notch when the opening operation first four pieces, are next made ready
ceases. When it is desired to reduce and fastened with glue and flat-head
the opening, it is only necessary to lift screws to the back of the first pieces,
the rail by means of the string D. A as shown. This allows %
in. for glass,
button is tied to the upper end of the picture and backing, and i/o in. to lap
string on top of the bench, to keep it over the front of the picture on all
handy for changing the jaw. Contrib- — edges.
uted by Harry F. Lowe, Washington, By arranging the pieces as shown in
District of Columbia. Fig. 1, a strong corner lap is secured.
BACK j«
difficult to use with accuracy. Two Anyone who has used a sawbuck
screws should be used in each joint to knows how inconvenient it is to have
reinforce the glue.— Contributed by a stick roll or lift up as the saw blade
James Gafifney, Chicago, 111.
Hunting-Knife Handles
Very artistic handles for hunting
knives and carving sets can be made
by using disks of horn. Procure some
cowhorns from a slaughter house and
split them with a saw, using only the
large portion of the horn. The split
c
—
when this was fresh. Contributed by
T. Whelan, Paterson, N. J.
/^^^ife5
LAyt A Mouse Trap
The Float in the Pan, and Contacts for Closing the After using various means to catch
Circuit to Ring the Bell the mice in my pantry, I finally de-
cided I could not catch them in the
ing a device that will sound an alarm
ordinary manner. Knowing that mice
when the water reaches a level safely
are not afraid of dishes but will run
below the overflow point. A device
all over them, while they will stay
of this kind may be attached to the
back of the refrigerator as shown in
away from other
things, I took a
the sketch. A float, A, is attached to
dinner plate, a
the lower end of a rod, B, which slides
bowl that held
through staples CC. At the upper end
about 1 qt., a
of the rod, a V-shaped copper sheet,
thimble, filled
D, is soldered. This makes the con-
tact points in the electric wiring. The
with toasted
cheese, and arranged the articles as
battery E can lie placed under or back
The shown in the sketch, balancing the
of the refrigerator as desired.
bowl on the thimble. When the
method of wiring is clearly shown.
mouse nibbled the cheese, the bowl
came down on it, making it a prisoner.
A Live-Bait Pail The whole was then dropped in a pail
of water. Scald the dish and bowl be-
Every fisherman knows that live
fore using them again to remove all
bait will soon die if they do not receive
have succeeded in traces of the mouse.
sufficient air. I
keeping bait
alive and healthy Quickly Made Rheostat
by using a pail
of my own con- A short time ago I found it neces-
struction, which sary to melt some silver, and in set-
is provided with ting up an arc light to obtain the heat
a compressed-air I made a rheostat by winding wire
row inclined slightly upward, and the gears being such as will cause the mir-
lower row slightly downward. If a rors to revolve slowly, when the motor
greater number of angles of reflection is running at normal speed.
are desired, the mirrors may be smaller, Connected to the motor are two or
and arranged in four circular rows in- more dry, or other suitable batteries, a
stead of two, each row being inclined small door being provided on the side
at a slightly different angle. of the lower part of the pedestal to
The shaft is pointed at the lower end enable the batteries to be replaced, or
and rests in a bearing drilled with a turned ofif, and to give access to the
V-shaped depression, the bearing being motor. A
circular shield is erected
supported by soldering or riveting at over the mirror carrier, surmounted by
each end to the inner sides of the pedes- an ornamental ball, to protect from the
tal shell. The upper portion of the weather and to provide a more finished
shaft passes through a bearing which is appearance. A waterproof canvas cover
also soldered or riveted at the ends, to may be slipped over the whole in rainy
the inner surfaces of the pedestal shell. weather.
180
uprights. Asmall hole is punched on moving hand will easily break the con-
one side top of the can so that it
in the tact.
will center the paddle of the wheel. On The magnetic arrangement consists
the opposite side of the top another of a 3-ohm coil, E, mounted, as shown.
larger hole is punched and tightly fitted
with a wood plug. This is the opening
for filling the boiler with water. The
can should be filled about two-thirds
full and set on a stove. The steam,
coming under pressure from the small
hole, strikes the paddles of the wheel
with considerable force and causes it
to revolve rapidly. Be careful not to
set the boiler on too hot a fire.
illustration was designed and used with The knife switch L is fastened to the
entire satisfaction. bottom of the case so that the handle
The device consists of an ordinary will project through a slot in one side
cheap watch, a standard, or support, for of the box. A trip piece, M, and a
an adjusting screw, a small coil, a mov- small eye for attaching a spiral spring,
able armature, a knife switch, and a N, are soldered to the knife switch.
trip arrangement. A neat box or case, These two attachments for the switch
about 5 in. square and 3 in. high, is first are insulated from the other parts.
constructed. A round recess, % in. Two binding posts are mounted on
deep, is cut in the center of the top, to top, one being connected to one ter-
admit the watch. The standard A is minal of the coil E and the other to the
made of brass, Vs i"- thick and i/o in. watch case. The other terminal of the
wide, bent as shown, and a i\-in. hole is coil is connected to the standard A.
drilled in the end of the long arm where The two binding posts are connected
it will exactly center over the pivot in series with one or two dry cells, and
holding the watch hands. A iVin. rod, the switch L is connected in series with
B, is closely fitted in the hole and sup- the lamp used for printing.
plied with a knurled wheel, C, on the The operation is as follows The arm :
upper end, and an L-shaped arm, D, D, being set for a certain time, the lever
is fastened to the lower end. The end of the switch L is set and the light re-
of this arm should be filed to a point, mains lit until the minute hand strikes
or a very thin piece of brass soldered the point on the arm D, when the bat-
to it, so that the end will just touch the tery circuit is closed causing the coil
minute hand of the watch. The tip to draw the armature H
and allowing
end of the point should be bent slightly the spring N
to open the switch L.
from the perpendicular toward the di- The lamp is then extinguished. Con- —
rection in which the watch hands are tributed by James P. Lewis, Golden,
moving, so that, when it is set, the Colorado.
182
The staple should be long enough to together. Then nail on ten by 2-in. %
admit the end of the bolt. Contributed — strips, 53 long, or as long as the
in.
width of the bed, leaving about i/^ in.
by Clarence L. Orcutt, Buffalo, N. Y.
space between the strips. These strips
will thus go about two-thirds of the
Cork-Covered Clothes Peg way around the circle, leaving room to
When screws or nails are used to insert the pillows when the bed is not
hang clothes or other articles on, run in use. Cover the bolster with build-
the nail or screw ing paper or any other suitable mate-
through a bot- rial, and it is ready for the pillow
tle cork as —
shams. Contributed by C. Martin, Jr..
shown. The Chicago.
/"^W^ ^'"-^ cork will pre-
vent the nail or A Fish-Scaling Knife
(^*^ll, screw from tear-
A useful iish-scaliiig and skinning
ing the article
knife can l)e made of an old broken
and also insure
hacksaw blade. This must be at least
the cloth against
in. long and will make a knife with
rust marks. (1
A
broom, having the straws bent and Grind the blade to the
a o-in. blade.
out of shape, yet not worn out, can be shape shown and make a handle for it
fixed up like new in the following man- by using two strips of maple, 14 '"
ner: Slightly dampen the straw with thick and 4 in. long. These are riveted
water and wrap with heavy paper, then together with 3 in. of the blade be-
place a weight on it. After standing
under pressure for several days the
—
tween them. Contributed by John f^.
W'aite, Cambridge, Mass.
straw will be restored to the shape of
To Prevent Moles from Damaging
Growing Seeds
The food most liked by the ground
mole the sprouts of peas and corn.
is
A way to protect these growing
seeds is to dip them in kerosene just
Method of Straightening the Straws
before planting. The mole will not
a new broom. Paint brushes can be touch the oil-covered seed, and the
treated in the same manner, but in that seeds are not injured in the least.
case linseed oil should be used instead Contributed by J. W. Bauholster,
of water. Gresham, O.
183
How to Make a
Heliograph
By R. B. HUEY
The heliograph which is used in the firmly held the frame with brass
to
army provides a good method of send- strips, wide, and 3 in. long. The
i/> in.
ing messages by the reflection of the strips are drilled centrally to admit the
Sim's rays. In the mountains there bolts, and then drilled at each end for
are stations from which messages are a screw to fasten them to the frame.
sent by the heliograph for great dis- This construction is clearly shown in
tances, and guides carry them for use Fig. 1.
in case of trouble or accident. The A is cut centrally through the
hole
wireless telegraph delivers messages backing of the frame and a small hole,
by electricity through the air, but the not over %
in. in diameter, is scratched
heliograph sends them by flashes of through the silvering on the glass. If
light. the trunnions are centered properly,
The main part of the instrument is the small hole should be exactly in line
the mirror, which should be about 4 with them and in the center.
in. square, set in a wood frame and A U-shaped support is made of
swun^ on trunnions made of two wood strips, %
in. thick and 1 in. wide,
Fig. I
Fig. 3
Fig. 2
Detail of the Parts for Making the Mirror and Sight Rod Which are Placed on a Base Set on a Tripod
Top, the Whole being Adjusted to Reflect the Sun's Rays in Any Direction Desired
square-head bolts, each i/4 in. in di- the length of the uprights being 3i o in.
ameter, and 1 in. long, which are and the crosspiece connecting their
184
lower ends a trifle longer than the upper unnailed ends are spread to slip
width of the frame. These are put to- over the blocks on the tripod top.
gether, as shown in Fig. 2, with small These ends are bored to loosely fit over
Fig. 9
Fic.8
The Parts in Detail for Making the Tripods and the Shutter for Flashing
the Light, and Diagram Showing the Location of the Tripods
to Direct the Light through the Shutter
brackets at the comers. A slot, in. % the headless nails driven part way into
deep and Vi i"- wide, is cut into the the block ends. One tripod leg is
upper end of each upright to receive shown in Fig. G.
the trunnions on the mirror frame. The screen, or shutter, is mounted
Nuts are turned on the bolt ends on a separate tripod and is shown in
tightly, to clamp the standard tops
against the brass strips on the mirror
Fig. 7. Cut out two slats, %
in. thick,
21/3 in. wide and 6 in. long, from hard
frame. The cross strip at the bottom wood, and taper both edges of these
is clamped to the base by means of a slats down to j\ in. Small nails are
bolt, li/o in. long. The hole for this driven into the ends of the slats and
bolt should be exactly below the peep- the heads are filed off so that the pro-
hole in the mirror and run through one jecting ends will form trunnions for
end of the baseboard, which is in. % the slats to turn on. Make a frame of
thick, 2 in.wide and 10 in. long. wood pieces, %
in. thick and 21/0 in.
At the opposite end of the base, wide, the opening in the frame being
place a sighting rod, which is made as (iin. square. Before nailing the frame
follows : The rod diameter
is I/2 in. in together bore holes in the side uprights
and 8 in. long. The upper end is for the trunnions of the slats to turn
fitted with a piece of thick, white card- in. These holes are 1%
in. apart. The
board, cut 1/4 in. in diameter and hav- frame then nailed together and also
is
ing a projecting shank 1 in. long, as nailed to the tripod top. The shutter
shown in Fig. 3. The rod is placed in is operated with a key very similar to
a Yo-in. hole bored in the end of the a telegraph key. The construction of
baseboard, as shown in Fig. 2. To keep this key is shown
in Fig. 7. A part of
the rod from slipping through the hole a spool fastened to a stick that is
is
a setscrew is made of a small bolt with pivoted on the opposite side of the
the nut set in the edge of the base- frame. The key is connected to the
board, as shown in Fig. 4. slats in the frame with a bar and rod,
The tripod head is formed of a wood to which a coil spring is attached, as
disk, 5 in. in diameter, with a hole in shown in Fig. 8. Figure 9 shows the
the center, and three small blocks of positions of the tripods when the in-
wood, 1 in. square and 8 in. long, nailed strument is set to flash the sunlight
to the under side, as shown in Fig. 5. through the shutter. The regular tele-
The tripod legs are made of light graph code is used in flashing the light.
strips of wood, % in. thick, 1 in. wide To set the instrument, first turn the
and .5 ft. long. Two
of these strips, cardboard disk down to uncover the
nailed securely together to within 20 point of the sight rod, then sight
in, of the top, constitute one leg. The through the hole in the mirror and ad-
185
just the sight rod so that the tip end A Cupboard-Door Spice-Box Shelf
•comes squarely in line with the receiv-
ing station. When the instrument is To keep the spice boxes in a handy
properly sighted, the shutter is set up place where they would be together
directly in front of it and the card- and not behind larcrer articles on the
board disk is turned up to cover the
end of the sight rod. The mirror is
then turned .so that it reflects a beam
of light with a small shadow spot
showing in the center made by the
peephole in the mirror, which is di-
rected to fall on the center of the card-
board sighting disk. It will be quite
easy to direct this shadow spot to the
disk by holding a sheet of paper 6 or 8
in. in front of the mirror and following
The Shelf willHold All the Spice Boxes and
the spot on the paper until it reaches Keep Them Handy
the disk. The flashes are made by cupboard shelves, I made a special
manipulating the key operating the spice-box shelf, as shown, to hang on
shutter in the same manner as a tele-
the inside of the cupboard door. The
graph key. shelf swings out with the door as it
opens, and is made of two bracket ends
Twine Cutter for Use at a Wrapping to which a bottom board and front
Counter crosspiece is nailed. The size of the
shelf and its capacity are only limited
A cutter use at the wrapping
for
l)y the space on the door. Contrib- —
counter in a drug
or confectionery
store may be easily uted by Austin Miller, Santa Barbara,
California.
made from a double-
edged razor blade
®^ and a piece of thin Starting a Siphon
—
i
thorou gh y 1
York.
cleaned with
benzine and the
bristles cut to a Homemade Brush for Cleaning Uphol-
bevel, as shown stered Furniture
i n the sketch.
A durable brush for cleaning uphol-
In use, brush across the comb parallel stered furniture can be made in the
with the teeth, and the dirt between following manner Procure a piece of
them will be easily removed. Con- — :
This will scrape off all surplus water mencing to wind, measure G in. from
from the grinding surface and prevent one end and glue this portion to the
spattering. —
Contributed by Thos. L. side of a strip of soft wood, 6 in. long,
Parker, Wibaux, Mont. % in. wide and tV in. thick. When
dry, wind the glued length of hair-
A Paper Drinking Cup cloth and paper around the wood strip,
applying glue to each separate turn
The cup readily made of a piece
is
of winding. The turns should be kept
of paper 8 in. square. Lay the paper flush on the side that has been glued
on a fiat surface, turn the point A over and the fringed part brushed and
straight.
The part to be glued to the handle
must be perfectly even in its wind-
ings and held firmly in place while the
glue is hardening. The winding should
lie continued until the brush is ly^ in.
thick.
The handle is made of a piece of
Several Cups can be Nested Together and Carried in the
Pocket or Hand Bag
wood, 14 in. long, 1%
wide and V2 in.
A Stocking-Stretcher Form
Asimple as well as inexpensive
device for preventing the shrinking of
stockings, more particularly those of
children, after they have been washed,
thus saving great wear and tear on the
fabrics and increasing their length of
The Eggs are Prevented from Becoming Cracked and life,is shown in the illustration. The
All are Easily Handled in One Operation stretcher can be made by anyone, a
knowledge of woodcraft or art being
burn, as well as in cracking of the eggs
unnecessary. If used, the device will
by the fall. In removing the eggs
prove to effect quite a saving in
from the hot water and taking one out
money, labor and worry in the course
at a time, no two will be cooked alike.
of a year.
To overcome these difficulties I con-
Place a new and unused stocking,
structed an egg boiler as illustrated.
A pan was procured tin or alumi- — that properly fits the foot, flat on a
—
num as desired about 1 in. deep and heavy piece of cardboard or a wood
board, if desired, and mark an outline
51/0 in. in diameter, and holes were
of the stocking on the board with a
drflled in the bottom having dimen-
pencil. Cut out the design with a pen-
sions as shown. A
handle was at-
knife or heavy pair of scissors and
tached to the center with washers and
nuts. The small ends of the eggs are
smooth the edges. A
design having
set in the 1%-in. holes and the whole
pan set in a vessel of boiling water.
I^
When the boiling is completed, the
entire lot of eggs are removed at the
same time. As the device with its The Spring of the Two Parts
load of cooked eggs is quite pleasing Tends to Hold the Yarn and
in appearance, it may be set on a plate Keep It from Shrinking
and the eggs served from it on the
table. —Contributed by \V. E. Crane,
Cleveland, O.
a small bolt. When the stockings are piece of wire, bent as shown and slipped
washed and the dampness wrung out into the slot end of the spool. One
as well as possible, stretch them over end of the first piece of string was tied
the boards and hang them up to dry.
They will retain their shape and are
=^
The Film Spool as It is Attached P
g:
easily ironed. —
Contributed by Wm.
Ifor to a Wall, and the Crank
Turning It
^
^
P. Kennedy, Washington, D. C.
I ,„ i
Stick Holder for a Chopping Block
Having a lot of branch wood, from
1/2 in. to diameter, to saw, and
1 in. in i
not wishing to bother with a sawbuck, to the core and then wound around it,
I rigged up a chopping block, as shown the next piece tied to the first and
in the sketch, by fastening a piece of wound up, and so on, as the strings
board to one side of the block with were taken from the packages from
time to time. When a string is needed
for any purpose I always know where
to find it, and it is easier to take it
from the spool than from a ball. Con- —
tributed by W. Resseguie, Susque-
hanna, Pa.
placed in the bottom, for the battery A good way to mend partially
to rest on, and the sides are packed broken felt or a felt hat is to hold a
with sawdust to within i/o in. of the lighted match under the break and
top. Waterproof wires are connected smooth out the crevice with the
to the binding posts and melted hand. The shellac in the felt is melted
paraffin poured over the battery to the by the heat and runs together, mend-
top of the jar. The carbon and zinc ing the in such a way that the
felt
terminals should be marked to avoid break hardly noticeable.
is This
trouble when connecting several cells method may also be used to mend felt
together. Batteries treated in this articles in the laboratory.
193
The woodis immersed for 48 hours The mechanic who attempts to fasten
in a warm solution of alum and a mitered frame in the home work-
sprinkled several times with the fol- shop usually comes to grief. This is
lowintj mixture One part of losjwood
:
under the joint to keep it from stick- end, staples being driven into the posts
ing. Apply the glue and push the two to receive them. Three or four wire
sides into the corner formed by the grips were formed and attached to the
raised strips, the dog is then driven in line. It was only necessary to draw
lightly and the clamping piece screwed the corner of a handkerchief into the
down tightly, and if the miter has been grip as it was wrung out. placing sev-
properly cut, a nice close-jointed and eral in each grip. The line with its
square corner will be the result. load was then
carried out and attached
Contributed by J. Shelly, Brooklyn, between the porch posts. This made
New York. it unnecessary to look through the
clothes for the small articles. It also
Handle Attachment for a Sickle prevented chilling the fingers and no
pins were needed. —
Contributed by
For cutting around flower beds or R. D. Livingston, Hopkinton, Iowa.
bushes and in close places I find that
an extension handle for a sickle is
Automatically Controlled Ice-Box
Lights
Often the ice bo.x is placed in a dark
closet or some out-of-the-way place,
and it almost impossible to locate
is
articles already in the box or put
The Extension Handle others away without considerable in-
Makes It Much Easier convenience on account of the lack of
to Control the Sickle in
Cutting around Obstacles
proper light. This difficulty can be
easily overcome by mounting a small
electric lamp in each of the difi^erent
quite an assistance. The auxiliary compartments of the box, which will
handle is bound to the sickle handle st^;
with wire at the ends and is further
fastened with a screw in the center. <at=
The arrows show the directions in
which the hands should be moved in tsqa
—
working the sickle. Contributed by
A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Can.
L-(^<^<^
A Clothesline for Small Goods
Fio I Fig 2
Handkerchiefs and small pieces The Lamps will be Automatically Lighted When
the Door of the Ice Box is Opened
included in the week's laundry are
usually quite troublesome to hang be automatically lighted when the lid
with the larger pieces, and for this of the box is raised or the door opened.
The circuit through the lamp is con-
trolled by a special switch mounted in
such a way that its contacts are open
when the doors and lid of the bo.x are
closed. A
diagram of the circuit is
given in Fig. 1, which shows three
Line and Holders are Always Together lamps, each controlled by a separate
and can be Washed as the Clothes switch, connected in parallel to a bat-
tery of several dry cells. The lamps
reason I constructed a special line for should be of low voltage and need not
the small goods. A line was cut to be very high in candlepower. The
fit between two porch posts and a hook number of cells needed in the battery
made of galvanized wire tied to each will depend upon the voltage of the
195
A special switch that will serve the metal, about 3 in. in diameter, with a
above purpose is shown in Fig. 2. It screw cover. The shaft B, to which is
consists of two pieces of spring brass,
A and B, about %
in. wide, bent into
the forms shown. These pieces are
mounted in a recess cut in the jamb of
the door or lid in such a way that the
free end of the piece A
is held away
from the piece B when the door or lid
is closed. When the lid of the box or
the door is open the two springs come
in contact and the lamp lights upon ;
stitute. It
makes an excellent sub-
only requires a small notch
of the horn. —Contributed by P. Mertz,
Jamaica, L. I.
filed in the heel of the blade, which
does not interfere with the ordinary
use of the knife in the least. Contrib- — Retarder for Plaster of Paris
uted by John V. Loeffler, Evansville, When it is desired to lengthen the
Indiana. time of setting after preparing plaster
of Paris, dissolve 1 oz. of citric acid
CAnts may be aestroyed by
eflfectively in water used for mixing 100 lb. of
placing a coop with a chicken in it over plaster, and it will retard the setting
the hill. for about three hours.
196
The owner of a private workshop has Procure a nut, having a small thread
need for taps and occasionally wishes that will admit the size of the wire to
to make them, not because they are be used in making the spring. Cut a
cheaper, but for the sake of experience
or to get some special thread. In cut-
ting the flutes, whether it be by hand or
in a shaper, it is a good plan to give the
flutes an angle, that is, to cut them, not
The Threads in the Nut Will Guide as Well as
parallel with the axis of the tap, but at Coil the Spring Evenly
By CHARLES FRANK
Motion pictures are made and repro- tight box with a lens at one end and a
duced by means of a camera and pro- sensitized plate or film at the other.
jector, each having a similar mechan- The motion-picture camera (Fig. 1) is
ism that would seem entirely too com- nothing more than a hand camera with
plicated for the amechanical device for stepping a long
average person roll of film through a space in the focal
to construct at plane of the lens at a speed of about 16
home, yet a cor- pictures a second, and stopping the
respond- film long enough to make the requisite
entof the exposure on each division. The first
N i c k e 1 o- thing to consider is the lens. A lens
deon has de- having ordinary speed for a hand cam-
vised a simple era, and one with about 3-in. focal
rotary cylinder length will give satisfactory results.
shutter that can If one does not care to purchase a lens,
be substituted a small l^ij-in. or 2-in. reading glass can
for the compli- be used, if it is stopped down, or a lens
cated parts. may be taken from a hand camera.
While this sim- The width of the camera from front to
ple cylinder back (W, Fig. 2) must be determined
shutter is not by the focal length of the lens. The
claimed to be dimensions given in the drawing are
Fig. 1
non - infringing only approximate, and they can be
on existing patents, yet, as it has no changed if the camera is to be used in
commercial value, there would be no making an extra long film negative.
objection on this score. The instru- The roll of unexposed film (A, Fig.
ments described are nothing more than 2) is placed on a small shaft between
toys, and if the amateur photographer U-shaped bearings, made of sheet metal
can secure a few dozen feet of ani- and screwed to the top board of the
mated photographs about the home camera. The lens B is set in the front
that are dear to his heart, and repro- board at a point 4 in. below the top. If
duce them on a screen, it will have a large roll of film is to be used, this
served its purpose. The camera and distance must be greater to allow room
projector described uses standard film, for the film roll in the top of the cam-
1% in. wide, with perforations every era. The cylinder C. which acts as a
tV in. shutter and intermittent movement, re-
The Camera volves directly behind and in the path
The ordinary hand camera for mak- of the light passing through the lens.
ing still pictures consists of a light- Partitions, DD, are set in grooves cut
199
in the boards, forming the sides of the hole in the film snugly, but the points
camera. These partitions are to keep should be slightly rounding, so that
the light,which may be diffused from they will easily enter the perforations.
the lens, from striking the film at either When the upper sprocket, which is ap-
side of the shutter, and at the same proaching the film, engages a perfora-
time acting as guides for the film at the
rear end of the camera. Their edges
at the back are covered with black vel-
vet. The back of the box is a hinged
door, rabbeted on all edges, and open-
ing at the side to allow the insertion
and removal of the film, and also act-
ing as a guide for the film when closed.
A strip of black velvet, E, a little wider
than the film, is pasted to the inside
surface of the door, so that it bears
lightly against the back edges of the
partitions DD. The film passes be-
tween the edges of the partitions and
the velvet on the door with some fric-
tion, which keeps it from moving ex-
cept when pulled through with the
roller shutter. A wire-staple guide,
F, is fastened in the lower partition,
through which the end of the film is
passed before closing the door. The
film as it is run through drops in folds
in the bottom of the bo.x.
The rotary cylinder shutter is the Fig. 2 — Details of Camera
heart of the machine and should be
made well and strictly according to the tion, just below the upper partition, it
dimensions. The detail of this part is will carry the film downward until the
shown in Fig. 3. A rectangular open- sprocket disengages from the perfora-
ing is mortised through one of its tion at the lower partition. The dis-
diameters to admit light on the film tance of travel must be exactly in., %
when in certain positions. The cylin- as that is the height of each picture.
der is of wood with a i/4-in. steel rod The cylinder requires some adjustment
inserted in the center of each end for to meet this condition therefore the;
axles. A small grooved pulley (G, Fig. axles are made to revolve in holes
2), about 1 in. in diameter, is fastened bored in two strips of wood, JJ, which
to the outer end of one of these rods. can be moved forward or backward to
The cylinder is revolved by a round obtain the proper distance from the film.
belt from a drive wheel, H, 3 or 3i/L' in. To allow for this movement, the axles
in diameter and turned by the aid of a pass through slots cut in the sides of
crankpin. Owing to the backward ro- the camera box instead of round holes.
tation of the cylinder, the belt must be The strips JJ are fastened temporarily
crossed between the drive wheel H, and when the correct position for the
and the pulley G. The projections or cylinder is found, they are permanently
sprockets. Fig. 3, must be accurately fastened to the box. Grooves, K, are
set at a distance of % in. from the 90- cut through the black velvet and into
deg. point, using the center of the mor- the back of the door to allow a space
tised hole as a base. These projec- for the sprockets to pass through freely.
tions can be pins or small staples, but The inside of the box should be painted
they must not be over tu in. in size. a dead black, and black paper pasted
The base of the sprockets must fit the on all corners and joints. Black velvet
200
( To be continued)
dinary gas or water pipe, 8 or 10 in. of also act as guides for the line. Should
y2-in. iron bar, and two twenty-penny the joints fit too tightly, scrape the
nails. The posts g-enerally used are 6 ends until they slip easily into the sock-
by 6 in. About 4 in. from the top of
the post bore a 1-in. hole, parallel with
the direction the rope is to run. On
the inside surface of the post bore four
%-in. holes.
Drill a V2-in. hole 1 in. from one end
of the pipe, and a i/4-in. hole 1 in. from
the other end. Put the iron bar in the
y<y-vn. hole, tie the rope around the pipe F1G.2
and bar at A
and wind. With the Screweye in Joint
An Emergency Clamp
While makint an extra large guitar
I did not
have clamps
large enough
to hold the
top and bot-
tom onto the
sides while
Fig. 6— Drying Reel gluing, so I
diameter, will be suitable under ordi- fastened
nary circumstances. three pieces
The opening B
may be adjusted by two metal slides of wood to-
which fit tightly in metal grooves fast- gether, each
ened to the wood front. The metal piece being
grooves and slides can be made of tin about 1 by 3
and painted a dead black. The films in.,as shown
after passing over the sprocket, fall in the sketch.
into the bottom of the box, or, if very Then I bored
long films are to be made, the instru- holes in
ment can be used in the dark room and both top and
the light admitted only to the opening bottom
B, then the ends can be dropped into a pieces and inserted a piece of soft wire
basket or other receptacle at the bot- in the form of a loop, which, when
tom and the unprinted portions carried twisted, drew the ends of the clamp
on reels above the box. together. —
Contributed by Geo. E.
The speed of the exposure and the Walsh, Buffalo, N. Y.
width of the opening B can be deter-
mined by making test strips. This can CWhile camping, remember a hot
be done by setting the opening B to a stone wrapped up makes an excellent
certain width and turning the crank for substitute for a hot-water basr.
204
as used in the lamp house. The parts of the required size, or a lens of 12-in.
can be rolled and a lock joint made at focus enlarEjinsj a 1-in. film to about 6
a local tinshop, or the pieces shaped ft. at a distance of 24 ft. A
regular
over a wood form and riveted. Small lens fitted in a metal tube can be pur-
L-shaped pieces are riveted to the in- chased from a moving-picture stock
ner surfaces to hold each lens in place. house at a reasonable price. The box
A rim is turned up on the back end of is made upsimilar to the camera box,
the metal tube for attaching the lens but with a metal back instead of the
barrel to the lamp house. wood. The intense heat from the light
An ordinary mantle or acetylene would quickly burn the wood and for
burner is attached to a gas pipe that this reason the light should be kept
has for its base a drop elbow fastened from the film while it is not in motion.
to a sliding board similar to the slide of The projecting lens barrel should be
the lamp house on the baseboard. A fitted snugly, yet loose enough for
good reflector should be attached to a focusing.
standard just back of the burner. The The baseboard is cut as shown and
standard is also fastened to the slid- the film-stepping device is firmly at-
ing board. The proper distance of the tached to the small end. The sides ex-
light from the condensing lens can be tend over the baseboard and are fas-
easily set by this adjusting device. tened with screws and braced with
This arrangement is shown in Fig. 10 metal brackets. The slot in the small
in the diagram entitled "lamp parts." end of the baseboard is for the film to
The device for stepping the film is pass through. The film should have a
a duplicate of the one used in the cam- tension the same as in the camera with
era as described in Part I, with the ex- velvet placed on the edges of the par-
ception of the lens. The lens should titions. It is well to have a guide be-
be about 2 in. in diameter with such low the roller shutter to keep the film
a focal length that will give a picture from encircling the roller as it turns.
206
manner as —
combs. Contributed
steel evenly, and drive three brads close to
by A. H. Waychoff, Koenig, Colo. the circumference of each glass bottom,
207
Adjustable Film-Developing Machine ment of the spools and for securing the
wire in place by staples. The top spool
The simple homemade developing is secured to a wire fitted with a crank
machine, shown in the illustration, can at the outer end, so that in turning the
be easily made with three film spools, wire, the spool will also turn, thereby
driving the film. When placing the
film on the machine, the sensitive side
should face outward so it will not rub
against the spools. The ends of the
film may be connected with pins or
—
ordinary paper fasteners. Contributed
by H. R. F. Richardson, Ottawa, Ont.
Pattern for Cutting the Metal to Form the Entire Lantern, or Lamp House, Also the Pattern for the Top
and the Metal Bracket That Makes a Bearing for the Revolving Wheel,
Having Openings Covered with Tinted Celluloid
of the reach of the average schoolboy, to time with a rag soaked in oil, then
but if he has any ingenuity and a lit- wiped dry, to keep it from rusting.
tle time, a lantern for throwing those The pattern for the body of the lan-
209
210
tern, or lamp house, is shown with di- to suit the condensing lens provided.
mensions. If a lens 51/. in. in diameter is used,
If metal, long enough for the whole then a 5-in. hole should be cut. This
length, cannot be procured, then make it is enough difference in size to hold
in two pieces, being sure to allow ^2-'"- the lens from dropping through, while
clips ri\'eted on the inside of the lamp-
house end will hold it in place. The
lens is set in the hole with the curved
side outward from the inside of the
lamp house.
The top, or covering, is cut out of the
same material as used in making the
lamp house, the length being 13 in.,
and the sides are cut to extend I/2 in.
on each side of the ventilator. The
edges, being turned down on the dotted
lines, provide a covering to prevent any
great amount of light from passing out
through the l/2-in. ventilating opening
mentioned in connection with the side
construction of the lantern. The 1-in.
parts of the cover ends are turned
down and riveted to the ends of the
lamp house. The little extensions on
Pattern for the Revolving Wheel in Which Six Holes
are Cut and Covered with Tinted Celluloid the ends provide a means of riveting
the side, to make a solid joint.
end also on the second part, as shown The arm C is made of a piece of
on the first, for a riveted joint. The
Vs or VV-in. metal, shaped as shown,
metal is bent on the dotted lines and to fit on the corner of the lamp house,
cut out on the full ones. The distance where it is riveted. This provides a
between the lines A to be bent is equal support and a place for an axis for the
to the radius B. The part A forms the large revolving wheel holding the col-
sloping side of the top, and the 3-in. ored-celluloid disks.
part at the top of the side extends ver- The metal forming the lamp house is
tically on the upper or vertical part,
fastened on a baseboard, cut to snugly
it being I/2 '"• narrower to provide an
fit on the inside. The base has two
outlet for the heat. cleats, nailed lengthwise to form a run-
An opening is cut in the rear end. way, 4 in. wide, into which another
board is fitted to carry the burner.
While the illustration shows an acety-
lene burner, any kind of light may be
used so long as it is of a high candle-
power. If manufactured gas is at hand,
a gas burner with a mantle can be
fitted, or a large tungsten electric light
will give good results.
The wheel, carrying the colored
disks, is made of the same kind of
metal as used for the lamp house. The
edges should be trimmed smooth, or,
The Base of the Lantern is Provided with a Sliding
lietter still, turned over and hammered
Part Carrying the Light for Adjustment
down to prevent injury to the hands
as shown, also a hole, 5 in. in diameter, while turning it. A washer should be
in the front end. The size of the round used between this wheel and the arm
hole is optional, as it should be cut C on a bolt used for the shaft, to make
ill
CTo remove a white mark on wood canvas, fastened to the wire mesh with
having a wax surface, rub it lightly clothespins, will produce a shade at
with a rag moistened in alcohol then ; —
any place desired. Contributed by
rub with a little raw linseed oil. Walter L. Kaufmann, Santa Ana, Cal.
31i
Reflector for Viewing Scenery from a ing above the water level and the en-
trance being through a hole in the
Car Window
bottom near one side, while the pas-
Construct a box of pasteboard or sage itself is under water. It, therefore,
thin wood, about 9 in. long, 3 in. wide only remains for the trapper to make
and 2 in. tiiick, and fasten two pieces one of these houses over into a huge
wire trap so that the animal may be
The Reflecting Device caught alive.
Used
as It is
,
i^,'*' ; i .^
...^W/sJs' - -..:,:^-^---
"which, in the case of a post-card size. shown and set in the camera opening.
214
This will bring the slot directly back When ready to expose, open the
of the lens center and at right angles shutter wide, turn the crank that is
to the direction in which the film moves hooked into the wing nut, and slowly
when being rolled. wind up the film while the train is
A board is prepared, about 4 ft. long, running. This will give a panoramic
10 in. wide and %
in. thick. This is to picture, continuous in character, and if
the speed of turning is well judged,
some very splendid views can be made.
The speed of turning the crank will
be governed by the focal length of the
lens and the speed of the train. For
an average lens, the crank should be
given one turn per second when the
car is traveling about 15 miles an hour,
or the average speed of a street car.
A train traveling 30 miles an hour will
require two turns of the crank per
second. A good method of trying this
out is to use one film as a test and
turn the crank a few times and note
its speed by the second, then stop and
The Two Parts as They are Applied to an Ordinary begin again at another speed for a few
Roil-Film Camera
turns and so on, until the entire film
take the place of a tripod, and it must is exposed, always noting the turns
have a small hole and suitable wing and time for each change, also the
nut to attach the camera near the cen- speed of the train, ^^'hen the film is
ter. This length of board will reach developed the one that shows best will
from the back of one seat to another give the proper number of turns per
when it is placed to support the camera second.
during the exposure. The following points must be consid-
A wire, about Vg in. in diameter, is ered : The track should not be rough,
bent, as shown, with a short hook on and the camera must be perfectly
one end, and the other turned up at steady and not twisted out of position
right angles, to serve as a handle. This by turning the crank, otherwise the
wire, when hooked into the wing nut, resulting picture will be wavy. If the
will enable one to wind up the film at slot in the back board is not smooth
a fairly uniform speed. This completes and true, the picture will be streaked.
all the necessary apparatus. Turning the film too fast will make the
To take pictures with this panoramic picture elongated, and too slowly, con-
outfit, load the camera in the usual densed. Should the camera be pointed
way, but do not wind it up to exposure otherwise than at right angles the pic-
No. 1 stop at a point where the be-
; ture will be distorted. This arrange-
ginning of the film will be nearly op- ment cannot be used to take moving
posite the narrow slot in the black objects except under special conditions.
paper, or rubber. This would be to A picture of a passing train of cars can
stop the turning at about the time the be made if the camera is stationary,
hand pointer appears in the small back but the wheels and drive rods will ap-
window. Attach the camera firmly to pear twisted out of shape. It is best
the board and brace up the lens end for the experimenter to confine himself
so that it will not easily shake with to scenery at the beginning, avoiding
the movement of the car. Place the architectural objects, because a varia-
board across the backs of two adjacent tion in speed of turning the crank to
seats, so that the camera will point out wind the film naturally distorts the ar-
of the window at exactly right angles chitecture, which variation is not so
to the car. noticeable in a scenic view.
^^^^^F!!^
Hi HHP^I^^ff^H
^^^Si
FLAT dwellers have no space at edge of the rails. If a very neat job is
their disposal for a person to work required, these boards should be set
at photography, and the bathroom inside on strips nailed to the inside sur-
must take the place of a dark room. faces of the rails, at the proper place
As this was very inconvenient in my to make the boards come flush with the
case, I constructed a table, that from under edges of the rails.
allappearances was nothing more than At the back side and in the center of
a large-size kitchen worktable, and the new bottom, a hole is cut, 6 or 7
such a table can be used in case the in. square, and a box fastened beneath
builder does not care to construct it. it, to form a bottom several inches
The table is turned upside down and below the main bottom. In this space
the top removed by taking out the bottles filled with solutions are kept.
screws. The top is made of several The main bottom should be painted
pieces glued together and will remain with an acid-proof varnish.
in one piece. It is then hinged at one The space in the table is then
side to the top edge of the rail, so that divided, and partitions set up, which
it can be turned back like a trunk, or can be arranged to suit the builder.
box, cover. Another attachment, which comes in
Boards are then nailed to the under exceedingly handy, is the ruby light.
215
216
This consists of a box, large enough the arrangement of which will depend
to receive a printing frame at the bot- on the size and shape of the box. In
tom. Two holes are cut in the table closing, the lamp box is removed, and
top, at the right places to make a pieces of board are set in the holes.
window for the light and a slit for the This can be easily arranged, if the holes
printing frame. When the table top and blocks are cut on a slight slope,
is raised, the box with the light is fas- so that the latter when set in will not
tened over the openings with hooks, fallthrough the openings.
Enlarj3^ng Photographs
By A. E . SWOYER
When the photoj^rapher wishes to sisting simply in the substitution of a
make an enlarged 'print from a small better lens for the cheap plate glass
negative, he arranges a suitable light with which such instruments are usu-
and condensers back of the negative ally fitted.
and by means of a lens projects the A contact print, preferably on glossy
resultant image upon a sheet of sensi- paper, ferrotyped, is made from the
tive paper. Owing to the comparative original negative by contact in the
weakness of the light, however, it is usual way; this is then placed in the
necessary either to use bromide paper modified projector and the image
or some of the faster brands of de- thrown upon a sensitive plate of the
this method were simply a form of lows extension the nearer the lens is
;
photographic copying; it is, in fact, the to the back of the camera the larger
reverse. For in copying any object will be the projected image.
with a camera, the sensitive medium is The diagram (Fig. 1) shows that the
behind the lens and the object to be size of the object to be enlarged does
copied is in front, and the size of the not depend upon the focal length of
copy is therefore limited both by that the lens used, as in ordinary enlarging,
of the camera and by its bellows draw. but simply upon the size of the open-
In the reflection process, the object to ing in the front of the projector. The
be copied is back of the lens and the dotted lines are drawn from the edges
sensitive medium is in front ; as large a of the card to be projected through the
copy can be made with a small camera lens. Figure 3 is a sketch of a projec-
as with an eight by ten. It is really tor with the lens tube removed, so that
more convenient to work with a short- it may be used with a camera as shown
focus lens and a camera of limited bel- in Fig. 3.
cusing type can be used to enlarge pic- lens, and to enlarge the pictures from
tures from negatives of its own make. a 4 by 5-in. negative to 8 by 10 in. In
The requirement is a device to hold the the first place make a box 81/^ in. wide.
negative rigid in a position in front of lOV, deep and 14 in. long, inside
the camera lens, and at such a distance measurement, using %-in. material, as
that the rays of light passing through shown in the sectional drawing A.
the negative and lens will enter a box One end is left open and in the center
of sufficient size for the desired en- of the other a hole is cut 5 in. square.
largement and focus plainly on a sheet The back end of the camera is placed
of sensitive paper attached to the end over this hole as shown at B and %-
of the box. '
^/;w//////////////;////;;;/7m
The
first thing to do -14-
is to find the distance
that is required from
the camera lens to the -c ]
paper enlargement to
make the proper size,
i
and the distance from
W///M^/MW//M///////}^_^
the lens to the negative. WvVA\W
.\\\\\\\Vv\
A correspondent
^4'U
o f
Camera Craft gives the
following rule for find-
ing these dimensions:
To find the distance be-
tween the lens and pa-
per enlargement, add
1 to the number of
times the picture is to
be enlarged and multi-
ply the result by the
focus of the lens in
inches. The example
given is for a 6-in. focus
lens. An example: A
4 by 5-in. negative en-
larged to 8 by 10 in. is
a two-time enlargement
(four times in area) ;
to the center of the large one, crossing paper, doing the developing about 10
the grain of wood in so doing. The ft. from the source of light.
end board is the easel upon whicli the To operate the camera plhce it on
sensitive paper is fastened with push the enlarging box, hook the easel in
pins, and should be covered with a place, put a negative in the holder with
sheet of white paper, pasting it on the the film side toward the lens. Take the
81/2 by 101/2-in. board with a thin coat outfit to a shady place outdoors, point
of glue. The slide D is a piece of wood the holder end at an unobstructed por-
% in. thick, 31/2 in. wide and 26 in. tion of the sky and look through the
long. This is fastened to the under peephole. Rack the lens in and out to
side of the box with four screws, plac- focus the picture. The easel should
ing it exactly in the center and parallel have heavy black lines drawn upon it
with the sides of the box. Be careful inclosing parallelograms from 5 by 7
to have the slide parallel or the holder in. to 8 by 10 in., so that one can
upon it.
will not freely slide readily see the size of the enlargement
The negative holder E is made of to be made. When the focus is obtained
a piece of %-in. board, 8 in. wide and take the outfit into the darkroom, re-
10 in. long. A
hole 51/2 by 71/2 in. is move the easel and fasten the sensitive
cut in its center, leaving a margin of paper with push pins. Replace the
1^/4 in. on all sides. This holder is easel and take the outfit outdoors again,
set in a groove cut in a block of wood point it toward the clear sky and make
having a mortise cut % by S^/o in. to the exposure, which should be at least
fit on the slide easily. A thumb screw 5 seconds with a 16 stop. It is best to
is fitted inthe center of the bottom of make a trial exposure on a small strip
the block of wood. This is used for of paper to find the proper time. Di-
fastening the negative holder rigidly rections for the use of bromide papers
to the slide when the focus is secured. will be found in each package.
A 1-in. hole is bored in the upper
corner of the box end, as shown, to An Easy Way to Make a Shelf
serve as a peephole for seeing the Procure an ordinary packing box
image on the end board or easel. This and mark a line from corner to corner
is covered before putting the sensitive on both ends, as shown, from A to B
paper in the box. The end board is in Fig. 1. Pull out all the nails from
held in position with two flat brass the corners that may cross the line.
hooks. The camera is held in place with Nail the top to the box and saw it on
two buttons placed on blocks of wood the lines marked and two shelves will
the height of the camera back, as shown
at F. pieces of clear glass, 6 by
Two
8 in. in size, are held in place in the
negative holder by means of buttons,
the film negative being placed between
them. All the joints in the box must
be carefully puttied and the inside of
the box blackened, which is done with
a mixture of lampblack and alcohol,
to which is added a small quantity of
shellac to give it body.
A darkroom is not essential, a bath- Fig I ria.2
room with the window covered over Two Shelves Made of One Box
with orange paper will do, or even a
large room with the shades drawn and be formed which may be used as
The Attachment as It is Fitted to the Camera and the Reversible Back in the Frame
back, over the opening, and make consists of two horizontal strips joined
attachments to hold it to the camera at the ends with grooved pieces, fitting
in the same manner as the reversible the edge of the new back, so that it
back was attached. may be slid up and down in the
If pictures of two or three dififerent grooves. The crosspieces are also rab-
sizes are to be made, the openins; in beted to receive the reversible back
thenew back should be fitted with as and allow it to be moved back and
many new pieces as there are sizes of forth horizontally. The rabbet in the
pictures, each to have an opening of horizontal strips should not be so deep
corresponding size. For a 5 by 7-in. as to permit the extending edge to
plate, 1% by iVi-in. pictures is a good overlap the ground-glass frame, thus
size, as there will be room for 34 preventing it from moving back as the
pictures on the plate with a small mar- plate holder is inserted.
gin left for notes. The piece to fill If the frame on the back and the
the opening should be made of the reversible back fit tightly, they will
same material as the back so that a remain in any position, but if they are
smooth joint will result. As a board loosely fitted, it will be necessary to
cannot be made smooth enough for a provide some means to hold them.
perfectly light-tight joint, the surface Small springs with pins may be fitted
on the new back, over which the rever- to the vertically moving frame to hold
sible back travels, must be covered it in the position for the horizontal
with cloth —a
piece of black velvet is rows of pictures.
suitable —
to exclude all light as the The ground glass should be marked
plate holder is shifted over the back. for the size picture to be taken. The
A
frame is now made to carry the positions of the frame and plate car-
reversible back of the camera, the size rier should also be marked so that the
of which will depend on the size of plate holder need not be taken out to
the other parts, as well as on the size find the location and focus for the next
of the camera to be used. This frame picture.
An Acid Siphon
When siphoning off acids or other
disagreeable or poisonous liquids, it is
very important that none of it touch
the flesh or mouth. It is almost im-
])ossible to do this when starting the
cirdinary siphon. A siphon that does
away with this inconvenience and dan-
ger can be made as follows
Vhe End of the Pipe as It is Prepared to be Riveted on Procure a good Bunsen burner and
the Sheet Metal
two pieces of V^^-m. glass tube, one
sketch. The end of the pipe, Fig. 1. 2 ft. and the other 18 in. long. Heat
is slotted with a hacksaw to form four the 2-ft. length at a point 8 in. from
projections, which are turned outward one end in the flame until it can be
223
bent as shown at A. The other piece select a bottle with a loose stopper, or
should be plugged at one end and else wear a glove, as the gentleman
then slowly and evenly heated at a who demonstrated the trick had hands
point 10 in. from one end. When the
glass is soft, blow slowly and steadily
into the open end, at the same time
turning the tube around in the flame.
This will form a bulb, B. The ends of
the glass tube are heated and bent as
shown, at C and D, and then fused
onto the piece A, as shown at E. This
can be accomplished by heating the
piece A at a point -1 in. from the un-
In Striking the Bottle Cork, the Knuckle of the Second
bent end. When the glass becomes Finger Loosens the "Wire Lock
soft, place one end of a short piece
of tube in it and pull out into a thread.
of the hard and horny type. Con- —
tributed by James M. Kane, Doyles-
Break this off as close to the tube as
possible, to make a hole in the tube.
town. Pa.
Heat the end of the tube D and also
the glass around the hole, and when Setting Colors in Fabrics
both become soft, they can be fused
The colors of fabrics or other
together.
materials of any kind may be set by
boiling the articles in the following
solution To 1 gal. of soft water add
:
An Adjustable Bookholder
A very satisfactory adjustable
holder for books or letters can be con-
structed of ordinary materials. A
board is used for the base, and two
pieces, C. cut from the grooved edges of
flooring boards, are fastened on top as
shown. A permanent end. A, is fast-
ened to one end of the base. A good-
size holder is 19 in. long, 6 in. wide,
made of material 34 in. thick.
The movable slide B has two pieces
attached to its under side, which are
cut from the tongued edges of flooring
boards. The piece D answers the
double purpose of a handle and brace.
A lock, E, is made of a bolt, having a
Developing-Tray Rocker to Keep the Liquid in
long thread and a square head. A hole
Motion over the Plate Automatically
is bored from the under side through
ous reasons, still use the old-style tray the brace, and a portion of the wood
method. For those who use the tray, is cut out to admit the nut. square A
a splendid and simple method that place is cut out to admit the square
combines the good qualities of both bolt head in the bottom pieces. To
the tank and tray is the tray-rocking
device shown in the illustration.
The rocker consists of a wood box,
13 long, 9 in. wide and iVo in. deep,
in.
made of %-in. material, together with
a similar box 1% in- deep, that fits over
the other as a light-proof coyer. Both
are given a coat of black paint.
The Holder may be Used Books or Letters
At the center on the under side of the for
and Papers as a File
tray part, a right angle made of strap
lock the slide, simply screw the nut
iron is fastened with screws. On the _
part projecting down, a hole is drilled upward so that it will push the bolt
to receive a sleeve made of a brass tube head against the base. Contributed —
which is soldered in place. An or- by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
An Old-Oak Stain well. Its edge should be notched so
that it will easily enter thewood. The
To make old oak of ash, elm, box edges of its central slot should be
alder, chestnut, maple, yew, and syca-
more wood use a solution of copper
acetate, or iron acetate. Either of these
can be made by allowing a strong acid
to come in contact with copper or
iron. Acetic acid, or vinegar, will do
for the acid. The chemical can be ob-
tained from a local druggist if it is not
desired to make the stain. By varying
the strength of the solution, several
shades may be obtained. A
weak solu-
tion of iron acetate gives various brown
hues. As the strength of the salt in- A Plane Bit Fastened to the Top of a Bench to Hold
Blocks While Planing Them
creases by concentration, the shades of
brown darken. beveled off, if an ordinary wood screw
is used to fasten it to the bench. A
Tablespoon End Used as Lemon series of holes, several inches apart
Plaster
Procure a small oval or rectangular Holding the Knot to theLight a Star will be Seen,
frame of a suitable size and use it as Shown by the Dotted Lines
frame, one that is straight without any whole is turned over and it will take
227
the position shown in D. Hold the and in most cases fail. It can be done,
paper to a good light and a perfect five- and the illustration shows how simply
pointed star will be seen. — Contributed
by J. J. Kolar, Maywood, 111.
A Scraper Handle
In using the ordinary steel-plate
No Fixtures That will Show are Required with This scraper, much inconvenience and
Fastening of a PortiSre Pole cramping of the hands is experienced
unless some suitable handle is attached.
Other projecting screw head until it
If a piece of scrap wood is taken and
slips into the hole by pressure from
cut to a convenient shape, with a groove
the spring. The spring will keep the
pole in position. —
Contributed by tightly fitting the scraper steel, greater
pressure can be exerted and more ef-
Ernest F. Dexter, Hartford, Conn.
fectivework produced, without cramp-
PIECE OF SCRAP WOOD
Trick with Knives and Glasses V& THICK
Kite-Line Traveler
The amusement of kite flying can
be broadened by adding the kite-line
traveler shown in sketch.
the The
frame of the traveler is made
of poplar,
spruce or soft pine, 1/4 in. square. The
horizontal piece is 24 in. long and the Fis.6
piece to which the wings are fastened Traveler Details
is 8 in. long. This piece is cut so it
will have a slight slant. The brace is wings, as shown in Fig. 2, is a small
a mitered piece, 13 in. long. The frame block of wood about 2 in. square and
is fastened together with small brads, % in. thick with a i/^-in. hole in the
229
center. Slip the kite line through the top of the flower pot. A
smaller cru-
hole before tying it to the kite. Place cible is placed inside of the large one
the trip about 100 ft. from the kite for use in melting such metals as cop-
and wedge it to the string with a small per, brass and aluminum. With metals
piece of wood. The eyelets SS are nec- that will melt at a low degree of heat,
essary, as they make it impossible for
the pulley to run off the string.
The traveler is first put on the kite
string with the end having the loop L
(Fig. 3) up, then, after letting out 100
ft. of string, the trip block is fastened
difficult to hold together when fitting the under side and level with the sur-
the corners. It is still more difficult face on the upper side. Each of the
to hold them together while the glue corner blocks is fitted with two pieces
dries. The clamp illustrated will be like X, Fig. 2. Each of these pieces
found quite satisfactory in solving this has one end round or a semicircle, and
problem, and at the same time is very in its center a Y^-in. hole is bored. The
simple to construct and easy to manip- other end has a %-in. hole bored in. %
ulate. The
material list for making the from the end.
clamps and corner blocks is as follows: After making the small pieces, take
the four corner blocks G, H, I and J
Picture frame clamp;
4 pieces. 1^ by m, by 15 in. and draw a line on the upper side in the
2 pieces. 1^ by liii by 5 in.
Triangle clamp; center, with the grain of the wood, and
3 pieces. IH by IM by 10 in-
mark the angles as follows, so that
I piece. IH by 134 by 4 in.
Corner blocks; one-half the angle will be on each side
4 pieces. % by by 3H in.
3f'2
8 pieces. % by
1 by 2 in. of the centerline: On one end of the
The pieces mentioned are of oak, S-4-S.
1 piece ?8"in. maple for dowels pieces G and H
mark a 90-deg. angle,
Hardware;
10 bolts, H by 2 in.
on the other end a 4.5-deg. angle, on
4 bolts. H by 3 in, the piece I mark a 90-deg. and 30-deg.
2 bolts, ?A by 6 in.
angle and on J mark a 90-deg. and 60-
The picture-frame clamp consists of deg. angle. Mark the number of de-
the four arms A, B, C and D, Fig. 1. grees of each between the sides of the
A %-in. hole is bored in one end of angle. Place two of the pieces marked
each piece, I/2 in. from the end. A X, Fig. 2, on each of the corner blocks,
series of %-in. holes, 1 in. apart, are one piece on each side between the
bored along the center in each piece. dift'erent angle lines, so their round
The two short pieces, E and F, have ends will be toward the center and
two %,-in. holes bored in their cen- toward each other with a space of %
ters, Yo in. from each end. These in. between them. Clamp the pieces to
pieces are bolted to the four arms with the corner blocks and bore the ^/^-in.
i/i-in. bolts as shown in the sketch. A holes through them to secure perfect
%-in. hole is bored in the middle of alincment. Put the bolts in and turn
The Corner Blocks on Both Picture Frame and Triangle Clamps are so Constructed That They Hold the
Molding together "While Fitting ttie Corners and also Hold Them Securely While the Glue is Hardening
each piece E and F for one of the 6-in. the pieces first to one angle and then
bolts K. the other, and while in the respective
Thefour corner blocks G, H, I and positions, bore the %-in. holes in. %
J, Fig. have a %-in. hole bored in the
1, deep in the corner blocks. Glue a
center of each and a dowel glued into dowel in each %-in. hole of the small
331
be put to many
uses, is easily made 4 Guides, H in. by l^i in. by 2 ft. 6 in.. S-2-S.
2 Bottom Pieces, 1 in. by 9 in. by 2 6
and, when made, will be of particular S-2-S
ft. in.,
service, says Work, London, for en- "l 'Easel, H in. by 1 ft. 6 in. by 2 ft., S-2-S.
2 Cleats, 'A in. by V/i in. by 1 ft. 4 in., S-2-S.
industry where only parts of some ob- front crosspiece is mortised into the
ject are to be plated, and where it is frame, and the one near the center
desired to remedy bad spots without is laid on top of the two side rails.
putting the articles back into the bath.
A Milk-Bottle Tray
Bottled milk is difficult to deliver
without knocking the bottles together
when carrying them or while in a
wagon. There are several kinds of
wire baskets for carrying the bottles,
but they all have the disadvantage of
allowing the bottles to strike one an-
other. A carrier not having this fault A Springboard for Use in Connection with a
Vaulting Pole or for Turning Acts
can be made very cheaply as follows
Procure a board 1 in. thick, 8 in. wide The rear crosspiece is either fastened
and 2 ft. long, plane and make it with large dowels or mortised into the
smooth, and use ordinary tin fruit or sidepieces. This springboard will be
of use in connection with a back-yard
gymnasium for vaulting and doing
turning acts.
A Developing Machine
The base
of the developing machine
consists of a wood tray with sloping
ends and high sides, which is placed at
the center and provides bearings for
the wheel axle. The dimensions given
in the sketch are for making a machine
i 1 to develop a film about 2'J in. long.
The disk, or wheel, is cut from a board,
i i
do the work by hand. Not having a developer is poured into the tray.
sanding machine, I used a disk talking Keep on turning the wheel until full
machine for the purpose. I placed a development is obtained, then pour out
sheet of sandpaper over the disk and the liquid and turn in fresh, clear
237
water, and turn the wheel to wash out hole meets the inner edge of C. It
the developer. Remove the film and is fastened to the lower arm with
place it in the hypo bath. —
Contrib- screws. A sharp cutting edge is ground
uted by Raymond M. Dealer, Balti-
more, Md.
A Pencil Sharpener
That will Make
A
Stove-Wood Carrier a Point without Q
Breaking the Lead
A handy wood carrier, for bringing
wood and kindling from the basement
or yard to the wood box in the house,
may be made from a grain sack, as
shown in the sketch. Use a complete
sack and make rope handles at each on the blade which is then attached to
end. When used, place only sufficient the arm A with a rivet loosely enough
wood or kindling in it to permit the to swing freely. —
Contributed by J. V.
handles to come together over the top Loeftler, Evansville, Ind.
of the load. This will make a com-
fortable grip and it is no harder to
Cleaning an Oilstone
carry than a medium-weight suitcase.
When the wood is removed the carrier Use kerosene oil and a sprinkling of
can be taken to the back yard and emery flour and proceed to sharpen
tools. It is not necessary to clean a
stone thus treated before placing the
tool on it, as the emery and kerosene
will make a good surface on the stone
as well as assisting in producing a
The Ropes
Handle
at the Ends of the Sack Make a
to Carry It Like a Grip
sharp edge on the tool. Contributed —
by James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
shaken out, thus doing away with the
dirt that usually results from other
Landing for Small Boats
methods of filling wood boxes. Con- — Not having a landing for my small
tributed by Walter Nelson Kidston,
Seattle, Wash. boat, I made a series of sectional plat-
forms, rising 2 ft. above the bottom,
which served the purpose well and
A Pencil Sharpener were inexpensive. Each section is
A pencil sharpened with the device about 15 ft. long, 3 ft. wide, and 2 ft.
shown will have a better point and one high. The frame is made of material
that will not break easily while being 2 in. thick and 4 in. wide, and on top
is a floor made of boards, while the
sharpened. The lower arm A is made
from a strip of sheet steel, jV in. thick. bottom consists of 2 by 4-in. cross-
An extension, Vi in. wide, is cut and pieces, nailed on 6 in. apart. Stones
bent in a circle to form the lower finger are laid on these crosspieces to moor
hold. The upper arm B forms the cut- it down in place. The whole landing
ter, which is made from a piece of hack- is simple to make and it lasts a long
saw blade. The teeth are ground off
and the temper is drawn from the ex-
tension that forms the upper circle. A
portion of the arm A is bent over, as The Series of Platforms Make a Good Small-Boat
Landing on a Slanting Beach
shown at C, to form a support for the
pencil point to rest upon. hole, A time, as the sections can be drawn out
large enough for a pencil to turn in, is and stored during the winter. Con- —
bored through a stick of hardwood, D, tributed by Henry Briggs, Lexington,
and tapered so that the center of the Massachusetts.
238
A Photo Vignetter
Sheet-Copper Support Procure a piece of heavy wire, one
with a Base and a
that is fairly stiff, says Camera Craft,
Shaft BearingSoldered
to the Ends and a pair of pliers and bend the wire
with the pliers as shown in the illus-
tration. After the loop is made to fit
around the lens barrel the wire is bent
at right angles at a point 6 in. below
the circle. At a distance of 8 in. on
and capped with a box. The main part the extending part of the wire it is
of the bearing A is shaped as shown, bent as shown to form a clip for hold-
and the box B consists of a small piece ing a sheet of cardboard.
cut from a brass rod and drilled for The cardboard should be about 7 in.
the size of the shaft. The box is wide and of dark color, with one edge
soldered to the top end of A and the cut semicircular and notched. The
base C to the bottom end. When a
large metal base is used for a certain .^••i
model, the part A is attached directly
AaAA A/> /W^'*'^
Make sure the inside end of the plati- the interrupter is complete with the
num wire is not covered with the glass, exception of the solution.
and that the outside end protrudes a The solution for the interrupter is
short distance beyond the end of the dilute sulphuric acid made by mixing
glass tube. Now bend about in. of % about four parts of water and one part
the end of the glass tube which has of acid. In preparing this mixture,
the platinum in it over at right angles be sure to pour the acid into the water,
to the remainder of the tube. The tube not the water into the acid. The jar
should then be placed in the opening should be about two-thirds filled. At
on the wooden top provided for it and least 40 volts will be required for the
a rubber band placed around it to pre- satisfactory operation of the inter-
vent it dropping through the opening. rupter. The distance between the
The lower end of the tube should be a platinum point and the lead sheet may
little higher than the lower end of the be adjusted by simply turning the glass
sheet of lead. A
small quantity of tube.
mercury should be placed in the tube No condenser will be required in
and copper wire run down in-
a bare operating an inductor coil with an
side. The mercury affords a connec- interrupter of this kind. The make-
tion between the piece of platinum in and-break interrupter, if there is one
the end of the tube and the copper in circuit, should of course be made
wire. Connect the outside end of the inoperative by screwing up the contact
copper wire under a binding post and point against the spring.
A Homemade Hand Drill Press The bolt turns in a square nut fas-
The little use had for
a drill press
I tened in the opposite post. The end
did not make it advisable to purchase of the screw bears on a plate fastened
one, so I constructed a device for drill- on the under side of the table to pre-
ing iron and brass which answered all vent wear. A crank could be attached
purposes. A broken carpenter's brace to this bolt so that it may be turned
furnished the chuck, which was fas- more easily.
tened -to a i/o-in. shaft having a de- The sliding ortable part is made
tachable crank. The shaft turns in a of a post similar to the end posts, but
with guides attached so as to keep it
in place. The holes for the chuck shaft
and bolt should be bored on a line and
exactly in the center of the posts.
<=ct Contributed by L. R. Kelley, Phil-
adelphia, Pa.
= =u.
s o e
f^ 1
A
Hose Nozzle
If V The nozzle shown in the accompany-
-^ .
S ing sketch was made from an empty
^mir ] tobacco can having an oval shape. I
a J. ©
cut the can in two near the center and
punched small holes in the bottom.
© e
I then cut a piece of V^-in. board to fit
«.
^
tightly in the end of the can and turned
1
A Very Inexpensive Drill Press Frame Which Answers the edges of the tin down to hold it
the Purpose Admirably
in place. A hole was bored in the cen-
brass tube which is fitted tightly in a ter of the wood and a Yo-'m. hose coup-
hole bored in the upright. The slid- ling fitted in it. The water will swell
ing part or table is forced up against the wood enough to make an abso-
the drill with a V2-in- machine bolt. lutely watertight joint, but by using a
243
little care in fitting it, the joint will smooth edge of the iron band over the
be watertight without the swelling. glass. It requires only a short time of
The holes being punched in straight
lines, the nozzle throws a rectangular
section of tine streams, which makes it
possible to sprinkle close up to walks
without wetting them. The friction The Filed Edge on the Coiled Metal Retains the Sand
Particles as It is Rubbed over the Glass Surface
is much less than in the ordinary hose
nozzle, and consequently this nozzle rubbing to produce a beautiful frosted
delivers more water and also materially surface on the glass. —
Contributed by
M. E. Duggan, Kenosha, Wis.
Frosting Glass
Procure a piece of flat iron similar to
an iron hoop, bend it, as shown in the The Metal on the End of the Leg Fastens It Solidly
in Place
sketch, to make a piece 3 in. long and
1^/4 in. wide and file one edge smooth. leg is driven into the hole, the points
Sprinkle some fine lake sand over the are pushed into the wood B as the
glass, dampen the sand and rub the metal flattens.
244
made at almost no expense as shown The globes holding the colored water
in the sketch. Two pieces of board, were set in these holes and a light with
a round shade placed in the center.
It proved to be an attractive display
and a good method of showing
the colors. —
Contributed by Maurice
Baudier, New Orleans, La.
Globes Filled with Colored to come against the back side of the
^Vater, Representing the rear jaw. This provides an adjustment
Different Colors of Dyes for a range of various thicknesses of
Carried in Stock
material. Another bar is located at
the bottom of the jaws to provide a
means of keeping the jaws parallel.
This bar is made in a similar manner
to the bar C. The rear jaw can be
the bulb being a vacuum, the colored fastened to the side of a bench, post,
water was drawn into it, and filled the or any support that may be handy.
globe. The point was then sealed with Contributed by Wm. S. Thompson,
paraffin. Columbia, Tenn.
245
Shade Roller Attached to Upper each side edge, IV^ in. from one end, I
Window Sash cut teeth, A A, and clipped the corners
of the opposite end at an angle. The
Free circulation of air cannot be ob- end at B was turned down at right
tained through a window when the angles and the points A A bent in the
shade is attached to the window cas- opposite direction. I placed the coun-
ter-flashing in the usual manner, with
the projection B hanging down and the
WOOD <fJ pointed end of the hook in the joint,
BLOCK-'
and drove or pushed it in tightly. The
OUTEIR points A A will catch on the under side
SASH
of the brick and hold solidly. Contrib- —
CURTAIN uted by Ralph M. Chatham, Orleans,
Indiana.
When the Upper Sash is
Lowered the Shade is Out
of the Way of the Opening A Homemade Dibble
INNER SASM
A dibble made
of a round and sharp-
pointed stick is the usual tool for mak-
ing, as it the opening caused
partly fills
ing holes when setting tomato and
by lowering the upper sash. If the
other plants. I found by experience
shade roller is attached to the top of
the upper sash, the shade can perform
that a dibble made of a flat board
its function without obstructing the
would work much better and leave a
opening when the sash is lowered. It
only requires a shorter roller and a
narrower shade. The roller brackets
are attached in the usual manner, but,
in order to have the shade hang ver-
tically, a block, as wide as the lower
sash frame, must be fastened under A Dibble Used
for Making
each bracket.
Holes in the
This arrangement also makes it Soil to
much easier to put up a curtain, as the Transplant
sash can be let down until the roller Tomato and
can be reached while standing on a
Other Plants
1
chair.— Contributed by James M.
Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
V
Flashing Hook
cleaner hole if worked into the earth
Having occasion to do a large with a horizontal swinging motion.
amount of counter-flashing in a new The hole produced is just right for the
wall where the mortar was soft and the
plant. The illustration shows its
joint too large to
construction.
use an ordinary
nail or the regu-
lar flashing hook.
Liquid Court-Plaster
I made hooks A good liquid preparation for cuts
from No. 24 and bruises that forms a covering like
gauge galvanized liquid court-plaster is made by mixing
iron, having % oz. of flexible collodion with 1/4 oz.
hooks of extra of ether. When this solution is ap-
size and plied to cuts it will not wash off. As
strength, as shown in the sketch. The the ether evaporates, add more to keep
size of the hook is 1-54 by in. 3% On the mixture liquid.
247
The
DOOdOOOO
VentilatorPrevents the Air from Entering
A convenient way to accurately drop
medicine and liquids without any other
a Room in a Straight Line than
appliance
toward the outside. This will direct the cork is the
following: Sim-
the incoming air currents upward into
the room.
plyburn or
puncture a
smooth hole in
A Chisel Rack
the cork as
Turn two large screweyes into the shown. Pull the cork out slightly
under side of a shelf, as far apart as is when the liquid is to be dropped, and
necessary, and slip a rod into the eyes. when this is done, push the cork in
The rod may be kept from slipping out and the bottle is sealed.
249
Fasten each disk to a block and 4 ft. of line to each revolution and the
nail these to any convenient wall at sash-cord shaft is %
in. in diameter,
such a distance apart that the nail about 100 ft. of line can be taken up
heads in the broomstick will slip down in a basement 7 ft. high. —
Contributed
in the slots and rest in the holes in the by A. E. Little, Akron, O.
centers of the disks, which form the
bearings for the nail heads resting be-
yond the tin and next to the block. CBlack-heart malleable iron derives its
With a little care the tin can be name from the fact that in annealing
made to bulge outwardly in the center only the outer layers of carbon are
making room for the nail heads. Con- — oxidized, the carbon of the interior be-
tributed by L. Alberta Norrell, Au- ing simply changed to a black amor-
gusta, Ga. phous state.
250
A Sliver Extractor
Night Croquet Playing wire will hold any bottle. The wire
is bent to hook on the side of the crib,
Croquet playing became so interest-
ing to us that we could not find time
to do all our playing during the day.
So at night we attach a candle to each
of the wickets and also use one at each
corner of the grounds. These light
the grounds so that the game can be
played nicely. The candles may be at-
tached by wiring them to the wickets
or by using small pasteboard boxes,
similar to a pill box of sufficient size, Nursing Bottle in Holder
and running a wire through the center
or down the sides, which is hooked
cradle or cab. — Contributed by W. A.
Humphrey, Columbus, O.
over the top to hold them upright on
top of the ground. The latter way is
the better as the candles may be pulled Milk-Ticket Holder
up in the day time and taken out of An
ordinary spring mousetrap makes
the way. —
Contributed by Geo. Good- a good bread or milk-ticket holder.
brod, Union, Ore. The wood part of the trap can be
A Nursing-Bottle Holder
The ordinary nursing bottle with
nipple necessitates holding the bottle
in a certain position, and when the
valve nipples are used, the bottle
should be held far enough away to al-
Trap Used as Ticket Holder
low this valve free action. To accom-
plish this I constructed a very sim- easily nailed or screwed to a door or
ple wire holder for the bottle as shown window casing. The way the tickets
in the illustration. Ordinary telephone are held is clearly shown in the sketch.
zle it is necessary to
pen was then slipped in, the outside
have some kind of
wound with a rubber band, and my an arrangement to
penholder was complete. Contributed — tilt the end at the
by H. A. Sullwold, St. Paul, Minn. proper angle. I find
that a holder made
Protecting Binding Posts on Wet
of a heavy piece of
Batteries from Corrosion galvanized wire bent
AVhen recharging the cells of a wet in the shape shown can be used
battery best to procure the best
it is to set the nozzle at any angle.
grade of sal ammoniac, the kind that The wire is easily pushed into the
is put up in boxes having a sufficient earth and does no harm to the
amount for one cell. Then, before put- —
lawn. Contributed liy T. J. Ingram,
ting the solution mto the cell, melt Jr., I^ynchburg, \'a.
253
Alarm to Designate a Filled Storage to a post the use of the device shown
is
in the sketch. It consists of a board,
Battery
as long as the fencing is wide, with
When a storage battery is recharged,
the completion of the recharging is
marked by the development of gas in
the cell. This fact is the basis of a
simple electrical device which will ring
a bell when the battery is fully charged.
A glass tube bent as shown and hav-
ing a small bulb near its upper end is
inserted in the top of the cell, a small Board Fitted with
quantity of mercury being first intro- Screw Hooks and a
Pulling Device for
duced in the bend below the bulb.
Stretching Poultry
Wires extend down the upper tubing Fencing on Posts
to within a short distance of the mer-
cury. These wires are connected with
binding posts so mounted that they can screw hooks set far enough apart to
rest on top of the tube, whereupon the catch into the meshes of
the wire, and
bell circuit is completed as shown. the board by
a crosspiece attached to
Small quantities of gas may develop and provided
pieces of rope at the ends
with a pulling loop in the center.
Contributed by Joseph C. Laackman,
Meadow Brook, Pa.
A Centering Gauge
The centering gauge consists of a
piece of celluloid on which several
circles are drawn having different
diameters, but all drawn from the same
center. A small hole is made at the
center to admit the point of a center
punch. Two sets of circles may be
drawn on one piece as shown, but the
lines should be spaced far enough
The Gas Generated by a Filled Storage Battery will apart to allow the metal to be clearly
Make Electric Connections and Sound an Alarm
seen through the celluloid. The sheet
during the charging of the cell, but if is placed on the end of a shaft and
a small hole pierced in the tube be-
is adjusted so that a ring will match the
tween the mercury and the cell, this circumference of the shaft, then the
gas will not exert pressure enough on center punch is set in the center hole
the mercury to push it up and connect
it with the wires, which will take place
first when the development of gas be-
comes very active at the coinpletion of
the recharging.
Homemade Letters for Marking Bags shoe. Tie the extending ends together,
and mount the whole on a suitable
An initial marker for bags can be block, or, if desired, a hole can be
made of a beet or potato. Cut ofif bored in the step to receive the handle,
enough of the vege- and the scraper thus securely attached.
table to provide a This makes an effective scraper for
flat surface of suf- the liottom as well as the sides of shoes
ficient size and then
cut out the letter as
of almost any size. —
Contributed by
Jno. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
shown in the sketch,
and use shoe black-
ing as ink. In cut-
A Vegetable Slicer
ting, remember that A tin bucket or can makes a good
most of the letters slicer for vegetables when no other
must be made reversed in order to slicer is at hand. A
print right. For example, in making a number of slots are cut
B, draw it out on paper and cut it out, across one side of the
then lay the face of the pattern on the can, and the lower edge
flat surface of the vegetable and cut of each slot slightly
around it. turned out to form a
cutting edge. The vege-
To Keep a Crease in a Soft Hat table is placed against
the top of the can and
The
crease in a soft hat can be kept pushed down over the
in proper shape with the aid of a slots. Each slot will cut ofif a slice
paper clip. The clip is slipped over which falls inside of the can.
through the
\
5" 1—
3'/4-
it also made it appear in harmony with
circle to make 24 points. This will them pliable enough to bend over at
haxe to be tried out more than once, right angles. It will not injure the
to get the spaces to come out evenly wood bottom to soak it with the reeds.
and just have the right number of As shown at A, Figs. 4 and 5, each
points. Holes are bored with a ^-in. spoke below the wood bottom is bent
bit, just inside of the inner circle, back down and back of the two nearest
of the places marked by the compass spokes, B and C, then out between the
points, as shown in Fig. 2. Cut the third and fourth spokes, C and D, and
board on the outside circle with a so on. The last two spokes, Y
and Z,
coping, or turn, saw, to make the cir- Fig. 6, are forced under the spokes A
cle, as in Fig. 3. Do not saw out the and B, respectively. In this illustra-
circle before boring the holes, as other- tion the spoke Yis shown as it is being
wise the disk might split out in places. inserted under the spoke A. When
The reeds placed vertically are called this operation is completed, the bottom
spokes, and the horizontal ones are will have the appearance of a fireworks
the weavers. For the spokes, what is pinwheel.
called a No. 4 reed is used. Do not wet Continue the bending of the spokes.,
the spokes before putting them through in the same
direction, up and across
the wood. Allow the ends to project the thickness of the wood in front of
about 51/^ in. below the bottom, as three other spokes and behind the
shown in Fig. 4. Place the bottom, fourth, as shown in Fig. 7. This would
with the spokes, in water, and soak not cover the edge of the wood entirely,
them thoroughly, especially the part and, for this reason, other short spokes
below the bottom. About 15 minutes must be inserted in front of each of
of soaking will be sufficient to make the first ones before it is brought up
Fic.6
Fitt.5
The Bottom is Cut from a Piece of Wood to Give Strength and to Avoid the Most Difficult Part of the
Weaving; the Reeds are Attached to the Bottom and Their Lower Ends Bent as Shown
259
across the edge of the wood. These a weaver is used up, press it back to
supplementary spokes should be about the side a little, push in a new reed
4 in. long. The manner of inserting about II/2 in., and continue the weav-
Fie.i2
^FiG.IO X "^ Fig. II A B C D E
The Lower Ends of the Spokes are Turned to Cover the Edge of the Bottom. Then the Reeds
are Woven into the Upright Spokes to the Right Height, Where They are
Broken Down and Woven into a Top Border
these spokes before making the bend is ing. This is clearly shown in Fig. 10.
shown at G and T, Fig. 6. The double This weaving is known as the triple
spokes must be pressed down flat, when weave, which cinches down well and
brought up in place, without riding one holds tightly. The first round should
on the other. If the ends are too long be carefully worked, so as to get the
and interfere with the next pair, they ends of the roll properly pressed down
can be cut ofif a little with a flat chisel, flat in place. Each throw of the weaver
or knife, being careful not to make should be well pressed down.
them too short, or the pieces will not The break-down-tight border is used
stay in place. If there is still an open for the finish at the top. The first
space, an extra, short spoke can be in- operation in making this border is
serted to crowd the pieces together and shown in Fig. 11. The spoke A is bent
fill up the space. over back of spoke B and out between
When the roll is completed, insert spokes B and C. The spoke B is bent
three weavers, of No. 3 reed that has over back of the spoke C and out be-
been soaked about 15 minutes, placing tween C and D, and so on, until the
them between the spokes A and B, B spoke E is turned down. Then take
and C, and C and D, as shown in Fig. the end of the spoke A, Fig. 13, and
8. Pass weaver L in front of the lay it over B, C, D, and E, in front of
spokes B and C, then back of D and F, back of G, and out between G and
out between D and E. Weaver is M H. The end of spoke F is then brought
passed in front of C and D, back of E down, also between G and H, but back
and out in front of E and F. These of the end of A. The end of B takes
operations are clearly shown in Fig. a similar leap, passes behind H and
9. The weaver N is placed in front of out between H and J then G is brought
;
D and E, back of F and then in front down behind the end of B, in the same
of G and H. At this point the weaver manner as F was brought down back
L is used again. The weaver farthest of A. The last four or five spokes are
behind each time is brought in front the most difficult to handle, as they
of the two spokes nearest to it, then must be forced through the first ones
behind the third and out in front of the to correspond with those already in
next two spokes. Do not try to use place. It is best not to pull the ends
weavers longer than 8 ft., which is of A, B, C, and D down too tightly at
about half the length of a reed. When first, keeping in mind that the last ones
260
must be inserted under the first ones. other, flame that will not smut. If it
The standing spokes are repre-
last requires bleaching, brush some chloride
sented by the full and shaded lines. of lime, mixed in a little water, over
If the roll illustrated in Figs. 11 and the reeds and set in the sunlight for
12 too difficult, a simple break-down
is a short time. It is better to leave the
can be used, such as shown in Fig. 13. finish a little dark rather than use
To make this finish, spoke A
is turned too much bleaching, as the latter will
back of spoke B, in front of spoke C give an objectionable whitish appear-
and back of spoke D, but not out again. ance that looks like a poor job of
Spoke B is bent back of C, in front of painting.
D, and back of E. The others are In working the reeds, do not leave
turned down the same way. The them in the water longer than neces-
manner in which the two last spokes sary, as this will turn them dark. A
are turned down and inserted is shown, bleached reed will stand the water
by the double dotted lines. much longer than in the natural state.
The remainder of the illustrations Dampen the reed frequently while
show the method of forming a roll weaving it, as the weavers pack down
between the first and second spokes, much closer when wet. The dampgn-
where only three spokes are turned ing process is also required to remedy
down before the throwing-across proc- the drying out caused by whisking the
ess begins. The first three spokes reeds through the air in weaving ope-
turned down are shown in Fig. 14, rations. A great variety of baskets
and the throwing over, in Fig. 15. can be made from this form, viz., low,
The second beginning is shown in tall, tapering vase forms, bowl shapes,
Fig. 16. The finishing of this top is etc., in plain or dark weaves.
shown in Figs. 17 and 18. The full,
heavy lines represent the final inser- Wireless-Lighted Lamp Deception
tions,and the reed must be in quite a
sharp loop to make the end enter the Window displays of puzzling nature
right place. It is then drawn down usually draw crowds. A lighted globe
and forced in front of the other reed lying on its side in full view, yet ap-
that passes out between the same parently not connected to any source of
spokes. electricity, could easily be arranged as
When the basket is dry, the long a window display, deceiving the closest
ends can be cut ofi^ close up with a observer. A mirror, or window glass,
C D
A Simple Break-Down Roll for the Top. Also a Method of Forming a Roll between the First and Second
Spokes Where Only Three Spokes are Turned Down Before the Throwing-Across Process Begins
knife,being careful not to cut a weaver, backed with some opaque material.
If there are hairv fibers sticking out should be used for the foundation of
they can be singed ofiE over a gas, or the device. For the display lamp, it is
261
best to use a 25 or 40-watt tungsten, as notched around the edge to permit wa-
these will lie flatter on the glass than ter to enter or leave the bottle without
the larger sizes, and the deception will losing the bait. If live grasshoppers.
not be as easily discovered. The place
where the brass cap of the lamp
touches the glass should be marked
and a small hole drilled through to the
wire connecting the tungsten filament
to the plug on the top of the lamp. At
any suitable place, a hole should be
drilled in the glass plate, no larger than
is necessary, to permit two small cot-
ton-covered magnet wires to pass
through. One of the wires should be
looped, passed through the hole in the
cap and hooked onto the bare wire con- The Bait is Kept Alive and Unharmed in a Bottle
necting with the plug on top of lamp. Surrounded with Hooks
The other wire should be fastened to or similar bait, is desired the cork can
the brass cap, near the drilled hole,
be used unnotched to form a water-
after which the lamp may be placed in
tight stopper. As illuminated bait for
position and the two wires connected night fishing, several fireflies can be put
to a source of electricity. If proper
care has been taken and no crosses oc-
in the bottle. —
Contributed by L. Wah-
rer, Tifiin, Ohio.
WINDOW GLASS>
i^ Bookrack
£^
-J^&y^_^_-f|^
^^i=^
^ TpiP
The material necessary for the illus-
trated bookrack is as follows
2 end pieces,
1 shelf, 5i
^ by 5^ by 6
by 5J4 by 13 in.
in.
glued in place, and clamped with hand formed by a door jamb or window
screws until the glue has set. Any of frame, which protects it and renders it
the good mission stains, properly ap- almost unnoticeable.
plied, will give a finished appearance to A good grade of tough Manila paper
the bookrack. should be procured and cut into strips,
about 18 in. long and wide enough to
A Paper Gas Pipe build up a tube at least J^ in. in
diameter. This will require from 4 to
When one fits up an attic or a back 6 in., according to the thickness of the
room as a workshop, it is seldom that paper. A piece of i/4-in. round iron or
a gas connection is available on about hard wood, 20 in. long, is procured and
carefully oiled or greased. Apply a
METHOD OF ROLLING
Z) PAPER STRIP ^ coat of strong fish glue to one of these
pieces of paper, omitting a strip along
one edge, about 1 in. wide. Using the
outspread fingers of each hand, begin
with the unglued edge and roll the
paper around the wood. As it is im-
possible to get the paper uniformly
tight with the fingers, select a smooth
place on the table and then roll the
newly formed tube forward by means
of a piece of board, as shown in the
illustration. On the return stroke lift
the board. In this way it is possible
to get a tight, smooth tube. Immedi-
ately withdraw the core, twisting it
slightly in a reverse direction if it
tends to stick. Before using the core
again, make sure it is free from glue
and regrease it. When a sufficient
number of tubes have been made and
hardened, neatly trim the ends ofif
squarely, and then form an equal num-
CROSS SECTION OF JOINT ber of short tubes, about 2 in. long, by
The Tube is Run Out Horizontally from the Chan- winding a strip of glued paper on a
deher to the Wall Where the Drop is Connected
large wire nail until a diameter is
the same level as the workbench so reached that will fit snugly into the
that a Bunsen burner and soldering pipes already made. The joints may
apparatus may be operated. To install then be set up with strong glue and
the standard gas pipe, it would be finally wrapped with two thicknesses
necessary either to alter the chandelier of paper on the outside. The construc-
connection or to tear up some of the tion of these joints is shown in the
plaster, the former plan resulting in cross section.
a rather conspicuous display of pipe The connection with the chandelier
and the latter in considerable expense. can be made by means of a metal tube
The following method permits the roll- soldered in at a point where the regu-
ing of a pipe, about the size of a lead lar valve will cut ofif all connection
pencil, from paper that becomes so stiff with the paper piping when it is not
that it is almost impossible to crush in use. This metal tube should be
it between the thumb and fingers. This coated with thick shellac, and the paper
small inconspicuous pipe may be run tube slipped over it for 1 in. or more,
directly from the side of the valve on after which the joint should be given
the chandelier to the wall, as shown several additional coats on the outside.
in the sketch, thence down some corner A small regulating gas cock can be
263
attached to the lower end of the piping, Needle Box for Talking Machines
and if this is rigidly fastened to the
wall, or casing, the connecting and An empty cigarette box can be easily
disconnecting of the rubber tubing will changed to a useful container for talk-
not disturb the piping in any way. ing-machine needles, as shown in the
Contributed by John D. Adams.
method, of course, is the easier and grasps the half apple and crushes it
really just as effective. In performing, with a slight pass toward the knife-
a plate with three apples is first ex- handle end where the bill is grasped
along with the apple, which makes a
perfect illusion of taking the bill out of
the apple.
As to the disappearance of the dollar
bill, there are many ways in which this
may be accomplished. Perhaps the
method requiring the least practice is
to place the bill in the trousers pocket,
and then show the audience that the
latter is empty. This can be done by
rolling the bill to small compass, and
pushing it into the extreme upper cor-
ner of the pocket where it will remain
undetected while the pocket is pulled
out for inspection. Other combinations
can be arranged with the use of the
knife, which is simple to make and ver/
inexpensive.
The child's playhouse is an expen- from unraveling, turn the edges under
sive luxury, if it is purchased ready to before tacking them down.
set up, but by following the instruc-
tions given herewith a large and in-
expensive one may be con-
structed.
Procure about 100 ft. of 1%
by li/i>-in. boards, and saw out
pieces, as shown. With the
use of iron brackets instead of
nails, it will be found much
easier to construct than if the
V-HINGE HINGE-V
Fig 2
.OWNING WINDOW
FRAME FRAME
Fig 3
The Entire Framework is Held Together with Brackets, and is Hinged at the Joints, so That It can be
Folded Up and Put into a Small Space, the Sections being Covered with Colored Burlap to
Make Them Appear Solid. On the Right is Shown the Awning-Frame Construction
363
266
A
piece of wire screen is used for the For the one built by the writer, green
door. An old piece will do, if it is well burlap was used, and by trimming the
coated with black or dark-green paint. door and window frames along the
It is then tacked on the inside of the edges with white paint a very pretty
door. Fasten the different parts to- effect was produced.
gether with the hinges. The hinges A small awning was made over the
are fastened on the inside of the side window, which improved the appear-
wings, and on the outside of the two ance very much. Roller shades on the
front pieces. With the hinges placed door and window and an electric door
in this manner, the house can be folded bell completed a very neat and practi-
into a small space. cal playhouse.
Removing Basketball from Closed- and run up and over a sheave pulley
Bottom Receptacle attached to the basket support, then
down so it could be easily grasped.
The closed-bottom basket used in the When a goal is made, it is only neces-
game of basketball is so high that it sary to give a pull on the rope for
is difficult to remove the ball after a throwing the ball out of the ba.sket.
Contributed by Annie B. Currine, San
Diego, Cal.
How to Make a Candy-Floss Machine home much quicker than making tafify
candy.
Every person is familiar with candy The device for making the candy
floss, made at stands on grounds,
fair floss consists of ordinary things that
or carnivals, in an expensive whirling can be had in any home, and usually a
boy has a battery motor of some kind
that will furnish the power.
Procure a tin pan, the shape of an
ordinary dish pan and of medium size;
cut a hole about one-half the diameter
of the pan in the bottom and solder
in a conical-shaped piece similar to a
cake pan, allowing it to extend up in-
side about half the height of the pan.
Fasten supports to the pan so that a
Bunsen burner can be set under it
where the flame will pass through the
conical center opening.
Mount a small battery motor with
its shaft vertical, pulley end up, and
centering the conical hole, on a base,
which supports the pan. Procure a can
cover, similar to that used on cofTee
cans, and fasten it with solder to the
pulley on the motor shaft, being care-
ful to locate it centrally so that it will
run smoothly.
Close to the bottom and in the rim
of the can cover, make a number of
small holes with a prickpunch, or other
sharp-pointed tool. Wire the motor to
the battery, and the candy-tloss ma-
The Disk is Driven by a Small Battery Motor and
Melted Sugar is Spun Out into Floss
chine is ready for use.
Light the burner, start the motor,
machine. It is not necessary to wait and pour a little granulated sugar in
for a fair or a carnival to have a bunch the revolving can cover. As the sugar
of candy floss, as it can be made at is melted, it will be spun out in floss
269
Enlarging Pictures
A very simple and sufficiently ac-
curateway of enlarging pictures by
means of a pencil holder and elastic is
shown in the illustration. The picture
to be enlarged is fastened to a table top /
or drawing board, and the paper on
\ \\i f^
^A^)!?^
which it is to be drawn is placed di- i
Recently I was hard pressed for a This is a new indoor game which
pen, and as none could be found and follows out in principle the regular
the hour was late it was necessary to baseball play. It is an exciting and
interesting pastime, and while a cer-
tain amount of skill is required to
score runs, a person who cannot play
the regular game can score as many
runs, and as often, as the best players
in the national leagues.
Anyone that is just a little handy
A Notch Cut in the Tapered Part of a Wood Stick
Forms a Substitute Pen with tools can make the necessary parts
for this game. The tools required are
find a substitute. I fashioned a pen a hammer and a saw. and the materials
from a piece of boxwood, and was consist of some finishing nails three ;
agreeably surprised at the excellent strips of wood, 6 ft. long, 2 in. wide,
results obtained with it. The wood and 1 in. thick two strips, 18 in. long,
;
was sharpened like a lead pencil at one 4 in. wide, and 1 in. thick four strips,
;
end, and a groove was cut out of the 24 in. long, 2 in. wide, and 1 in. thick;
tapered part to hold the ink. Con- — two strips, 18 in. long, 2 in. wide, and
tributed by Richard F. Pohle, Lynn, 1 in. thick; two blocks, 4 in. square,
Massachusetts. and 1 in. thick, and four wood buckets.
^^n\ ^fTK
\^^ '%^
The Frame is Made Up without a Back, to Hold the Buckets at an Angle That Makes It Difficult
to Toss the Ball So That It will Stay in Any One of Them
271
The Player must Throw the Ball So That It will Enter and Stay in One of the Buckets,
Which Designates the Base Hits by the Number in Its Bottom
A frame is built up as shown, 6 ft. Ifthe next ball stays in bucket No.
long, 18 in. wide, and 2i in. high, with- 4, the man on third base is forced
out a back. One of the long pieces is home, as well as the one who scored
fastened to the bottoms of the buckets the home run, making three runs for
as shown, spacing the latter equally that inning. The runs should be
on the length of the piece. This piece scored as made, to guard against con-
is then set in notches cut in the blocks fusion and argument. —
Contributed by
of wood at an angle of 45°. These Walter Tallev, Pottsville, Pa.
blocks are fastened to the upper cross-
pieces at the ends of the frame. The
upper part of the buckets rest on the A Staple Puller
upper front piece of the frame.
The rules for playing the game are With nothing
as follows :Three baseballs are used. but ordinary
The players stand about 10 ft. distant tools the remov-
and in front of the buckets. Each ing of staples is
player, or side, is only permitted to tedious and diffi-
covers both. The falling glass can be In nickelplating iron, a thin coating of
heard, but upon removing the hand- copper is first produced on it by rub-
kerchief nothing can be seen of the bing on a solution of 20 parts sulphate
dollar or watch crystal. The circular of copper, 5 parts sulphuric acid and
glass disk cannot be seen in the water. 100 parts of water. After the copper
— Contributed by Albert Biery, Spo- plate has been formed rul_> over it, with
a rag, a solution of 3 parts tin, 6 parts
kane, Wash.
nickel and 1 part iron in 100 parts of
hydrochloric acid and 3 parts of sul-
A Fruit- Jar Opener phuric acid. If finally the object is
The accompanying sketch shows a rubbed with a rag that has been dipped
handy device for turning up and un- in finely pulverized zinc, a nickel de-
screwing the covers on glass fruit jars. posit will be formed on the copper.
The loop is slipped over the cover and The thickness of the deposit of nickel
the handle turned in the direction of can be increased by repeating the two
the arrow. To unscrew the cover, the last operations.
tool is turned over and the handle According to a recent patent, a silver
turned in the opposite direction. coating can be produced by dissolving
The loop should be just large freshly precipitated chloride of silver
enough to slip over the cover easily. in a solution of hyposulphite of soda,
1.1 parts to 10 parts of water, and add-
ing to this solution 180 parts spirits
of sal ammoniac and then stirring in
800 parts of finely washed chalk. This
mixture is applied and rubbed until it
dries on the object being silvered, and
tlie result is a brilliant deposit of pure
silver.
The Loop in the Leather Grips the Cap Tightly ^Vhen
the Handle is Turned as the Arrow Indicates
CAgood filling for cracks in old furni-
made of leather and fastened to the
It is ture is made of shellac, either melted
wood handle with screws. Contrib- — by heat or dissolved in alcohol to make
uted by J. B. Downer, Seattle, Wash. a thick paste.
373
The cradle shown in the sketch can The stopping of a ball on a string at
be made quickly and easily at home any desired point is understood by al-
and will be found far more serviceable most every person, but to make one
than, and possessing several advan- that can be worked
tages over, the ones purchased. It is only when the oper-
made of a clothes basket, an iron rod ator so desires is a
and two ordinary chairs. It can be mysterious trick.
Procure a wooden
ball, about 2 in. in
diameter, and cut it
into two equal parts.
Insert a small peg
in the flat surface of
one half, a little to
one side of the cen-
ter, as shown, and
o--PIM ropes and stakes Before handing the ball and string
must be removed. out for inspection, push the string from
To drive in iron each side of the ball and turn it slight-
stakes and then re- ly to throw it off the peg. This will
i move them
work and
is hard
requires
allow the string to pass freely through
the ball, and it cannot be stopped at
considerable time. will. To replace the string reverse the
J The sketch shows a operation. — Contributed by Wm. O.
much better way. A Swett, Chicago.
piece of 2-in. pipe,
about 18 in. long, is sunk level with
Wall-Paper Cleaner
the ground in the right location for
a post. The post is made of li/2-in- The following mixture I have used
pipe of the length desired. This will with the best results for years. Thor-
just fit inside of the 2-in. pipe. A oughly mix together 3 pt. of wheat
wood plug is fitted in the upper end flour and 1 pt. of powdered whiting,
of the pipe in the ground to keep out then add sufficient water to make a
dirt when the post is removed. Con- — dough. To clean a dirty papered wall,
tributed by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dart- take a piece of the dough that can be
mouth, Mass. easily grasped in the hand, press it
374
A Curtain Hanger
A
close-coiled spring, about 1/4 i'l- '"
diameter, makes a much better hanger
for a short curtain than a small rod.
The Expansion and Contraction of the Ropes Keep
the Disk Up and to One Side of the Center The spring should be about 1 in.
out. The ropes emerging from the shorter than the width of the window
water but not yet thoroughly dry and fastened with screwhooks. The
cause the upper part of the disk to be spring is preferable not only because
in an eccentric position laterally with it is less apt to tear the fabric, as it
thus causing the center of gravity to but also for the reason that it is much
be not only above but also slightly to easier to put it through the hem than
—
one side. Contributed by Charles the rod. —
Contributed by Walter
Roberts, Brooklyn, N. Y. Ramm, New York City.
275
CA deep rust on tools may be removed Throwing a ring over one of the "home-
by soaking them in a strong, hot bath run" pegs means a score, of course.
of potash and water for a half hour, The "infield hit" secures a base. If
then dipping them into a solution of the ring slips into a hole, that counts
1 part muriatic acid in 2 parts cold one out. A player must throw until
water. he has three outs. The score is kept
376
j&
TO SOURCE or CNtRGY
^h and D. The wiring for the control of
lamps, as just indicated, must comply
with the underwriters' requirements,
and also city requirements, if the work
000000 be done in a place having city regula-
tions for electric wiring.
Fig. I
number of different switches. For ex- CWire netting may be cut by laying
ample, the lights in a long hall or it on the side edge of a spade and strik-
passage-way can be lighted or extin- insr it with a hammer.
277
the water.
An Alarm Clock with a Wood Covering Ornamented
The following is the proper way to
and Finished in Mission Style
proceed in mixing sulphuric acid as
mensions cannot be given as these will well as other acids of lighter weight.
vary with the size of the clock. Quar- Place the water in a jar and pour the
ter-sawed oak, 14 in. thick, is the best acid in, a little at a time, stirring the
material to use. The front and back mixture with a wooden stick. The
can be cut on a jigsaw, the opening mixing process will always heat the
for the clock face being cut slightly solution, which in many instances,
smaller than the metal of the clock so must be allowed to cool before using.
that only the face shows. An opening
in the back piece should be cut a little
smaller than the one in front, to pro- A Chinese Pagoda
vide a free opening for winding the Fold the end of a long and narrow
clock. Fasten the parts together with strip of paper over several times as
small round-head brass brads or shown in Fig. 1 and roll the entire
screws and finish to match the furni- length over a stick, then remove the
ture. A small desk clock can be made roll and crease, or make it fiat, as
in a similar manner, using a cheap
watch instead of the alarm clock.
Contributed by C. E. Hamann, Somer-
Fig, I
ville, Mass.
F1G.2
Mixing Sulphuric Acid
One of the first lessons given a
student in chemistry is how to mix F1G.4
sulphuric acid with water. This would
Fig. 3
naturally be supposed to be very easy,
F1G.5
yet, if it is not done right, it will surely Stages in Making the Strip of Paper
result in injury to the person doing into the Finished Pagoda
on the inner end of the paper, then shown in the sketch. In this way the
cut the fold in the paper between the work can be done better and more
cuts as shown in Fig. 3, and bend
the ends over to form the shape The Plane-Iron Cap
Turned at Right
in Fig. 4. Insert the knife blade Angles, Provides
under the first fold and draw it out a Guide to Grind
the Edge
until the paper takes the form in Straight
Fig. 5.
These pagodas can be made large
or small, as desired, and also varied
in several ways. Large ones can be
formed and used as small tree orna-
ments. All that is necessary to make quickly than by the usual method.
them high is to roll up one strip of
Contributed by L. S. UphoiT, Schenec-
paper on another in the rolling tady, N. Y.
process.
In rolling up several strips, one on To Prevent Torch Lights from
top of the other successively, various
Smoking
colored papers may be used and the
appearance is greatly enhanced. Con- — In the shop or factory oil torches
tributed by Chas. C. Bradley, W. are sometimes used and much trouble
Toledo, O. is experienced by the excessive smok-
ing of the tlame. This occurs because
too much carbon remains unburned,
A Cuspidor Carrier
and can be remedied by first soaking
The task of handling cuspidors 'un- the wick in a weak solution of acetic
der all conditions is anything but pleas- acid. A 5-per-cent solution can be
ant, but the carrier purchased for a few cents at anv drug
shown in the sketch store and will soak a great number of
makes quite an im- wicks. The acid is not poisonous un-
provement over ordi- less taken internally.
nary methods. The
carrier consists of an
iron rod, Y^ in. in di- A Lard and Fruit Presser
ameter and 3 ft. long. Avery simple but handy device for
One end is bent to pressing out lard, juices for jelly, or
fit around the neck fruit for marmalade, is made from two
of the cuspidor and boards, each 18 long, 3 in. wide and
in.
the other is shaped into a handle. 1/2 in. thick, formed into the shape of
paddles and hinged together. The
hinge is made by running a wire
Guide for Grinding a Plane Iron through holes bored in one end of the
When a plane iron has been sharp- paddles and twisting the ends together
ened a number of times, it often be-
comes so out of square that the edge
cannot be made parallel with the bot-
tom of the plane block, even by using
the lateral adjustment. A\'here this
happens, the plane iron must be re-
ground. If an emery wheel mounted Two Paddles Hinged Together with a Piece of Wire
Make a Presser for Lard and Fruits
in a polishing head or lathe is at hand,
this can be easily accomplished. as shown. This presser will save the
Loosen the plane-iron cap and screw hands from stains and other effects of
it down at right angles to the plane ihe juices. —
Contributed by Julia A.
iron, also reverse the tool rest as White, Glenburg, Pa.
280
thumbs, then up again, and tied in two of the hands with the palms spread out.
knots on top of the riglit thumb, as at If there is any difficulty in drawing
C. The trick in the tying is at this out or replacing the thumb in the loop,
point. Just as the tie is being made it is because the ties have not been
pull the left thumb until the smallest- properly made
or tied when the thumbs
diameter joints reach the cord and pull were the right place.
in It requires
down with the left hand. Push the some practice to do the trick quickly.
right thumb so that the fleshy part en- Fayette.
ters as far as possible into the cords.
Insist on the tie being made tightly.
A Way to Keep Home Accounts
The second and smaller cord is laid
below the right thumb as shown at D, An easy way to keep track of all the
and on top of the left against the first home expenses is by the popular card
cord, crossed, brought back and tied system. The index cards can be had
twice. When this is being done re- at any stationery-supply house. Place
verse the pushing and pulling as de- the cards in a box on end and have a
scribed, pushing the left thumb and good supply of blanks back of them
pulling out on the right. Secure all ready for use. Under, or back of, each
the slack on the left thumb, the right letter place as many blanks as is neces-
being pushed into the cords at its sary, and almost instantly any item of
smallest diameter and the second cord expense in the home may be found,
being tied high up and as near the such as the cost of coal for the year,
right thumb as possible, with knots drugs, meat, the cost of clothing for
tightly drawn. If this second knot is a child, and the account of the head of
not tight it will give trouble in per- the family. The boy's account might
forming the trick. read as follows under the letter J :
used to connect to the light which is the metal on the inside, or the wire
swung to the scroll end of the base. may be placed inside of the shell and
Contributed by F. L. Matter, Portland,
Oregon.
An Inexpensive File
How to Clean Jewelry tive, but low and high numbers dis-
tributed with the object in view of
To cleanse articles of silver, gold,
bronze and brass use a saturated solu-
tion of cyanide of potassium. To clean
small articles, dip each one into the
solution and rinse immediately in hot
water; then dry and polish with a linen
cloth. Larger articles are cleaned by
rubbing the surface with a small tuft
of cotton saturated in the solution. As
cyanide of potassium is a deadly
poison, care must be taken not to have
ittouch any sore spot on the flesh.
Contributed by G. A. Koerbis, U. S. S.
"Vermont."
The Candy-Pail Cover with Pegs Numbered and a
Set of Rings for Each Player
Runner for a Go-Cart
making it difificult to secure a high
Asthe wheels of a go-cart do not score.
push through the snow very easily and Each player has a set of five rings,
the cart, therefore, does not run in a which are nothing else but rubber
straight direction, and as I did not care fruit-jar rings. These can be purchased
to purchase a sled, I instead fitted the at a grocery store. The board is hung
on a wall or post, and the player stands
about 5 or 6 ft. away and throws the
rings, one at a time, trying to ring pegs
having the highest numbers. The sum
of the numbers corresponding to the
The Runners are Easily Applied to the \Vheels of a
Go-Cart and Hold Them Solidly pegs ringed counts toward the final
score. Turns are taken by each player,
go-cart wheels with runners as shown and each time five rings are thrown.
in the sketch. I purchased a piece of
The score can be set at any amount,
machine steel of a diameter to fit the
grooves in the wheels after the rubber,
—
500 being about right. Contributed by
Francis P. Hobart, Willoughby, O.
tires were removed. This I cut and
bent to the shape shown at A, making
two runners, and applied one to each A Pen and Brush Holder
pair of wheels, front and rear, as shown
at B. The runners kept the wheels im- A sheet of corrugated
paper is a
movable and caused the cart to glide handy thing to have
on the writing
over the snow as a sleigh. This run- desk, for the purpose of placing wet
ner will not interfere with the folding pens or brushes in its grooves. The
of a collapsible cart. —
Contributed by paper absorbs the liquid, and the cor-
rugations hold the pens or brushes in
Roy B. Hanaford, Detroit, Mich.
handy positions. A sheet of this paper
A Ring-Throwing Game
The board for this game is made of
a cover from an old candy or lard pail,
washed and painted black. When the
paint is dry, place 50 pegs on the sur- The Depressions in the Paper Hold the Pens or
Brushes and Also Absorb the Excess Fluid
face as shown and number them with
white paint or by fastening numbers isalmost as useful a desk accessory as
cut from paper below them. The a blotter. —
Contributed by James M.
numbering of the pegs is not consecu- Kanfe, Doylestown, Pa.
288
Supporter for a Double Clothesline at C. The line from the other side of
the socket B terminates at D.
A double clothesline of any length In testing a fixture, the plug is A
should have a supporter in the center
turned into a socket of some source
to keep the line from sagging when
of current, and a lamp is turned into
the clothes are
the socket B. The terminal C is held
hung on the lower
to the metal covering of the fi.xture,
one. The sup-
while the end D is held to one of the
porter shown in
wires. If there is a leak of current,
the sketch saves
the lamp at B and those of the fi.xture
the wear from the
strain on the lines.
will light up. —
Contributed by Fred
It also keeps the
Schumacher, Brooklyn, N. Y.
clothes in a higher
current of air so Opening for Steam in a Utensil Cover
that they dry
quicker.
When cooking certain foods the or-
The supporter dinary cover on a vessel confines too
is made of two nickel-
plated rings measuring 2 in. in di-
much steam, while if no cover at all is
ameter. They are bound together as used, too much will escape, hence a
shown. The rings being nickelplated, cover which is provided with a vent is
the supporter will not rust the clothes. very desirable. The cover attachment
The clothes should be arranged on shown in the illustration is evidently
the lower line so that the supporter well adapted for service on such oc-
will rest in the center. —
Contributed casions and can be easily made as
follows
by Katharine D. Morse, Syracuse, New
York.
Drying Seeds
zxcm A good way to dry tomato, canta-
loupe, and other seeds is to put them
One Line of the Two Connecting ^Vi^es is Broken and on blotters. They will quickly dry in
the Ends Used as Terminals on the Fixture
this manner and will not become
can be easily made as follows: Two moldy, as the blotter soaks up the
wires are run from a plug, A, one to —
moisture. Contributed by Theodore
a socket, B, and the other to terminate Becker, Kansas City, Mo.
389
Washbasin Holder
The Point of a Spoon will Easily Pull a Tack A piece of wire formed into the
from Soft Wood shape shown in the sketch makes a
handy hook to ^
spoon, andfound that it worked
I y''
,
after a few days that his watch is los- unsatisfactory, and more harm than
ing a half hour or more a day by hav- good may result.
cure a 1/2-10- iron rod, about 3 ft. long, The Wire Prevents the Lace from Raveling and
Makes a Tip for Easily Entering the Eyelets
bend one end in the shape of a spade
are twisted tightly together as shown
in Fig. 2. This covers the end of the
lace and makes a tip that is easily
passed through the eyelets.
The Shape of the Hinge, and the Manner of Attaching COld discarded blueprints can be made
It to a Cover or Door
white and used for sketching by dip-
center. It is attached l)y driving the ping them in a solution of soda and
points, one into the door and the other water, in the proportions of 4 oz. of
into the casing. soda to each gallon of water.
393
Holder for a Set of Sadirons long, 21/2 in. wide and li/4 i"- thick;
one piece, 81 in. long, 2 in. wide and
A very attractive holder for a set of 1 in. thick ; two i/^-in. lag screws, 6
sadirons and their handle can be made
as shown in the illustration, although
the design may be changed if desired.
The holder consists of a shield-shaped
back, which is fastened to the wall in
a convenient place and has a shelf with
openings for the irons attached to it.
The shelf is made in two pieces, the
bottom part being covered with a
heavy piece of tin while the upper is
cut out to receive the irons.
The irons are placed on the upper
piece in such positions that they will A Roller for Crushing Clods and Digging the Earth
in Garden Making
be attractively displayed and evenly
located, and then a lead-pencil mark is in. long, and a quantity of 8-penny
drawn around their Openings
base. nails.
are cut in the wood on these marks The short piece of wood is fitted be-
and the board fastened on top of the tween the two long pieces with tenon-
tin-covered shelf. An ordinary brass and-mortise joints to serve as a handle
at one end and the roller is fastened be-
tween the side pieces at the opposite
end to revolve on the lag screws. The
nails are driven into the roller so that
they project about 1 in.
Water-Heating Coil in a Furnace Pipe the wood plug just under the bushing.
The accompanying sketch shows a
Two pieces of flat steel, each 1^4 in-
wide by Vs thick and 1/8 ill- longer
'II-
plan I adopted for conserving the
than the tee, are fitted in the slot cut in
waste heat from my furnace. I found
the plug as shown in the sketch. The
that I was able
outer end of each piece is bent at right
to put a coil into
angles and sharpened. After the points
the smoke pipe,
which was about have been drawn out to the right dis-
tance, the wing bolt is turned to hold
8 in diame-
ter,
in.
and thus heat —
them in that position. Contributed by
C. Molloy, Philadelphia, Pa.
water for domes-
tic purposes. It
will be seen that
Protecting Brush Handles from Paint
the coil is spiral A very efficient method
to prevent
in shape rather paint from running down on
a paint-
than cylindrical, brush handle and on the hand is to cut
as the latter a hollow rubber ball in half. Fig. 1,
would leave a make a hole in the center to fit the
passage upfree brush handle and attach it as shown in
the center and therefore would not
bring enough gases into contact with
the coil.
In addition to this coil I have a gas
heater near the tank which is used
only in case the demand for hot water
exceeds the capacity of the coil, which The Shape of the Ball Forms a Cup to Catch the
Paint from the Brush
is naturally not as efficient per unit of
length as one directly within the fire- Fig. 2. One ball will fit up two
pot would be. It has the advantage brushes. The cup shape catches the
of not absorbing heat which should paint and prevents it from getting on
go to make steam, 'but only that which the handle. —
Contributed by O. H.
would otherwisebe wasted. The Meyer, Churdon, Iowa.
heating surface of the coil is much
greater than would be possible within A Tie-Pin Holder
the firepot, which in a measure com- Having lost several tie pins by
pensates for its lower efficiency. Con- — or by their falling out I made a little
theft
shown in the sketch. Drive the tack closing and pushing about very easy.
so that itwill enter the wood straight, An ornamental hasp or lock can be
which will draw the screen taut. fitted if desired.
After having thus fastened the screen
to two opposite sides of the frame
with tacks 1 ft. apart, other tacks are
A Curtain Stop
driven in midway between the first A small screweye turned into the
ones, stretching the screen and driving bottom part or wood strip inclosed in
the tacks as before described, until a the lower end of the curtain will pre-
sufficient number of tacks are driven vent this end from winding over the
into either side. Then both ends are at- top roller when the curtain is quickly
tached in the same manner. Contrib- — released and rolls to the top. Contrib- —
uted by Bertram S. Barnes, Santa uted by D. O. C. Kersten, Detroit,
Barbara, Cal. Michigan.
397
manner. A hose on a weighted reel in tightly, then filling it to the top with
was attached to the joists in the base- plaster of Paris, in which a candle
ment under the floor near the window socket is formed.
flower pots. The weight on
the reel The bracket is made of strips of
kept the hose wound on it and
the noz- metal, formed as shown and riveted to-
zle end which projects through the gether where they touch each other,
floor is large enough to hold it from the back piece being fastened with
passing through the hole bored for the screws to a wall board. The metal
hose. A
long stem valve was provided may be brass or copper and finished in
with the wheel attached above the
floor for turning the water on and ofif.
When the plants need a shower all
that is necessary is to draw the hose
nozzle up and turn on the water. The
hole for the hose and the valve wheel
can be located close to the wall under
the flower tray where they will scarcely
be seen.
How to Make a Copper Stencil bored in it, and a round piece of hard
for Marking Laundry wood, 1% or 2 in. in diameter, with
the ends sawn off square.
A stencil suitable for marking laun- Place the sheet metal centrally over
dry may be easily made as follows
First procure a small sheet of "sten-
cil sheet copper," about 1 in. wide and
4 long.
in. Dip this sheet of copper
in a vessel containing some melted
beeswax, so that both sides will be
evenly covered with a thin coat of the
wax when it cools. The design
name, monogram or figure that is —
wanted in the stencil should now
be drawn upon a piece of thin white
paper, the reverse side of the paper
blackened with graphite, and then laid
on the stencil plate with the design in
the center of the plate, whereupon the The Former and Method of Using It to Produce a
design is lightly traced with a blunt Wrinkled Edge on the Tray
point on the thin wax coating. After the the hole in the board and set one end
paper is removed, trace the design on of the round stick in the center of the
the wax surface with a pointed instru- metal. Drive the stick with a ham-
ment, but not completely, the lines mer until a recess about 1 in. deep is
being broken at more or less regular made in the center. The edge of the
intervals, to form "holders" so that, metal will wrinkle up as shown in the
after etching, the design cannot fall sketch. It is scarcely possible to
out. make two trays alike, as the edge
Next lay the stencil in a small shal- almost invariably will buckle in a dif-
low dish and pour a small quantity of ferent —
manner. Contributed by F.
fresh nitric acid over it. Keep the Van Eps, Plainfield, N. J.
air bubbles removed from the surface
by means of a piece of soft feather. A Homemade Exerciser
The design be eaten away in a
will
very short time, where the wax has A weight machine for exercising
been removed, and this may be readily the muscles of the arms is easily con-
observed by holding the stencil plate structed by using two screw hooks, 5
up to the light. The acid should then in. long, and two small pulleys, 2V2 in.
be rinsed off with water, and the wax in diameter. An awning pulley can
removed by heating and wiping it off be used for this purpose. The hole
with a cloth. The stencil may be at the top of the hanger will allow
given a final cleaning in a dish of ben- the pulley to freely turn at almost any
zine or gasoline, which will remove any
remaining wax.
A Ring Trick
The trick to be described is one of
the simplest and at the same time one
Paper Covering Kept in of the most effective, and but little
Place with Corners
Cut from Old Envelopes "make-ready" is required to perform
and Pasted on the Paper
it. The magician, while sitting in a
ting a paper chair, allows his hands to be tied to-
large enough to gether behind the back of the chair. A
cover the back ring is placed between his lips which
and sides when he claims to be able to slip on his
the book is finger without untying his hands.
closed, allowing 1 in. extra at each end This, to the audience, seems practi-
to be turned over the front and back cally impossible, but it is easily ac-
edges, then pasting on corners cut complished.
from used envelopes. The paper jacket A screen is placed in front of the
can be slipped on or off easily when the performer before the trick is started,
book is opened, and it will keep a new so that the audience will not see how
cover clean while the book is being it is done. As soon as he is hidden
—
handled. Contributed by Dr. John A. from view, he tilts his head forward
Cohalan, Philadelphia. and drops the ring in his lap. He then
allows the ring to drop to the seat of
the chair between his legs. The chair
A Tilting Inkstand is tilted backward slightly, and he
An ink-bottle stand, that can be raises himself to allow the ring to slip
tilted or adjusted so that the pen will to the back part of the chair seat,
always be filled with a sufficient quan- where he catches it in his hands and
tit}' of ink even when little of it re- slips it on the finger. Any one finger
mains in the bottle, as shown in the may be mentioned, as he can slip the
sketch, can be easily made by the ama- ring as readily on one as on another.
teur. The base may consist of a Use a leather-bottom chair, if possible,
square piece of sheet brass, which has as the least noise will then be made
soldered or riveted to its centef two when the ring is dropped. — Contribu-
pieces of spring brass, placed cross- ted by Abner B. Shaw, N. Dartmouth,.
wise and bent upward so as to form Massachusetts.
iff'-'/ 'W
- fT
*jr '
-€51-.^J^^^^- —_^
. r.-y^^-
h-H Fid. I
^^13
Fig 3
Details of the Water Wheel
end of the y^-irx. rod. The parts of this side motion. The pipe is babbitted
nozzle are a i/o-in. tee, connected to the and drilled for oil holes. The runner
source of water supply a plug, drilled
; or wheel must be well balanced, as
to snugly fit the 14-in. rod, and fitted the speed will be from 2,000 to 2,500
into one end of the straight part of the revolutions per minute with ordinary
tee; and a i/2-in- nipple of sufficient city pressure. In balancing the wheel,
length to make the dimension shown in instead of adding an extra weight, a
the sketch. The nipple has a long part of the disk is filed out on one edge.
thread to receive two \'-2-m. locknuts, The inclosing sides are made of wood
which clamp the nozzle to the sheet- —
cypress preferred having the dimen-
metal covering, as shown in Fig. 1. sions given, and two Yg by 11/2-'".
The buckets, Fig. 3, are formed of pieces are attached to the bottom out-
some easily melted, but not too soft side surfaces for mounting the wheel.
metal alloy which can be cast in plas- The curved part is covered with gal-
ter molds. They are attached with riv- vanized sheet metal.
ets to the circumference of a tg-in. The drawing shows a wheel of
303
small diameter, but having consider- actly on the center of the bucket and
able power. Greater power may be get out of the way as soon ai possible.
obtained by increasing the size of the Any stagnant water in the case, or
jet and the diameter of the wheel, but dead water in the bucket, is detri-
the use of too many buckets results mental to the power. A
free exit for
the water is made at the bottom of
the case, as shown.
The construction of the case may
be varied and, instead of wood, metal
sides and frame may be used. Where
the builder cares to make a more sub-
O stantial wheel and has access to a
Isi) (si foundry, the metal parts can be made
FiG.4 as shown in Fig. 4. The parts are in
Metal Casing Instead of "Wood
this instance fastened together with
in decrease of power. One bucket machine screws. Patterns are made
should be just entering the stream of and taken to a foundry for the cast-
water, when the working bucket is at ings, which are then machined to have
a point at right angles to the stream. close fitting joints. —
Contributed by
The water should divide equally ex- R. H. Franklin, Unnatosa, Wis.
Ironing-Board Holder
An ironing board that had been used
on two chairs was cut off square on
one end and a piece of heavy sheet
metal cut and bent into the shape
striking the
Board shown in Fig. 1. The square end of
the board was fitted into the socket
formed by the sheet metal. After at-
of its length will project over the edge. taching the socket to the wall with
Unfold a newspaper and lay it on the screws the board was easily put in
table over the board as shown in the
sketch. Anyone not familiar with the
experiment would suppose the board
could be knocked off by hitting it on
the outer end. It would appear to be
easy to do, but try it. Unless you are
prepared to break the board you will
probably not be able to knock the
board off.
The reason is that when the board is
struck it forces the other end up and Socket and Manner of Holding Board
the newspaper along with it. This
causes a momentary vacuum to be place as shown in Fig. 2. The brace is
formed under the paper, and the pres- hinged to the under side of the board.
sure of the air above, which is about — Contributed by L. G. Swett, Roches-
15 lb. to the square inch, prevents the ter, N. Y.
303
After making several different styles is placed over the depressions in the
of water motors I found the one illus- die and a ball-peen hammer used to
trated to be the most powerful as well
as the simplest and most inexpensive
to make. It can be constructed in the
following manner: A
disk, as shown
in Fig. 1, cut from sheet iron or brass,
^ in. thick and 9-'^4 in. in diameter,
constitutes the main part of the wheel.
The circumference is divided into 2i
equal parts, and a depth line marked Two Ways of Making the Dies to Shape the Sheet-
Metal Water Cups
which is 81/i '"• in diameter. Notches
are cut to the depth line, similar to the drive the metal into the die. Cups, or
teeth of a rip saw, one edge being on a buckets, are thus formed which are sol-
line with the center of the wheel and dered to the edge of the teeth on a
the other running from the top of one line with the center of the disk, as
tooth to the base of the preceding
tooth.
A y^-in. hole is drilled in the center
of the disk and the metal strengthened
with a flange, placed on each side of
the disk and fastened with screws or
rivets. A
%,-in. steel rod is used for the
shaft.
The cups, or buckets, are shaped in
a die which can be cast or built up of
The Sheet Metal Placed on the Die and Then
two pieces, as desired. Both of these is
Hammered into Shape
dies are shown in Fig. 2. The one at
A is made of two pieces riveted to-
shown in Fig. 4. As
there are 24
gether. notches in the disk, 2i cups will be
If a foundry is near, a pattern can be necessary to fill them.
made for a casting, as shown at B. The cups are made in pairs or in two
sections, which is a better construction
than the single cup. The water from
the nozzle first strikes the center be-
tween the cups, then divides and pro-
duces a double force.
When this part of the work is fin-
ished it is well to balance the wheel,
which can be done by filing off some
of the metal on the heavy side or add-
ing a little solder to the light side.
This will be necessary to provide an
easy-running wheel that will not cause
any unnecessary wear on the bearings.
The housing for the wheel consists
of two wood pieces, about %-in. thick
and cut to the shape shown in Fig. .5.
Metal Disk with a Saw-Tooth Circumference That Grooves are cut in one surface of each
Constitutes the Main Body of the Wheel
piece, to receive the edges of a strip
The die is used in the manner shown of galvanized metal, as shown at A.
in Fig. 3. A strip of galvanized metal The grooves are cut with a specially
304
U- t
\
core box and allowed to harden. This
Fig, 6 kind of a core can be removed from
Construction of the Saw for Making the Groove to the casting by soaking it in warm
Receive the Metal Strip in the Sides water, which will dissolve the salt and
garden-hose coupling, C, is soldered to leave the desired hole. —
Contributed
the end of the pipe. by H. F. Hopkins, N. Girard, Pa.
305
move over a specially constructed re- Clamp these, side by side, between two
sistance R, Fig. 2. A
second movable boards and smooth down their edges
contact, B, is controlled by the observer and ends, and then file small slots in
and moves over a second resistance, the edges with the edge of a three-
identical with that over which the con- cornered file. These slots should all
tact Amoves. These two resistances be equally spaced about g\ in. apart.
are connected so as to form the two Have the pieces clamped together
main branches of a Wheatstone bridge ;
while filing the slots and mark one
the points A and B are connected to the edge top and one end right so that
current-detecting device, which may the pieces may be mounted alike. Now
be a galvanometer or telephone re- procure a small quantity of No. 20
ceiver, and current is supplied by a gauge bare manganin wire. Fasten
number of dry cells. one end of this wire to one end of
In order to obtain a balance that — the pieces of rubber by winding it in
is, no current through the receiver the — and out through three or four small
points A and B must occupy corre- holes and then wind it around the
sponding positions on their respective piece, placing the various turns in the
resistances. the two resistances
If small slots that were filed in the edges.
over which the points and B moveA After completing the winding, fasten
are mounted in the same position with the end just as the starting end was
respect to the cardinal points of the attached. Wind the second piece of
compass, then the points themselves rubber in a similar manner and make
will always be in the same position sure to have the length of the free ends
with respect to the cardinal points in each case the same. Obtain a cylin-
when a balance is obtained. The ar- der of some kind, about 8 in. in diam-
row head on the wind vane and the eter, warm the pieces of rubber by dip-
point A
are made to occupy corre- ping them in hot water, bend them
sponding positions, and hence the po- around the cylinder and allow them
sition of the point B, when no current to cool.
passes through the receiver, is an in- A containing case, similar to that
dication of the direction in which the shown in cross section in the upper
wind vane pointing.
is portion of Fig. 2 should now be
The principal parts in the construc- constructed from a good quality of
tion of the device are shown in the il- tin or copper. The inside diameter of
306
this case should be about 1 in. more about 2 in. above the bottom of the
than the outside diameter of the re- case.
sistance ring R, and it should be about Ne.xt, mount a piece of brass tube,
3 in. deep. The top C may be made D, in the exact center of the top and
perpendicular to it. A washer, E, may
also be soldered to the top so as to
aid in holding the tube. Procure a
piece of steel rod, F, that will fit in
the tube D
and turn freely. Sharpen
one end of this rod and mount a brass
wind vane on the other end. A small
metal cup, G, may be soldered to a
washer, H, and the whole mounted on
the steel rod F in an inverted position
as shown, which will prevent water
from getting down inside the case
along the rod. The cup G may be
soldered directly to the rod. Make a
small arm, J, of brass, and fasten a
piece of light spring, K, to one side
of it, near the outer end, then mount
the arm on the steel rod so that it is
parallel to the vane and its outer end
points in the same direction as the ar-
row on the vane. The free end of the
light spring on the arm J should be
broad enough to bridge the gap be-
tween adjacent turns of wire on the
resistance ring. Four bindings should
then be mounted on the inside of the
case and all insulated from it with the
exception of number 1. Numbers 3
and .3 are connected to the ends of the
Fig.2— The Weather Vane with Resistance Coil, and winding and number -i is connected to
Diagram of Indicator Which is Identical with That number 3.
of the Vane
Asecond outfit should now be con-
curved as shown in the illustration, structed, identical with the one just
and should be fastened to the case described except that it should have
proper by a number of small machine a flat top with a circular scale mounted
screws. The base of this case may be on it, and the arm L should be con-
made so that the whole device can be trolled by a small handle in the center
mounted on the top of a pole. of the scale. The position of the con-
Mount a piece of V^-'m. steel rod, tact B may be indicated on the scale
about 1/2 in- long, with a conical hole by a slender pointer, attached to the
in one end, in the center of the bottom handle controlling the arm L.
of the case as shown by M. numberA Four leads of equal resistance should
of supports, similar to the one shown, be used in connecting the two devices
should be made from some V^-in. hard and the connections made as shown.
rubber and fastened to the sides of An ordinary buzzer placed in the bat-
the case, to support the resistance ring. tery circuit will produce an interrupted
The dimensions of these supports current through the bridge circuit and
should be such that the ends of the a balance will be obtained by adjust-
piece of rubber, forming the ring, are ing the contact point B until a min-
against each other when it is in place. imum hum is heard in the telephone
The upper edge of the ring should be receiver.
307
k }'
keep it in position. The power can be Take 2 lb. of fine silver sand, place it
transmitted with gears or by a flat belt in a frying pan and heat well over a
over a pulley. clear fire. When the sand is thor-
A wheel of this kind is not adapted oughly heated, place a small piece of
for high speed, but direct-connected to —
grease or wax the composition of a
a pump or other slow-working machin- paraffin candle preferred — in the sand,
ery will prove very efficient. Con- — stirring it well to get thoroughly
it
tributed by Edward Hanson, Kane, mixed, then allow the sand to cool.
Pennsylvania. When this sand is placed in a basin of
water, it will be apparently dry when
taken out. It is very important that
A Small Bunsen Burner
only a small portion of the adherent
An excellent bunsen burner for be used so that it cannot be detected
small work can be made as follows: when the sand is examined by the audi-
Draw a glass tube to the shape shown, ence. The explanation is that the
to produce a fine grease or wax coating on each sand
hollow
Mark
point.
carefully
particle repels the water. —Contributed
by Mighty Oaks, Oshkosh, Wis.
with a file and
break at A and A Kite-Line Cutaway for Toy
then at B. Bore Parachutes
or burn a hole
in a cork to fit
The cutaway is made of a small
Cut piece of board, a cigar-box lid, an old
the tube. a
V-shaped notch yardstick or a piece of lath, which
in the side of should be about 6 in. long. Common
carpet wire staples are used to hold
the cork extend-
ing to the hole. it on the string. The under side has
a wire bent into such a shape as to
Bend the lower
tube at right
form a loop at the forward end over
the kite string, then running back
angles and in-
sert it in a wood
through the two staples at the one
side and through two staples at the
block, previously slotted with a saw
other side.
to make a snug fit. A
little glue will
hold the glass tubes, cork and base
The parachute should have a small
wire ring fastened at the weight end
together. The air mixture can be ad-
so as to fasten in the carrier, and
justed by sliding the upper tube be-
fore the glue sets.
The burner is especially adapted to
continuous work, such as sealing
packages, etc. The flame will not
discolor the wax. —
Contributed by E.
P. Ferte, Spokane, Wash. "Wires Attached
to the Traveler
strike the loop of the wire on the car- Vibrator for a Spark Coil
rier, which releases the parachute and
If you do not have the time to make
allows it to drop. The carrier will re-
a vibrator or electrolytic interrupter for
turn of its own weight to the lower
common
end of the string. —Contributed by I.
a spark coil, a electric door-
A Cherry Fitter
Procure an ordinary quill feather
and cut the tip off to form a small hole.
Do not remove so much of the end that
the cherry stone can stick in it. The
hole must be slightly smaller than the
cherry stone. Push the quill through
the center of the cherry and the stone bellmakes a good substitute. Connect
will come out easily. —
Contributed by one of the primary wires to the bind-
Harold Wynning, Chicago, 111. ing-post of the bell that is not insulated
from the frame, and the other primary
To Hold a Fish while Removing the wire to the adjusting screw on the
Scales make-and-break contact of the bell, as
shown in the sketch. The connections
Insert a screwdriver or ice pick in
are made from the batteries to the bell
a fish as shown, and the scales can be
removed much better and quicker than
in the usual manner. —
Contributed by
Ralph Tarshis, Brooklyn, N. Y.
in any other way. The handle of the
Head Rest for a Chair
II
same time make an artistic corner, the which is easily inserted and will hold
Upholsterer suggests the following —
better than a nail. Contributed by
method: P. D. Merrill, Chicago.
311
A Power Windmill
The windmill shown is somewhat The Wheel
different from the ordinary kind. It As shown drawings, the wheel
in the
is not a toy, nor does it approach in has eight blades. Ordinarily the use
size the ordinary farm windmill, l)ut of eight blades makes it difficult to
isa compromise between the two, and
in a good strong wind, will supply
power enough to run a washing ma-
chine, a small dynamo, an emery
wheel, or any other device used in
the home workshop. The wheel is
about 5 ft. in diameter, with eight
blades. The over-all length is about
6 feet.
The windmill is easily made and
the cost within the means of the
is
average boy. There is not a part used
in its construction that cannot be
found about an ordinary manual-train-
ing shop. The most difficult parts of
the construction will be described in The Supporting Standard
Holds the Machine Head
with the Wheel and the
Vane on an Axis
Fic 6
machine will make a good drive narily sticks, 2 in. square, are suitable,
wheel. The small handwheel, originally These are well braced with wire and
mounted on the machine-head shaft, fastened securely to the roof of the
is left intact. This arrangement gives shop. The arrangement of the tower
two sizes of drive wheels. Heavy with the mill is shown in Fig. 7.
Telegraph Code on Typewriter Keys dashes (- -), for the letter M, etc.
and these slips are pasted on the cor-
A very simple and practical method responding keys of the typewriter.
of transcribing wireless time and other The operator puts on his receiver, and
messages on the typewriter without the proper key is struck as he hears
having such perfect knowledge of the the corresponding Morse letter. As
Morse system as to be able to imme- there are no capitals, spacing between
diately translate it into the common words, or even punctuation, the ma-
alphabet is the following: The char- nipulation of the typewriter is much
acters of the Morse system are in- simplified, and it is easily learned to
scribed on small slips of paper thus,— record the signals as fast as they are
three dots (...)> ^o^ the letter S two; heard.
314
An Aid in Sketching Profiles head may recede from the wire at the
top, or the nose may have a different
The means usually employed by slant or shape.
most beginners to obtain the correct The paper on which the drawing is
outline of an object, such as tracing or to be made should have a faint out-
line drawn by laying the wire upon it
The Fine Wire is Bent as Near as and marking around it with a soft pen-
Possible to the Outline ol the Object cil. Having noted the variations be-
tween the wire and the features,
proceed to draw the profile, observing
the same variations, and when the
sketch is completed, erase the faint
outlines. Then compare the drawing
with the model without using the
wire, and make final corrections. The
dotted line indicates the outline to be
erased.
a pantograph, make them dependent The drawing may be made larger or
on mechanical help rather than train
smaller than the bent wire, but the
the eye to form and proportion a draw-
outline on the paper must be kept in
ing correctly. The device shown not
exactly the same proportion. It is not
only greatly assists the beginner, but
necessary that the wire be bent so that
actually trains him toward a point
it represents perfect features. With
where he can dispense with any such
the use of this device one forms a habit
device and correctly sketch by free
of comparing and proportioning, which
hand. It also has the effect of en-
applies to the correct sketching of all
couraging the beginner, because his
first efforts will not be complete fail-
objects. —
Contributed by Will L. Bur-
ner, Columbus, Ohio.
ures, as is usually the case.
The device consists of a rather fine
wire bent in the shape of a human A Small Hydroelectric-Power Plant
profile and supported on a stand or
base. The stand may be dispensed W^herever a water pressure of over
with, however, and the wire held in 30 lb. is available a small hydroelec-
the hand. In use, it is placed near the tric-power plant will produce sufficient
model or person whose profile is to be electric current for any light work,
drawn then, after closing one eye, it
; such as charging storage batteries,
is set at a position where it will cor- operating sewing and washing ma-
Section on AA
Layout for the Casing. Cover and Wheel {or the Construction of a Hydraulic Motor That wi 11 Drive
a Small Dynamo, to Produce Current for Experimental Purposes, to Charge
Storage Cells or to Run Electric Toys
respond to the features of the model, chines, toys, etc. The design
is for a
This enables one to note the varia- G-in. hydraulic motor the Pelton
of
tions between the wire and the mod- type, which will operate well on al-
el's features. For instance, the fore- most all city-water pressures, and at
315
80 lb. will drive a 100-watt generator The wheel, with brackets attached,
to its full output. is shown in Fig. 3. This style of wheel
The castings may be procured from need not be followed out closely.
any foundry cheaply, so that these Bore the hub centrally for a y^-ln.
parts need not trouble the builder.
The patterns can be constructed easily
and are not so complicated that they
will tear the molds when being re-
moved. They are made from well sea-
soned white pine, i/4 i"- thick. Fill in ANCHOR BOLT
all sharp corners with small fillets. All
the patterns should taper slightly from
the parting line.
The motor casing is shown in Fig.
1. It is made with a wide flange so CONCRETE FOUNDATION
that the cover plate can be bolted to
it. The lug A is to give additional The Motor as It is Coupled to Drive the Dynamo,
and the Water Connections
strength and thickness to the side so
that it may be drilled and tapped for shaft and fit in two setscrews. Drill
the nozzle. The legs B and C are for and tap the rim for the buckets with
bolting the case to a base or support. a i/4-in. standard tap. The buckets
The outlet pipe is of lead, 1% in. out- must be evenly spaced and bolted on
side diameter, and the hole for it in the to make the wheel balance.
case can be either drilled or cored. The buckets are shown in Fig. 4.
Solder the pipe flush with the inside They may be cast from iron or bab-
of the casing. Drill and tap the holes bitt. The sharp ridge in the center
around the flange for 8, 32 bolts. The provides for a deviation of the water
shaft hole must be drilled very care- jet as it flows on the bucket. The
fully. Drill i/4-in- holes in the feet. ridge divides the bucket into two
The oil holes are %
in. in diameter. equal lobes which turn each division
File the surface of the flange smooth of the jet through almost 180 deg.,
and also the inside shoulder of the using all the kinetic energy in the jet.
bearing lug. Drill and tap the nozzle This is shown at D. The dividing
hole for a %-in. pipe thread. ridge must lie in the plane of the rev-
The cover plate is shown in Fig. 2. olution, so that each bucket will enter
This isbolted to the casing with 8, 32 the center of the jet. The buckets
brass bolts, 1/2 in. long. The holes for being evenly spaced on the periphery
them are drilled j^ in. in diameter. A of the wheel, only one at a time re-
shallow hole, for the end of the shaft ceives the force of the jet, the one in
to fit in, is drilled in the lug, as shown. front and the one behind clearing the
jet.
The nozzle shown in Fig. 5. It
is
can be madeof iron or brass. The
inside gradually tapers from to y\ %
in. It has a -"^-in. pipe thread and is
screwed into the hole in the case from
the inside and is secured with a lock
nut. Enough additional threaded por-
tion is left protruding to allow the
The Best Shape of the Buckets to Take Up supply pipe to be connected.
the Force of the Water
When assembling the motor, fasten
It does not pass the way through
all the wheel to the shaft with the two
the plate. File the inside face of the setscrews, and place a metal washer,
lug smooth and also the edge of the E, on each side of the wheel. Place
plate where it joins the casing. the wheel in the casing and screw the
316
cover plate in place. A thin rubber up the two machines by the use of thin
gasket should be placed between the washers on the bolts between the base
cover and the casing to provide a and machine. A heavy sleeve and set-
v/ater-tight joint. screws are used to connect the two
The general arrangement of the shafts. The connection to the water
plant shown in Fig. 6. The motor
is supply is made with -^-in. pipe, with
and dynamo are mounted on a heavy a globe valve in it to regulate the flow
wood base, which in turn is firmly of water. Any dynamo of about 100-
bolted to a concrete foundation. Level watt output can be used.
Paper Shades for Electric-Light Globes ends. If the paper extends beyond the
end of the globe, trim off with it
The appearance of an electric-light the shears. Ruftfe the two edges of the
globe can be very prettily improved by narrow strip and the lower edge of the
making a shade of crepe paper of any larger one. This operation is simply
stretching the edge of the crepe to
—
cause it to stand out. Contributed by
Jas. A. Hart, Philadelphia, Pa.
desired color for each one. Canary- of absorbent cotton with a solution of
colored crepe produces a soft, mellow white shellac, cut in alcohol. Rub this
effect. Pale blue, yellow, red and, in well into all the etched parts and allow
fact, all the colors can be used, making to dry for about two minutes, then rub
a very pleasing variety. in a fine whiting or litharge with an
The body of the shade is made of a old toothbrush. If red is desired, use
piece of paper about 51/2 in- wide and rouge; if black is preferred, use lamp-
3I/2 ft. long. The width will vary with black or powdered graphite. When
the length of the globe to be covered, dry, wipe off' the excess pigment with
and it is best to have it full, as the edge a cloth moistened in alcohol. —
Con-
can be trimmed even with the lower tributed by A. C. Norris, Rockford, 111.
end of the globe afterward. Another
piece of the same color is cut 3Vi; in. Repairing a Broken Ball-Clasp Purse
wide and of the same length. This
piece makes the ruffle. Having occasion to repair a purse of
The smaller piece is placed on the the ordinary ball-clasp kind where one
larger centrally, and both are stitched of the stems was broken off and lost,
together with a running stitch, using a I first had some
needle and cotton thread. A
plain run- trouble in find-
ning stitch is also made 1/4 in. from one ing a way to
edge of the larger strip. The material repair it. I
pened to close the purse and found sists of a block of wood with a sloping
that it there
locked just as well as if cut at the right angle to make two
had been two balls on it. I have since pieces. One of these pieces is perma-
repaired two other purses in the same nently fastened to the strip at the back,
manner and found that they worked
well.
The idea is to bend the remaining
clasp over until it is low enough to
come in contact with and to spring
over the other side, thus giving the
same snap and holding qualities as
before. —
Contributed by W. C. Loy, The Tool Edge
Rochester, Ind. is Kept at the
Proper Angle While
It is Run over the Stone
while the other is held with a bolt
Automatic Valve for a Funnel passing through a notch in the strip
for adjusting or clamping. The rear
Where liquid is run through a fun- end of the back piece is fitted with a
nel into an opaque bottle or earthen
large screw hook or L-hook to pro-
jug, the filling cannot be watched, and
vide a slide to keep the rear end of the
if not watched con-
holder at the right height. The iron
stantly, the vessel
or chisel is inserted between the slop-
will overflow. This
ing edges of the blocks and clamped
can be obviated by
in place, then the L-screw is adjusted
applying the auto-
for height to secure the proper angle
matic valve to the
on the stone. It is then only neces-
funnel stem, as sary to move the block and tool back
shown. A washer and forth over the stone.
support is soldered
or otherwise f a s-
tened in the upper A Large Hole in a Small Piece of
end of the stem, or Paper
at the base of the
It would seem impossible to cut a
sloping part, and a
hole in a piece of paper, 3 in. wide and
crossbar is fastened to its upper sur-
3 in. long, large enough to allow a
face across the hole. The crossbar is
person's body to pass through it, but
centrally drilled to receive a small rod
if carefully cut as shown by the lines
or wire, to which is attached a valve
in the sketch, one will find with sur-
that will cover the hole in the washer.
prise that the paper can be extended
A cork is stuck on the lower end of
so that the feat is easily accomplished.
the rod. The location of the cork on
the rod should be at a point a little be-
Make the cuts about Yg in. apart and
low the level to which the bottle or
vessel is to be filled. —
Contributed by
H. W. Hilton, Hopington, B. C.
so when whetting. The illustration these will allow the paper to expand
shows a holder to keep the iron or several times its size. —
Contributed by
chisel at the proper slope. It con H. Martine Warner, E. Orange, N. J.
318
These pins and the pole keep the brack- Lathe Dogs
ets from spreading at the top, so that a In the absence of a full equipment
shade roller, D, may have
attach-
its
of lathe dogs the amateur can make
ments fastened to the inner sides of the them cheaply from pieces of iron pipe.
brackets. A
small pulley, E, is at-
tached to the window casing above the
right bracket and a double pulley is
located above the left, cords being
passed through them, down along the
casing to a point within easy reach,
and fastened in any manner desired.
All that is necessary to change the
curtains or fix a shade is to loosen the
^^ "^^
Two Forma Lathe Dogs That are Quickly
of
cord and allow the brackets to drop and Cheaply Constructed
down until they may be easily reached. One of these is shown in the sketch.
— Contributed by James F. Napier, A section of pipe, 1^2 in. to 3 in. long,
Montreal, Can. is partly cut away, as shown, leaving
a projection of metal 1 in. wide. One
Planing Arrow Sticks or more setscrev^s are fitted in the
While making some bows one day round part, and the dog is complete.
I discovered I had no suitable dowel
Adog, or driver, may also be made
of two U-clamps and two bolts as
sticks for the arrows, so I started to
make them out of Vi-'m. square stock. shown. This is especially useful for
large work, where the cost of a dog
I found it rather difficult to plane these
pieces until I hit upon the scheme
would be prohibitive. After these two
clamps are bolted on the work to be
turned a bolt is attached in the face-
plate that bears against the clamp, thus
turning the work.
i^l- 'ft
The covering of a broken demijohn ener is sanitary and replaces
was used in the manner shown as a —
the wet sponge. Contrilnited by Theo.
waste - paper J. Becker,
Kansas City, Mo.
basket. The
glass was broken A Window Lock
out and the cov-
ering soaked in A very neat window lock can be
water, after made of sheet steel, I'-j
in. wide. One
which the splints piece, shaped
were turned like a saw tooth,
down and tied isfastened to the
with a cord.This I found to make a sash, and the
waste-paper basket.
first-class Con- — other, which is
Varnished Candles Burn Longer bored in the end will answer the pur-
pose. Be sure to have the diameter of
The heated tallow or wax of a candle the drum l-^j. inches.
runs down the sides and this results
in a considerable waste. This waste
can be stopped by coating the new
candles with white varnish and laying
them aside for a few days to harden.
The varnish will keep the melted tal-
low or wax from running away and it
is used in the wick.
copper, about the same length as the Provide a base piece, C, Y^ in. thick
files, was bent to fit over one edge and and 2 in. square, and fasten a piece of
both sides of the file, allowing both cardboard having a slit E, as shown.
edges to project about 14 '"• This The cardboard should be 2 in. wide
made a guide that prevented the edge
of the file from slipping off the end of
and 21/2 in- high, the slit being cut
in. in width, 1/4 in. from the top and
%
% in. from the bottom. A hole is
bored in the center of the block to
admit the standard B easily.
The next step is to provide the pic-
ture and attach it to the drum. pic- A
ture of a boy pounding cobblestones is
shown in the sketch, at F, which should
Guide for Using the Edge of Worn-Out Files
on Small Round or Square Stock
be made on a strip of paper in. 4%
long. This is gli;ed or attached with
the wire. The guide was held in place rubber bands to the drum. The draw-
on the file by cutting a slit in the pro- ing can be enlarged in pen and ink, or
jecting edges, about 14 in. from the can be reproduced as it is, if a hand
end, and turning these separated parts camera is at hand, and a print used on
back on the file. the drum.
If such a guide is fitted tightly on a
file,the edges of worn-out files can be
used for such work, and the file cannot
slip oiT and mar the sides of the work.
— Contributed by A. R. Drury, Hamp-
ton, 111.
The necessity for using more than circumference and small holes pierced
one cleat for fastening two boards to-
gether may be done away with by
using the device shown in the sketch.
The center cleat prevents the boards
from buckling while the sides are
tightly held by these simple flat fasten-
ers. The fasteners are made of tin cut
A Strip of Chamois Skin Attiched to the Flywheel
as indicated, slipped between the edges of a Sewing Machine for a Buffer
of the boards and the parts bent over
and tacked. Where the strain is not in its edges,through which strings are
run to hold it to the rim of the wheel.
The chamois can then be removed or
left on the wheel as desired. Run the
machine and hold the nail on the buffer.
When there is a free wheel on the
machine this makes an e.xcellent buf-
The Metal Clips Hold the Edges of the Boards
fing device.
Together Closely and Quite Rigidly
10 AMPERES 5 AMPERES
A Finger-Nail Buffer The Amperes of a Fuse Reduced by Makiag a
Nick in the Lead Wire
Theflywheel on a sewing machine
is usually turned with a semicircular a 10-ampere fuse to make it five am-
face and this makes a good base on peres. —
Contributed by Louis Litsky.
which to apply a piece of chamois skin Brooklyn, N. Y.
323
Plant Shelf for a Window Drill a Vg-'n. hole through the metal
just below the threaded part and insert
An ingenious and simple method of a short piece of i/g-in. wire. Slip a
putting up window shelves for winter washer over the end, down to the wire,
plants so that the window casing and and fasten it with solder.
The device can be turned into a tree,
post or a stick thrust into the ground,"
and the camera screwed onto it and ad-
justed to any angle.— Contributed by
O. D. Turner, Seattle, Wash.
A Crochet Hook
In making some kinds of lace work The Writing Board is Easily Attached to, or
Detached from, an Ordinary Chair Back
diflferent-sized hooks must be used as
the work proceeds. Considerable time to tip over, make the rods long enough
will be lost in changing from one hook to reach to the floor. —
Contributed by
to another, if they are separate. The John V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
326
made into a scale by the geometric rule A small torch, that will give a very
fine and hot smokeless flame, can be
for dividing a given line into equal
parts.
made from a piece of glass tube, about
Suppose, for example, the line AB, 4 in. long, and 4 ft. of rubber tubing.
which is to represent 12 ft., is found to The sflass tube is heated in the center
be 1 ft. long. Draw a line, AC, at any
angle from the point and step off on A
it12 equal parts, beginning at A. The
A Torch Made of Glass and Rubber Tubing, to be
last point, or the one at C, is connected Used on an Ordinary Gas Jet
to the end B, then eleven other lines until it is red, then the ends drawn
are drawn parallel with CB. Thus apart so that the tube will have a small
AB will make a scale of 1 in. to each diameter. After the glass has cooled,
1 ft.— Contributed by James M. Kane, make a small scratch with a file on the
Doylestown, Pa. thin part and break it. One of the
pointed ends is connected to a straight
Repairing a Broken Whip piece of glass tube with a short piece
of the rubber tube, as shown in the
Procure a piece of thin tin the — sketch. Asmall hole is cut in the side
metal taken from a discarded fruit can of the piece of rubber to admit air to
will do —
and cut it about 2i/o in. long the gas. The torch is connected to an
and wide enough to encircle the break. —
ordinary gas jet. Contributed by E.
Notch the ends like saw teeth and K. Marshall, Oak Park, 111.
remove any sharp edges with a file.
Place the tin on the break and tie Fountain Attachment for an Ordinary
temporarily. Wind the whole from
Pen
end to end with a waxed linen thread,
such as used by harness makers. The A quite efficient fovmtain pen may be
threads lying alternately on the whip quickly made by bending an ordinary
and on metal at the notched ends elimi-
nate any possibility of the parts work-
ing loose. A break near the small and The Space between the Pens Forms the Fountain,
flexible end of a whip is repaired in Which is Sufficient for Considerable Wiiting
the same manner, using a quill instead pen, as shown at A, and inserting it in
the holder opposite to the regular pen,
as shown at B. For best results, the
point of the auxiliary pen should just
The Repair on a
Ferrule and a
Whip Made with a Notched
Waxed Thread
—
touch the regular pen. Contributed by
Thos. L. Parker, \\'ibaux, Mont.
of the tin. In either case, do not let
the edges of the splicing material meet, CA water added to oil paint will
little
and it will clamp tightly on the whip. make a flat or lusterless finish and will
—Contributed by W. S. Kingsley, W. do no harm to the paint, as the water
Gouldsboro, Me. evaporates in time.
327
The person who has a little ability under side of the base is crowning,
in making wood cuts with a knife will either with a plane or nail
level it
find it very interesting to make the cleats across the ends for feet. A
press shown in the sketch. A fair job washer is used with the stove bolt in
of printing can be done with the press, connecting the lever and post.
using printer's ink spread on a piece The cuts are made of small blocks
of glass with a hand ink roller, such as
can be purchased cheaply of any dealer
in printing supplies.
The press may have a base, A, of any
size to suit, but one ly^ in. thick, 6
in. wide, and 12 in. long will be found
to serve best for most purposes. It
must be smooth and level. Hard wood,
such as maple, beech, or birch, is best
for all parts. The post B is li/4 in.
thick, 2 in. wide, and 5 in. long. Be-
fore setting it, slot the upper end for A Hand Press for Printing from Cuts Made of Wood,
Using Ordinary Printer's Ink
the end of the lever. This is done by
making a saw cut, 1% in. deep, in. % of wood, about %
in. thick and of a
from either side and cutting out the size totake the characters desired.
core to make a slot %
in. wide. A These blocks must be level and the
i/4-in. hole is then bored through the printing side made smooth with very
prongs to receive a stove bolt that fine sandpaper, or a scraper, before the
connects them with the lever. The characters are laid out. Boxwood is
post is fastened with screws and glue best for cuts, but pearwood, ap-
in a notch cut in the center of the base plewood, birch, or maple will do very
end. well. Mark out the characters back-
The lever C is made of a piece of ward, using the pencil very lightly.
wood 1/4 in. square and 10 in. long. Then, with the small blade of a knife,
At the forward end the sides are pared made as sharp as possible, cut around
away to form a tongue, or tenon, that the outlines, holding the knife slant-
will pass between the prongs of the ing, and remove the adjacent wood by
upright, and a hole is bored through it cutting in at a reverse angle to meet
to match those in the prongs. The en- the boundary cut. Gradually deepen
tire upper surface of the lever is round- the cuts around the characters until
ed and the under surface is rounded, they stand in relief about Yg i"-. then
beginning 6 in. from the tenon end. score V-shaped grooves, checkerboard
Glue to the under side of the lever a fashion, across the remaining high
block, D, at the end of the under, flat surface that is not a part of the de-
surface. The block should be about sign, and chip out the resulting small
11/4 m. square by 1^; in. long. If the blocks to bring the entire secondary
328
An Electrical Testing Instrument for er's telegraph line is out of order and
Experimenters the trouble cannot be found. The
sounder may be tested out by discon-
The amateur having an ordinary necting the wires from the instru-
flash light can make an instrument that ment and placing the bottom of the
will serve for a variety of purposes. flash light on one binding post and
It is only necessary to solder a piece the cord on the other. If the light
goes out, the trouble does not lie in the
sounder, but in some other part of the
line. The line may be tested in a
similar manner if one end is short-
circuited and the flash light connected
to the other.
A
tester of this kind cannot be used
on long lines, or on instruments of
much resistance, as their resistance
will overcome that of the light. Keep
in mind the fact that the lamp will al-
ways burn on an open circuit and go
out on a closed circuit.
s
A Musical Doorbell
By H. MARCELLE
Detail of the
Parts for the
Construction
of a Music al
Doorbell That
will Play the
on Brass Tubes
ne Touch of a
Push Button
Allow a space of 1 in. outside the first too close together. Supposing the
and last tube, and cut a piece of the music it isdesired to play has 1.5 notes
wood to this length, allowing sufficient in its composition, then 15 horizontal
339
330
lines must be spaced evenly on the sur- the tubes will have a little play with-
face of the roller. The length of the out touching the sides at any point.
roller should be a free-working fit be- The hammers are each made of a
tween the uprights. A
i/4-in. steel rod strip of sheet brass, having a length
is run through its center for a shaft, that will extend from the base to a
short distance above the lower ends of
the tubes. A hole is drilled in each
end of the strip, the lower one being
of a size to fasten it to the base cross-
piece with a round-head wood screw.
The hole in the upper end is used to
fasten a small block of wood with a
IIIIIII screw, for the hammer head. A small
strip of felt is glued to the striking side
of the block. Another piece of brass,
used for a trip, is fastened to the center
part of each long piece with rivets, so
that its upper end will be near the cen-
ter of the roller for height, and strike
The Appearance of the Doorbell Is That of a
Mission Clock on a Mantel the end of a small peg driven into the
roller. The length of these pieces, in
allowing sufficient ends for the bear- fact, of all pieces, will depend on the
ings, and, in addition, at one end suf- length of the tubes in the tubaphone
ficient length for a pulley. and the size roller required for the
The motor is lined up on the base, so music.
that its pulley wheel will run a belt on The setting of the pegs in the roller
the large wheel of the roller. The cur- requires some patience in order to get
rent is turned on after making belt and the tune correct, but one mistake will
wiring connections, a lead pencil is held be of more value than an hour's de-
directly centering the place where each scription. The pegs can be procured
tube hangs, and a line is drawn on the from ashoemaker. If the roller is of
circumference of the roller. pine, they can be driven into the wood
A i/s-i"- hole is drilled through each of the roller with a hammer.
tube, near one end, and a piece of cat- With ordinary connections to the
gut string run into it to make a hanger. push button and motor, the mechanism
A piece of board, long enough to fit will only run while the push button is
between the uprights when placed on being pressed. A device that will
the slope formed by the upper ends of cause the piece of music to be played
the tubes after their lower ends are set through to the finish after the push but-
straight on a line at right angles to ton is pushed for a short time, consists
their length, and wide enough to swing of a turned piece of wood fastened to
the tubes clear of the frame, is fas- the outside surface of the driving wheel
tened in place, as shown. Small screw on the roller. This piece of wood
eyes are turned into the under side of should be carefully set, so that its out-
this board, at even spacings of 1 in., side surface will be true as it revolves.
and used to swing the tubes by the cat- Three brushes, made of copper strips,
gut strings. Another piece of board, are fastened to the base. The length
the same width as the former, is placed, of these brushes will depend on the
perfectly horizontal, between the up- size of the roller and height of the block
rights a short distance above the lower of wood. They should be evenly
ends of the hanging tubes. Evenly spaced and fastened, so that they will
spaced holes are bored in this cross- be insulated from each other. One
piece to admit the ends of the tubes. strip of brass, or copper, is fastened
The holes should be of such size that around the turned piece of wood. This
when they are lined with a piece of felt, strip must be as wide as two brushes,
331
brass machine screws with two nuts 18 in. long. The automatic switch is
clamping on the wood back, as shown located at one end of the base, and
at A, are set at intervals so as to be op- consists of two sets of magnets, and H
posite, or just back of. the hour marks J, with an armature, K, to
which is
2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11. and 12. A contact attached a stifif contact wire, L. This
spring, B, is shaped as shown and sold- wire is to make contact with the spring
ered to the knurled knob on the back M when the armature is drawn by the
magnets J, and with N when drawn by
C
©
E
® lU VJ ^ I ^- the magnets H. The springs M and N
BINDING^
POSTS
Ql CJJ-
are madeof thin sheet brass, bent as
T
shown, and mounted on the base.
o'OiO'
U V w L A piece of wood, O, on which to
mount the works of the old clock is
mortised into the base. Another
standard, P, of the same height as O,
Location of the Clock Works, Magnets. Binding is also mortised into the base to pro-
Posts, Gongs and Strikers on the Baseboard
vide a bearing for the end of the shaft
of the clock used for setting the hands which carries the wood disk Q, the op-
in a position where it will travel or be posite end of the shaft being connected
parallel with the minute hand. The by means of a ferrule and soldered to
end of the contact spring should be the end of the minute-hand shaft. The
shaped so that it will slide over the shaft should be well lined up, so that it
points of the screws easily, but in good will turn freely. The wood disk is ^4
thick and about 6 in. in diameter.
contact. The ends of the screws should in.
333
Mark four circles on the face of the parallel with the shaft carrying the
disk, near the outside edge and i/i in. disk Q, as shown.
apart. Step off the outside circle into The starting and stopping of the
150 parts and draw a radial line from clockwork F is accomplished by means
each mark across the four circular lines of a set of bell magnets, arranged, as
with the straight edge on the center of
the disk. An arc of the disk is shown
in Fig. 3, where trip pins are driven in
for making the electric contacts. This
part of the arc shows the method of
locating the pins for the hour from 3
to 4 o'clock, with the intermediate pins
for the quarter, half, and three-quarter-
hour contacts. The intermediate pins
are arranged in the same manner for all
hours, but the hour pins, on the second
circle, run from 1 pin to 12 pins con-
secutively. Ordinary pins, with the
heads cut off, are used and should be
driven in accurately on the division
lines to secure proper results.
The arrangement of the springs is
shown in Fig. 4. These springs, when
pressed together, will close the circuit
for ringing the gongs. They are made
of thin sheet brass, bent as shown at R,
and fastened to a piece, or block, of
hard wood with screws, as shown at
5. The springs numbered 3, 5, 7, and
9 are the ones made as shown at R for
sliding over the pins in the disk Q, and
their ends should clear the face of the
disk about in. %
The springs 1, 2, 4,
6, and 8 are about 1/2 in- shorter and
have their ends bent up at right angles
so that they will almost touch the long The Parts Constructing the Chime are Placed
ones. The spring 1 should be a little in the Clock Frame below the Works
shorter than 2. When fastening the shown at T, Fig. 2, with the wire at-
3 00 PINS tached to the armature bent to touch
3 15 PIN
3 OCLOCK the brass wing of the fan G. The arma-
PINS
ture must not vibrate, but stay against
the magnet cores while the current
is flowing through them, thus allow-
ing the clock wheels to turn, and as
3A5 STOP PIN soon as the current is cut off, the arma-
330 STOP PIN
3 OCLOCK 3 IS STOP PIN ture will spring back and stop the
STOP PIN
wheels.
The Pins arc Accurately Set in Four Circular Lines Arrange four gongs, U, V, W, and
and on Radial Lines
X, as shown in Fig. 2, and also three
springs to the block of wood, be sure bell magnets with clappers 1, 2 and 3.
that no two springs touch and that These gongs should be selected for
each one is separated from the other tone as in a chime clock. The connec-
to form no contact until the pins in the tions to the bell magnets 1, 2, and 3
wheel force them together. The block should be direct to the binding posts
is then fastened to the base under and so that the armature will not vibrate.
334
but give one stroke. For instance, bell 3 o'clock. As the contact spring B will
magnet 1 should produce one stroke be on the contact pin 13 for about 1
on the gong U when the current is on, minute, the wheels of the clockwork
and one stroke on the gong V when F would continue to turn and the bells
ring, if it were not for the stop pin lo-
cated on the outside, or first, circle of
the disk Q, which pin is set in line with
;-3 — R
the last pin in the set of pins for the
hour, or, in this instance, in line with
the third pin. When the stop pin has
passed the spring, the connection
The Contact Springs are Operated by the Pins
through the magnets T is broken and
on the Disk Wheel the clockwork F stops instantly.
The magnets 2
When the spring B strikes the 2 o'clock
the current breaks.
pin, or 10 minutes after 3 o'clock, the
should cause the clapper to strike once
armature K is drawn over to N, and at
on the gong V
when the current is the 3 pin, or 15 minutes after 3 o'clock,
on, and to make one stroke on the gong
W when the current is broken. The
the bells U, V, and W
will ring and
then the stop pin will break the cur-
magnets 3 produce only one stroke rent, and so on, at every 15 minutes of
on the gong Xat a time, which is used
the 13 hours.
to sound the hours.
The parts are connected up electric-
ally as shown in Fig. 5. The lines be- Hinges Used to Substitute Night Bolt
tween the clock. Fig. 1, and the bell- One of the safest devices for bolting,
ringing part. Fig. 2, are connected or locking, a door against intruders is
from C to C, Dto D, and E, Fig. 1, to
to use two sets of hinges. The extra
the zinc of a battery and from the car- set is fastened to the door and frame in
bon to E, Fig. 3. Two dry cells will the same way but directly opposite the
be sufficient for the current. regular hinges. It may be necessary to
The working of the mechanism is as file the extra hinges and pins in order
follows Suppose the time is 6 min-
to separate and bring the parts together
:
utes of 3 o'clock and the contact spring The usual door lock need not
easily.
on the back is near the 11 pin. As be used with this arrangement, as the
soon as it touches the pin, the arma- hinges are exposed only on the inside
ture K of the switch will be drawn
of the room and cannot be tampered
in contact with the spring N, then
with from without.
when the contact spring touches the
12 pin, the current will flow into the
Propellers for a Hand Sled
Corks-in-a-Box Trick
Repairing Marble
Amongf the various methods for the net N, there will be an electrical pres-
transmission speech electrically,
of sure induced in the conductor, and this
without wire, from one point to an- electrical pressure will produce a cur-
other, the so-called "inductivity" sys- rent in the winding of the galvanometer
tem, which utilizes the principles of
electromagnetic induction, is perhaps
the simplest, because it requires no spe-
cial apparatus. Since this system is
so simple in construction, and its opera-
tion can be easily understood by one
whose knowledge of electricity is lim-
ited, a description will be given of how
to construct and connect the necessary
apparatus required at a station for both
transmitting and receiving a message. Fig. 1— Wire Connected to Galvanometer
Before taking up the actual construc-
tion and proper connection of the vari- G, which will cause the magnetic needle
ous pieces of apparatus, it will be well suspended in the center of the coil to
to explain the electrical operation of the be acted upon by a magnetic force tend-
system. If a conductor be moved in ing to move it from its initial position,
a magnetic field in any direction other or position of rest. It will be found
than parallel to the field, there will be that this induced electrical pressure will
an electrical pressure induced in the exist only as long as the conductor AB
conductor, and this induced electrical is moving with respect to the magnetic
pressure will produce a current in an field of the magnet N, as there will
electrical circuit of which the conductor be no deflection of the galvanometer
is a part, provided the circuit be com- needle when the motion of the con-
plete, or closed, just as the electrical ductor ceases, indicating there is no
pressure produced in the battery due current in the galvanometer winding,
to the chemical action in the battery and hence no induced electrical pres-
will produce a current in a circuit con- sure. It will also be found that the
nected to the terminals of the battery. direction in which the magnetic needle
A simple experiment to illustrate the of the galvanometer is deflected
fact that there is an induced electrical changes as the direction of motion of
pressure set up in a conductor when the conductor changes with respect to
it ismoved in a magnetic field may be the magnet, indicating that there is a
performed as follows Take a wire,
: change in the direction of the cur-
AB, as shown in Fig. 1, and connect its rent in the winding of the galva-
terminals to a galvanometer, G, as nometer, and since the direction of this
shown. If no galvanometer can be ob- current is dependent upon the direction
tained, a simple one can be made by in which the induced electrical pres-
supporting a small compass needle in- sure acts, there must have been a
side a coil composed of about 100 turns change in the direction of this pressure
of small wire. The terminals of the due to a change in the direction of mo-
winding on the coil of the galvanometer tion of the conductor. The same re-
should be connected to the terminals sults can be obtained by moving the
AB, as shown in Fig.
of the conductor magnet, allowing the conductor AB to
1. now the conductor AB be moved
If remain stationary, the only require-
up and down past the end of the mag- ment being a relative movement of the
338
'
^— be shown by a sim-
-..^^
s pie experiment, as
ductor, the N-pole would point to the
left and the wS-pole to the right, indicat-
>^^~~"^ \ illustrated in Fig. ing that the direction of the magnetic
//^Z^v\ I
-• If a '^'^•re be field above the conductor is just the re-
placed above a verse of what it is below the conductor.
\
compass needle
v^^te vy and parallel to the
The strength of the magnetic field
produced by a current in a conductor
direction of the can be greatly increased by forming
compass needle and the conductor into a coil. Figure 4
a current be sent shows the cross-section of a coil com-
through the wire in posed of a single turn of wire. The
the direction indi- current in the upper cross-section is
cated by the arrow just the reverse of what it is in the
I, there will be a lower cross-section, as indicated by the
force acting on the cross and dash inside the two circles.
Fig. 4 —
Reversed
Lines of Force
compass needle As a result of the direction of current
tending to turn the
needle at right angles to the wire. The
amount the needle is turned will de-
pend upon the value of the current in /
/ /
the wire. There
a definite relation
is
between the direction of the current in
the wire and the direction of the mag-
netic field surrounding the wire, be-
cause a reversal of current in the con- ^"- /
ductor will result in a reversal in the \ \ V ^
direction in which the compass needle \ ^
\
is deflected. Remembering that the / /
direction of a magnetic field can be de-
termined by placing a magnetic needle
\ y
in the field and noting the direction in
which the N-pole of the needle points, Fig. 3 — Lines of Force
this being taken as the positive direc-
tion, if one looks along a conductor in in the two cross-sections being differ-
which there is a current and the cur- ent, the direction of the magnetic field
rent be from the observer, the direction about these two cross-sections will be
of the magnetic field about the con- different, one being clockwise, and the
339
— Magnetic Bottle
Fig. 5 Lines Passing through Center
her of lines passing through the coil When necessary, a large cork may
per unit of cross-sectional area being be made to fit a small bottle, if treated
greater than it was for a single turn, as shown in the sketch. Two wedge-
although the value of the current in shaped sections are cut from the cork,
the conductor has remained constant, at right angles toeach other, as shown
the only change being an increase in in Fig. 1. The points are then squeezed
the number of turns forming the coil. together (Fig. 2) and the end inserted
If a conductor be moved by the end
of a coil similar to that shown in Fig.
5, when there is a current in the wind-
ing of the coil, there will be an elec-
trical pressure induced in the con-
ductor, just the same as though it were
moved by the end of a permanent mag-
net. The polarity of the coil is marked Fig. 2
in Fig. 5. The magnetic lines pass Reducing Size of Cork
from the S-pole to the N-pole through
the coil and from the N-pole to the S- in the bottle (Fig. 3). Wet the cork
pole outside the coil, just as they do slightly and the operation will be
in a permanent magnet. easier. —
Contributed by James M.
Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
340
zinc and mold a per off. Cut these carbons off, forming
piece having S-in. lengths. File the top ends of the
the same di- carbons flat and so that they all be-
mensions as the come equal in thickness, and clamp
pieces of car- them in place by means of the brass
bon. The mold bolts. If rods are used, they should all
for casting the be connected together by means of a
zinc may be piece of copper wire and then to a
made by nail- binding post.
ing some i/4-in. strips of wood on a The plates may now be hung in the
piece of dry board, forming a shallow jar, the wooden pieces resting on the
box, 4 in. wide and 8 in. long. Re- top of the jar and acting as a support.
move all the impurities from the sur- The solution for this cell is made by
face of the zinc when it is melted, dissolving i/o lb. of potassium bichro-
with a metal spoon or piece of tin. mate in 1/2 gal- of water, and then
Before filling the mold with the metal, adding very slowly i/o lb. of strong
place a piece of No. 14 gauge bare sulphuric acid. More or less solution
copper wire through a small hole in may be made by using the proper pro-
one of the end pieces forming the portion of each ingredient.
mold, and allow it to project several This cell will have a voltage of two
inches inside, and make sure the mold volts, a rather low internal resistance,
is perfectly level. The zinc will run and will be capable of delivering a
around the end of the wire, which is to large current. If it should begin to
afford a means of connecting the zinc show signs of exhaustion, a little more
plate to one of the binding posts form- acid may be added.
ing the terminals of the cell. A chemical action goes on in this
Cut from some hard wood four cell regardless of whether it supplies
pieces a little longer than the outside current to an external circuit or not,
diameter of the glass jar, two of them and for this reason the elements should
V2 by % in-> and two, V2 by % in. Drill be removed from the solution and
a %-in. hole in each end of all four hung directly over the jar when the
pieces, the holes being perpendicular cell is not in use. Asimple device for
to the i/2-in. dimension in each case, this purpose may be constructed as
and about % in. from the end. Boil shown. A cord may be passed through
all the pieces for several minutes in the opening in the crossbar at the top
paraffin and stand them up on end and its lower end attached to the ele-
to drain. Procure two %-in. brass ments. When the elements are drawn
bolts, 3V2 in. long, which are to be out of the solution, the upper end of
used in clamping the elements of the the cord may be fastened in some man-
cell together. The two smaller pieces ner. This frame can, of course, be
of wood should be placed on each side made longer, so it will accommodate
of one end of the zinc, then the carbon a number of cells.
341
If two coils of wire be placed parallel direction to the one created by the cur-
to each other as shown in Fig. 6, and a rent in the winding of coil A. When
current be passed through the winding the current in the winding of A is de-
of one of them, say A, a part of the creasing in value, the induced pressure
magnetic lines of force created by this in the winding of the coil B is just the
current will pass through the other coil reverse of what it was in the previous
B. These lines of magnetic force must case and the current produced by this
cut across the turns of wire of the induced
coil in which there is no current as the pressure
magnetic field is being created, and as passes
a result there will be an electrical pres- around the \
sure produced in the winding of the winding o f
coil carrying no current. When the cur- the coil B in
rent in coil A is discontinued, the mag- the same di-
netic field created by this current is rection a s B A
destroyed or it contracts to zero, and the current
the magnetic lines again cut the vari- passes / ^-" \
ous turns composing the winding of around the
coil B. The direction in which the winding o f yiA ')^^\
magnetic lines of force and the wind- coil A. The
ing of coil B move with respect to current pro- Fig. 6
each other is just the reverse, when the duced by the
current in the winding of coil A is in- induced electrical pressure aids the cur-
creasing, to what it is when the cur- rent in the winding of coil A in produc-
rent in the winding of the coil Ais de- ing a magnetic field. In general the
creasing. Any change in the value of current resulting from the induced
the current in the winding of coil A pressure always passes around the cir-
will result in a change in the number cuit in such a direction as to produce
of magnetic lines of force linked with a magnetic effect which will oppose a
the winding of the coil B, and as a re- change in the value of the magnetic
sult of this change in the number of field causing the induced electrical
lines linked with the winding of coil pressure.
B there will be an induced electrical There will be an induced pressure
pressure set up in coil B. The direction in the winding of coil B, due to a
of this induced electrical pressure will change in the value of the current in
depend upon whether the current in the winding of coil A, as long as the
the winding of coil A is increasing or coil B remains in the magnetic field of
decreasing in value. When the current the coil A and its plane is not par-
in the winding of coil A is increasing allel to magnetic lines or, in other
;
in value, the electrical pressure induced words, coil B must always be in such
in the winding of coil B will be in such a position that some of the magnetic
a direction that the current produced lines created by the current in coil A
by this induced electrical pressure will will pass through the winding of coil
pass around the winding of coil B in B.
the opposite direction to that in which If a telephone transmitter and a bat-
the current passes around the winding tery be connected in series with the
of coil A. Or the current produced by winding of coil A, a fluctuating or vary-
the induced electrical pressure tends to ing current can be made to pass
produce a magnetic field opposite in through the winding by causing the dia-
342
phragm of the transmitter to vibrate in the normal position. Ten dry cells
by speaking into the mouthpiece of the should be connected in series and used
transmitter. This varying current will to supply current to the transmitter
set up a varying magnetic field and circuit, as shown by B in the figure.
there will be an induced electrical pres- The receiver R, secondary winding of
the induction coil S, and the winding
of coil A used in transmitting and re-
ceiving the magnetic effects, are all
connected in series. The winding of
the coil A
consists of two parts, D and
E, as shown in the figure, with two of
their ends connected together by means
of a condenser, C, having a capacity
of about 2 micro-farads. Each of these
parts should consist of about 200 turns
of No. 23 gauge silk-covered copper
wire, wound on an ordinary bicycle rim.
Fig. 7 — Sending and Receiving Equipment The inside end of one winding should
be connected to the outside of the other
sure set up in coil B, if it be properly by means of the condenser, the two
placed with respect to coil A. re- A coils being wound in the same direc-
ceiver connected in series with the tion. The condenser C can be pro-
winding of coil B will be subjected to cured at a small cost from almost any
the action of a varying current due to telephone company.
the induced electrical pressure in the To talk, two of the instruments are
winding of coil B and as a result, the placed 23 or 30 ft. apart, and they may
diaphragm of the receiver will vibrate be placed in difl^erent rooms as walls
in unison with that of the transmitter, and other ordinary obstructions that
and speech can thus be transmitted. do not interfere with the production of
The connection just described should the magnetic field about the trans-
be somewhat modified and a little more mitting coil, have no effect upon the
equipment used in order to give tlie operation. Pressing the button K
at
best results. the transmitting station, closes the
Figure 7 shows the complete send- transmitter circuit and removes the
ing and receiving equipment, a com- shunt from about the secondary wind-
plete outfit of this kind being re- ing of the induction. Any vibration of
quired for each station. The trans- the transmitter will cause a varying
mitter T and the receiver R may be current to pass through the primary
an ordinary local battery transmitter winding P, which in turn induces an
and receiver, although a high-resist- electrical pressure in the secondary
ance receiver will give better results. winding S, and this pressure causes a
The induction coil with the windings, varying current to pass through the
marked P and S, may be any commer- coil A. The varying current in the
cial type of induction coil as used in a winding of the coil A produces a vary-
magneto telephone instrument, but a ing magnetic field which acts upon the
coil with a high-wound secondary will receiving coil, inducing an electrical
give better results. The push button pressure in it and producing a current
K is to be used in closing the trans- through the receiver at the receiving
mitter circuit when the set is being station.
used for transmitting, the key being de- A filing coherer, adapted to close a
pressed, and for shorting out the high local relay circuit and ring an ordinary
resistance secondary winding when the bell,may be used with the sets just de-
set is used in receiving, the key being scribed for signaling between stations.
343
An Electric Incubator
ply along the coils, starting at the ex- instrument, as a good one can be pur-
treme opposite end and drawing toward chased for less than $1. Place the
the center until the iron wire gets too thermostat in the end of the box at
hot to hold with the bare hand. This B, Fig. 1. A small door, E, is made in
will be the right length of wire to use. the box for easy adjustment of the
The length being known, a number of thumbscrews.
tacks are placed in the asbestos board Suspend the heater from the cover
to hold the wire, as shown in Fig. 2. of the box with bolts 2% in. long, as
Cover the wire with a sheet of asbestos shown in Fig. 1. A base receptacle, G,
and attach binding-posts, E and F, at and asnap switch, H, are fastened on
each end. top of the cover and connected up to
The asbestos inclosing the heating the thermostat B, the condenser C, the
wires is covered with a thin piece of heater F, and lamp I, as shown. An-
sheet iron, which is made to fit tightly other snap switch, J, is used on the
over the bottom and sides. This will light only. The condenser C is to pre-
spread the heat evenly. Be careful to vent sparking, thus saving the plati-
have the binding-posts insulated from num points on the screws. Do not use
the sheet metal. In the cross section more than a 2-cp. lamp for lighting
of the heater, Fig. 2, A represents the purposes, as a brighter light blinds the
%-in. asbestos board B, the heater
; young chicks.
wire C, the asbestos paper, and
; the D The incubator should be run for a
sheet-metal covering. day or two so that the current may be
The most important part of the in- well regulated before placing the eggs
cubator is the thermostat which regu- in the tray. The incubator is operated
lates the current to maintain a steady the same as with lamp heat. Contrib- —
heat. It is not advisable to make this uted by M. Miller, Lansing, Mich.
Fig. 4
riG.3
Removing the Cover, and Binding with Heavy Paper Cloth Cover and Paper Cover Attached
345
An Optical Illusion
A very deceiving illusion can be con-
trived with a bit of wire, a rubber band
and a toothpick. An ordinary straight
hairpin will serve instead of the wire.
The Alarm and 'Wiring Diagram
The hairpin or wire is bent as shown in
the illustration, and the rubber band the bare end of a No. 20 gauge magnet
then placed on the inverted U-shaped wire is inserted. The tube is almost
part. A toothpick is inserted through filled with mercury. On the mercury
a float of wax is placed in which
a bare piece of the same magnet
wire is inserted and bent as shown
in the sketch. The tube of mercury is
fastened to a base with two clips of
metal. At the upper end of this base
the adjustable lever isA attached.
The electric connections are made as
Toothpick in Rubber Band shown in the sketch.
Should the temperature fall during
the rubber band and a few turns taken the night, the mercury will contract,
by slipping the toothpick back and the float descend and the circuit close,
forth so it will pass the wire. so that the bell will ring. The adjust-
Hold the wire straight in front of the able lever allows setting the alarm
eyes, and, using the forefinger of the for various differences of temperature.
right hand, turn the end of the tooth- — Contributed by Klyce Fuzzelle,
pick A, Fig. 1, down until it almost Rogers, Ark.
reaches the opposite point A, Fig. 2,
and let the finger slip ofif. It will ap-
pear as if the toothpick passed through Paper Smoother and Penwiper
—
the wire. Contributed by H. H. Wind- A
convenient paper smoother and
sor, Jr. penwiper can be easily made as fol-
lows: Procure a common celluloid
harness ring. A, about li/o in. in diam-
Temperature Alarm
eter and fasten a
The temperature of a room
falling penwiper, B, to
during the night may result in a very it. The wiper is
bad cold for the occupant. This may made of arts- in ng^r^gj
be prevented by the use of an alarm crafts leather,
to awaken the sleeper and warn him doubled and
to close the window. An alarm can filledwith pieces
be made as follows: Take a glass of chamois. They are held in place
346
with a ribbon or cord tied as shown. negatives that can be trimmed 1/4 in.
The roughened paper caused by eras- on each side to make prints 3 by 3l^
ing can be easily smoothed with the in. Each two negatives making a pair
ring. —
Contributed by G. H. Holter, are fastened together, properly trans-
Jasper, Minn. posed, by folding a narrow strip of
black paper like a long, V-shaped
Stereoscopic Pictures with an trough, pasting it, and putting one on
the bottom of the two negatives, as
Ordinary Camera
they lie side by side, and one at the top,
Make a small table as wide as the saddle fashion. This can be done still
camera is long and 3 in. longer than easier by using strips of passe-partout
the camera is wide. Sink a screw nut binding, or strips used for binding lan-
in the center of the under side to en- tern slides. If so desired, the use of
black paper can be carried farther by
cutting the top strip of binding paper
in such a way that it gives the round
corners to the top of the prints. A
narrow strip through the center and a
binding of black paper along the two
end edges make a mask unnecessary in
printing.
it on the dotted lines, AG, F B, and pin was bent at one end so as to keep
CD E, as shown in Fig. 1. Fold the it from falling out and the other end
paper in half through the line C D E to fitted with two nuts. The motor shaft
form a rectangle, Fig. 2. Fold points
C and E inward until they meet inside
the triangle to form the shape shown in
Fig. 3. This makes four distinct cor-
L.@. Q
kwwmwM?
A
3
ners, F, G, A and B. Fold the paper
over on the dotted line and bring the Coupling on the Shafts
points A and B together as in Fig. 4.
The extreme edges meet in the central being a little loose in the coupling, gave
it a chance to work free without bind-
line indicated. Reverse the paper and
fold the points G and F in like manner. ing. —
Contributed by Leo J. Werner,
Turn the points A B and F G inward New York City.
and fold on the dotted line, and you
will have a perfect pyramid-shaped cup Reading the Date of a Worn Coin
as shown in Fig. 5. — Ctintributed
by
The date and denomination of a coin
Miss Margaret S. Humphreville, Mt.
Pleasant, O. worn smooth can be determined in the
following manner: Take an ordinary
coal shovel, or a piece of sheet metal,
A Hand Corn Sheller
and place it in a hot fire. Allow it to
A
very handy device for shelling become red hot, then remove, and place
corn,and especially popcorn, can be the coin on the hot surface of the
made of a 1-in. board on which is fas- metal. Any figures or letters can be
readily seen when heated in this man-
ner. This test seldom fails even when
the inscriptions have been worn so
smooth that they are invisible to the
naked eye.
Metal Lath on a Board
Making a Knife an Easy Opener
tened a piece of metal lath. The edges
of the metal lath are bound with a strip The large blade of my knife being so
of wood nailed to the board. Contrib- — hard to open placed me in constant risk
uted by Ulysses Flacy, Long Beach, of breaking my thumbnail. To over-
California. come this difficulty, I ground a notch
in the handle as shown in the sketch.
After smoothing it up with a round file
A Shaft Coupling
and fine sandpaper, I had just as good
In connecting a small Vs-'ip- motor a job as if the knife had been made
to a small air pump where both shafts that way, and it is very easy to open
were %
in. in diameter, I quickly made it, as it can be done with the thumb
a coupling that would save the wear on and forefinger. Anyone can improve
the machines, as follows. The coup-
ling was made of a piece of %-in.
brass rod with a %-in. hole drilled
through its center. One end of the
hole was enlarged to 7-16 in. for about
% in. The end of the coupling having
Notch in the Handle
the small hole was slipped on the pump
shaft and fastened with two setscrews. his knife in this way, but be careful not
The other end was drilled to take a to cut the notch back of the point of
pin loosely, the pin fitting tightly in a the small blade. — Contributed by C.
hole drilled in the motor shaft. The M. Mahood, Warren, Pa.
348
Oersted that there was a magnetic field along a conductor in the direction of
produced by the current in the conduc- the current, the magnetic field will
tor. He also found that there was a consist of magnetic lines encircling the
definite relation between the direction conductor. These lines will be con-
of the current in the conductor, and
the direction in which the north pole
of the compass needle pointed. If the
compass needle is allowed to come to
rest in the earth's magnetic field, and
a conductor is placed above it, the
conductor being parallel to the needle,
and a current then sent through the
conductor, the needle will be deflected
Fig. 3 — Magnetic Field around Conductor
from its position of rest. Reversing
the current in the conductor, reverses centric circles, as a general rule, ex-
the direction in which the needle is cept when they are distorted by the
deflected. If the needle be allowed to presence of other magnets or magnetic
come to rest while there is a current materials, and their direction will be
in the conductor, and this current is clockwise.
then increased, it will be found that The strength of the magnetic field
the deflection of the needle will be in- at any point near this conductor will
creased, but not in direct proportion to depend upon the value of the current
the increase in the current. Hence in the conductor, and the distance the
the strength of this magnetic field sur- point is from the conductor. The
rounding the conductor depends upon magnetic field surrounding a conductor
the value of the current in the conduc- is shown in Fig. 4. The plus sign in-
tor, and the direction of the field de- dicates that the direction of the cur-
pends upon the direction of the current. rent is from you. The strength of a
If a conductor be passed through a magnetic field due to a current in a
piece of cardboard, as shown in Fig. conductor can be greatly increased by
3, and a current sent through it in the forming a coil of the conductor. Each
direction indicated by the arrow A, a turn of the coil then produces a certain
compass needle, moved about the con- number of lines, and the greater part
ductor in the path indicated by the of these lines pass through the center
dotted line, will always assume such a of the coil, as shown in Fig. 5. The
position that the north pole points field strength inside such a coil is de-
around the conductor in a clockwise pendent upon the number of turns in
Fig. 4 — Magnetic Field Surrounding Fig. 5— Magnetic Field about a Fig. 6— A Coil about a Magnetic Circuit
a Conductor Coil through Iron and Air
direction as you look down on the card- the coil, and the value of the current
board. If the current be reversed, the in these turns. Increasing the number
direction assumed by the compass of turns in the coil increases the num-
needle will be reversed. Looking ber of magnetic lines passing through
350
the center of the coil, as shown in Fig. ing either the direction of the magnetic
6. If the current be decreased in value, field or the motion of the conductor,
the field strength is decreased, and if reverses the direction of the induced
the current be reversed in direction, pressure. If both the direction of the
the magnetic field is reversed in direc- magnetic field, and the direction of the
motion of the conductor be reversed,
there is no change in the direction of
the induced pressure, for there is then
no change in the relative directions of
the two. The same results can be ob-
tained by moving the magnetic field
with respect to the conductor in such
a way that the lines of force of the
field cut the conductor.
If a permanent magnet be thrust
into a coil of wire, there will be an
Fig. 7— A Coil about a Magnetic Circuit througii Iron
electrical pressure set up in the coil
tion. The number of magnetic lines so long as the turns of wire forming
passing through the solenoid depends the coil are cutting the lines of force
also upon the kind of material compos- that are produced by the magnet.
ing the core of the solenoid, in addition When the magnet is withdrawn, the
to the number of turns and the value of induced electrical pressure will be re-
the current in these turns. The num- versed in direction, since the direc-
ber of lines per unit area inside a sole- tion of cutting is reversed. A mag-
noid with an air core can be multiplied netic field may be produced through a
several times by introducing a soft-iron coil of wire by winding it on the mag-
core. If this core be extended as netic circuit shown in Fig. 8. Now
shown in magnetic circuit
Fig. 7, the any change of current in the coil P will
(the path through which the magnetic cause a change in the number of mag-
lines pass) may be completed through netic lines passing through S and
it. The larger part of the total num- hence there will be an induced electri-
ber of lines will pass through the iron, cal pressure set up in S so long as the
as it is a much better conductor of number of lines passing through it is
magnetism than air. changing. The pressure induced in
In 18.31, Michael Faraday discovered
that there was an electrical pressure
induced in an electrical conductor
when was moved in a magnetic field
it
the induced pressure depends upon the S depends upon the change in the num-
direction of the movement of the con- ber of magnetic lines through it.
ductor and the direction of the lines Let us now consider a condition of
of force in the magnetic field revers- ;
operation when there is no current in
351
the secondary coil and the primary coil was before any current was taken from
is connected to some source of electri- the secondary coil. The decrease in
cal energy. When this is the case the induced pressure is small, but it is al-
current in the primary coil is not de- ways ample to allow the required in-
termined by Ohm's law, which states crease in primary current. There is,
that the current is equal to the elec- at the same time, a small decrease in
trical pressure divided by the resist- the secondary pressure.
ance, but is considerably less in value, When the transformer is operating
for the following reason. The mag- on no load, with no current in the sec-
netic lines of force produced by the ondary coil, the induced pressure in the
current in the primary induces an elec- primary coil is practically equal to the
trical pressure in the primary winding impressed pressure and hence a very
itself, the direction of which is always small current will be taken from the
opposite to the impressed pressure, or source of energy. It is apparent now
the one producing the current. As a that the primary and secondary coils
if
result of this induced pressure be- have the same number of turns, the in-
ing set up in the primary, the elTec- duced electrical pressure in each of
tive pressure acting in the circuit these coils will be the same, assuming,
is decreased. At the same time there of course, that all the magnetic lines
is an electrical pressure induced in the that pass through the primary also
secondary winding in the same direc- pass through the secondary coil, and
tion as that induced in the primary. vice versa, or the secondary pressure is
If the secondary circuit be connected practically the same as the pressure
to a load, there will be a current in the impressed on the primary. If the
secondary winding, which will pass number of turns in the secondary coil
around the magnetic circuit in the op- is greater or less than the number of
posite direction to the primary current, turns in the primary, the magnetic
and as a result will decrease the num- lines will be cut a greater or less num-
ber of lines passing through the pri- ber of times by the secondary coil, and
mary coil. This will in turn decrease hence the induced pressure will be
the electrical pressure induced in the greater or less, depending upon the re-
primary coil, and a larger current will lation of the number of turns in the
exist in the primary winding than there two coils.
Spirit Photographs
Print some photographs in the usual tion and allow it to dry. You are now
way on printing-out paper, then fix ready to perform the magic-photograph
them in a solution of 1 oz. hyposul- trick.
phite of soda and 8 oz. of water, and To cause the spirit photograph to
wash them thoroughly. While the appear, cut a piece of blotting paper
prints are still wet, immerse them in a the same size as the prepared print and
saturated solution of bichloride of mer- moisten it, then hold the apparently
cury. Be very careful to wash the blank piece of paper in contact with it.
hands and trays after using the mer- The picture will come out clear and
cury solution, as it is poisonous. When plain, and if thoroughly washed out
the print is placed in the mercury so- it will remain permanently.
lution, the picture vanishes completely.
Leave the prints in this bath just long CSaturate a small piece of cotton bat-
enough for the image to disappear, ting in glue and wrap it around a nail,
and then wash and dry them thor- then place it in a hole previously made
oughly. Soak some clean blotting in a plaster wall. When the glue dries,
paper in the hyposulphite-of-soda solu- the nail will remain permanently.
352
By A. E. ANDREWS
PART II — Construction
Transformers may be divided into eliminated, butit may be reduced to a
^ W(NDINGS
which the metal is
placed. This loss can-
r
not be entirely elimi-
- J nated, but it can be
greatly reduced by
Fig. 9 — Core-Type Transformer Fig. 10— Shell-Type Transformer
breaking the mass of
core type. If the magnetic circuit metal up into parts and insulating these
surrounds the windings, as indicated parts from each other, which results
in Fig. 10, the transformer is said to in the paths in which the eddy currents
be of the shell type. The following in- originally circulated being destroyed to
structions are for a shell-type trans- a certain extent.
former. The breaking up of the metal is
Any mass of magnetic material, usually made in such a way that the
such as a piece of soft iron, when joints between the various parts are
placed in a magnetic field that is pro- parallel to the direction of the mag-
duced by an alternating current, will netic field. When the joints are made
be rapidly magnetized and demag- in this way, they offer less opposition
netized, the rapidity of the change de- to the magnetizing force. This is one
pending upon the frequency of the of the principal reasons why induction-
current producing the field. When a coil cores are made up of a bundle of
piece of iron is magnetized and de- wires instead of a solid piece. These
magnetized, as just stated, there will wires are annealed or softened to re-
be a certain amount of heat generated duce the hysteresis loss that would
in it and this heat represents energy occur. The combined hysteresis and
that must come from the electrical cir- eddy-current losses, which are spoken
cuit producing the magnetic field in of as the iron losses, will of course be
which the iron is placed. very small in the transformer you are
The heat that is generated in the going to construct, but the above dis-
iron is due to two causes: First, the cussion is given to show why the mag-
hysteresis loss which is due to a prop- netic circuits of transformers are built
erty of the iron that causes the mag- up from sheets of soft iron, called lam-
netism in the iron to lag behind the inations. The core is said to be
magnetizing influence, or the changes laminated.
that are constantly taking place in the The dimensions of the complete mag-
field strength due to the alternating netic circuit, of the transformer you
current. This loss cannot be entirely are going to construct, are given in
353
T
•"a"*
— J'^ -i'-
-1- "Kj
A iS B '-i-t
•?."'
I
35" J
n^ c
XMO
_ .
.J
-.(Vl
J
.
U1.C0
(
1 1 1
all the edges of the pieces are perfectly being of larger wire, on it will be placed
smooth and that they are all of the the core first. winding you
For this
same size then give each one a coat of
; will need a small quantity of No. 26 B.
very thin shellac. & S. gau e, single cotton-covered wire.
354
Drill a small hole through one of the 240 turns on each layer and place one
insulating washers, down close to the layer of paraffin paper between each
cloth covering the core, being careful layer of wire. The primary winding
at the same time to keep the hole as far should have at least 13 layers, and the
" outside end should be terminated as
/ "
"^
•a the inside end. Outside of the com-
pleted windings, place several layers of
insulating cloth to serve as an insula-
15
t—3" tion, and at the same time provide a
1
4
9"
-o^ ~I6 mechanical protection for the windings.
The outside part of the magnetic
circuit can now be put in place. When
end of the secondary winding should transformer at all points. This box
be terminated in the same way as the should be provided with a cover that
winding was started. Outside of the can be easily removed.
completed secondary winding place at Now mount the transformer in the
least six layers of paraffin paper, or box by means of small bolts, that pass
several layers of insulating cloth. The through the holes in the supports and
paraffin paper used should be approxi- holes in the bottom of the box. Two
mately five mills in thickness. You binding-posts can now be mounted on
can make your own paraffin paper by one end of the box, and insulated from
taking a good quality of writing paper it, to serve as terminals for the sec-
about two mills thick and dipping it ondary winding. Two pieces of
into some hot paraffin, then hanging it stranded No. 14 B. & S. gauge, rubber-
up by one edge to drain. covered copper wire should now be
The primary winding is to be made soldered to the terminals of the
from No. 34 B. & S. gauge, single silk- primary circuit and passed out through
covered copper wire. The inside end insulating bushings mounted in holes
of this winding should be started in cut in the end of the box opposite to
the same way as the secondary, but at the one upon which the binding-posts
the end opposite to the one where the were mounted. These heavy wires
secondary terminated. Wind about should be firmlv fastened to the iron
355
part of the transformer inside the box, wiring for lights, and connected to the
so that any outside strain placed upon heavy wires, or primary circuit. The
them will not, in time, break them loose binding-posts, or secondary winding
from the smaller wires. Be sure to should be connected to the bell circuit
SMALL BOLTS -
-3i-
insulate all joints and wires well inside and the transformer is complete and
Mirror Hinged to Window Casing isproduced by the zinc, water and sil-
ver which decomposes the sulphides
A shaving mirror is usually placed
on the silver and leaves it well cleaned.
on window sash to avoid shadows as
a
much as possible. This is very incon- No silver is taken away by this method.
venient and — Contributed
Moines, Iowa.
by Loren Ward, Des
««MHi U many times the
o mirror is broken
by a fall. A To Prevent Poultry Water from
good way
^ avoid
and
shadows
have
to
the
Freezing
The method shown in the sketch is
mirror handy is used by me in cold weather to keep the
drinking water for the poultry from
to hinge it to
freezing. The device consists of a part
the window cas-
of a barrel inverted and set over the
ing. This can be
done with screw- fountain, and a tubular lantern. A
small opening is cut in one side of the
eyes, A, and screwhooks, B. The
screweyes are turned into the frame of
the mirror and the screwhooks into the
window casing. Two screwhooks can
also be turned into the casing on the
opposite side of the window, if desired,
so that the mirror can be used on either
side. — Contributed by James D. Mc-
Kenna, New Britain, Conn.
Hilh
Fig. 2 _
m j^
D, battery E, and push button A, are often results in quite a saving of wire.
all connected in series. The operation The proper connections for operat-
of the bell is independent of the order ing one bell from either of two push
357
B C0
rjG.5
in Fig. 4. The two bells, D, are shown tallic return-call circuit are shown in
connected in parallel, which requires Fig. 9. A
special push button must be
more wire than if they were connected used in this circuit, and in this case
in series. If they be connected in ser- two batteries are used instead of one,
ies, one or the other should have its as in Figs. 7 and 8. This circuit may
make-and-break contact closed. The be changed to a ground return-call
bell whose circuit remains unchanged circuit by using the earth as a con-
will intercept the current for the other ductor instead of either wire. There
bell in series with it. The operating are, of course, numerous other meth-
of the bells is satisfactory, how-
more ods that may be used in connecting
ever, when they are in parallel, and call bells, but the connections shown
each taking current from the battery in the diagrams are perhaps the most
independent of the other. common.
The diagram, Fig. 5, shows the
proper connections for operating two Refrigerator for Dry and Warm
bells from two independent push but-
Climates
tons, each push button operating a par-
ticular bell. Any number of bells Set a bowl containing butter, cream
operated from any number of push or fruit in a saucer and cover the bowl
buttons, all of the bells being rung with a moistened napkin, allowing the
from any one of the push buttons, are edges to hang in a larger saucer tilled
connected as shown in Fig. 6. Such with water, and place the whole in
a circuit can be used as a fire alarm or the air out of the sun's rays. The arti-
time call in a factory, the operation of cle to be kept cool may also be placed
the circuit being controlled from any in apan with an earthenware crock
one of a number of different points. turned over it and covered with a
The proper connections for what is small towel or cloth, the edges of
called a return-call circuit is shown in which extend into another outer pan
Fig. 7. The circuit is so arranged that partly filled with water.
the bell at one end is controlled by The method can be applied on a
the push button at the other end. Such larger scale by using a shallow gal-
a circuit can be used in transmitting vanized pan which will contain many
signals in either direction. A ground articles and more water. This man-
return-call circuit is shown in Fig. 8. ner of cooling is especially adapted to
358
camping parties and will prevent in the hole and driven into the top of
sloppy butter, sour milk and spoiling the door, 1 in. from its back edge. The
fruit. The articles are also kept free other bracket was placed on the bot-
—
from ants and flies. Contributed by tom of the door in a similar manner.
C. B. Hosford, Swansea, Ariz. The door was placed in an open posi-
tion and the prongs of the brackets
were nailed to the door post. The bot-
Pencil-Sharpening Guide
tom bracket may also be nailed to the
The sketch shows how a guide for floor and the top one to the lintel.
making a true point on a lead pencil Contributed by Robert Smith, E.
may be made of a block of wood. The Burnaby, B. C.
hole, which should be
large enough to allow
Skimmer for Bottled Milk
the pencil to be turned
easily, is bored at the The cream that rises on the milk in
proper angle to form an ordinary milk bottle cannot be re-
the desired point on moved easily. Where a small family
the pencil. The long desires to use the
side of the block cream for coffee, the
serves as a guide for skimmer shown in
the knife blade, while the sketch is very
the projection at the handy.
bottom acts as a The cone is made
stop. The guide of —
metal tin, brass
insures an even
point and is eas-
—
or copper w h c h i
can be nickelplated,
ily manipulated. It is held in the palm the seam being
of the left hand and the pencil is turned soldered. The cone
with the thumb and forefinger, while is 2 in. deep with a
the knife is held against the face of the diameter at the top
block, cutting edge downward, and of 1% in. A handle
worked up and down with the right can be made of a
hand. discarded sugar or teaspoon, which is
soldered to the cone. Insert the cone
Homemade Hinges in the bottle far enough for the cream
to flow into and then withdraw.
it
When making a chicken house re- Cream will gather about in. deep on
,'i
cently I had forgotten to procure rich milk. The milk can be used for
hinges. When searching the "junk" cooking. A piece of wire can be used
box I found for a handle instead of the spoon.
some little metal Contributed by Victor Labadie, Dallas,
brackets such as Texas.
used for holding
spring roller How to Preserve Putty
shades. Attach-
ing these as Having some putty left over after a
shown, I made job of glazing and wishing to keep it
a good substi- without its becoming dried up, I tried
tute hinge. A wrapping it in paraffin paper such as
pair of the used to wrap butter. I found this
brackets having method to be a decided success, the
no slots were oil being prevented from drying out.
selected. A 2^2" — Contributed by Levi R. Markwood,
in. wire nail with a washer was placed Fairview, Pa.
359
etcr. Turn down a piece of hard rub- 30 parts by weight sodium chloride,
;
tion of the tail and circle to the last Flying Model Aeroplane for a Display
number counted. For instance, the A novelty for a window display is
sketch shows 4 coins in the tail, there-
made of a model aeroplane flying by
fore the last coin counted in the circle
its own power. To control the direc-
will be at C or the fourth coin from
tion and make the model fly in a circle
the intersection of the tail and circle.
By slipping another coin in the tail
the location of the last coin counted
is changed, thereby eliminating any
chance of exposing the trick by locat-
ing the same coin in the circle every
time. This can be done secretly with-
out being noticed.
with air. This can be done by means the beds. The slightest breeze will
of a bulb attached to a hypodermic keep them fluttering, and no bird will
needle. The needle must be inserted —
come to rest on the beds. Contributed
through the soft plug which every in- by M. T. Canary, Chicago.
flated ball has, and which can be dis-
covered by pressure. After the ball is
inflated and the needle extracted, the
Measuring the Length of Wire Wound
on a Spool
soft rubber closes around the fine hole,
preventing the escape of the air. If a When winding magnet spools on a
leak is found, which allows the air to lathe, the exact amount of wire used
escape too rapidly, a repair can be can be easily determined by means of
made with a single-tube tire outfit. the device shown in the illustration.
Contributed by A. B. Wegener, Cam- The large reel from which the wire is
den, N. J. obtained is conveniently placed on a
366
loose mandrel, or rod, near the lathe, part, thereby shutting ofT any flow
and in line with the spool which is to be through it. Several cuts are made into
wound. A
grooved idler wheel, the ex- it, about halfway across and 6 in. apart.
~ "
it from sliding; then it is led to the = ;
- ~
spool. The exact diameter of the idler
being known and the number of revolu-
tions indicated, the true length of the
•"2*6* zi ^¥P
wire wound on the spools can be easily Six Pieces of Wood as They are Put Together to
determined by the following formula: Form a Toy Bank
Length of wire on spool in feet equals In construction, six pieces of hard
its
circumference of idler in feet times wood, of the dimensions shown in the
number of revolutions of idler. Con- — sketch, are required. White wood will
tributed by C. Swayne, St. Louis, Mo. do if there is no hard wood at hand.
The coin slot is l^ in. wide by II/4 in.
Homemade Lawn Sprinkler long, and is cut in only one piece.
No difficulty will be experienced in
With
a short length of old hose, a putting the first five pieces together,
serviceable lawn sprinkler can be but the sixth, or top, piece, shown in
quickly and easily made. One end is the sketch, will not go in, because the
provided with a regular coupling for bottom edge of the raised side will
connecting it to the line of good hose. strike the inside of the piece to the
The other end is turned up for several right. By beveling this edge with a
inches, and securely wired to the main chisel from top to bottom between the
dadoes, or grooves, it can be forced
down quite a distance and sprung in
place by placing a block of wood on
the high side and striking it a sharp
blow with a heavy hammer. Con- —
tributed by J. A. Shelly, Brooklyn,
The Slots Cut in the Hosewill Produce a Very
Fine Spray of Water New York.
367
An Electric Anemometer
By Wm. H. DETTMAN
The
construction of this instrument wide, one li/^ in. long and the other %
is simple that any amateur can
so in. Two iV-in. holes are drilled in the
make one, and if accurate caHbrations end of the long piece, and one iV'^n.
are desired, these can be marked by
comparison with a standard anemom-
eter, while both are placed in the
wind.
The Indicator
The case of the indicator is built of
thin wood— the material of an old
cigar —
box will do 9 in. long, 6 in. wide
and IVi; in. deep. If cigar-box ma-
terial is used, it must first be soaked
in warm water to remove the paper.
If a cover is to be used on the bo.x, a
slot, on an arc of a circle, must be cut
through it to show the scale beneath.
The arc is determined by the length of
the needle from a center over the axis
on which the needle swings. When
the box is completed, smooth up the
outside surface with fine sandpaper
and give it a coat of stain.
The core of the magnet is made by
winding several layers of bond paper
around a pencil of sufficient size to
make an insidediameter of slightly
over 14 in-, and a tube 2 in. long. Iiach
layer of the paper is glued to the pre-
ceding layer.
Two flanges or disks are attached to
The Indicator Box with Coil, Needle and Scale, as
the tube to form a spool for the wire. is Used in Connection with the Anemometer
It
hole of the longer brass strip of the piece of wood, 2 in. square and 4 in.
core, and the coil is fitted with the core long, and wound with No. 18 gauge
in the manner shown at D. light A single-wound cotton-covered german-
brass coil spring is attached to each silver wire. The winding should be-
end of the core, as shown at E and F, gin i/i in. from one end of the core and
the latter being held with a string, G, finish y^ in. from the other, making the
length of the coil 3l^ in. The ends of
the wire are secured by winding them
around the heads of brads driven into
(o o
IB) the core. A small portion of the in-
sulation is removed from the wire on
Fig 2 F'S 3 one side of the coil. This may be done
The Metal Core for the Coil and the Bearing Block with a piece of emery cloth or sand-
for the Axis of the Needle
paper. A sliding spring contact, F, is
whose end tied to a brad on the out-
is attached to the sliding shaft B, the
side of the box, for adjustment. bet- A end of which is pressed firmly on the
ter device could be substituted by at- bared portion of the wire coil. One
taching the end of the spring F to a nut end of a coil spring, which is slipped
and using a knurled-head bolt passed on the shaft between the pieces CC, is
through the box side. One of the attached to the end crosspiece, and the
wires from the coil is attached to a other end is fastened to the sliding
push button, H, to be used when a shaft so as to keep
reading of the instrument is made. the shaft and disk
The connections for the instrument out, and the flange
consist of one binding post and a push H against the
button. second crosspiece,
The Anemometer when there is no
air current ap-
The anemometer resembles a minia-
plied to the disk A.
ture windmill and is mounted on top The insulation
of a l)uilding or support where it is of the standard
fully exposed to the air currents. It
upon which the
differs from the windmill in that the anemometer turns
revolving wheel is replaced by a cupped is shown in Fig. 5. The standard J is
disk, A, Fig. 4, fitted with a sliding made of a piece of Vi^-in. pipe, suitably
metal shaft, B, which is supported on and rigidly attached to the building
crosspieces, CC, between the main or support, and the upper end, around
frame pieces DD. The latter pieces which the anemometer revolves to keep
carry a vane at the opposite end. The in the direction of the air currents, is
frame pieces are i/o in. thick, 2^^ in. fitted with a plug of wood to insulate
the ^/4-in. brass rod K. bearing and A
electric-wire connection plate, L, is
the indicator with the anemometer at magnet core D in the coil, in propor-
NN, Fig. 1. tion to the magnetic force induced by
Two or more dry cells must be con- the amount of current passing through
nected in the line, and when a reading the resistance in the coils on E, Fig. 4,
is desired, the button H, Fig. 1, is from the contact into which the spring
pushed, which causes the current to F is brought by the wind pressure on
flow through the lines and draw the the disk A.
Procure two pieces of metal, one of of 3^5 or 14 in. Cut from some iV-in.
brass and the other of sheet iron, 5 in. sheet brass a piece 1% in. long, and
long, I/O in. wide, and ^^ in., or just a 1/2 in- wide. Drill two Vs-in. holes
little more, in thickness. Bend the in this piece, y^ in. apart and equally
brass strip into the form shown in Fig. spaced from the ends. Procure four
1, then place the brass piece on top of %-in. brass bolts, two i/o in. in length,
the iron and drill the holes and BA and two 1 in. in length. Secure four
indicated in Fig. 2. After the brass small washers and two additional
piece has been bent, as shown in Fig. nuts. Mount the combined iron and
1, it will of course be shorter than the brass strip on the slate base, using a
iron strip and the iron strip must be long and short bolt as shown in Fig.
cut off, or a brass strip a little longer 4. One terminal of the winding should
than 5 in. can be secured and cut the be placed under the head of the bolt J.
same length as the iron strip after it is Place a washer, K, between the head of
bent. The holes Aand B should be the bolt and the wire. The brass strip
W'j in. in diameter. The next thing to L can now be mounted in a similar
do will be to wind a heating coil about manner, as shown in Fig. 4. Place
the brass strip. Wrap a very thin layer the other end of the winding under the
of sheet asbestos about the brass strip, head of the bolt M.
and wind on the strip 18 ft. of No. 34 Obtain a small screw, N, Fig. 4, of
gauge bare superior resistance wire. such a length that its point will reach
Use a thread about .006 in. in diameter the brass strip L when the screw is
to separate the various turns. This placed in the hole B, Fig. 2. lock A
thread can be removed after the wind- nut, O, should be provided for this
ing is completed and the ends have screw so that it will remain in adjust-
been fastened. Rivet the iron and ment. The point of the screw and the
brass pieces together with a small point on the brass plate where the
brass rivet in the hole A, Fig. 3. After screw touches should be of platinum,
the two pieces are riveted together as the brass will not withstand the
bend them into the form shown in Fig. high temperature of the arc formed
4 and then drill the two %-in. holes C when the circuit is broken.
and D, as shown in Fig. 2. Tap the A
metal box should now be provided
hole B, Fig. 2, to take a small machine to serve as a containing case and the
screw. flasher is complete. This box should
The base is constructed as follows be of such design and construction that
Procure a piece of slate, 5% in. long, it will comply with the requirements
li/o in. wide, and 1/2 in. in thickness. of the electrical inspection department
Drill the holes indicated in Fig. 3. having jurisdiction over the locality
The four corner holes are for mount- where the flasher is to be used.
o
—rfTV" l-,i-
H %- %
-3i-
Dimensions of the Brass Strip and Mounting Base. Showing the Location of the Holes and the Shape of the
Brass Strip to Receive the Coil of Wire
ing the flasher in its containing case, The flasher should be connected in
and should be about in. %
in series with the lamp, the wires being
diameter. The holes E, F, G, and H fastened under the nuts on the bolts P
should be i/s in. in diameter and and R, Fig. 4, and the screw N ad-
countersunk with a %-in. square-ended justed so that it lacks a small fraction
drill, on the under side, to a depth of an inch of making contact with the
371
brass plate when there is no current in coimected in series with the lamp. The
the winding. When the switch is lamp will apparently go out when the
turned on there will be a current
through the lamp and winding in
series. The brass strip will be heated
more than the iron and it will expand
more, thus forcing the point of the
screw N down upon the brass plate,
which will result in the winding about The Assembled Parts Show/ing
F15.4
the Complete Flasher
the brass strip being shorted and the and Electric Connections with Adjusting Screw
full voltage will be impressed upon winding series with it, as the total
is in
the lamp, and it will burn at normal resistance of the lamp and winding
candlepower. When the coil is shorted combined will not permit sufficient
there will of course be no current in current to pass through the lamp to
its winding and the brass strip will make its filament glow. The time
cool down, the screw N will finally the lamp is on and off may
be varied
be drawn away from contact with to a certain extent by adjusting the
the brass plate, and the winding again screw N.
FiG,2
Tuning Coil and Wiring Diagran
from %-in. stock, 1 in. wide and well Toy Parachute Cut-Away for
covered with insulating material. It JCite Lines
is then wound with No. 24 single cot-
ton-covered copper wire so that the An interesting pastime while flying
kites is to attach large toy parachutes
coils will lie flat. All the arms are of
%-in. square brass. The supports are to the lines and have some device to
smaller in section. Sliders are mounted drop them when they are at a great
on the ends of the long arms and are
kept in place by setscrews.
The insulation on the wire is re-
moved with a small piece of sand-
paper pasted on a block of wood. This
should be temporarily fastened to the
revolving lever at the point where the
contact is wanted, then the lever is Tig, 2
turned until the insulation is removed. Two Parachute Drops
The wiring diagram shows the location
of the tuning coil in the line.
height. In Fig. 1 is shown how the
parachute dropped by the burning of
is
Preparing Sheet Music for Turning a piece of punk.
Each page on sheet music having Another method is shown in Fig. 2.
It is only necessary to send a piece of
three or more pages should be cut 1/4
in. shorter than the preceding page, as
paper or cardboard along the line and
when it strikes the wire coil (Fig. 2) A
the part B slides out of the loops C, the
end D will then and disengage the
fall
loop G on theend of the parachute
string. The wires E and F are twisted
around the kite string. Contributed —
by Thos. De Loof, Grand Rapids,
Leaves Cut for Turning Alichigan.
373
%-in. groove lengthwise in the center seasoned board, hard wood if possible,
of these pieces to within V/2 •"• of about 1 in. thick, 8 in. wide and per-
each end, as shown in Fig. 1. Drill haps 20 in. long. Cover one side of
four %-in. holes, AA, in each piece, a this board and the edges with some %-
%-in. hole, B, in one end and a 3%-in. in. sheet asbestos. Now place the
^^' ^^!
3"
J-^'%^ 1/h"
3-A 6
O^A t V/E8^ J \
3" 1
3"
8_ B_
-ii"H FiG.l \-'i'-
Mro ^\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\to t ,.
Details of the Base, Rod and Handle for Each Carbon Feed. Which is Attached to the
Large Base on One Side of the Furnace
hole, C, in the other end. bend Now flowerpot in the exact center and then
the ends up at right angles to the re- mount the grooved brass strips one on
mainder of the piece along the dotted either side of it with the longest di-
lines shown at D
and E. Next obtain mension parallel to the longest dimen-
374
sion of the board and the inside end give access to the interior of the com-
about 1 in. from the side of the pot. pleted rheostat. Now obtain eight %-
The end with the i%-in. holes should in. iron rods, 10 in. long. Drill and
be next to the pot. Assemble the tap each end of these rods to accom-
parts of the carbon feeds and then cut modate a Vs-in. machine screw. Wrap
out some circular disks of asbestos to several layers of thin sheet asbestos
place under the flowerpot so as to around each rod and tie it in place
raise it to such a position with some thread. These rods should
rH that the holes in its sides now be fastened between the end
will be on a line with the plates by means of a number of
carbon rods. Three long iron machine screws. Mount four
screws should now be back-connected binding posts on the
iO placed in the board, form- plate shown in Fig. G, making sure
6 ing the base, in such a they are insulated from the plate by
i position as to hold the means of suitable bushings and
flowerpot always in place. washers.
This completes the fur- Procure a small quantity of No.
nace proper, which is 14 gauge iron wire. Fasten one end
shown in Fig. 5. The of the wire under the head of the screw
furnace can now be put holding one of the binding posts in
into operation provided there is a suit- place and then wind it around the rods
able current rheostat to connect in se-
ries with the carbon arc to prevent an °
°
-->l' l""*^-/-
excessive current being taken from the
line. If such a rheostat is not avail-
o
/—\
able, a serviceable one may be made as
follows h'-^
Obtain two pieces of tV-'O- sheet o
The Furnace Consists of a Flowerpot in Which a Crucible is Set, and on Either Side
the Carbon Holders are Fastened to the Base
375
winding and attach the end to the may be located on a bracket fastened
remaining binding post. Different to the wall, but care must be taken not
amounts of this resistance can now be to place it in such a position that it will
connected in series with the arc by come into contact with inflammable
changing the connections from one material. As an extra precaution, the
binding post to another. The rheostat circuit should be properly fused.
shown in the figure and cut its upper time before it is opened so that sorne
end off so that it is about 1/2 in. below energy may be stored in the kick coil.
the outwardly projecting end of the If the wire A is made long enough to
the first one. Divide the circles into 36 binding posts mounted on the base of
equal parts and draw lines from one the switch G, H, and I are three con-
;
mind that in order to reverse the direc- Twosmall brads should be driven
tion of rotation, the current must be into the wooden base so as to prevent
reversed in the armature only or in the the possibility of the switch blades
field only, not in both.
The above switch may be con-
structed as follows: First, procure a
piece of well-seasoned hard wood, say
maple, i/o in. thick, 2i/L' in. wide and 4
in. long. Round ofif the corners and
the edges of this piece on one side and
drill the holes indicated in the sketch. -0-0
The four corner holes should be of -I —t-
such a size as to accommodate the
screws used in mounting four small
.T
back-connected binding posts. The
<z--- -}
remaining holes should be %
in. All
these holes should be countersunk |_-L
with a %-in. bit to a depth of i/4 in- on
the under side. Diagram of the Wiring to a Small Motor and the
Details of the Switch
Cut from some iV-in. sheet brass
two pieces, 2% in. long, % in. wide at moving beyond their proper position.
one end and 14 in. at the other, and Two pieces of iV-in. fiber should be
round their ends. Drill a Vs-in. hole ])laced between the heads of the screws
through the larger end of each of G and H, and H and I, to prevent the
these pieces, 1^4 'n. from the end, and ends of the switch blades from drop-
also a hole through each, I14 in. from ping down on the wooden base.
the narrow end. The last two holes
should be threaded for %-in. machine Adjustable Rod for Potted Plants
screws. Obtain five y^;-in. brass bolts,
14 in. long. File the heads of three of Procure a brass sash-curtain rod of
these bolts down to a thickness of ap- the telescoping kind and stick the solid
proximatel}' ^ in. and mount them in part into the soil close to the plant and
the holes G, H
and I. Before mount- tie it to the rod. As the plant grows
ing anything on the base the grooves move the tubular part of the rod up-
indicated by the hea\-y dotted lines ward to correspond with the height of
should be cut in the under side so that the plant. This makes a good support
the various points may be properly and is not so unsightly as a stick, —
connected by conductors placed in the Contributed by Gertrude M. Bender,
grooves. Now mount the two pieces Utica, N. Y.
of sheet brass upon the base by means
of the remaining two bolts, which
Wrench for Different-Size Nuts
should pass through the holes J and K.
A xV-in. washer should be placed be- A
very handy wrench can be made
tween the pieces of brass and the from a piece of square bar, shaped as
wooden base. shown and fitted with a handle. The
Procure a piece of %-in. fiber, I14 joint at A may be halved and riveted
in. long and %
in. broad. Drill two or a weld made as desired. The size
%-in. holes in this piece, one in each
end, so that they are 1 in. apart. Drill
a third %-in. hole in the center and
fasten a small handle to the piece of The Sloping Notch in the Wrench Permits Its
Use on Nuts of Various Size
fiber. Now mount upon the
this piece
two pieces of brass that form the of the bar and the space between the
blades of the switch by means of two parts will depend on the size of nuts
small %-in. brass machine screws. to be turned.
380
mate amounts given: Muriate ot am- thus have the necessary tools at hand
monia, 10 parts bichromate of potash,
; for work. A plank, 3 in. thick, 10 in.
4 parts, and chloride of sodium, 4 wide and 18 in. long, was planed and
parts. After the porous cup has thor-
oughly soaked in the above solution
it should be dried by passing a roller
over its external surface when it is
mounted on a wooden cylinder of
proper diameter. The moisture-proof The Bench Top can be Quickly Attached to Any
cup may be formed outside the porous Table Top without Harming It
cup by covering the latter with several smoothed up on all sides, and a vise
coats of waterproofing paste and wind- and a bench pin were fastened on one
ing on several thicknesses of common edge.
manila paper, each layer of paper be- To the under side of the same edge
ing treated with the paste. A disk of two blocks were securely fastened, as
cardboard, properly treated, should be shown, and to these blocks two other
placed in the end of the cylinder to pieces were fastened with hinges. With
form the bottom, and the edge of the a bolt, running through from the top,
manila paper folded in over it and and a thumb nut used underneath,
pasted in place. these pieces are used as clamps for
The pasteboard covering surround- holding the bench to the table top.
ing the zinc cup of the cell should be The top can be removed and set away in
removed and the surface of the zinc
thoroughly cleaned. The coal tar in
a closet when not in use. —
Contributed
by Wm. H. Hathaway, Nutley, N. J.
the top of the zinc cup should be re-
moved by tapping around the edge with
a hammer, and a large number of small
A Nonsticking Drawer Guide
holes should be made in the walls of The guide shown is nonbinding and
the cup with a sharp instrument. Then has been found thoroughly practical
put the cell within the porous cup and after several years' use on furniture.
fill the top with clear water, preferably The guide A
rain water. A chemical reaction will consists of a
immediately take place between the piece of wood,
outer surface of the zinc and the chem- about lYs in.
icals contained in the material forming square, with a
the porous cup, and the terminal volt- concave cut in
age of the cell will be practically the its upper edge,
same as it was when the cell was new. the width being
The water, of course, must be replen- about %in.
ished from time to time on account of and the depth
evaporation, and the useful life of the such as not to
cell can be prolonged for a consider- cut through the
able time. A part cross section of a extending end
cell treated as described above is shown projecting over
in the accompanying sketch. the crossbar B.
The drawer sides have a half-round
edge on the bottom edge to run in the
Workbench Equipment for a
groove in the guide. The difference
Table Top in width between the groove in the
The average home mechanic with a guide and the rounding edge on the
few tools seldom has a place to work drawer side causes the drawer always
and is usually without a workbench. to ride snugly without binding as
As this was my case, I constructed a the wood expands or contracts with
bench e':]uipment that I could easily —
changes in the weather. Contributed
clamp to the kitchen or other table and by Herman Hermann, Portland, Ind.
384
construction are clearly shown in the The mortise for this joint is made in
illustration. The seat board is sawed the usual manner, the only require-
out to fit the circumference of the ments being that the mortise is run
bucket to be used, and the iron is also through the piece, and the tenon is
bent to this curve and fastened to the cut Vs'in. shorter than the depth of the
board as shown. The little shelf on
the front support holds the bucket at
the right height, and keeps it clean and
out of the way of the cow's foot while
milking.
cannot let some of his friends listen to mortise or the width of the piece it is
a message at the same time as he him- entering. The end of the tenon and
self. The magnifier described in the the mortise is then covered with a
following permits all those present in piece of metal, fastened with screws as
the room to hear the message, provided, shown. The metal can be of any
of course, they are able to interpret the desired material and beveled on the
Morse alphabet by sound. edges. This makes a very good knock-
Avery simple means, making the down joint for mission furniture.
Contributed by H. R. Allen. Cheyenne,
Wyoming.
A Tow^el Roller
A substantial, convenient and non-
rusting towel roller can be made from
afcpg GROUND 8 or of tlie familiar wood handles on
The Phonograph Horn as It is Connected to a bundle carriers and a length of brass
Detector for Transmitting the Messages curtain rod. The bracket ends can be
message audible at a distance of about shaped from any piece of wood of suit-
10 ft., is to attach a phonograph horn, able dimensions. The rollers and ends
or a horn of cardboard or metal, to the
—
can be finished as desired. Contrib-
telephone receiver, but a much better uted by F. E. S., E. Lynn, Mass.
385
Is -^-,„ -^
O -«M
—X
rie.3
m 1^5
\^fU
Fio.2
Fig. 4 FCG.7
Detail of the Parts for the Construction of an Electric Shaving Mug. The Heating of Sufficient ^Vater for
a Shave can be Accomplished at a Nominal Cost
cups are spun from a flat sheet and can be rotated about it. Begin at the
have no seams to open and leak, and center and fasten one end of the rib-
it is necessary that no holes be drilled bon to the block, leaving about 2 in.
in the cup as it is impossible to make projecting for a connection, then pro-
such a hole watertight. The heating ceed to wind the ribbon in a spiral coil,
element must be fastened to the mug separating each turn from the preced-
with a clamp. The clamp will also ing one with a strand of asbestos cord.
allow the heating coil to be removed A small section of the coil is shown in
for repairs without injury to the mug. Fig. 5, in which A, or the light part,
The bottoms of these mugs have a represents the asbestos insulation, and
flange which makes a recessed part B, or the black lines, the heating ele-
and in this the heating element is ment. The insulation may be obtained
placed. by untwisting some i/g-in. round as-
The legs of the mug are made of bestos packing and using one of the
sheet brass as shown in Fig. 1, one of strands. This cord insulates each
the three having an enlargement near turn of the ribbon from the other and
its center with a hole for an insulating the current must travel through the
button (Fig. 2), of "transite" or some whole coil without jumping across
other material, to hold the. supply cord from one turn to the other. The
in place. whole coil must be closely wound to
The clamp for holding the heating get it into the limited space at the bot-
coil in place is shown in Fig. 3. This tom of the mug.
386
Before taking the coil from the with nuts. The heads of these screws
block, rub into its surface a little asbes- are shown in the nuts being
Fig. 6,
tos retort cement, or a cement com- above the brass and between the two
posed of a mixture of silicate of soda insulating pieces.
and silica, or glass sand. This mix- The ends of the heating ribbon are
ture, when dry, will tend to hold the brought through the lower insulating
coil together and the current may be disk and attached to binding posts as
passed through the coil to test it as shown. The leads may be covered
well as to bake it in its coiled shape. with tape to prevent any short circuit.
The support for the heating coil is The mug uses SVo amperes at 110
made of a piece of iVi"- asbestos volts, either direct or alternating cur-
wood or transite. Cut it to fit into the rent, and it will cost about 3 cents an
recessed bottom of the mug, then with hour to operate it. Care should be
a chisel remove the material in the top taken to use a separable attachment
to form a depression j^ in. deep to re- for connecting, as an ordinary lamp
ceive the coil with its top flush. The socket may be burned out by turning
leads of the coil are run through the off the current, it being adapted only
disk. The surface of the coil is then to a small capacity.
plastered evenly with retort cement. In assembling the parts, several
The legs are fastened to a second piece pieces of mica should be placed be-
of insulating material with round- tween the coil and the metal of the
head brass machine screws, i/o in. long, mug to insulate the coil from the mug.
of the holder B is to enable the work- natured or wood alcohol and after —
man to easily grasp the sheets of em- turning the spigot upward or upside
ery cloth. As the holder is on the down, as shown, open it and pour in
under side of the bench, there is little
The Faucet is
danger of any liquid or other sub- Turned Upwards
stance spoiling the sheets. The sheets and Opened and
Alcohol Poured
are also within easy reach. Contrib- — In on the Ice
to make new tenons where one tenon the egg in and use it in the ordinary
was broken I used a metal piece made pan. It will not burn the egg, and the
from a short egg: can be lifted out of the pan and
length of bicycle easily slipped on a plate or toast when
tubing, as it is cooked. —
Contributed by W. A.
shown. The tul^e Jaquythe, San Diego, Cal.
was slotted two
ways to make A Sander Mandrel for the Lathe
four parts which were turned out and
flattened. The remaining end of the
A
cylindrical sander for use in the
lathe can be easily made of two pieces
tulie was slipped over the broken post
of wood, turned to a diameter that will
and the four parts were fastened with take the stock size of sandpaper, and
screws to the under side of the chair clamped together with pinch dogs at
seat. —
Contributed by Chas. H. Rob- the ends. One edge of the sandpaper
erts, Calumet, Mich.
1
-i
mechanical construction and the rela- " lO
.v.}/
tive arrangement of their different , Fis.2
8 ^
*
parts. -Is
in its center. In order that the cur- ends of the winding attached to them.
rent may produce a maximum effect The wires should be placed in grooves
upon the needle, the coil should be cut in the under side of the base, and
mounted in a vertical position. the screws used in fastening the bind-
The base upon which the ring is ing posts should be countersunk.
to be mounted may be cut from some A short compass needle is then
i/2-in. hard wood. Itshould be cir- mounted on a suitable supporting pivot
cular in form and about 5 in. in diam- in the center of the coil. This com-
eter, and have its upper edge rounded pass needle will always come to rest
off and shellackedto improve its ap- in an approximate north and south
pearance. The ring is mounted in a position when it is acted upon by the
vertical position on this base, which magnetic field alone. If now
earth's
may be done as follows: Cut a flat the plane of the coil be placed in such
surface on each of the flanges of the a position that it is parallel to the di-
300
rection of the compass needle (no cur- pered and then magnetized by means
rent in the coil), the magnetic field that of a powerful electromagnet. The
will he produced when a current is sent reason for making the compass needle
through the winding will be perpendic- short is that it will then operate in
practically a uniform magnetic field,
Galvanometer which exists only at the center of the
as It is
coil. On account of the needle being
Used to
Detect the
so short and in view of the fact that
Presence it comes to rest parallel to the coil for
of an its zero position, it is best to use a
Electrical
pointer attached to the needle to deter-
Current
mine its deflection, as this pointer can
be made much longer than the needle,
and any movement of the needle may
be more easily detected, as the end of
the pointer moves through a much
larger distance than the end of the
needle, and since it may be attached to
the needle, at right angles to the
needle's axis, the end of the pointer
will be ofT to one side of the coil and
ular to the magnetic field of the earth its movement may be easily observed.
and there will be a force, due to this The pointer should be made of some
particular current, tending to turn the nonmagnetic material, such as alumi-
compass needle around perpendicularly num or brass, and it should be as long
lo its original position. There will be .'!.'- it may
be conveniently made. A
a deflection of the needle for all values suitable box with a glass cover may be
of current in the coil, and this deflec- provided in which the needle, pointer
tion will vary in value as the current and scale may be housed. The con-
in the coil varies. The mere fact that struction of this box will be left en-
the compass needle is deflected due to tirely to the ingenuity of the one mak-
a current in the coil gives a means of ing the instrument.
detecting a current in any circuit of In order to use this instrument as
which the coil is a part, and the de- an ammeter, it will be necessary to
gree of this deflection affords a means calibrate it, which consists in deter-
of measuring the current, the value of mining the position of the pointer for
the difi'erent deflections in terms of various values of current throusjh the
the current in the coil having been ex-
perimentally determined by sending a
known current through the coil and
noting the positions of the compass
needle for each value of current used. GALVANOMETER
In order to determine the deflection
of the needle, a scale, C, Fig. .3, must
be mounted directly under the com-
pass needle and a pointer, D, attached VVV^AAA/V\^AAA^^
to the compass needle so that any VARIABLE RESISTANCE ^h
movement of the needle results in an
equal angular displacement of the The Electric Circuit, Showing Connections for Finding
the Value of a Current in Calibrating
pointer. The compass needle, E,
should be short and quite heavy, say, coil. It will be necessary to obtain
% in. in length, ^j. in. in thickness and the use of a direct-current ammeter for
1/4 in. in width at its center, and taper- this purpose. The winding of the gal-
ing to a point at its ends. It should vanometer, ammeter, battery and a
be made of a good grade of steel, tem- variable resistance of some kind should
891
^^ I'fl
How to Make Falling Blocks ner, and so on, down to the end. Con- —
tributed by Wayne Nutting, Minne-
Procure a thin board large enough apolis, Minn.
to cut six blocks. 2 in. wide and 3 in.
long; also 2 yd. of cotton tape, ^4 in-
Writing Name Reversed on Paper
:e Placed on Forehead
3:
The followingis an entertaining ex-
periment party of young people.
in a
One of those present is asked if he can
write his name, and will, of course,
^ answer "yes." He is then subjected to
the following test: He is asked to sit
Set of Blocks Joined with Tape So That
They Appear to Fall from the Top down in a chair, a paper, folded several
times, is placed on his forehead, a lead
wide, and some very small pencil is handed him and he is asked to
tacks. Cut the board into write his name on the paper. As little
pieces of the size mentioned, time as possible to reflect should be left
and number two of them on him if he hesitates, he should be told
;
E is in such a position that the max- connecting to binding posts that will
be mounted upon the base of the rheo-
stat.
I
Now
form this piece of fiber into a
complete ring by bending it around
some round object, the flat side being
L0-^>^\X/ \_J toward the object. Determine as ac-
curately as possible the diameter of
the ring thus formed and also its thick-
Diagram Showing the Connections for a Small ness. Obtain a piece of well seasoned
Motor Where a Rheostat Is in the Line
hard wood, i/o in. thick and 4i/i; in.
imum amount of resistance is in cir- square. Round ofif the corners and
cuit there will be a minimum circuit upper edges of this block and mark
through the field and armature of the out on it two circles whose diameters
motor, and its speed will be a mini- correspond to the inside and outside
mum. As the resistance of the rheo- diameters of the fiber ring. The cen-
stat is decreased, the current increases ters of these circles should be in the
394
center of the block. Carefully saw out end will be raised above the edge
the two circles so that the space be- of the fiber ring. Solder a short piece
tween the inside and outside portions of thin brass to the nut that is to
will just accommodate the fiber ring. be placed on the lower end of the
Obtain a second piece of hard wood, bolt, and cut a recess in the counter-
sunk portion of the hole in the base to
SLiSJ^
accommodate it. When the bolt has
been screwed down sufficiently tight
a locknut may be put on, or the first
nut soldered to the end of the bolt.
FcG.3 If possible, it would be best to use a
A Cross Section of the Rheostat, Showing the spring washer, or two, between the
Connections through the Resistance
arm and base.
1/4 in. thick and 4% i"- square, round The insulation should now be re-
off corners and upper edges and
its moved from the wire on the upper
mount the other pieces upon it by edge of the fiber ring with a piece of
means of several small wood screws, fine sandpaper, so that the spring on
which should pass up from the under the under side of the moval)le arm
side and be well countersunk. Place may make contact with the winding.
the fiber ring in the groove, but, before The rheostat is now complete with the
doing so, drill a hole in the base proper exception of a coat of shellac. A cross-
for one end of the wire to pass through. sectional view of the completed rheo-
Two small back-connected binding stat is shown in Fig. 3.
posts should be mounted in the cor-
ners. One of these should lie con-
nected to the end of the winding and
Folding Arms for Clothesline Posts
the other to a small bolt in the center The inconvenience of using a num-
of the base that serves to hold the han- ber of clothesline posts and the limited
dle or movable arm of the rheostat in space available resulted in the making
place. These connecting leads should of a clothesline post as shown in the
all be placed in grooves cut in the sketch. The entire line is supported
under side of the base. on two posts, which should be about
The movable arm of the rheostat Ci in. square and are set in concrete.
may be made from a piece of ic-in. The upper ends of the posts are
sheet brass, and should have the equipped with two arms, hinged to the
following approximate dimensions .sides of the posts in such a manner that
length, 2 in.; breadth lA in. at one end, the inside ends of the arms will meet on
and 1/4 in. at the other. Obtain a Vs-in.
brass bolt, about 1 in. long, also several
washers. Drill a hole in the larger end
of the piece of brass to accommodate
the bolt and also in the center of the
wooden base. Countersink the hole in
the base on the under side with a i/i>-in.
bit to a depth of 14 '"• On the under A Post That Provides
a Way to Hold Six
side of the piece of brass, and near its Lines Taut without
the Use of Props
narrow end, solder a piece of thin
spring brass so that its free end will
rest upon the upper edge of the fiber
ring. A
small handle may be mounted top of the post when they are in a
upon the upper side of the movable horizontal position. Each arm is pro-
arm. Now mount the arm on the base vided with three wood pins, equally
by means of the bolt, placing several spaced for the line. The arms are sup-
washers between it and the upper ported in a horizontal position by two
surface of the base, so that its outer bars of metal at the center, as shown
395
Holes are bored into the sides of the Into the beaker was then poured 100
posts to receive the pins when the arms cubic centimeters of water and the
are at rest. stretch of the elastic band noted by the
Asmall box is fastened to one post,
C
to provide a place for the clothesline
and the clothespins. The line, when
put up, gives space for an entire wash-
ing without the use of a prop, as the
line can be drawn taut enough to hold
the —
garments. Contributed by Olaf A
Used
Graduate Scale
in Connection
Tronnes, Evanston, 111. with an Elastic Band
to Make
a Simple Balance
A Folding Bookrack
Buttons on gates or small doors are Lines in a cable or the ends of con-
apt to become loose and then drop nections at a distance from the battery
^ ^ down, thereby al- must be tested to determine the polar-
lowing the gate ity. Where a large amount of this
(
or door to be- work is to be done, as in automobile
come unfastened. and motorboat repairing, it is necessary
The ordinary to have an indicator to save time. A
button is shown cheap indicator for this purpose can
at A where it is be made of a G-in. test tube having its
loose and turned ends sealed and inclosing a saturated
by its own weight. If the button is cut solution of ammonium chloride (sal
as shown at B, it will remain fastened, ammoniac) and water. The sealed
even if it is loose on the screw or nail. ends are made by inserting a piece of
— Contributed by A. S. Thomas, Am- wire through a cork and, after forcing
herstburg, Ont. this tightly into the end of the test
tube, covering it with sealing wax.
A Compensating Siphon To use, connect the terminals to the
The homemade siphon shown in the
sketch consists of two rubber corks
A Simple Pocket Indicator for Finding the Negative
and a glass tube with a rubber hose Wire in Battery Cable Lines
connected to it. The cork A is used
battery lines, and the end of the wire in
as a bearing and support on the edge
the solution giving off bubbles is the
of the tank. The position of the cork
B on the tube determines the distance
—
negative wire. Contributed by H. S.
Parker, Brooklyn, N. Y.
that the mouth of the tube will be un-
der the surface of the liquid, also to
Small Steam-Engine Cylinders Made
some extent the sensitiveness of the
apparatus. However, the principle of
from Seamless Brass Tubing
the device is the buoyant effect of the In making a small steam engine it
was desired to use seamless brass tub-
ing for the cylinders. To have them
exactly alike a piece of tubing of the
right size and of sufficient length for
both cylinders was fitted on a wood
mandrel. A, and the ends trued up in a
The End of the Pipe is Kept Just under the Surface
of the Liquid at all Times lathe. As these cylinders were to fit
into holes bored in a steel bedplate, it
water and the lever action of the ruli-
was necessary to have a flange at one
ber tube which is attached.
The one that I made had a tube 14
end. A
groove was turned in the tub-
ing B in the center, and as a final oper-
in. long, and the cork B was 1^/^ in.
ation a parting tool was used on the
in diameter, 1 in. thick, and weighed
about '/ii of a pound. The practical
application of this siphon will be found m
in sieve tests where it is necessary to
collect the residue on the bottom of
the tank while drawing off the liquid
at the surface, also in oil-storage tanks A Wood Mandrel Used to Face the Ends and Turn
Flanges on Tubing for Cylinders
where it is not wished to disturb the
dirt or other residue which collects on line CD. This resulted in a pair of
the bottom of the tank. — Contributed cylinders flanged to fit the bedplate.
by James Hemphill, Jr., Duquesne, — Contributed by Harry F. Lowe,
Pennsylvania. Washington, D. C.
397
in.in diameter. Make a small horse- This piece is not fastened to the shaft
shoe magnet from a piece of the very until some of the other parts are com-
best steel ol)taina))Ie, and magnetize it pleted.
to as high a strength as possible. This The spool upon which the winding
magnet is made of a piece of steel, Vs is tobe placed is made as follows:
in. thick, about % in. in breadth, and Procure a piece of very soft wrought
of such length that the overall length- iron, 114 in. long and 14 in- i" diam-
wise dimension of the completed mag- eter, to form the core. The ends of
net will be about 1% in. and the dis- the spool are made of thin brass and
tance between the inside edges of the are dimensioned as shown in Fig. 2,
ends a little greater than 14 in. Fasten at B and C. The piece shown at B
the completed magnet to the base F is to form the lower end of the spool,
by means of two or three straps, made and is bent at right angles along the
from some thin brass, and small ma- dotted line. The two holes at the lower
chine or wood screws. edge are for attaching the end of the
Then cut from some iV-in. sheet spool to the fiber base. The piece shown
brass a piece having the general ap- at C forms the upper end of the spool
pearance and dimensions shown at A, and at the same time a back upon
Fig. 2. Bend the ends of this piece which the scale of the instrument is
over at right angles to the center por- mounted. The holes in the lower edge
tion along the dotted lines. Drill the are threaded for small machine screws,
hole at the upper end and thread it as it will be necessary to fasten this
for a -fiT-iii- machine screw. By means piece to the base by means of screws
of a pointed drill, make a small recess that pass through the base from the
at the lower end directly opposite the under side, as shown in Fig. 1. Bend
first hole. This small recess is to form the upper and lower portion of the
the lower bearing for the shaft sup- piece over at right angles to the center
porting the moving system, while a portion along the dotted lines. Make
small recess cut centrally in the end of sure that the large hole in the center
a screw, mounted in the upper hole, of each end piece is of such size that
willform the upper bearing. The screw it will fit very tight on the end of the
placed in the upper hole need be only wrought-iron core. Force the end
about ^B in. long. The holes in the pieces onto the ends of the core a short
two wings are for mounting this piece distance, say, in., and hammer down
-j',;
upon the fiber base, as shown in Fig. 1. the edges of the core so that the end
The shaft for supporting the moving pieces cannot be easily removed. In
system is made of a piece of a hatpin. fastening the ends to the core be sure
It is about If in. long and its ends are that the parts that are to rest upon the
pointed so that they will turn freely base are parallel with each other and
in the bearings provided for them. extend in opposite directions also that
;
The armature is cut from a piece the ends are at right angles to the
of iG-in. sheet steel. It is made about core. Then insulate the inner portions
% in. long, -/jj in. wide at the center, of the completed spool with several
tapering to % in. at the ends. A hole thicknesses of onion-skin paper, or any
is drilled in its center so that it may good-quality, thin writing paper, and
be forced onto the shaft. It is mounted shellac. The winding will be described
so that its lower surface comes about later.
14 in. from the lower end of the shaft. Mount the spool and support for the
Then cut from some very thin brass bearings upon the base so that they
a piece, that is to form the needle, 14 occupy the positions, relative to each
in. wide at one end and tapered to a other, indicated in Fig. 1. A paper
point at the other, the total length scale is then mounted upon the brass
being about 3 in. Drill a hole in the base provided for it by means of some
large end of thi.s piece, the same size thin shellac. The upper and lower lines
as the shaft and V2 'n. from the end. for the scale can now be drawn upon
399
the paper, using the center of the screw and well insulated from each other and
at the lower end of the needle as a from the case, to serve as terminals for
center. These lines are best placed the instrument.
about Vs in. apart and not nearer the The instrument is now complete
edge of the base than 14 inches. with exception of the winding.
the
The needle is bent over at right Since this is to be a voltmeter and it
angles y% '"• from the center of the
shaft. Another right-angle bend in the
needle is then made so that the pointed
end will be about jV in. above the sur-
face of the scale when the large end
of the needle is fastened to the shaft
% in. from the upper end of the latter.
Turn the needle on the shaft so that
the pointer is at the left end of the
scale when the moving system is at
rest. The shaft must be exactly verti-
cal when this adjustment is made. Cut Details of the Supports for the Coil and for the
Needle, or Pointer, Shaft
the end of the needle down until its
end is midway between the two scale is always desirable that a voltmeter
lines. Solder the needle to the shaft, take as small a current as possible, the
and then place a sufficient quantity of winding must consist of a relatively
solder on the broad end to balance the large number of turns of small wire,
system perfectly and allow it to come each turn carrying a small current.
to rest in any position when the arma-
'
The difference in the construction of
ture B is not influenced by any mag- different instruments necessitates that
netic field. their winding contain a different num-
A containing case for the instrument ber of turns in order that a given volt-
may be made as follows: Make a cyl- age may produce a full-scale deflection.
inder from some thin sheet brass, hav- A little experimenting with different
ing exactly the same inside diameter windings is the easiest means of de-
as the base, and a height a little greater termining the proper size of wire and
than the vertical distance from the number of turns to meet individual
lower surface of the base to the upper requirements. After adjusting the
surface of the needle. Also a disk winding so that the maximum voltage
from some thin sheet brass, having a it is desired to measure produces a
diameter Vs in. greater than the outside full-scale deflection, the scale is cali-
diameter of the cylinder. Round ofT brated by marking the positions of the
the edges of this disk and cut a curved needle in accordance with those of the
slot in it directly over the scale, about needle of a standard instrument con-
% in. wide and of the same length and nected in parallel with it. In marking
form as the scale. Solder the disk to the scale of an ammeter, connect the
one end of the cylinder, placing the instruments in series. Remember that
solder all on the inside. To prevent if the instrument is to be used as an
moisture from entering the case, fasten ammeter, it must have as low a re-
a piece of thin glass on the under side sistance as possible and that to prevent
of the slot in the disk by means of some undue heating, the wire must have
shellac and several pieces of brass sol- ample cross section.
dered to the disk and bent down onto If difficulty is experienced due to the
the glass. The case can now be fas- continuous vibration of the needle,
tened to the base by means of several although the current be practically
screws, passing through its lower end constant, this trouble can be greatly
into the edge of the base. Two small reduced by mounting a paper wind
binding posts are mounted on the out- vane on the moving system, which
side of the case, about 90 deg. apart will tend to dampen its movement.
400
Falling Leaves in a Nature Scene on the head, foot or side rail of the bed
or used, as shown, in a sleeping car. It
Use an ordinary pasteboard box, a provides a place to keep the slippers,
shoe box or lartjer, and cut out one gown and other necessities, and can
end. Fasten the box to the ceiling by be rolled up and put in a bag. Con- —
tributed by Harriette I. Lockwood,
Philadelphia, Pa.
A Paper Perforator
In an emergency an ordinary hack-
saw blade may be made to serve very
acceptably as a paper perforator. The
toothed edge is applied to the paper
and the reverse edge tapped with a mal-
let or hammer. A considerable number
The Box Prepared to Fasten on the Ceiling
as It is
for Dropping the Leaves of sheets may be perforated at one
time, depending of course on the thick-
means of pasteboard strips. One end ness and softness of the paper.
of these strips is pasted on the bot-
tom of the box and the other ends Turning Brass Rings
tacked to the ceiling. Fit a piece of
Occasionally an amateur has need
board, V2 in. thick, into the open end
of brass rings of round cross section,
of the box so that it will slide easily
back and forth on the inside. Place and if their construction is not under-
stood, the task
this slide in the back of the box, attach
is a difficult one.
a string to it and run this through
If a piece of
double tacks placed in the ceiling and
brass tubing, an
to the side wings.
old bushing or a
Have the box almost full of autumn
cored piece is at
leaves, and when the slide is pulled
hand, a part of
slowlv l)y the operator, they will be
the work is al-
pushed, one or two at a time, out of
ready done. If not, a piece of stock
the open end, and will drift down to
with large enough outside diameter
the stage as" naturally as if falling from
should be chucked in the lathe and
trees, making quite a realistic scene.
drilled out with the right size of drill.
Contrilnited by Miss S. E. Jocelyn,
New Haven, Conn. A tin or pasteboard template should
be prepared the size of the ring sec-
tion —a half circle is best, and it is
Home or Traveling Utility Bed Pocket easiest made by drilling a hole in the
The pocket is made of cretonne with tin and cutting it in two. An inside
boring tool and a turning tool are
wire hooks attached on the upper edge.
necessary. It is preferable to shape
the inside first, cutting it out roughly
and checking up with the template.
The amount of inside cutting is shown
in the drawing. A hard scraper and
emery cloth maj' be used for smooth-
ing and polishing.
Turn and polish outside and
the
finally turn as far down on the inner
Various Pockets for the Change Garments tor Use quarter as can be done without cutting
at Home or in Traveling
ofif the finish, then polish and cut it
The compartments are arranged as ofif. It only requires a little filing to
needs may require. It can be hooked smooth up the rim of rough metal left.
The Iilectric Globes, as They Light beneath the Spray. Illuminate the Top, and the Light Follows
the Streams of Water So That They Appear Like Streams of Light
An Electric Fountain
By WALTER P. BUTLER
To make the grounds as attractive —
A small battery motor I had one
as possible for a lawn party given one on hand and did not need to purchase
night, I constructed an electric foun- —
one was fastened to one side of the
tain which an
at first appeared to be box so that its pulley was in line with
expensive proposition, but when com- the pulley on the lower surface of the
pleted the desired eiTect was produced frame. The batteries to run the motor
without any expense whatever, as I were placed in the corner of the box,
had the things used in its construction where the evolving frame would not
i
lugs into the cylinder. These pieces The three coils are wound in the same
of brass are equally spaced around the direction about their respective cores
cylinder so that all the lugs, not and each winding is started at the
turned down, project in the same direc- center of the armature with 2 or 3 in.
of wire extending out toward the com-
mutator. The outside end of each
winding will terminate at the end of
the coil toward the center of the arma-
ture, if an even numljer of layers is
wound on, and is securely fastened by
means of two or three turns of heavy
thread. The inside end of one coil is
then connected to the outside end of
the next one, and so on. These con-
nections can be easily made, and at
the same time the proper connections
made to the commutator, by cutting
Diagram of the Winding on the Armature and
tlie inside end of one coil and the out-
Detail of the Field Laminations
side end of the next so that they will
tion. Now place a nut on the end of the reach the lug on the nearest segment
shaft that extends the greatest distance of the commutator, with about 14 in.
through the armature, so that its out- to spare, then removing the insulation
side surface is i/o in. from the surface from each for about Vs in. and solder-
of the end of the armature core next ing them both to the same lug. The
to it, and solder the nut to the shaft. arrangement of the winding is shown
Place the commutator on the shaft so at A, Fig. 2. Connect all of the coils
that the projections on the pieces of and segments in this manner, and the
brass are toward the armature core armature of the motor is complete.
and the spaces between the ends of the The field or frame of the machine is
pieces occupy the position relative to made from a number of laminations
the cores, shown at A, Fig. 2. Another whose dimensions correspond to those
nut is then placed on the shaft and given in B, Fig. 2. As many lamina-
drawn up tight against the cylinder. tions are used in the construction of
The proper spacing of the various parts the frame as the number of pieces in
on the shaft of the machine is shown the armature, if iron of the same thick-
at D, Fig. 1. Another small nut is ness is used. Four of the laminations
. placed on the end of the shaft, away have extensions at their lower corners
from the commutator, so that its out- to correspond to the parts shown by
side surface is i/o in. from the surface the dotted lines in B, Fig. 2. Place
of the end of the armature core. all of these laminations in a pile and
The threads on that part of the shaft clamp them rigidly together, then drill
extending beyond the last nut on each the four holes, indicated by the letters
end are now filed ofif, which can be C, D, E and F, with a I'V-in. drill. Two
easily done by placing the shaft be- of the pieces with the extensions on
tween the centers of a lathe and re- them are placed in the bottom of the
volving it quite rapidly, the file being pile and the other two on top.
applied to the parts that are to be cut Place a /o-in. bolt through each of
down. the lower holes and draw up the nuts
Obtain a small quantity of No. 22 on them tight. Procure two pieces of
gauge single-cotton-covered copper f'lj-in. rod, fi/'n in. long, and thread each
wire and wind four layers on each of end for a distance of i/^ in. Get 8 nuts
the three legs, or poles, of the arma- for these rods, about Vs in. thick and
ture core, insulating the layers from ^/fi i'l- across the face, if
possible. Both
each other and the entire winding from sides of these nuts are filed down flat.
the core by means of paper and shellac. Put the threaded rods through the two
405
upper holes in the field frame and are mounted at the same time as the
place a nut on each end and draw them brushes, and are electrically connected
tight, leaving an equal length of rod to the brushes, thus affording an easy
protruding from each side. means of making a connection to the
Obtain two pieces of %-in. brass, %
in. wide, one 4% in. long and the other
5% in. long. Bend these pieces into -3i- -3* -
tor side of the frame. A small pulley may be made and at-
The brushes for the machine are tached to the armature shaft so that
made from some thin sheet copper or the motor may be used in driving va-
brass, and are shaped and dimensioned rious kinds of toys.
approximately as shown at B, Fig. 3.
Two pieces of hard rubber, or fiber, %
in. square and %
in. long, serve as Cooler for Milk and Butter
mountings for the brushes. These An
earthen jar or crock, with a cover,
pieces of insulation are mounted in the set in abox con-
corners of the armature support, at the taining moist
commutator end, by means of two sand will keep
small screws in each. Mount the butter and milk
brushes on these pieces so that their in hot weather
free ends bear on the commutator ex- better than a re-
actly opposite each other. One brush frigerator. The
is mounted on the upper end of its sand must be
support and the other brush on the kept moist at all
lower end of its support. This is shown times. —Edwin
at C, Fig. 3. Two small binding posts Bachman, Jr., Fullerton, Pa.
J.
406
each side of the disks. A better way sheet metal, 191/2 i"- wide and long
of mounting these disks would be by enough to reach from one outside disk
small machine screws that enter to the other. Bend this into a cylinder
threaded holes in the ends of the rods. and fasten it to the lugs on the disks
These last disks are not absolutely nec- by means of small screws or bolts.
essary, but they will add some to the The legs may be made of Vs-in. strap
appearance o f iron, % in. wide, bent into the form
Having occasion to saw some short Desiring to make a small piston for
pieces of molding, I experienced con- a model engine and not caring to make
siderable trouble in holding them a pattern and send it away to have a
casting made, I thought of using or-
dinary pipe caps, these being both in-
expensive and of a quality adapted to
machining.
The cylinder bore was V^ in. in
diameter, so I secured a standard pipe
A Block Holding Molding,
for cap for li/4-in. pipe which gave an
Wood, While
or Strips of outside diameter of about 1% in. The
Sawing Small Pieces from Them
cap, not having sufficient depth for
without a vise until I made a block, holding in a chuck, was screwed on
as shown in the sketch. This answered a short piece of pipe and then trued in
the purpose as well as a vise. The the lathe chuck. The outside surface
block is not fastened in any manner, was turned to a diameter of IV2 in->
but is simply pushed against the edge then removed from the pipe, reversed
of the bench or table and held with the and chucked again, and the threads
hand. It should be about 9 in. wide bored out to reduce the walls to in. %
and 1long, with strips 2 in. thick
ft. This made an excellent piston for a
at each edge. —
Contributed by W. F. single-acting engine. —
Contributed by
Brodnax, Jr., Bethlehem, Pa. Harry F. Lowe, Washington, D. C.
409
alarm is shown in Fig. 1. A switch, Connections and Wiring Diagram Showing an Open-
Circuit Fire and Burglar Alarm
A, is placed in circuit so that the alarm
may be disconnected during the day low a person to enter, before the alarm
and the opening and closing of doors is sounded.
and windows will not operate the bell. An alarm switch, identical with that
It is best not to place a switch in the just described for the door, should be
fire-alarm circuit as this circuit should mounted in the upper part of the win-
be in an operating condition at all dow frame to take care of the upper
times. sash. This alarm switch may be lo-
The alarm switch controlled by the cated low enough to permit the window
window consists of a narrow metal to be lowered for the purpose of venti-
plate, B, and a spring, C, mounted in lation without sounding the alarm.
a recess cut in the side of the window The wires for these various alarm
frame. The spring C is bent into switches should be run as near com-
such a form that its upper end is forced pletely concealed as possible to prevent
into contact with the plate B, when the them being tampered with by curious
window is raised past the outwardly parties, who may unintentionally break
projecting part of the spring C, and one of the conductors and thus make
the bell circuit is thus closed. The some part of the system inoperative.
position of the alarm switch can be It might be best to test the system
adjusted so that the window may be occasionally, to make sure all switches
opened a sufficient distance to permit are in operating condition.
the necessary ventilation but not allow The fire-alarm switch consists of
a burglar to enter. two springs that are held from contact
The alarm switch controlled by the with each other by means of a thin
door is arranged in a different manner. cord. This switch is placed in the lo-
In this case the free end of the spring cation to be protected, or wherever a
D is held away from contact with the fire is most likely to break out, such
spring E by the edge of the door, as over the furnace, in the coal bin,
which forces the spring D back into etc. When the cord is destroyed the
the recess cut in the door jamb. When springs make contact and the alarm is
the door is opened the spring E is sounded. A metal having a very low
permitted to move out and come into melting temperature may be used in-
contact with the spring or plate E, stead of the cord, and the alarm will
412
be sounded when the temperature ex- cuit with a closed-circuit battery and
ceeds a certain amount and the actual relay or drop. The drop or relay con-
occurrence of a fire thus prevented. In trols a local circuit composed of an
some cases, the fire-alarm switch may open-circuit battery and an ordinary
be completely destroyed and the alarm vibrating bell.
The operation of a drop on a closed
circuit is a little different from its op-
eration on a normally open circuit.
The drop for the closed circuit must
be so constructed that its latch holds
the shutter in a vertical position when
there is a current in the drop winding,
but allows it to fall as soon as the drop
Fig. 2 circuit is opened.
Circuit Equipped with Drop to Ring the Bell An
ordinary telegraph relay may be
in Case the Switch is Destroyed
used connection with the closed-cir-
in
circuit will then be opened and the bell cuit alarm. The connections to the
will cease ringing. To prevent this relay are such that the bell circuit
trouble a small electric drop may be is normally open and remains so un-
placed in the circuit, the arrangement til the armature of the relay is re-
being similar to that shown in Fig. 3. leased, which does not occur until the
When the shutter of the drop falls, due circuit of which its winding is a part
to the closing of the alarm circuit, there is opened at one of the alarm springs.
is second circuit closed, and this
a A special switch, A, and resistance,
second circuit remains closed until the B, are shown connected in circuit in
shutter restored
is to its vertical or Fig. 3, the object of which is as follows :
nr^/1 RELAY
position for the switch.
The fire-alarm switch for this type
/
i^~]\
m of signal may be made from a narrow
piece of tin foil, or some metal having
purchased at any up-to-date electrical fastened to the rear tube of the frame
supply house, but their construction with hooks and eyes so that it can be
and operation is so simple that they turned with a handle at the top, or
may be easily made by almost anyone.
A detailed description of the construc-
tion of the various parts of the above
circuits will not be given here, but such
details can be safely left to the in-
genuity of the person installing the
system.
It is easily seen from the above de-
scription that a burglar who might dis-
cover that a house was wired for alarm
would be greatly perplexed to know
what to do, for the very thing that
would prevent one kind of alarm from
ringing would cause the other to ring. The Rear Fork of a Bicycle with Its P. rts
Constitutes the Main Propeller Attachment
Removing a Rear Bicycle Sprocket with ropes run to a wheel. The illus-
tration shows the connection of the
If a bicycle rider desires to remove
the rear sprocket for changing the
device to a boat. Contributed by —
Berge Lion, Fresno, Cal.
gear, or for any other reason, and there
is no large pipe wrench at hand, a
piece of tube or pipe, as shown in the An Attached Back for a Photographic
Printing Frame
In using the ordinary photographic
printing frame with a spring-pressure
back, the back must be entirely re-
moved from the frame to
put in the paper, and as
The Piece of Pipe this operation is carried
Gives a Leverage Equal to
on in a dim light, the
That of a Large Pipe Wrench
)ack is often mislaid,
sketch, can be used as a lever. Fasten causing no little incon-
one end of the chain in one end of the venience and delay. To
pipe with a wedge and place the other do awav with this an-
end of the pipe on a sprocket. The f0>
chain then placed over the sprockets
is
and a leverage equal to any pipe
—
wrench is secured. Contributed by
Jno. V. Loeffler, Evansville, Ind.
washer, and screw will not draw it laid or there are none at hand, the
tightly into place. holes may be cut in the manner shown
To remedy this trouble, file off a in the sketch. Place a piece of wood,
portion of the plug on the line AA and having a width equal to the length of
also file off a sufficient amount of the the buttonhole, on the table and lay the
screw on the line BB. When the plug cloth over it in the line where the holes
is replaced and the washer and screw are required, then draw a sharp knife
drawn up, the stop cock will be as
—
good as a new one. Contributed by
James M. Kane, Doylestown, Pa.
easily formed of sheet metal in any across the cloth on the wood where the
desired material. The clips are shaped holes are marked. This will cut the
as shown at A in the sketch. Any cloth neatly and accurately. Contrib- —
uted by A. S. Thomas, Gordon, Can.
ings into which the handles of the tools sketch. In this manner almost any
are pressed. Before fastening the clips amount of pressure can be applied by
they should be spaced for the widths
of the handles. —
Contributed by F. H.
Tillotson, Sycamore, 111.
Removing Perspiration Stains from The Pressure of One File Against the Other Prevents
the Rod from Bending
Delicate Cloth
the stain in the cloth over some
Lay squeezing the files together without
blotting paper, and sponge the cloth
danger of bending the rod. Contrib- —
with a grain-alcohol and ether solution, uted by J. F. ThoU, Detroit, Mich.
which should be made by mixing equal
portions of each. The sponging should CYoung sleepwalkers may be cured if
be quite vigorous and kept up until the watched and given a good switching
cloth is dry, then the spot should be until they are wide awake.
415
A D'Arsonval Galvanometer
Agalvanometer in which the mov- A and B, in this piece as shown in the
This second piece is mounted
ing part of the instrument is a perma- sketch.
between the poles of the magnet, as
nent magnet controlled by the action
of the earth's magnetic field and the
magnetic effect of a current in a coil of
I
wire, that usually surrounds the mag-
net, has the great disadvantage of hav-
ing its indications changed, although
the current itself may remain constant,
due to a change in the strength of
a
tid-
is about level with the ends of the way, two binding posts are mounted on
magnet. Fasten, back of this open- the bracket, and connected to the two
ing, a piece of thin glass with four on the galvanometer. In this way the
small screws whose heads rest upon galvanometer will not be disturbed
the edge of the glass. The interior when making connections.
of this case and all the parts should The suspension is made as follows
be given a coat of lampblack mixed Take a piece of small copper wire and
with a little vinegar. Two small bind- roll it out flat. Solder one end of a
ing posts, O and P, are mounted on piece of this wire in the hole in the
the upper end of the piece N and con- piece of brass, with the mirror mount-
nected to the upper and lower sup- ed on it. Fasten a piece of the same
ports for the suspension of the coil. wire to the lower brass piece, attached
This galvanometer will work best, to the coil. The upper piece of wire is
of course, when it is in an exactly ver- then clamped in the end of the screw
tical position and the following simple A, Fig. 6, so that the coil hangs per-
device, when attached to it, will allow fectly free about the iron core. The
it to assume this position independent lower piece of wire is bent around a
of the level of the surface its base may small rod several times and its end
rest upon. Cut from some Vs-'m. brass fastened in the slot in the lower screw.
two pieces, Y^ in. wide and 21/2 in. The deflection of the instrument is
long. Drill a i/4-in. hole in the center read by causing a beam of light from a
of each end of them, i/4 in. from the lamp or candle to be reflected from the
end, and a V^-in. hole through the cen- mirror to a scale located in front of the
ter of each. Bend these pieces to a %- instrument. If the light from the lamp
in. radius. Cut from some %-in. hard is allowed to shine through a small slit
wood a block, ly^ in. square. Fasten in a piece of dark paper, there will be
the two pieces of brass to the wooden a streak of light reflected upon the
block with i/s-in. screws, as shown in scale, instead of a spot.
Fig. 8. One of these pieces is fastened To use this instrument in measuring
to the upper end of the piece N, Fig. 1, larger currents than it will safely
so that the galvanometer will hang ver- carry, connect it in parallel with an-
tically. The other piece is fastened to other resistance which will carry the
a bracket from which the galvanome- larger part of the total current. The
ter is suspended. A
suitable bracket galvanometer can be calibrated with
for this purpose can be easily made. this resistance, which is known as a
When the galvanometer is hung in this shunt.
White lead, thick shellac, and pastes A holder, as well as a tray, for safety-
that are used occasionally may be pre- matches can be made from any ordi-
served by laying a piece of leather over nary tobacco can. The metal on one
the exposed surface. When these ma-
terials are kept in cans, cut a piece of
leather from the upper of a heavy boot
of such a size that it will drop freely
into the container. Form a handle on 1" :
and then adding a few drops of sul- back. Lay three or four sheets of the
phuric acid. Immerse the plate in the lead from tea packages on the back of
solution as shown in Fig. 2 and con- the shell and heat it over a spirit
nect with the zinc pole of the battery. lamp or on the stove until the lead
Put a piece of pure copper in on the melts and runs into the crevices on the
opposite side of the jar and connect back of the copper, thus making it
with the carbon pole of the battery, solid and suitable for mounting.
using care in each case to keep the Mount as shown in Fig. 3 with small
connection of the wire and the upper brass screws and after polishing the
part of the plate above the surface. surface to remove dirt, etc., the stamp
One or two dry cells will be sufficient. is ready for use.
If the current is right, the deposit on An ordinary stamp pad will do for
the waxed plate will be a flesh pink; inking, but the best ink to use is
if too strong, it will be a dirty brick printer'sslightly thinned, as the or-
color and the plate will have to be dinary rubber stamp ink is not suit-
washed and the current reduced. able for a metal stamp. —
Contributed
When the desired thickness of metal by S. V. Cooke, Hamilton, Ont.
420
Homemade Skis
Pattern for Making a Bottle Cover of Leather or Not having a bent board suitable for
Rubiaer for Bottles Carried in the Pocket
a pair of skis, I proceeded to make the
The sketch shows how to cut the pat- skis in the following manner: A
tern so that it will tit a square bottle. cheese box was procured and two
The bottle is placed on the leather, or pieces cut out of the side, each 15 in.
a piece of paper as a pattern, and the long and 3 in. wide. These were used
outlines marked upon it. The leather for the upturned ends and two boards.
or paper is then folded over four times
and cut out as shown. This cover
The Curved Part of the Runner
will prevent the glass from being scat- IS Made from Pieces Cut
runners. A
notch, 4 in. long and Ys in.
deep, was cut in one end of each board
Boring a Long Hole to receive one end of the thin curved
pieces cut from the cheese box, which
The usual method of boring a hole were fastened with screws. The upper
through a piece of wood longer than end of each thin piece was cut to a
the bit is to bore from each end. point.
To make the hole
A piece for the foot, 10 in. long and
straight by this
3 in. wide, with a notch 1 in. wide and
method, split the
1/4 in. deep, was fastened in the center
wood or saw it in
of the runner. A strap is run through
halves, then make a
the notch for holding the ski to the
knife kerf in both
pieces on a center
foot. — Contributed by Henry Meuse,
Reading: Mass.
line of the hole and
glue the pieces together. The spur of
the bit will follow the kerf from either GTo remove iron rust or ink stains
end, and the result will be a meeting from use a warm solution of
cloth,
of the holes, almost perfectly in the oxalic acid with a few crystals of citric
center. — Contributed by Ernest J. acid added. Repeat the washings until
Dickert, Niagara Falls, N. Y. the stain is removed.
421
The containing vessel for the cell a mixture of equal parts sand and fine
should be made from sheet zinc. It sawdust and then, over this, a layer
should be cylindrical in form, approxi- of pitch, which acts as a seal for the
mately 2V2 in. in diameter and 6 in. cell. A layer of blotting paper should
long. This vessel is to form the nega-
tive terminal of the cell and a suitable / SEALING
COMPOUND
connecting device, similar to the one jJjTJl
bon rod from its central position. The The Handle is Made of a Piece of
AVire and a Package Grip
vessel should be filled with the paste
to within about %
in. of the top. The The hose nozzle can be easily carried
lower end of the carbon rod should not with the handle, which will keep the
be nearer the bottom of the vessel than —
hand dry. Contributed by F. G. Mar-
% in. Over the top of the paste place bach, Cleveland, O.
422
Guide for Cutting Mortises bolic acid and the roost set in place.
Both ends of each roost are fixed in the
After spending considerable time in same way. This makes it impossible
cutting one mortise in a piece to make for any insects to get on the roost.
the settee de- Contributed by Rudolph Netzeband,
scribed in a re- St. Louis, Mo.
cent issue of
Popular Mechan-
ics Magazine, I
To Prevent Shade Rollers from
from the under side and through the ing manner: Re-
center of the can bottom, so that about move the inner
11/4 in. projected above the latter. hub by unscrew-
The can cover was perforated in the ing the cones
center and a hole, about y^ in. deep, and insert a
was drilled in the roost so that the end piece of clock
of the nail would easily slip into it. spring, about the
The bottom of the can was filled with same width as
a mixture of kerosene, vaseline and car- the brake shell and almost as long as
433
its inside periphery. Replace the parts a 1-in. strip and drill holes to receive
and the repair will render the brake nails or pieces of wire from the back,
quite as efficient as a new one. The through the edge, and projecting about
spring serves as a braking surface for
the expanding steel shoes of the brake.
— Contributed by Heber H. Clewett,
Pomona, Cal.
The Rake is so
Constructed That It can
Flypaper Holder be Taken Apart for Packing
The ordinary method of using sticky 4 in. The strip is then replaced and
flypaper is quite annoying, as it can- fastened with screws. The handle can
not be easily removed from anything be cut from the blade and jointed by
that may come in contact with its using tubing. This makes it handy to
sticky surface. The best way to avoid
this trouble is to make a holder for the
take apart and pack. Contributed by —
L. W. Pedrose, Seattle, Wash.
paper, and one can be constructed of a
piece of wire and a metal cover taken
from a jelly glass. The wire is threaded To Harden Small Blocks of Wood
at one end on which the cover is
Small bliicks of wood can be hard-
o ened so that they will not split so easily
when small screws are inserted by boil-
ing them in olive oil for about 10 min-
utes. The olive oil can be kept for
future use. If it is desired to water-
proof the blocks after hardening them,
they should be placed in melted par-
affin and allowed to cool in the solution.
This gives the block of wood a good
The Paper, Held in an Upright Position, will Catch appearance and makes it nonabrasive
More Flies Than If Placed Flat and waterproof.
clamped between two nuts. The upper
end of the wire is shaped into a hook
Homemade Clothesline Reel
for hanging it wherever desired. The
paper is rolled with the sticky side It is much
better to make a small
out and tied with strings, then slipped reel, likethe one shown, for a clothes-
over the wire and set into the inverted line than to wind the line on the arm,
cover. The cover prevents any of the the usual meth-
sticky substance from dripping onto od of getting it
the floor and the wire holds it from be- into shape for
ing blown about the room. Contrib- — putting away.
uted by Percy de Romtra, Cape May The reel con-
Point, N. J. s i s t s of two
strips of wood,
A Fish Rake 16 in.
wide and y^ in.
long, 3 in.
-^l
The fish rake can be made in any thick. These are
size, for minnows or salmon, but it is joined together
especially adapted for fish that run in with two pieces of broom handle, al-
schools, like smelt, herring and min- lowing a space of 9 in. between the
nows. Procure a piece of wood, 7 ft. sides and an extending handle of 5 in.
long, 4 in. wide and %
'i- thick, and on opposite sides, as shown. Contrib- —
make a handle 3 ft. long on one end. uted by Bert Longabaugh, Davenport,
Dress the other end to an edge, rip ofif Iowa.
424
Gear-Cutting Machine
Perhaps the last thing that would be up to by the screw G, acting
it
shape is desired for the tooth. The will then retain some of their curling
best shape for any particular purpose tendency, so that by taking one end in
can be found by reference to a book one hand and gradually lowering the
on gears.
This cutter is adapted, of course,
only to the softer metals. For experi-
mental purposes a blank cast in type
metal is excellent and will last as long
probably as required. The mechanism
here described will cut brass perfectly
well and a gear made of this more dur-
able metal will answer for a finished
construction. Type-metal blanks com-
mend themselves because they are so
easily cast, any flame which will melt
solder being sufficient, and the molds,
of wood, plaster of Paris or any easily
worked material, being quickly con-
structed. —
Contributed by C. W. Nie- Developing Film
man. New York City.
film into the dish of developer and then
raising it out of the dish, it will be
A Potato Peeler found that the film will roll and unroll
The guard made of a piece of wire
is quite readily, much as one would let
about 1 in. shorter than the blade of out or wind in a reel. This method
an ordinary table knife. The ends of will result in quicker development, be-
the wire are turned into a coil to re- cause the roll is nearly always im-
mersed in developer. The method
necessitates using only one hand, mak-
ing it possible to develop a second
Guard Made of Wire strip at the same time with the other.
The illustration shows quite clearly
semble a coil spring with coils close
just how the film will behave.
together. Allow enough wire to pro-
ject on one end to be flattened and
pointed for an eye extractor.
When this device is placed on the A Shoe Hanger
knife, the contrivance works on the
An inexpensive shoe hanger can be
same principle as a spokeshave. The made of a strip of tin, about 1/2
setting peels the potato without
in- wide
first
and as long as the space will permit.
an}' appreciable waste, the other setting
Cut notches along one edge and bend
may be as desired for cutting slices.
the tin and tack or screw
it on a strip
Contributed by H. W. Ravens, Seattle,
Washington.
How to Make a Small Vertical Drill etc., to all of which it gives that work-
manlike appearance that can only be
A small hand drill with a three-jaw had when things are polished with a
chuck that will take the smallest drill true rotary motion. —
Contri1:)Uted by
can be purchased John D. Adams, Phoenix, Ariz.
very reasonably.
For ordinary
work these drills Decorating Candles
do very well, but
for comparative- Candles can be easily decorated by
ly deep holes, or the following method The designs
:
As the greater part of the energy re- but before doing so lay it on top of
quired for drilling metal by hand is the box to determine where the center
used for feeding the drill, I made what of the square space will come, and
I term a drill box in which the brace bore a hole, large enough for the round
is held perfectly true and pressure is
applied by a weight. The feed can
be changed for the different metals
and sizes of drills, also for drilling the
hard outside of castings and relieving
the drill for the softer body. The con-
stant feed will cause the drill to turn
out a long chip, and a number of holes
may be drilled to a uniform depth by
using the same feed and counting the
turns of the brace handle.
To build the box, first find the di-
mensions of the brace, as shown in
F1G.2
Fig. 1 the diameter of the head A, the
:
the work. Make the inside width twice 2 in. over the right and 10 in. over
the distance C, plus 6 in. for clearance the left side of the box top, and when
and the inside depth the length C, plus in this position, locate the hole bored
one-half of the dimension A, plus 3 in. for the round stick and bore a hole in
Use material % in- thick and nail the the square stick, Vs in. deep, to coin-
parts together to form a rectangular cide with it. Place the head of the
frame. Cut a piece of broomstick as brace in the guide and push it up until
long as the dimension B, and two it touches the top of the box and block
pieces of wood as long as the inside it up in this position, then drop the
width of the box and as wide as the round stick through the hole and rest
dimension B. Cut two pieces yV in. it on the head of the brace. Place the
longer than the dimension A and as socket in the lever over the top of the
wide as the length B. Nail these lat- round stick. Make a loop, 8 in. long,
ter pieces together as shown in Fig. 2, of heavy wire and hang it over the
leaving a square space in the center. right end of the lever and mark the
This frame is to be nailed inside of the box at the lower end of the loop. Turn
top of tee box flush with the front, in a large screw V2 in. below this mark
428
Homemade Ellipsograph
By CHELSEA CURTIS FRASER
An efficient ellipsograph is the only- swivel head. Sheet brass plates, and D
device that will make true ellipses of E, are cut from t^e-in. stock and at-
various sizes quickly, and such a ma- tached to the top of the piece A with
chine is in demand on some classes ot screws. The plates F and G are of the
work in a drafting room. Its cost, same material and fastened in a like
however, is prohibitive where only few manner to the upper surface of the
ellipses are to be drawn, but a person piece B. All plates project slightly
handy with tools can make an appa- where they touch the groove borders,
ratus that will do the work as well as as shown. This is to provide a bearing
the most expensive instrument. for the projections on the sliding parts
The completed ellipsograph, herein against metal instead of wood. A piece
described, will appear as shown in Fig. of thin celluloid or brass plate, K, is
1. It consists of two main parts, the inserted in the bottom side of the base
base and the arm. The former is a C so that the point will be exactly in
hardwood piece, A, Fig. 2, to the side line with the center groove J, and ex-
center of which is attached another tend outward i/s i"- This point indi-
hardwood piece, B. This latter piece cates the center of all ellipses to be
may be dovetailed into A, but an or- drawn. In the bottom of the base C,
dinary butt joint will suffice, as a one- at each end, drive an ordinary pin and
piece base, C, also of hard wood, is cut it off so that a part of it will pro-
glued to the bottom surfaces of the ject beyond the surface of the wood.
pieces A
and B, thus securely holding These extending ends are pointed with
them together. Before gluing, how- a file, and serve to keep the instrument
ever, care must be taken to see that the from slipping when in use.
piece B is exactly at right angles with The arm L is shown in Fig. 3. It is
the piece A. This can be done with made of either maple or birch. Follow
h^m^s^mi
Fill a basin or pot half full of snow, Anordinary breast drill is used in
and secretly put a handful of table the construction of this drill press, it
salt in it and place the vessel on a being rigidly secured to a piece of oak,
chair or table, wetting the space where A, 2 in. square and 18 in. long, which
it is to be set. After holding the basin
in place for about two minutes, con-
tinually stirring the contents, it will
freeze to the chair so solidly that when
the basin is lifted the chair will come
along with it.
This experiment is quite interesting
to an audience and can be performed
at any assemblage with success. If the
The Breast
instructions are carried out closely, Drill as It is
the trick will always succeed and the Attached to
audience will consider it magic. Even an Upright,
to Make a
if performed in a warm room, the com-
Drill Press
bination of snow and salt will reduce
the temperature below the freezing
point where the bottom of the vessel
— is a sliding member on
the pipe B. In
comes in contact with the chair seat.
attaching the breast the wood,
drill to
Contributed by Harry Slosower, Pitts-
a bolt, having a hook on the head end,
burfrh. Pa.
was used at the top, at C, and a stud
at the bottom D. Pipe clips, EE, were
attached on one side of the block to fit
An Envelope and Stamp Moistener loosely over the pipe B. The vertical
part of the pipe is supported by two
A moistener for postage stamps or horizontal pieces, FF, which are
envelopes can be easily made from a
or«.„=.^^ screw-top jar. A fastened to a post. A
feed lever, G, is
pivoted at the top of the vertical piece
Strip of felt cut as
wide as the jar is deep of oak A
and fulcrumed on the post
with a bolt through a slot, the extend-
and made into a roll
ing end carrying a weight as a counter-
large enough to
,WATER balance. The illustration clearly shows
=ir fit the neck of
the construction of this very useful
the jar serves as
a wick. The metal press.
firill —
Contributed by W. A.
top is perforated,
Ready, Boston, Mass.
and, after filling the
jar with water, it is CA pair of bicycle trotisers guards
screwed into place. This makes a very makes excellent sleeve bands when the
inexpensive moistener for the library cufTs are turned back and rolled above
desk. the elbows.
432
PART I
With a hard pencil go over every line can be done on any sewing machine,
of the design with a firm, even pres- or by a shoemaker. The circle in M
sure. If the leather is properly moist- the pattern is the catch or button
ened, this will leave a clear outline of which can be furnished and put on by
the design when a shoemaker, or
the tracing paper at a trunk store.
isremoved. Then Any ordinary
with a lining article of leather
tool—the tool can be stitched on
with the narrow a sewing machine
edge — go over in the home. To
the lines on do this success-
the leather with fully the stitch
a strong, firm must be long and
stroke. Should a the needle of a
line design only large rather than
be desired, this a small size. Try
operation finishes the stitch on a
the decoration. scrap of leather
Two other before sewing the
methods may be article. If the foot
used tooling or
: or feed of the ma-
stamping. The chine mars the
design shown Pattern for Purse leather, place tis-
does not go to the sue paper or a
edge of the pattern. A margin of at plain piece of paper over the leather
least between the edge of the
1/8 in- and stitch through both. After making
pattern and design must be left for the stitch the paper can be pulled
tooling and stamping. For tooling, away. Use as heavy a silk as the
after lining the pattern, use the broad needle will take. The card case, coin
end of the tool and make purse, stamp case and
even, long
strokes to bags can all be stitched
press downthe back- on an ordinary machine,
ground. If the back- if the above directions are
sions and shape shown. These are in. long. Threads are cut on one end.
fastened with screws to the base. Ahardened steel collar, 14 by IV2 '"•.
The base has a slider, a strip of is riveted on the spindle so it may turn
wood 1 in. thick and 10 in. long, wide against another collar of the same size
enough to slide smoothly between the on the headstock. Another collar is
bed pieces, nailed to its bottom, 2 in. fastened with screws to the rear end
ro
7:VW,
m
ffi
d
^^^
T^
riG.i
<I3
^A
- t"- *
^2-
^
SECTION THROUGH Fio 4
^
^
rie.4 FlG.5
7^^
J
<»
T
\r^Y ^n'.->
'oJm
~-z- -2-
^ ll
-2- •2-
^3^
Fic.8
435
436
have higher efficiency without resorting — immediately thrust his finger into
to any of the numerous and exceedingly the hole. But he could not get it out
costly devices on the market. again, and the mother, accompanied
I procured a piece of wire screen, cut by several other small children,
it in the shape of the gasket between brought the screaming child to my
the carburetor and the intake manifold, office. I found the hole had been
but leaving it blind, that is, with the punched, which caused three harpoon-
screen across the inlet. I put this be- like fragments to be carried into the
tween two gaskets and fastened the center of the globe.
whole back in place. The
result was The mother in her attempt to re-
an increase of 3 miles per gallon of fuel. move it had caused the sharp points
— Contributed by W. J. Weber, New to enter the flesh of the finger in two
York City. or three places. Any attempt to pull
437
the balloff, drove the points of the chair. It is necessary to have extra
harpoons deeper into the finger, and eyelets at one end of the canvas to
it was therefore a question of cutting adjust it to varying widths of seats.
the tin or the finger. But what kind Contributed by W. A. Jaquythe, Rich-
of an instrument could I use on this mond, Cal.
tin globe?
had nothing in my case that would
I
Holding Spoon on a Hot Dish
cut it. My 35 years of medical exper-
ience gave me no help. The tin was as After repeatedly burning my fingers
hard and smooth as a glass marble. in the attempt to prevent the spoon
Yet, it would have been ridiculous to from sliding into the hot dish, I de-
be thus conquered by a tin whistle, so
after some meditation I called to mind
that I had a pair of heavy tinner's snips
in the basement. By using the utmost
care I succeeded in cutting a small in-
cision in the round ball, and then with
the points of the shears I cut the metal
away from the finger.
Such an accident may come under FiG.2
Spoon Holder on a Dish
the observation of any parent, and if
so, he can use the same method to cided to do a little inventing on my
relieve the child where medical assist- own hook. Taking a clean, straight
ance is not near at hand. — Contributed hairpin I bent it to the shape shown
by R. W. Battles, M. D., Erie, Pa. in Fig. 1, and after hooking it over the
edge of the dish, I placed the spoon in
Child's Seat for Theaters it as shown in Fig. 2, and my troubles
with eyelets for wire hooks that fit Contributed by Katharine D. Morse,
over the arms of the ordinary theater Syracuse, N. Y.
438
tfci" \
NlHI' )!;
ls^«sss8:^e^^.^:-'??-:-^
When laying out designs for leather tra material for fastening the leather
work, avoid making them too small on a board outside of the pattern.
and intricate.Bold, simple designs are Moisten the leather on the rough or
the best. The
relation between the unfinished side. Remember that, as
shapes of the background and of the previously stated, Russian calfskin is
design should be well balanced. The the best for tooling. Place the folded
design should not be so small that the paper on the right side of the leather,
large background shapes overbalance then with a ruler, triangle and lining
it. One good way is to let the design tool draw the vertical lines where the
partly follow or repeat the contour of paper is folded. If the leather is moist-
the object. If the article be rectangu- ened enough, the tool will make a deep
lar in shape, let some of the lines of line. Make these lines where the
the design follow rectangular lines; leather is to be folded in the center,
and if circular, follow the curves of the and for each pocket. Line all around
circle. the pattern on four sides to indicate
The first piece of leather work con- the outside border of the pattern.
sidered, will be an ar- Note that there are
tistic cardcase. The four vertical panels or
foundation of a card- rectangles, two wide
case is a rectangle. ones and two narrow
Take a piece of paper ones, as the leather
10 by 4%in. and fold lies flaton the board.
it in the middle, mak- Select either of the
ing each side 5 in., wider rectangles for
then fold in 2 in. on the front of the card-
each outside edge to- case. Transfer the
ward the center. This design onto this side.
last fold makes the Place the paper on
pocket of the case. If the moistened leather
a deeper pocket is de- and go over all the
sired, a longer piece lines of the design
of paper must be used, with a hard pencil.
and the fold more When this is done,
than 2 in. Cut out take the paper away
the leather according and deepen the lines
to the paper pattern of the design with the
and allow at least 14 lining tool. If tooling
in. for the margin. is desired, use the
This gives enough ex- stampcase broad-end tool and
440
press down
the background with firm edges together. The design can be
even strokes. Keep the background placed on either side. A border de-
and edges of the design sharp. If sign bounded by rectangular lines is
stamping is desired, make rows of very suitable. The margin allowed
small circles, regular or irregular, by- around the design shown in the illus-
using the nail set and a wood mallet. tration is 1 in. from the front edge,
The inside or lining is made of skiver 11 in. from the top edge, and 214 in.
li
leather or silk. The two center rect- from the bottom edge. The design
angles are the only parts lined. Cut is 514 in. wide. It is placed on the
out the piece of silk or leather about moistened leather and lined, tooled or
^V in. less at the top and bottom of stamped as described for the card-
the rectangles and 14 ™- wider on each case. The inside of this cover is lined
side. If leather is used, apply library with heavy silk. Allow a 14-in. margin
paste on its back, then place carefully to turn in on all four sides. Two strips
on the inside, smooth it down firmly made of the lining material, 2I/2 in.
and put it under a heavy weight to wide and 11 in. long, are placed ll^ in.
dry. If silk is used, apply the paste from each side, over the lining on the
around the edges for a width of about inside. The lining, strips and the
14 in., and put it under the weight. leather are stitched together about 14
The case is then folded and sewed at in. from the edge on all four sides.
top and bottom. Cut off the surplus The strips are to hold the magazine
leather about in place as
1/8 in. from the the cover of
stitches. the book is
7 T
bag and stampcase. The design is laid out, and the designs made in the
traced on the wrong or smooth side same manner as for the cardcase and
of the leather. Do not moisten the magazine cover, but instead of stitch-
ooze leather. Fas- ing the edges
ten the leather on the handbags,
firmly on the they are joined
board and cut out with thongs run
the design with a through holes cut
sharp knife. A in the edges of
soft silk is best the leather. The
for the lining. Ap- stampcase edges
ply the paste on are sewed togeth-
the leather near er. Bear in mind
the edge of the that Russian calf
design and after Handbags is used for tooling
laying the silk in and stamping,
place, put it under a weight to dry. ind ooze cow or calf for perforated
The stampcase and handbags are designs.
bare at a point about 2 in. from the in either hand, and no electrical effect
sharpened end. will be felt by the person so doing. If
A small copper wire is wound around the pointed tips are touched together, a
the pencil and into this notch, thereby fine little arc, not much larger than the
making contact with the exposed lead tips of the pencils, will be formed. The
or graphite. By means of these small temperature of this arc, however, is
wires the pencils are connected to such that fine wires or small quantities
larger wires, which in turn are con- of metal may be melted readily.
nected to a switchboard or source of These little lead-pencil arcs may be
electric-current supply. used to fuse very small gold or silver
At some place in the circuit there wires, or platinum thermometers, or
should be a resistance to prevent short- wires for tungsten or tantalum lamps.
circuiting and also to control the The bead or globule of molten metal
strength of the current. As the wood formed on the end of a fine wire need
sheath on the pencils offers sufficient be no longer than a small-sized grain
insulation, they may be picked up, one of sand.
Coat and Trousers Hangers over on the bottom edge. The wood
The hanger is simple in construction may be stained any desired color and
and can be easily made by following then given two coats of shellac. Con-
tributed by Olaf Tronnes, Wilmette,
—
Illinois.
simple leading and yet very effective, Sketch out the lines of the design
involving no difficulty of construction. full size on paper, drawing in only one
For this lead glazing a quantity of side of a symmetrical pattern and trac-
strip lead, the section of which is ing the other. After the design has
been prepared, the next
fW^ step
ting
to make a cut-
is
pattern. To do
this, take a piece of
tracing cloth and lay it
on the drawing. Trace
the lines and go over
them with a brush
dipped in black, mak-
ing the lines exactly
the same thickness as
the core of the lead, or
the thickness of the
distance the glasses are
III i' I ' I
-^ separated from one an-
shown in Fig.
other, as
Only a Part of the Top of Window
Each isHighly Decorated so That th 11. Each division is
Maximum Light may Gain Access
marked for the color it
shown in Fig. 11, will be required. is to be and the paper is then cut into
This can be purchased from dealers in sections on each side of the broad line.
art-glass supplies. The lead is sold These pieces form the patterns for cut-
on spools and it must be straightened ting similar shapes from heavy card-
board which serve as templates for
cutting the glass.
Proceed to cut the glass by laying
a pattern on the right side and scoring
around with the cutter guided by the
pattern. Little difficulty will be ex-
perienced in this work if the general
design does not have very irregular
shapes.
When the various pieces of glass
A Pencil-Sharpener Stick
Do
not discard the sandpaper stick
or pencil sharpener used by a drafts-
man just because all the abrasive
sheets have been removed. Make use
of it indefinitely by fitting a wedge in
Wing Nuts Made Discarded Parts Taken from
of a one edge, as shown in the illustration,
Faucet or a Gas Bracket to hold fresh sheets of sand or emery
carded gas-bracket key, cut oft" on the
line AA
and vvith the part within the
dotted lines filed out, then drilled and
threaded, also makes a good wing nut.
negative film, well cleaned, is suitable less. The coil should be a close fit on
for the celluloid. Be sure to put the the belt, and after turning one end half-
steel ball in before fastening the cellu-
way into the spring, the belt itself is
twisted in the reverse direction as
loid in place.
The difficulty of the puzzle is to get many times as there are coils remain-
the ball into the hole. —
Contributed by
R. C. Knox, Waycross, Ga.
A Coil Spring User for Splicing Sash Cords or
Small Round Belts
To Start the Ink Flowing from a ing in the spring, before the other end
Drawing Pen is turned into it to meet the first. Con- —
In order to keep the ink flowing tributed by F. S. Cummings, Detroit,
readily from a drawing pen it must be Michigan.
kept clean and not allowed to stand
with the ink in the nibs. A good plan CW'hen painting wireless instruments
is to have a small piece of velvet fast- use black asphaltum, as it has high
ened to the drawing board or upon insulating qualities.
447
The thing most desired by a young making sure that the ends are square,
mechanic is a lathe, but the cost of and boring the holes to receive the
these machines is usually too high to bolts snugly, they are put together,
be considered by the average boy, and the horizontal pieces for the ways and
consequently he is hampered in exe- feet at perfect right angles to the up-
cuting more difficult work. The com- rights. This will insure the parts run-
bination lathe shown in the illustra- ning freely in the finished machine. All
tion comes as near filling the wants bolts should be supplied with a washer
of most boy mechanics as could be under both head and
wished, the attachments making it nut, and the nuts
more than a lathe so that various kinds drawn up tightly.
of work other than turning may be The headstock ex-
accomplished. The materials neces- tends 7 in. above the
sary are few, and, upper surface of the
outside of a few ways, thus making a
parts, it can be swing of 12 in. One
constructed by the of the standards of the
average boy at headstock is the exten-
home with ordi- sion of the lathe stand-
nary tools. ard, as previously men-
The material tioned the other stand-
;
cardboard to hold the melted metal as the latter is run ir.to the bearings.
Detail of the Plain Lathe. Showing the Constiuction of the Clamp Devices for the Tailstock and Rest Slide,
and the Manner of Attaching a Vise Jaw on the End of the Lathe Bed
in thesquare holes while it cools, by The pulley is fastened to the shaft with
cuttingthem about 2 in. square and a pin run through a hole drilled in
making a hole in the center of each, % them. If a small flywheel is attached
in. diameter. Two of these pieces
in to the outer end of the spindle it will
are held between the two standards aid in keeping a steady motion.
while the shaft is run through them The same procedure is carried out in
and the square holes. Paint the parts the construction of the tailstock bear-
of the shaft used in the bearing with ings. The standards for this part are
thick white lead, or wrap it with one about 8 in. long and are bolted at right
thickness of writing paper, then line angles to and between two pieces that
it up perfectly parallel with the ways rest on top of the ways. The shaft is
in both directions and tack the card- threaded full length, which should be
board pieces to the standards. Place done in a lathe by a machinist to get a
the remaining two cardboard disks on true thread, and the melted metal run
the ends of the shaft and tack them to on it to make an internal thread in the
the standards also. Place putty over bearing. A nut is run on the threads
all the edges and pour melted babbitt of the sliaft between the standards, and
metal into the hole at the top. When provided with a small handle for use
the metal is cool, remove the cardboard in locking the shaft when it is set on
disks and turn the shaft, first in one work between centers. A
small hand-
direction and then in the other, until wheel is attached to the back end of
it can be taken from the bearings, A the shaft, into the rim of which a han-
Vs-in. hole is then drilled through the dle is set to make the turning easy.
metal in the top for an oil hole. The The faceplate consists of a disk of
ends of the shaft should be threaded metal. 6 in. in diameter and Vt iu- thick,
by a machinist, and nuts fitted to it and attached with j^-in. machine screws
faced up true. The threads should be to a %-in. nut. The disk is drilled in
cut just long enough to allow the back various places to receive ordinary
of each nut to turn freely against a wood screws. The faceplate should be
washer placed on the shaft against the made by a machinist so that the sur-
449
^
ADJUSTING,,
E
SCREW
jOl
"ic:3~ irni
BRASS
' \ PIATE
NOTCH TOR
JIG SAW STANDARD '
PLANER CLAMPING
HEAD SLOT -TIGHTENER jQk^ NUTS
O-JIG SAW HOLE J^^
cii
U
i>
Q SPUR CENTER
Detail of the Various Attachments for Use in Conrection with the Lathe for Sawing, Planing and Sanding,
and the Shape of the Tools Used in Turning, Together with the Faceplate and Spur Construction
face of the face can be turned true. The drive wheel for this lathe was
The spur center is made of a %-in. nut, taken from an old discarded washing
drilled in opposite corners for 14-in. machine. Such a wheel is a very com-
pins, 114 in. long. mon part of various kinds of machinery
450
An emery wheel can be used on the lever which is pivoted to the post.
spindle in the same manner as the cir- The lever should be about 3 long, ft.
cular saw. Procure a wheel, 5 in. in 1 in. thick, 3 in. wide at one end, and
diameter with a V^-in. face and having
a lead center. The hole should be
bored out and tapped to fit the threads
on the lathe spindle, and to have the
grinding surface run true, this work \>^
should be done in a lathe by a A Lever Attached on One End Post
machinist. Makes It Easy to Draw
The drawings show the construction the Line Taut
tohang straight down, while the right notched at one end, and is pivoted at
hand grasps the handle and whirls the B on a small bolt. Two stops, C and
box in a circle around to the left. D, are located on the side of the box to
Contributed by C. C. Fraser. prevent the catch from being thrown
out of position when the bin is quickly
Box pulled out. These stops are nails
Partitions
driven into the box side. When the
As I needed a box with a number of bin is pulled out the catch takes the
narrow partitions and it was impossi- position shown in Fig. 2. The catch
stick should be a little shorter than
the distance the bin is pulled out, so
that it may be raised to release the bin
for its return. —
Contributed by O. F.
Fouche, Erie, Pa.
A Homemade Whistle
Procure two empty No. 30 gauge
brass cartridge shells. Cut one shell
% in. shorter than the other, then flat-
Grooves for the Partitions Made with the Use of ten and bend them as shown in the
Small, Thin Strips of Wood
sketch. The mouthpiece should be at
ble to grooves for the sections
cut an angle of 60 deg. File a slot, ^^ in.
without removing the bottom, I spaced in width, about i^ in. from the end.
off the places for the partitions with File ofT the flange on the shorter shell
pieces of thin wood and fastened these so that it will fit snuglv against the
in place with small nails clinched on
the outside of the box. This method
was much more rapid and satisfactory
than sawing the grooves and cutting
them out with a wood chisel. Contrib- —
uted by James M. Kane.
may be admired. But there is a way come covered with creases from re-
by which ahnost anyone may emboss peated use, it should be discarded and
stationery at home with one's own de- a new one substituted.
sign at no expense whatever. The As it is best to adopt a distinctive
work is easy and the results pleasing, form of monogram or design for sta-
and monograms or lettering thus done tionery and to use it without deviation,
will compare very favorably with the it should be selected or worked up with
A Bug Powder
To secure a nonpoisonous roach and
bug powder mix dry 3 lb. plaster of A Strip of Tin Shaped to Take the Place
of a Rivet Set
Paris with 2 lb. of sugar, then add 1
oz. of pulverized aniseed. The addi- end formed the part for setting the
tion of a little corn meal will help to washer and the slotted end held the
—
draw the pests. Contributed by Lor- washer down while the first blows of
en Ward, Des Moines, Iowa. the hammer were struck.
458
The torch shown in the sketch re- The method of using the thvmb as a
quires no air pump. Instead of forcing gauge on a rule in scribing long boards
a small stream of gasoline into a heated is not always satisfactory, especially
,^
^
burner con-
it if the board has a rough edge. It is
verts gaso-
the always best to have a regular gauge,
line into gas in but in the absence of one, an attach-
the chamber and ment for- an ordinary carpenter's rule
blows a small can be quickly made from a piece of
jet of it through tin, although one made of sheet brass
a very small hole is better, in appearance as well as for
into the combus- service. Cut out the metal, as shown
tion chamber. by the dimensions, and roll the two
A medium- sides up, stopping at the dotted lines.
sized and strong oilcan is used for the The ends A and B are turned out
reservoir, the spout being cut off close slightly so that they will slide easily
to the screw part and a steel or brass along the edge of the board. The
tube, about in. in diameter, sol- gauge will snap on a rule easily and
dered to the stub end. The tube is
bent as shown. A piece of wicking is
drawn into the tube so that the upper
end is within % i"- of the tube end.
The end of the tube is then fitted with
a piece of brass rod with a very small
hole in the center. The hole is made in
the following manner: Before the
piece is cut from the rod, it is held in
a vise and the sharp end of a scriber Gauge Made of Sheet Metal Which will Easily
is carefully driven into the center. A Snap on a Carpenter's Rule
little oil placed on the scriber point will Stay where it is placed. Con- —
will keep it from sticking in the metal. tributed by H. J. Blacklidge, San Ra-
Measure the depth of the hole and cut fael, Cal.
the rod off just above the point. File
the end of the piece cut off with a fine
file until the point of the hole is
A Match Holder
reached. This hole must be so small consists of a small box,
The holder
that light can be barely seen through it. the same size as a match box, with a
The combustion chamber is made of sloping spring bottom and spring wires
a piece of brass tubing driven over the covering the
end of the smaller tube on the spout. lower part of
About 1/2 i"- from the back end of the the front side.
larger tube four or more holes are One end of the
drilled to admit air to the gas. match box is re-
Fill the can about three-fourths full moved and the
of gasoline and allow time for the wick contents dumped
to become saturated to the upper end. into the holder.
Hold a lighted match to the rear of The matches fall
the burner, and the heat will convert to the lower
the gasoline into gas which will then sloping edge,
burn with a nice white flame about 1 where one match
in. long. The success of the torch de- at a time can be
pends altogether on the fineness of the easily removed.
hole in the end of the tube and the — C o n t r i b-
tight soldering of all the joints. uted by Bert Verne, San Diego, Cal.
460
The performer presents to his au- press by using a round copper tube,
dience two pastehoard covers, one bot- with fine emery applied to its end, as
tle and one glass. Saying that he a drill. The hole should be so placed
Under Each Cover Used Is a Bottle and Glass, and by Pinching the Cover the Bottle is Made to Rise
with It,Thus Leaving the Glass in View
wishes to secure the safety of the bot- that a finger will strike the top of the
tle and glass, he places covers over glass when l)oth bottle and glass are
them, cautioning the audience to note set on the same surface. If dark-colored
carefully which cover incloses the bottles are used, a false bottom can
glass and which the bottle. Then he be made and fitted in each bottle above
says that, to prevent any misunder- the upper edge of the glass. This bot-
standing as to their positions, it is de- tom can be cemented in place and made
sired the audience designate which liquid-tight, so that some wine may be
cover holds the glass. The response placed in the bottle and poured into
will be unanimous, "the left" or "the the opposite glass to show that it holds
right" as the case may be, but on rais- liquid. In doing this part of the trick,
ing that cover the bottle is exposed. make no more changes with the wine in
Covering the liottle again, and asking one glass.
the audience if they were quite sure Under each cover is a bottle and
that their eyes did not deceive them, tumbler, and by pinching the cover,
he states that the glass is really under the bottle is made to rise with it, thus
the cover just lifted and returned to its leaving the tumbler in view. When it
place. To pro\-e it, the cover is lifted is necessary to show the bottle, just
again, to show the glass this time. The raise the cover, and the bottle covers
changing can be done as often as de- the glass. When the bottle is lifted
sired, or will amuse the crowd. from the table, the thumb is inserted
The secret of the trick consists in in the hole to press the tumbler
the use of two covers, two bottles and against the opposite side, where it is
two glasses, and the manner of per- held and raised with the bottle. Be
forming it is as follows The bottles
: sure to keep the side of the bottles with
are bottomless and of such size as to the hole back and away from the au-
admit the glass without sticking. A dience.
round hole is cut in one side of each It will 1)6 seen that it matters not
bottle, about 21/2 in. above the bottom. which co\er is mentioned the perform-
;
This can be accomplished in a drill er can show just the article he desires.
GKNTRAL CIRCULATION
OHILDKEN'S ROOM
CONTENTS
Accounts, Home, Way to Keep 282 Belt, Cartridge,How to Make 55
Acid Siphon 222 Belts, Round, Splice for 446
Acid iStains, Removing from Cloth 196 Bench, Attacliing Vise Jaw to 176
Addressing a Roll of Papers 369 Bench, Lathe 22
Advertising Lantern Slides, How to Make..
Aerial Propeller, Model Boat with
417
207
—
Bench, Molding Sawing Block Used on.... 408
Bench Stop, Adjustable 325
Aeroplane, Flying Model, for Display 361 Bench Stop for Planing Thin Boards 254
Aeroplane Frames, Braces for 235 Bench Vise, Homemade 149, 244
Aeroplane Kite Ill Bench with Folding Seats 158
Aeroplane, Model, Joints for 275 Bench-Vise Nut, Broken, Substitute for 143
Air Pencil to Make Embossed Letters 29 Bicycle Horn, Mechanical 195
Air Pressure, Relieving, When Closing Rec- . Bicycle Oil Lamp Changed to Electric Light 78
ord Boxes 57 Bicycle Sprocket, Rear, Removing 413
Alarm Clock, Mission Frame for 277 Bicycle Wheel, Roller Skate on 201
Alarm, Doorbell 160 Binding Machine, Lantern-Slide 207
Alarm, Drip-Pan 178 Binding Magazines 50
Alarm, Fire and Burglar, How to Make.... 411 Binding I^osts on Wet Batteries, Protect-
Alarm for Sleepwalker 297 ing from Corrosion 252
Alarm, Temperature 345 Bird Cages, Seed Receptacle for 147
Alarm to Designate Filled Storage Battery. 253 Birds, Turn Feeding Table tor 137
Amateur Mechanic's Combination Lathe. 447 . . . Black Deposit on Bathtubs, Removing 190
Amperage of Fuse Wire, Reducing 322 Black, Dull, for Cameras 163
Anchor Posts for Lawn Swing 148 Blackboard for Children 51
Anemometer, Electric 367 Blades, Jig-Saw 442
Angling 59, 69, 73, 79 Blades, Razor, Discarded Wafer, Use for.... 124
Anti-Tangle Safety Pin 272 Blank Books, Ruling 290
Ants, To Keep Away from Food 361 Bleaching Ivory 175
Application for Small Wounds 304 Block, Whetting 375
Arbor, Grape, Built of Poles 12 Blocks, Falling, How to Make 392
Arm, Pincushion for 288 Blocks of Wood, Small, To Harden 423
Armatures for Small Motors 124 Blowgun, How to Make 282
Armatures, Small, Holding for Winding.... 118 Blowpipe, Automatic 180
Arrow Sticks, Planing 319 Blowtorch, Homemade 459
Arts-Crafts Leather Work; Board, Writing, for Children 325
Part 1 432 Boards, Planing Rough-Grain 235
Part II 439 Boat, Barrel 445
Aspirator, How Make
to 146 Boat, Ice and Catamaran 27
Atmospheric Thermo Engine 120 Boat, Mirror an Aid in Rowing 121
Attractor for Game Fish 97 Boat, Model Steam-Turbine 323
Automatic Valve for Funnel 317 Boat, Model, With Aerial Propeller 207
Automobile, Gasoline Consumption of. To Boat, Paddle-wheel, How to Build 105
Reduce
Automobile Robe, How to Make
436
122
—
Boats A Canoe Stove
—
Boats An Oar Holder
103
168
Awning, Combined Shade and 164 Boats, Foot, How to Make 166
Boats — Hand Propeller-Wheel Attachment
Babbitt Metal, Cores for Use in 304 for Rowboat 413
Back, Attached, for Photographic Printing Boats — Holder for Dory Rudder 68
Frame 413 Boats — How to Build a Paddle-Wheel Boat. 105
Back Stop for Workbench 225 Boats — How to Build a Skiff 18
Back Thrust Prevented on Skis 216 Boats — Ice Boat and Catamaran 27
Bag, Clothespin 42 Boats — Mirror an Aid in Rowing a Boat.... 121
Bait, Live, Pail 178 Boats — Rope Oarlocks 201
Bait, Live, Used in Fishing 261 Boats, Small, Landing for 237
Baking Bread in Hot Sand 53 Boats — To Repair a Leak in a Canoe 149
Baking Ovens, To Prevent from Scorching. 298 Bobsled, Four-Passenger Coasting 24
Baking-Pan Shoes, Adjustable 129 Bobsled, Guide Ropes on 155
Balance, Simple 395 Bobsled, Inexpensive 49
Ball Catch for Cabinet Doors. Homemade... 72 Boiling Cracked Eggs 391
Ball-Clasp Purse, Repairing Broken 316 Bolster, How to Make 182
Balloons, Toy, Inflating 167 Bolt, Night, Hinges Used to Substitute 334
Bamboo Pole, Uses for 173 Book Cover, Pocket for Inside of 238
Bank, Homemade Toy 366 Book Covering 300
Barn Tools, Hangers for 155 Book Leaves, Removing Ink Stains from... 418
Barometer, Electric-Light Bulb as 280 Book, Support for Open 438
Barrel Boat 445 Bookcase or Closet, Portable and Folding.. 296
Baseball Game, Indoor 275 Bookholder, Adjustable 224
Basement Light, Lighting 156 Bookrack 261
Bases for Electric Apparatus, Varnishing... 324 Bookrack, Folding 395
Basin, Freezing to Chair 431 Books in Case, Holder for 247
Basket, A Reed 257 Books, Removing Finger Marks from 200
Basket, Waste-Paper 320 Boring a Clean-Edged Hole 406
Basketball, Removing from Closed-Bottom Boring a Long Hole 420
Receptacle 266 Bottle, Cover for 420
Bathroom Light, To Operate Automatically. 56 Bottle, Glass, Cutting 186
Bathtubs, Removing Black Deposit on 190 Bottle Necks. To Prevent Corks Sticking in 174
Batteries, Dry, Preserving 192 Bottle, Removing Cork from 295
Batteries, Dry, Renewing 382 Bottle-Cap Lifter 195
Batteries, Dry, Testing 266 Bottle-Opening Trick 223
Battery, Homemade Wet 340 Bottles and Glasses, Trick 460
Bearings for Model Work 238 Bottles, Medicine. Time Indicator for 138
Bed for a Camp 133 Bottles, Poison. Simple Way to Mark 126
Bed Pocket, Utility Home or Traveling.... 400 Box, Camp Provision 95
Bed Warmer, Homemade Electric 154 Box Partitions 454
Bed-Cover Fasteners 55 Boxes, Homemade Hinges for 100
Bedroom Cabinet 163 Boy Surveyor:
Bell,Continuously Ringing, How to Make.. 381 Camera Surveying 7
Bell-Ringing Transformer, Small, Construc- Plane-Table Surveying 1
tion of 348, 352 Plotting a Camera Survey IS
Bells, Call, Simple Methods of Connecting. . 356 Brace, Drill Press on Ordinary 427
461
462
Brace, Wrist
Braces for Aeroplane Frames
m
235
Card, Magic Change
Card Stock, Typewriting on
133
458
Bracket, Shade-Roller and Curtain-Pole... 318 Card-and-Coin Trick 41
Bracket, Swinging Electric-L-ight 284 Cards, Mind-Reading Effect with 29
Brackets, Towel-Roller 223 Carrier for Fishhooks 269
Brake, Prony, for Testing Small Motors... 32 Carrier for Suitcase 114
Brass Articles, Cleaning 375 Carrier, Milk-Bottle 107
Brass, Cleaner for 192 Carrier, Stove-Wood 237
Brass Clips, Tool Holders Made of 414 Carrying Stone Jars 309
Brass, Frosting 185 Carrying Two Pails in One Hand 382
Brass Rings, Turning 400 Cartridge Belt, How to Make 55
Brass Tubing, Seamless, Small Steam-En- Cartridge Shells Used for Electrical Con-
gine Cylinders Made from 396 tacts 285
Bread, Baking in Hot Sand 53 Case, Holder for Books in 247
Bread, Toasting Over an Open Fire 11 Casein Glue 212
Breaker, Glass 291 Casting Rod, One-Piece 59
Broom for Sweeping Out Corners in Steps.. 295 Castings for Engine Pistons, Pipe Caps Used
Broom Holder, Another 99 as 408
Broom, Old, Shaping 1S2 Catamaran, Ice Boat and 27
Brown Stain for Wood 189 Catapult 132
Brush for Applying Soldering Acid 283 Catch, Ball, for Cabinet Doors 72
Brush Handles, Protecting, from Paint.... 294 Catch, Safety, for Flour Kin 454
Brush Handles, Utilizing Old 417 Catch to Hold Two Joining Doors Open 77
Brush Hanger for Dark Room 156 Caterpillars on Grapevines, Destroying.... 94
Brush, Homemade, for Cleaning Upholstered Cellar-Door Holder 34
Furniture 188 Cement Floors, Footstool for 119
Brush, To Clean Shellac from 319 Cement, Shellac 50
Buckle Tongues, Replacing 331 Center Gauge, Prick-Punch 453
Bucket, Ear Repair on 175 Centering Gauge 253
Bucket-Ball Game 270 Chain, Novelty 191
Buffer, Finger-Nail 322 Chair Bottoms, Reinforcing 191
Bug Powder 457 Chair, Freezing Basin to 431
Bugs Attracted by Light, Catching 263 Chair, Head Rest for 309
Bumper, Rubber, on Water Faucet 406 Chair Legs, To Fasten 243
Bunsen Burner, Homemade 318 Chair Post, Repairing Broken Tenon on.... 388
Bunsen Burner, Small 308 Chair, Repairing Rocker on 196
Burglar Alarm, Fire and. How to Make.... 411 Chair Rocker, Stop on, for Baby 153
Burlap, Needle for Sewing 151 Chair Rockers, Safety Tips on 296
Burner for Soldering Small Work 418 Chair Swing 98
Burner, tlomemade Bunsen 318 Chairs, Reflnishing 376
Burner, Small Bunsen 308 Chalk Trays, Covering for 274
Bushing a Stovepipe in a Chimney Hole.... 231 Chart. Compass Time 378
Buttonhole Cutter 414 Cherry Fitter 309
Buttonholes, Guide for Making 264 Chickens, Tin Can Used for Watering 144
Child's Finger, Cutting Tin Ball from 436
Cabinet, Bedroom 163 Child's Playhouse 265
Cabinet Doors, Homemade Ball Catch for.. 72 Child's Seat for Theaters 437
Cabinet, Shaving, Mounted on Adjustable Chime Clock, Electric 332
Pedestal 23 Chinese Pagoda 278
Cabinet Work, Joint for 251 Chisel Edges, Grinding 322
Calcium Deposits on Glass, Removing 189 Chisel Handle, Protector Cap for 430
Calculation Trick, Lightning 101 Chisel Holder for Whetting 317
Caliper Gauge, Vise Used as 172 Chisel Rack 248
Camera, Hand, Telephoto Attachment for... 136 Chopper, Poultry-Pood 291
Camera, Homemade, Enlarging 219 Chopping Block, Stick Holder for 191
Camera, Mechanical 233 Clamp, Detachable, for Stairway Handrails. 452
Camera, Mile-O-View 213 Clamp, Emergency 203
Camera, Multiplying, Attachment for 221 Clamp, Picture-Frame and Triangle 230
Camera, Ordinary, .Stereoscopic Pictures with 346 Clamp Used as Vise 410
Camera Shutter, Electrically Operated 234 Clapper, Whirligig 453
Camera Support 324 Clean Jewelry, How to 287
Camera Survey, Plotting a 13 Cleaner, Cane-Seat ".
318
Camera Surveying 7 Cleaner for Brass 192
Cameras, Dull Black for 163 Cleaner for Canvas Shoes 289
Cameras, Homemade Direct-View Finder for 54 Cleaner, Lamp-Chimney 125
Camp, Bed for 133 Cleaner, AVall-Paper 266, 273
Camp Furnishings 93 Cleaning an Oilstone 237
Camp, Hanger for 101 Cleaning Bath for Silverware 355
Camp, Lantern for 276 Cleaning Brass Articles 375
Camp Loom 107 Cleaning Clothes by Boiling Them 289
Camp Provision Box 95 Cleaning Dirt from Tufts in Upholstering.. 175
Camp Stoves 97 Cleaning Gold and Platinum 191
Camp-Fire Utensils, Supports for 371 Cleaning Painted or Frescoed Walls 187
Camphor, Experiments with 391 Cleaning Pearl Articles 133
Camps 90 Cleaning Steel of Grease and Stains 239
Cams, Small, How to Make 53 Cleats on Boards, Substitute for
Magazine Pages Together....
322
Can Covers, Tight-Fitting, Removing 391 Clips to Hold 103
Candle Sconce, Horn 298 Clock, Electric Chime 332
Candle-Shade Holder 250 Clock, Repairing Worn Escapement Wheel of 72
Candle, To Automatically Extinguish 67 Closet, Bookcase or. Portable and Folding. . 296
Candles, Decorating 426 Closet Holders for Linen 192
Candles, Motor Made of 49 Cloth, Delicate, Removing Perspiration
Candles, Substitute for 247 Stains from 414
Candles, Varnished, Burn Longer 321 Cloth, Removing Acid Stains from 196
Candy-Floss Machine, How to Make 268 Clothes, Cleaning by Boiling 289
Cane-Seat Cleaner 318 Clothes Peg, Cork-Covered 18^
Canned Foods, Heated, Relieving Pressure
' Clothes Peg, Wood 406
166
for Opening 42 Clothes Rack •
4i .
ni
Lock.. ,101
•
Cucumbers, Raising on Trellis 445 Dropper and Cork tor Medicine Bottles 248 . .
Cup. Paper Drinking 1^» Dry and Warm Climates. Refrigerator for.. 3.57
la^
Cup, Paper Drinking, How to Make Dry Batteries, Preserving
i4b
Curling-Iron Heater 1;? Dry Batteries, Renewing ^"
Curtain Hanger ^'4 Dry Batteries, Testing r??
Curtain Stop ^V> Dry Cell. How to Make 4^J
Curtain, Stretching, without Frame 158 Drying Seeds •.
"^H •
Motors
—
Electrical Apparatus Armatures for Small
124
Experiment, Interesting
Experiment, Interesting Vacuum
302
250
made
—
Electrical Apparatus Bed Warmer, Home-
154
Experimenters, Electrical Testing Instru-
ment for 328
Electrical —
Apparatus Bell, Continuously Experiments with Camphor 391
Ringing, How to Make 381 Exterior Sliding Fly Screen 231
—
Electrical Apparatus Bell-Ringing Trans-
former, Construction of Small 348, 352
Extracting a Broken Screw
Extractor, Sliver
134
250
tor
—
Electrical Apparatus Disk-Armature Mo-
336
Eye Shield for Microscope 153
—
Electrical Apparatus Doorbell Alarm
—
Electrical Apparatus Door Ijock, Combina-
160 Fabrics, Setting Colors in
Falling Blocks, How to Make
223
392
tion Electrically Operated 110 Fastener, Door 163
Make a
—
Electrical Apparatus Dry Cell, How to
421
Fasteners, Bed-Cover
Fasteners, Collar
55
56
Show Window
—
Electrical Apparatus Electric Display for
52
Fastening Loose Table Legs 289
Fastening Screws in Tile and Brick Walls.. 292
nal
—
Electrical Apparatus Electric Fishing Sig-
9S
Faucet, Water, Rubber Bumper on
Feeding Table, Turn, for Birds
406
137
chine
—
Electrical Apparatus Electric Stirring Ma-
165
Felt, Mending Break in
Fencing, Poultry, Stretching
192
253
Electrical Apparatus Electric Water Ferris Wheel, Plavground 161
Heater 89 Ferrule, Taper, How to Make 380
Electrical
How to Make an
—
Apparatus Electrotype Stamp,
419
Figures, Puzzle with
File, Inexpensive
289
286
sonval
—
Electrical Apparatus Galvanometer, D'Ar-
415
Filing Flat Surfaces
Filing Soft Metals
296
1 02
—
Electrical Apparatus O.alvanometer, Sim-
ple, How to Construct a 389
Film-Developing Machine, Adjustable
Film, Roll, Easy Way to Develop
208
425
Electrical —
Apparatus Fire and Burglar
Alarm, How to Make a 411
Filter, Automatic
Filter, Force, Laboratory
148
119
stat
—
Electrical Apparatus Quickly Made Rheo-
178
Finger Protection on Laboratory Vessels... 170
Finger-Ring Trick 56
Small Motors
—
Electrical Apparatus Reversing Switch for
378
Fire and Burglar Alarm, How to Make
Fireflies, Theatrical Night Scene with Ap-
411
Electrical
Make a Small
—
Apparatus Rheostat, How to
393
pearance of
Fish, Game, Attractor for
162
97
—
Electrical Apparatus Rotary Tuning Coil.. 372
—
Electrical Apparatus Series Motor. How to
Fish, Preventing Loss of, from Covered
Baskets 208
Make a Small 403 Fish Rake 423
—
Electrical Apparatus Simple Methods of
Connecting Call Bells 356
Fish-Scaling Knife
Fish Stringer
182
146
chine
—
Electrical Apparatus Small Shocking Ma-
363
Fish, To Hold While Removing Scales
Fishhooks, Carrier for
309
269
Electrical
Homemade
—
Apparatus Telegraph Sounder,
119
Fishhooks, Carrying in. Cane Pole
Fishing, Live Bait Used in
58
261
465
Flshing-Rod Joints, •Holding Together 201 Gas and Electric Fixtures, Locating in Dark 437
Fishing-Rod Making and Angling: Gas Generator, Laboratory 118
——
Part I A One-Piece Casting Kod
Fart II Various Two and Three-Piece
59 Gas
Gas
Lighter, Electric
Pipe, Paper
376
262
Rods 69 Gas Stove Top, Covering for 420
Part III — Trout Fishing with Fly and Bait 73 Gasoline Consumption of Automobile, To
Part IV — Trout Fishing with Fly and Bait 79 Reduce 436
Fishing Signal, lilectric. How to Make 98 Gate, Double-Swing, with Common Hinge. . 19
Fishing, Trout, with Fly and Bait 73, 79 Gate Fasteners 396
Fitting Large Cork in Small Bottle 339 Gate, Self-Closing 211
Five-Pointed Star 226 Gauge Attachment for Pocket Rule 233
Fixtures, Electric Test for 288 Gauge, Centering 253
Fixtures, Gas and Electric, Locating in Dark 437 Gauge, Homemade Marking 294
Flash Light, Electrically Ignited, for Mak- Gauge, Prick-Punch Center 453
ing Photographs 239 Gauge, Rule 459
Flash Light Telegraph on Kite Line Ib5 Gear-Cutting Machine 424
Flasher, Electric Lamp, How to Make 370 Generator, Gas, Laboratory 118
Flasher, Sunlight, for Garden 179 Geometric Principle in Line Division 326
Flashing Hook 246 Glass Bottle, Cutting 186
Flat Surfaces, Filing 296 Glass Breaker 291
Flatiron, Electric, Flexible-Cord Adjuster Glass, Frosting 243
for 406 Glass, Removing Calcium Deposits on 189
Flatiron Holder, Ornamental Metal 150 Glass, Removing Paint from 298
Floor or Dish Mop, Endless 29 Glasses, Drinking, Separating 164
Floor Polisher, Homemade 125 Glasses, Trick Bottles and 460
Floor Push Button 144 Glaziers' Points, Substitute for 293
Flour Bin, Safety Catch for 454 Glider, Ice 31
Flower Beds, Edging 165 Glider, Monoplane, How to Make 115
Flower Trellis, Umbrella Used as 164 Glider, Paper, That Loops the Loop 109
Flowers, Preserving, in Color and Form.... 127 Glider, Tandem Monoplane 113
Flutter Ring, How to Make 100 Glue, Casein 212
Flying Model Aeroplane for Display 361 Glue-Spreader Holder 153
Flymobile, How to Make 139 Gluing Small Mitered Frames 193
Flypaper Holder 423 Go-Cart, Runner for 287
Folding Arms for Clothesline Posts 394 Gold and Platinum, Cleaning 191
Folding Bookrack 395 Graduate Holder 218
Food, Cooking, in Paper 168 Graduate, Homemade 192
Food, To Keep Ants Away from 361 Graduates, Renewing Markings on 316
Foot Boats, How to Make 166 Graining Tools, Homemade 206
Footstool tor Cement Floors 119 Grape Arbor Built of Poles 12
Form, Stocking-Stretcher 190 Grapevines, Destroying Caterpillars on 94
Fortune Teller, Mystic 32 Grass Rake 196
Fountain Attachment for Ordinary Pen 326 Grease, Removing from Paint 157
Fountain, Electric 401 Grease, To Remove from Clothing 102
Fountain for Ordinary Pen 173 Green-Corn Holder 167
Fountain-Pen Barrels, Mending Broken 442 Grinder, Kraut and Root 297
Fountain Pen, Homemade 94 Grinding a I'lane Iron, Guide for 279
Frame for Printing Post Cards from Nega- Grinding Chisel Edges 322
tives 170 Grinding .Scissors 148
Frames, Small Mitered, Gluing 193 Grindstone, Scraping Surplus Water Off on 188
Freezing Basin to Chair 431 Guard, Prunlng-Saw 197
Freezing, To Prevent Poultry Water from.. 355 Guide, Cold-Chisel 189
Frosting Brass 185 Guide for Grinding a Plane Iron 279
Frosting Glass 243 Guide for Making Buttonholes 264
Fruit Blossoms for Decoration, Forcing.... 12 Guide Ropes on Bobsled 155
Fruit-Jar Opener 272 Guides for Mill File 321
Fruit Jars, Screw-Top, Opening 125 Guides, Window-Shade 286
Fruit Presser 279 Gun, Pea-Shooting 438
Fruit Stemmer 94 Gunstocks, Polishing 452
Funnel, Automatic Valve for 317
Furnace, Electric, How to Make 373 Hacksaw Frame, Adjustable 163
Furnace Electrodes of Lead Pencils 441 Hacksaw Frame, Homemade 426
Furnace Pipe. Water-Heating Coil in 294 Hairpin, Fancy, Lock for 110
Furnace, Small Electric, How to Make 229 Hammer, Double-Claw, for Pulling Nails
Furnishings, Camp 93 Straight 134
—
Furniture Bedroom Cabinet
—
Furniture Bookrack
163
261
Hammock, To Tie
Hand Drill Press, Homemade
286
242
—
Furniture Chair Swing
—
Furniture Combination Settee Rocker and
98 Hand Hoe
Handbag Lock
147
386
Cradle 46 Handballs. Inflating 365
—
Furniture Costumer, How to Make
—
Furniture Double Top for Table
42
78
Handle Attachment for Sickle
Handle, Long, for Dustpan
194
243
—
Furniture Folding Bookrack
—
Furniture Footstool for Cement Floors....
395
119
Handle, New Pail-Cover
Handle, Scraper
177
227
—
Furniture Jardiniere Pedestal
Furniture, Leaded-Glass Panels for
255
443
Handles, Hunting-Knife
Handrails. Stairway, Detachable Clamp
177
for 452
Furniture, Mission, Joint for 384 Hanger, Curtain 274
Furniture Polish 102, 458 Hanger for the Camp 101
Furniture Polish for Fine Woods 216 Hanger, Kitchen Utensil 100
— —
Furniture, Reed A Reed Basket
Furniture Shaving Cabinet
257
23
Hangers, Coat and Trousers
Hangers for Barn Tools
442
155
—
Furniture Woven-Top Stool
Fuse Wire, Reducing Amperage of
256
322
Hanging Vase
Hat Hanger
102
388
Hat Sweatband, Reducing Size of 132
Galvanometer, D'Arsonval 415 Head Rest for Chair 309
Galvanometer, Simple, How to Construct. . . . 389 Heater, Curling Iron 126
Game, Bucket-Ball 270 Heater, Electric, How to Make 407
Game, Indoor Baseball 275 Heater. Electric Water 89
Game Played on Ice 52 Heel Plates 250
Game, Ring-Throwing 287 Heliograph. How to Make 183
Games, Indoor, Electric Score Board for 277 Hindoo Sand Trick 308
Garden-Bed Scarecrow 365 Hinge, Small Spring 291
Garden Roller 293 Hinge, Strap, Applying 280
Garden, Sunlight Flasher for 179 Hinge with Wide Swing 452
466
Hinges, Door, Locking Screws in 102 Joints for Model Aeroplane 275
Hinges (or Boxes, Homemade 100 Joint, Tenoned, How to Lock 339
Hinges, Homemade 358
Hinges Used to Substitute Night Bolt 334 Kettle-Handle Support 49
Hoe, Hand 147 Kettle Handle, To Protect from Heat 144
Hoe, Pointed End on 458 Kettles, Detachable Hinged Cover for 123
Holder, Broom, Another 9D Key-Holder Hook 147
Holder, Candle-Shade 250 Keyhole, Light in 114
Holder, Cellar-Door
Holder for Books in a Case
34
247 justable
—
Kitchen Utensil Baking-Pan Shoes, Ad-
129
Holder for Garden-Hose Nozzle
Holder for Loose Window Glass
252
149
—
Kitchen Utensil Bottle-Cap Lifter
—
Kitchen Utensil Broom Holder
195
99
Holder for Milk Card
Holder for Set of Sadirons
170
293
—
Kitchen Utensil Cherry Pitter
—
Kitchen Utensil Cork Puller 173,
309
25i!
Holder for Skates while Sharpening
Holder, Green-Corn
54
167
—
Kitchen Utensil Cover for a Bottle
—
Kitchen Utensil Cover Strainer
420
149
Holder, Milk-Ticket
Holder, Nursing-Bottle
251
2ril
—
Kitchen Utensil Egg Boiler
—
Kitchen Utensil Egg-Frying Pan
190
388
Holder, Paper-Bag
Holder, Pen and Brush
274
2S7
—
Kitchen Utensil Egg Separator, Homemade
—
Kitchen Utensil Fish-Scaling Knife
15.?
182
Holder, Pencil
Holder, Umbrella, for Display Purposes
290
170
—
Kitchen Utensil Fruit Jar Opener
—
Kitchen Utensil Fruit Stemmer
272
94
Holder, Washbasin
Holders for Displaying Magazines
289
320
—
Kitchen Utensil Grinder, Kraut and Root.
Kitchen Utensil Hanger
297
100
Hole, Boring Clean-Edged
Hole. Long, Boring
406
420 from Heat
—
Kitchen Utensil Kettle Handle, Protecting
144
Home Accounts, Way to Keep
Hook, Crochet
282
325 ——
Kitchen Utensil Kettle-Handle Support
Kitchen Utensil Kettles, Detachable
. . 49
Hook, Flashing 246 Hinged Cover for 123
Hook, Key-Holder
Hooks, Homemade Snap
147
248 Pan
—
Kitchen Utensil Knife Holder on Frying
295
Kitchen Utensil — Lamp-Chimney Cleaner...
•
Match Holder
Match Safe to Deliver One Match at a Time
459
285
Mysteries, Tricks,
Sand Trick
Illusions, —Hindoo 308
etc.
Medicine-Spoon Holder
Mending a Break in Felt
295
192
Mysteries. Tricks,
Fortune Teller
Illusions, —Mystic 152
etc.
32
Merry-Go-Round Pole 162 Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions, —Optical 345
etc. Il-
Merry-Go-Round. Skating
Metal, Bright Dip for
57
250
lusion
Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions,
— "Q" Trick 360
etc.
468
454
133
. .
Pendulum Trick
—
Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions, etc. Swinging-
280
Pea-Shooting Gun
Pedestal, Jardiniere
438
255
tles and Glasses
—
Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions, etc. Trick Bot-
460
Peeler, Potato
Pen and Brush Holder
425
287
Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions, etc. Trick of
Takinj; Dollar Bill from Apple
— 263
Pen, Ordinary, Fountain Attachment for.... 326
Pen, Ordinary, Fountain for 173
Knives and Glasses
—
Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions, etc. Trick with
227
Pen Rack on an Ink Bottle
Pen, Substitute for
143
270
Mysteries, Tricks, Illusions,
Performed with Thumbs
etc. Tricks—
Tied Together 2S1
Pencil Compass, Emergency
Pencil Holder
34
290
Mystery Coin Box 402 Pencil Rack 132
Mystery, Trunk 267 Pencil Sharpener 237
Mystic Fortune Teller 32 Pencil Sharpener Stick 446
Pencil Sharpening Guide 358
To Clinch
Nail, Finishing, 34 Pencil Stubs, Use for 104
Name, Writing Reversed on Paper Placed on Pendulum, Magnetic-Suspension 104
Forehead 392 Penholder, Inkwell and 283
Nature Scene, Falling Leaves in 400 Penholder, Substitute 252
Needle and Thread Tray, Combination 72 Penwiper, Paper Smoother and 345
Needle Box for Talking Machines 263 Percolator, Pad for 377
Needle for Repairing Screens 206 Perforator, Paper 400
Needle for Sewing Burlap 151 Perspiration Stains, Removing from Delicate
Needle-Spray Nozzle 41S Cloth 414
Negative, To Hold in Printing Frame 241 Photo Printing, Timing 245
Newspaper Holder, Clothespin 68 Photo Vignetter 238
Nickel or Silverplate Iron by Friction, How Photograph Prints, Timing 371
to 272 Photograph, Radium, How to Make 172
Night Bolt, Hinges Used to Substitute 334 Photographer's Dark Room, Drying Towels
Night Croquet Playing 251 in 331
Nonsticking Drawer Guide 383 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Nozzle Angle for Lawn Sprinkling 356 Brush Hanger for Dark Room 156
rvczzle, Garden-Hose, Holder for 252 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Noi.Ble, Hose 242 Camera Support 324
Nozzle, Needle-Spray 418 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Nove'tv "^hai., 191 Developing Machine 236
Nursirig-Bottle Holder 251 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Nut, Wing, How to Make 1S2 Developing Tray Made of Tin Can.... 121
Nutcracker, Adjustable 101 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Nuts, Different-Size, Wrench for 379 Developing Tray Rocker 224
Nuts, Homemade Wing 446 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Dull Black for Cameras 163
Oak, Imitating Ebony on 193 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Oar Holder 168 Easy Way to Develop Roll Film 425
Oarlocks, Rope 201 Photographic Appliances and Processes —
Odors, To Remove from Ice Boxes 100 Electric Stirring Machine 165
Oil Burner for Cook Stove 145 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Oilcloth, To Prevent from Cracking 138 Electrically Operated Camera Shutter. . 234
Oiling Bright Parts of Machinery 248 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Oilstone, Cleaning 237 Film-Developing M.^chine. Adjustable.. 208
Oilstone, Repairing Broken 249 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Old-Oak Stain 225 Frame for Printing Post Cards from
Opener, Fruit-Jar 272 Negatives 170
Opening for Air at Top of Shade 297 Photographic Appliances and Processes —
Opening for Steam in Utensil Cover 288 Holding Prints in a Liquid-Filled Tray 33
Operation of Compass 387 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Optical Illusion 345 Homemade Enlarging Camera 219
Photographic Appliances and Processes
Pad for Percolator 377 Homemade Motion-Picture Camera and
Paddle-Wheel Boat, How to Build 105 Projector 198, 202, 204
Pagoda, Chinese 278 Photographic Appliances and Processes —
Pail Cover Handle, New 177 Lighting a Room for Making Photo-
Pail Hook for Pitcher Pump 245 graphs 123
Pail, Live-Bait 178 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Palls, Carrying Two in One Hand 382 Mile-O-View Camera 213
Paint Brushes, Care of 189 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Paint, Preserving in Open Cans 382 Multiplying Attachment for Camera.... 221
Paint, Protecting Brush Handles from 294 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Paint, Removing from Glass 298 Photographic Print Washer 97
Paint, Removing Grease from 157 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Painted or Frescoed Walls, To Clean 187 Slide-Opening Cover for Plate Holder.. 104
Painting Lead Pipe 175 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Paints and Pastes, Preserving 418 Stereoscopic Pictures with Ordinary
Palette Knife, Homemade 211 Camera 346
Pan, Egg-Frying 388
Photographic Appliances and Processes-
Panels, Decorative Wood 58
Tank Development Methods Used in
Panels, Leaded-Glass, for Furniture 443
Tray Development 428
Pantograph, Homemade 142
Photographic Appliances and Processes
Paper, Carbon, Renewing 34
Telephoto Attachment for Hand Camera 136
Paper Drinking Cup 188
Photographic Appliances and Processes
Paper Drinking Cup, How to Make 346
Paper Gas Pipe 262 To Hold Negative in Printing Frame.. 241
Paper Glider That Loops the Loop 109 Photographic Appliances and Processes
Paper, Large Hole in Small Piece of 317 Trimming Photographs 68
Paper Perforator 400 Photographic Appliances and Processes^
Paper Shades for Electric-I>ight Globes 316 View Finder, Direct, for Cameras 54
Paper Smoother and Penwiper 345 Photographic Appliances and Processes —
Paper Transparent, To Make 11 Washing Photographic Prints 92, 168
469
257
249
Pocket, Utility Bed, Home or Traveling.... 400 Reel, Clothesline
Pointed End on Hoe 458 Reel, Homemade Clothesline 423
Poison Bottles, Simple Way to Mark 126 Reel, Hose, Substitute for 369
376
Polarity Indicator 396 Refinishing Chairs
Pole, Bamboo, Uses for 173 Reflector, Electric Lamp, for Target 196
Pole, Merry-Go-Round 162 Reflector for Viewing Scenery from Car
Poles, Houses Made of • 85 Window 212
Polish, Furniture 102, 458 Refrigerator for Dry and Warm Climates.. 357
Polish, Furniture, for Fine Woods 216 Refrigerator, Locating Drip Pan under.... 307
Polish, Metal 68 Reinforcing Chair Bottoms 191
Polisher, Floor, Homemade 125 Removable Post 273
Polishing Gunstocks 452 Removing Basketball from Closed-Bottom
Pop-Corn Popper 125 Receptacle 266
Popgun, Toy 240 Removing Tight-Fitting Can Covers 391
Porch Swing, Springs on Chains of 47 Renewing Dry Batteries 382
Portable and Folding Bookcase or Closet... 296 Repair tor Broken Lock Keeper 208
Portiere Pole, Fastening in Doorway 227 Repairing a Broken Ball-Clasp Purse 316
Post Cards, Frame for Printing from Nega- Repairing a Broken Knife Handle 229
tives 170 Repairing a Coaster Brake 422
Post, Removable 273 Repairing a Worn Stop Cock 414
Postal Cards, Wood 292 Repairing Broken Oilstone 249
Potato Peeler 425 Repairing Broken Tenon on Chair Post.... 388
Potted Plants, Adjustable Rod for 379 Repairing Broken Whip 326
Poultry Coop 247 Repairing Rocker on Chair 196
Poultry Fencing, Stretching 253 Repairing Worn Escapement Wheel of
Poultrv-Food Chopper 291 Clock ,T2
Poultry Roost, Insect-Proof 422 Repairing Worn Thimble 326
Poultry Shade 211 Resistance-Wire Connections, Small, Weld-
Poultry Water, To Prevent from Freezing.. 355 ing 158
Poultry Yards, Automatic Watering System Retarder for Plaster of Paris 195
for «6 Reversing Switch for Small Motors 378
Powder, Bug 457 Revolving Shaft Without Power 274
Power, Light, Windmill for 307 Revolving Wheel. Mysterious 152
Power Plant, Small Hydroelectric 314 Rheostat, Quickly Made 178
470
Summer Dish Washing 356 Toy Parachutes, Kite-Line Cutaway for.... 308
Sunlight Flasher for Garden 179 Toy Popgun w- ?c3
Support, Kettle-Handle 49
:
Transferring Magazine Pictures Hi
Support, Telescoping, for Hinged Shelf 457 Transformer, Small Bell-Ringing, Construc-
Supporter for Double Clothesline 288 tion of 348, 352
Supports for Camp-Fire Utensils 371 Transit, Surveyor's, How to Make 20
Surprise Water Bottle 218 Transparent Paper, To Make 11
Survey, Camera, Plotting a 13 Trap, Mouse 178, 229
Surveying, Camera Trap, Muskrat 212
Surveying, Plan^-Table
J
1 Traveler, Kite-Line 228
Surveyor, Boy .1. 7, 13 Tray, Brass Pin **':
i7S
''
' '
272 Waterproof Shoe Dressing " 325 !
Trick, Finger-Ring 55 Welding Small Resistance-Wire Connec-
! !
Varnishing Bases for Electric Apparatus... 324 Winter Sports, Devices for Bobsled, Guide
Vase, Hanging 102 Ropes on 155
Vaulting-Pole Attachments
Vaulting-Pole Holder
1 P4
361
! ! !
'
pensive
—
Winter Sports, Devices for Bobsled, Inex-
49
Vegetable Slicer 254 Winter Sports, Devices for — Game Played
Vegetable Stains, Removing 176 on Ice 52
Vent for Pouring Heavy Liquids 387 Winter Sports, Devices for — Ice Boat and
Ventilator, Window, to Prevent Drafts 248 Catamaran 27
Vessels, Laboratory, Finger Protection on.. 170 Winter Sports, Devices for — Ice Glider 31
Vibrator for Spark Coil Winter Sports, Devices for — Monorail Sled. 50
. . . !
309
Vignetter, Photo 238 Winter Sports, Devices for — Propellers for
Vise, Bench, Homemade 149 Hand Sled 334
Vise, Clamp Used as 41O Winter Sports, Devices for— Pushmobile
Vise, Homemade Bench 244 Racer for Ice 428
Winter Sports, Devices for— Skates Made of
!
CHILDREN
\v\\S:SSWiXi\^\';stW\^^i«i;*^^